but The third that apprhension is not from his flesh but from his membrane nowe membranes are also instruments of sence And whereas it is sayd that the sensible subiect or obiect being placed immediately vpon the instrument of sence is not sensible that I say is vtterly false for The fourth by that reason there should be no organ of touching saue only a bone a gristle or a vinculū or tye That Axiome of Aristotle stands neede to be interpreted Of the sences some are absolutely An interpretation of an axiome and simply necessary to our life as touching and tasting some are ad bene esle that is for the better being of the creature but not simply necessary to his being as sight hearing and smelling The Medium or Meane of these last is externall and separated from the instrument the medium of the first is internall and so ioyned with the instrument that it cannot be separated In the first this axiome is true for if any colour be laid vppon our eye wee see indeed but very deprauedly being not able without an outward meane to distinguish so likewise it is in hearing and smelling but in tasting and touching because the medium is internall the obiect may be yea is best distinguished when it toucheth the instrument The conclusion We therefore conclude that the skin is the organ or instrument of touching and the Cuticle or skarfe-skin is his medium or meane Whereas Auicen sayth that the skinne doeth not feele equall or temperate things he meaneth that it is not violated or all affected by them when it feeleth them not that it feeleth Answere to Auicen them not at all for that common experience would condemne Lastly you will say that the skinne feeleth by the helpe of nerues the nerues therefore are the instruments of feeling not the skin I answere the flesh of the muscles are moued by the nerues yet is not the nerue the immediate organ of voluntary motion but the muscle In like manner Another argument answered Answere to Galens authority I eculiar touches in mens bodies the nerue giueth sense vnto the skin because it bringeth downe vnto it the Animall faculty and spirit yet nathe-more is it the immediate instrument of sense But Galen sayeth that the stomacke is the organ of touching because his sence is most exquisit surely the mouth of the stomacke is wondrous sensible because of the notable nerues it receiueth from the sixt coniugation and by reason of the hunger and thirst of which it onely is apprehensiue we acknowledge it the instrument or Organ of a peculiar and particular touch as also the partes of generation haue their peculiar touch whereof they are instruements but onely the skin is the Organ of externall touching and sole iudge of all tactile qualities Of the Temper of the Skin QVEST. II. GAlen is of opinion that the Skinne is absolutely temperate because it is of a middle nature between bloudy and vnbloudy whence it is called a neruous That the skin is temperate flesh and a fleshy Nerue so in anotherplace if the flesh bee adstringed and dryed it becommeth like the skinne for the skin is dryer and thighter then the flesh Hippocrates also expresseth so much where he sayth The outward Skin which is continual with it selfe and with the bloudy Nerue because it is exposed to the aire Hippocrater That it is not sometimes colder sometimes warmer is often affected by both and needes now and then the help of the one to temper the other On the contrary it may be proued by the authorities of Galen and Auicen that it is not Temperate Galen sayth that the Skin is nourished with phlegmaticke bloud it is therefore of the Temper of Phlegme for the nourishment of any part Galen is the same with that whereof it is compounded Auicen sayeth that the flesh commeth neerer to exact equality of Temper then any other part The flesh therefore and not the skinne is temperate Moreouer that cannot be temperate which is the weakest of all parts now the skin receiueth the superfluities of all the inward partes and is therefore called the Answere to the argumēts which proue it not to be temperate vniuersall Emunctory But all these knots may easily be cleft with a soft wedge The skin is nourished with phlegmatick bloud that is not ful boyled and labored when wee know it is hot not cold Auicen sayth not that flesh is most temperate but that it commeth nearest to that which is temperate so the whole body of Man is sayd to bee temperate although it be hot and moyst The weaknesse of the Skinne proceedeth not from the Temper for it is not weake of it selfe or of it owne nature but by euent by reason of the scituation and the vessels For the greater vessels because they are neerer to the fountaine are the stronger and the expelling Why the skin is weake and becomes an Emunctory vertue of the inner-parts more powerfull whence it is that the inward partes expell their superfluities into the outward and the greater vessels into the smaller vessels of the habit so that the skinne becommeth weaker because the expelling faculty is withinwarde and stronger and layeth all the burthen vpon the skinne and somuch for satisfaction of the aduersaries Whether by the skin the temper of the whole body may be known Aristotle There is another scruple arising out of this Doctrine of the Temper of the Skinne and that is whether a Physitian by the Skinne may iudge what is the Temper of the whole body Aristotle gathereth from this instrument of touching the vigour of the minde it selfe because where the touch is fine there the sence is lesse polluted the Phantasmes arising there from more subtile and so the operation of the soule higher and more abstruse Galen resolueth the doubt where he sayth They are in an errour who doe determine alwaies of the Temper of the whole body by the skinne for though the skinne be hard yet is not the Galens resolution of the question Creature necessarily dry neither if it be soft without haire is the whole creature moist yet if the whole body be in equall Temper then it is reasonable that all the parts should be proportionably correspondent to the Temper of the Skinne but if the body be vnequally tēpered as oftentimes it is from the nature by accident or by disease then is it not reasonable to iudge of the body by the skin For we see that in Oysters the flesh is very moist yet is their skin which is their shell beyond measure dry Of the Originall and Generation of the Skin QVETS III. THere are many opinions about the generation of the Skinne The common opinion is that it ariseth from the dilated endes of the Veines Arteries and The common opinion Sinewes because it euery where feeleth liueth and is nourished now life is communicated by the Arteries nourishment by the Veines
swell Howe this commeth to passe we will now declare but first it must be resolued what that diuine old man meant by dry Coughes not that Cough which is without matter caused either by a bare distemper as when the winde is at the North or by the inequality of the rough Artery or by the simpathy of the sinnewy parts for how could that breede tumors and Apostemations But a Cough with a matter whose cause is either the thinnesse of the matter which the breath cannot intercept as we cough but it slideth downe by the sides of the weazon or else the The wayes by which the humor must pas out of the chest into the testicles thicknes of the same which will not follow the constraint of the chest This matter whither thin or thicke Hippocrates vnderstandeth to be euacuated by Apostemations belowe and especially in the coddes or testicles but all the difficulty is which way this crude matter should passe out of the chest vnto the parts of generation There are three sorts of vessels which goe to the Testicles A Nerue an Artery and a veine all which haue through-passages from the chest to the testicles First of al a notable The way of the Nerue and euident branch of the rib sinnew called Costalis runneth by the sides of the ribs into the Testicles A vaine from the non-parill or vn-mated veine of the brest runneth thorough The way of the Veine the Midriffe and determineth into the veine of the Kidney and the spermaticall veines As for the Artery albeit none do come to the great trunke from the Lunges in whose lappes The way of the Arteire the matter of the cough doth lye yet it is not vnreasonable to thinke that the offending humour may passe by tâ—e venall arâ—ery into the left ventricle of the heâ—rt and from thence into the great Artery and so into his branches by which way â—lso the matter or pus of pleuriticall The passage of matter thorough the left Ventricle of the heart and Peripneumontcall or Empyicall patients descendeth and so is diuersly auoyded by vrine seidge or Apostemations in the lower parts and by this passage also it is more then probable that the matter should fall out of the chest to the testicles QVEST. VI. Of the scituation of the Prostatae COncerning the Glandules called Prostatae Anatomists doe contend That the Prostatae are aboue the sphincter some thinke they are placed beneath the sphincter Muscle others aboue we adhere to the latter For beside the credite of dissection if they were placed below the sphincter then the seede should neuer be spent without the auoyding of vrine also again in the running of the reines the seed could not flow without the water besides the Vrine would alwayes lye vpon these Glandules and fret them with his â—crimony They are therefore placed aboue the sphincter and their inflamation or exulceration breeds the venerious gonorrhaea or running of the reines QVEST. VII Whether the Erection of the yard be a Naturall or an Animall action EVery action according to Galen is Naturall or Animall that he calleth Naturall which is not voluntary so the vitall faculty is Naturall because it is not How manie soâ—ts actions there are Arbitrary The inflation of the virile member is an action because there is in it Locall and Mathematicall motion it must therefore needs be a Natural or an Anmiall or a mixt action To prooue it to be meerely Animall this argument is vrged because all the Animal faculties Imagination Motion and Sense do concurre to the perfection of it For the first That erection is meerely Animal before the distention of this part whether wee wake or sleepe wanton and lasciuious imaginations do trouble vs. Now mens Imaginations when they wake are alwayes voluntary and arbitrary with election and when they sleepe then are their imaginations like those of bruite beasts following the species or Idea and representations of the seede as it pricketh swelleth these parts of generation For euen as in sleepe Flegme stirreth vp in our imaginations The effects of the humours in sleepe similitudes of raine and waters Choler of rage and fury like vnto it selfe Melanlancholy that enemy of the light and demolisher of the principles of life it selfe powreth a cloude of darknesse ouer our minde and representeth to our imaginations similitudes full of terror and feare right so the seede contained in the Prostatae swelling with aboundance by his tickling or itching quality communicated to the braine by the continuity of the sinnewes How venerious imaginations 〈◊〉 sleep are mooued mooueth or stirreth vp images or shaddowes of venerious delights in the fantasies of men wherefore this part or member is not erected without the helpe of the imagination The Sense mooueth the imagination the imagination commandeth the moouing Faculty that obeyeth and so it is puffed vp The moouing Faculty hath the help of four Muscles two of which run along the sides of the member now wee know that all motions of the Muscles is Animall because a Muscle is defined to be an instrument of voluntary motion This inflation hath pleasure also ioyned vnto it but pleasure is not without sence wherefore all these three Animall faculties concurre in erection and therefore it is meerly an Animall action On the contrary that it is a Naturall action may thus bee demonstrated all the causes That it is meerly naturall The instruments of this distention the instruments the efficients and the end are Naturall The Naturall organs or instruments are two ligaments hollow fungous and blacke which though they be called Nerues yet are not voluntary and sensible or feeling sinewes they arise from the hanch and share-bones not from the brayne or marrow of the backe The efficient cause is not our will because erection is not alwayes at our commaundement either to moue or The efficient to appease as we may doe our armes legges and eyes but the efficient cause is heate spirites and winde which fill and distend these hollow bodies with an infinite number of vesselles both veines and arteries dispersed and wouen through them The finall cause is procreation The finall which belongeth to the Naturall not to the Animall faculty Betwixt these two extreames we wil take the middle way and determine that the action of erection is neyther meerely Animall nor meere Naturall but a mixed action In respect of the imagination the sence it is Animall because it is not distended vnlesse some The middle and true opinion that it is a mixt action luxurious imagination goe before and the distention when it is made is alwayes accompanied with a sence of pleasure and delight but in respect of the motion we rather thinke it to be Naturall which yet is somewhat holpen by the Animal For as the appetite which Comparison from the appetite is stirred vp in the vppermost mouth of the stomacke because traction breedes diuulsion
and sense do confirme the some Galen in the 4. chapter of Experience the aforesaid book telleth a storie of a certaine man whom hee commanded to snuffe vp into his nose and to receiue at his mouth Nigella Gith or Pepperwort finely beaten and Reason mingled with old oyle who thereupon felt a great gnawing in his braine Which saith he is a manifest argument that some of that Nigella went into the ventricles of the Brain and cleauing to the Pia mater or thin Membrane or else haply in the Braine it selfe was the cause of that paine Againe reason seemeth to perswade the same The Braine is the fountaine and originall of all sense and therefore it selfe must need be sensible because by it all other parts haue sense For it is an axiome in Logicke Propter quod vnumquodque est tale illud magis tale That for which any thing is such or such must needs it selfe be more such or such Furthermore vnlesse the Braine had sense it could not rouse it selfe vp to the expulsion of that which is offensiue for in sternutations or sneezings and fits of the Epilepsie or falling-sicknes how should the Braine bee moued and shaken to exclude and auoyde the humour or vapour by which it is vellicated or goaded vnlesse it felt the affluence thereof Contrarily the opinion of those who determine that the Braine hath no sense may also be confirmed by authoritie experience and reason Aristotle in the 17. chapter of his 3 The contrary opinion booke De historia Animalium And in the 7. capter of his second booke de partibus Animal writeth that the Braine and the marrow haue not sensum tactus the sense of feeling Galen in the 8. chapter of his first book De causis sympto The Braine saith he was ordained by nature not to haue sense but to communicate the faculty of sensation to the instruments of the senses In his third booke De causis sympt hee calleth the Braine an Organe without sense Experience then which nothing is more certain conuinceth the truth of this position Experience For when the Braine is wounded the patient doth not feele although the substance therof be pressed with a sharpe probe no not if some of it be taken away which thing is very ordinary for Physitians and Chyrurgions to obserue Finally it may be demonstrated by reasons Euery Organ saith the Philospoher Reasons must be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is without any externall quality So in the Christaline humor of the eye there is no colour in the eare no sound in the tongue no sauour and the skin which is the Iudge of those qualities which moue the sense of touching is it selfe of a moderate temper So the braine is the seate of the common sense and iudgeth of all sensation and therefore must it selfe be without sense Moreouer the braine ought not to be sensible for if it were hauing his scituation vppermost and like a cupping glasse drawing and supping vppe the exhalations of the lower parts it would by their affluence perpetually be payned Finally the substance well nigh of all the bowels is insensible as of the liuer the spleene the lungs c. and therefore the substance also of the braine is insensible To this opinion we rather subscribe then to the former following therein Galen in his first booke de causis Symp. where he is not of opinion that the braine hath sense but onely that it can discerne the differences of sensible things Those things which are brought to proue the contrary assertion seeme to me now to Answere to the argumēts of the former opinion be very light Hippocrates sayde that the braine did feele those iniurtes that were in the flesh and in the bone that is to say it is affected and altered by them So the same Hippocrates saith in his Aphorismes that the bones do feele the power of cold that is they are altered by cold Wherefore he vseth the word Sense in that place abusiuely Galen attributeth sense to the braine It is true yet not to his marrowy substance which is the fountaine and originall of all the Animall faculties but to the Pia mater or thin membrane which insinuateth it selfe deepely into the corners thereof As for that logicall Axiome it is only true in these causes which we call Homogeny and those also conioyned For the Sunne being of it selfe not hot yet heateth all sublunary things And whereas they say that the brain is shaken in the exclusion of that which is hurtfull and thence would prooue that it is sensible wee answere that there is seated in euery particular part a naturall power to expell that which is hurtfull which power is sometime ioyned with Animall sense sometimes How the braine apprehend that which is hurtfull also it is without the same So the bones haue a power of excretion and the flesh almost of all the bowels being insensible is yet apprehensiue of those things that are hurtful yea expell them also and driue them forth There are in the nature of things certaine Sympathies and Antipathies Fernelius in the tenth Chapter of the 5. booke of his Physiologia hath diuised a new and vncouth opinion concerning the motion and sense of the braine He conceiueth that all Fernelius new opinion motion is from the marrow of the braine and all sense saith hee floweth from the Meninges or Membranes because the body of the braine is perpetually mooued yet hath no sense at all on the other side the membranes that incompasse it are of themselues immoueable especially the Dura mater and yet their sense is most exquisite So in the diseases which we call Dilirium that is an aberration of the minde and in the Letargy which are affects of the Braine there is no paine at all but if a sharpe humor or vapour be transported into the Membranes then is the patient as it were on the racke Furthermore the spine and all the nerues haue their marrow from the braine and the same inuested with membranes al which haue the same power and nature which they receiued from their originall Therefore the fore-part of the braine is the originiall of sense the backepart the beginning of motion and the menings or membranes are the beginning of touching Those nerues that are fullest of marrow are the instruments of motion but those are the instruments of touching which are for the most part deriued from the meninges These are Fernelius words wherein saith my Author by the fauor of so great a man I finde some things that cannot be warranted First he saith that all voluntarie motion Fernelius his first error floweth from the Marrow because the Marrow is perpetually mooued as if the motion of the Braine and of the Nerues and Muscles were alike The motion of the Braine is Naturall consisting of a Dyastole a double rest and a Systole for the generation of Animall spirits but the motion of the Muscles
are many vnto them diuers muscles whereby their motions are very sudden and expedite Hence it is that Aristotle in the 8. Probleme of the 7. Section calleth the Eye The most noble part of the body yet sayth he the left eie is more nimble then the right Now whereas the motions of a mans eye are sixe according to Galen in the third Chapter of his first Booke de motu musculorum it followeth necessarily that the eie must haue sixe muscles but Galen Vesalius and the rest of the Anatomists as Columbus sayth being accustomed only to describe the eies of beastes haue added a seauenth muscle and those sixe also which they haue described they haue misplaced But we are to describe the muscles of the eye of a man that seauenth which belongeth to beastes is deuided into two into three and sometimes into foure In men therefore as we haue said there are sixe muscles according vnto the sixe motions of a mans eie foure of which motions are Right that is to say vpward downeward Why sixe to the right hand and to the left the two motions remayning are oblique to which belong two oblique muscles whose vse is to rowle the eie about Notwithstanding one of these is How many moâ—â—ons the eie hath exactly oblique the other partly right partly oblique All these muscles are seated on the backeside of the Eye within the cauity of the Scull whether they accompany the opticke nerue and so remayning in their position the eie and they together doe make a Pyramidal or turbinated figure Table 1. figu 6. 7. Among these muscles the thicker and more corpolent are the Right which haue all the same structure originall and insertion and do passe The figure of the eie straight al along the length of the eie the oblique muscles are lesse fleshy yet very like one another All these muscles of the eie are small that they might be sooner mooued but that which helpeth most the volubility of their motion is the round figure which is the nimblest of all Why the muscle 〈…〉 others as we may perceiue by the roundnes of the heauens The eie therefore being round as are also the muscles thereof is euen in a moment conueyed Why round ouer the whole heauen and the head itselfe is therefore mooued very suddanly and swiftly because it toucheth vpon the bone whereon it resteth with a narrow point The foure Right muscles meeting and touching one another toward the roote of the nerue optick doe arise with a sharp beginning froÌ„ the lower part of the bony orbe which is The right muscles made by the wedge bone hard by the passage through which the nerue of sight or the opticke nerue doth yssue I know well that Vesalius is of opinion that they arise out of diuers parts and into diuers parts are inserted Againe for their matter he conceiueth they arise from a commixture of the Dura mater which compasseth the opticke nerue and a nerue of the second coniugation Platerus thinkes that they arise from the membrane which compasseth the orbe of the eye and that membrane which inuesteth the opticke nerue Aquapendens imagineth they proceed from the Pericranium or Scull-skinne Laurentius disputeth about their originall on this manner They erre saith he which thinke the muscles of Diuers opinions about their original the eie doe arise from the inner thicke membrane which compasseth the opticke nerue for this is altogether against sence they could not sayth hee arise from a membrane nor they ought not They ought not because a membrane of an exquisite sence compasseth the nerue which nerue the muscles in their motions would compresse and so the sight would be offended They could not because they are not established vppon a firme foundation It remayneth therefore saith Laurentius that they must arise from the inmost depth of the Table 2. Figure 1. sheweth many muscles of the Eye in their owne seate Figure 2. sheweth the Eye rowled vpward whereby their muscles may be perceiued Figure 3. and 4. sheweth the muscles of the Eye separated before and behind with their nerues Figure 5. Is the Eye of an Oxe with his muscles seuered as Vesalius doth shew it TABVLA II. FIG I. FIG II FIG III. FIG IV. FIG V. Their whole bodies throughout their whole course are fleshy and their bellies beare out round as they come forward But they determine a little aboue the middle of the eye Their inserrion into a broad thinne and membranous tendon wherewith they compasse the whole eye before and grow very strongly to the horny Tunicle neare vnto the Iris or Raine-bow in the greater circle and these tendons ioyned together doe make that nameles coate of Columbus and the white of the eie For we conceiue that this whitenesse is caused rather by the tendons of these muscles Whence the whitenes of the eie proceâ—deth then that it properly belongeth to the coate which we call Adnata And so much shal be sufficient to haue spoken in generall of the muscles of the Eie Now we come to a more particular discription of them one by one The first Table 2. figure 1 3 4. D fig. 5. ♌ which is the third according to Vessalius and Galen also in the 8. Chapter of his 10. Booke de vsu partium is seated aboue fleshy it is A more particular description of the seueral muscles round thicker also then the rest greater and stronger then the second because it lifteth the eie vpward toward the brow For there is greater strength required to lift a thing vp then to pull it downe The names of this muscle commonly giuen by Authours are Attollens and Superbus the Lifter and the Proud muscle The second which according to Galen and Vesalius is the fourth Table 2. figure 2 3 4. E. figure 5. â— is opposite vnto the former and placed in the Lower part it draweth the eye downeward to the Cheeks and therfore needed not be so great as the former because the eye declineth easily with his owne waight It is called Deprimens and Humilis the Depressor and Humble Muscle The third Ta. 2. fig. 1 2 3 4 G. fig. 5 ζ according to Galen and Vesalius the first is seated in the great angle and leadeth the eye inward toward the nose and is called Adducens and Bibitorius we may call it the Gleeing Muscle The fourth Tab. 2. fig. 1 2 3 4 F. fig. 5 n which according to Galen and Vesalius is the second is opposite to the third seated on the outside of the eye which it draweth to the lesser angle or to the temples and is called Abducens and Indignatorius we may cal it the Scu-muscle or the Muscle of Disdaine If all these foure worke together the eye is drawne inwarde fixed established and conteined which kind of motion Physitians call Motus Tonicus wee in our Language Their Vse cal it a Set or wist-looke Archangelus is more distinct in the assignation
the sides of the head the sound may easily slip by them especially when it commeth from behind vs and we moue forward if it were not caught in these conuolutions â—nd in the guttures of the grystly substance conueyed vnto the hole of hearing And hence it is that euen by instinct of nature we see brute beasts as Dogs and Horses will pricke vp their eares and partly turne them toward any sound or noyse that is made And because the Eare might be thus prominent as well in the parts as in the whole for the whole eare standeth of a certaine distance from the head Nature hath made them of a cartelaginious or gristly substance which out of doubt wold grow farther from the head if Nurses or carefull mothers who haue more respect of comlinesse then of vse did not bind them downe in our infancy If you aske me how the sound of any thing farre off can ariue vnto the eare I will answer by a pregnant example on this manner If a stone be throwne into the midst of a A fit similitude expressing how the sounds come through the aire vnto the eare pond it moueth the water in circles one alwayes succeeding greater then another vntill the motion determine in the brinkes or bounds of the pond so in like manner those bodyes which by their collision do make a sound mooue the ayre into orbes or circles succeeding one another so that the circles which are nearest to the body from whence the sound came are but small the rest which follow them grow greater and greater vntill they come vnto the eare whereat when they beate they are latched in those furrowes wee spake of and by them directed vnto the hole of hearing CHAP. XII Of the parts of the outward Eares THis outward Eare is made of parts some common some proper the common parts are the cuticle the skin the fleshy membrane flesh itselfe and a little fat in the lobe or lap The proper parts are muscles veines Arteries Nerues and a gristle The cuticle or skarfe-skin we haue spoken of before in the second book as also of all the other coÌ„mon parts only of the skin itselfe in this part we may say that it is exceeding thin yet somewhat thicker in the gibbous or backeside of the eare then it is in the concauous or foreside and the nearer it comes to the hole of hearing the thinner it is This skin compasseth the eare round about both without and within and cleaueth very strongly and firmely to a little flesh and to the gristle that the superficies of the eare especially The skin of the outward eare the inner might be smooth and slicke not corrugated or vnequall as well for beauty and comelinesse as also for the better reception of sounds for Aristotle in the seuerth Aristotle Probleme of the eleuenth section enquiring why a house that is new plastered doth sound Why a new house sounds more then an old better then an old house answereth that the reason is because the wals are smooth which smoothnesse procedeth from density or fastnesse It is reasonable therefore to thinke that the smoothnesse of the eare helpeth the sound and therefore the very hole also of hearing is inuested with a thight hard thin and smooth skin which cleaueth very closely to the meÌ„brane there vnder But where the skin incompasseth the lobe or lap of the eare it is so exquisitely mixed with the membrane and the flesh that it cannot be separated from them and therefore we may call that part a fleshy fatty and spongy skin The vessels of the eare are these Veines of the eare Hippocrates tooke knowledge of in his first booke de natura haminis Branches they are dispersed on either side Tab. 4. fig. 1. DDD The veins of the eare Table 6. Figure 1. Sheweth the fore-face of the outward Eare without the skin Figure 2. sheweth a ligament of the outward Eare whereby it is tyed to the Skull Figure 3. The stony processe being broken sheweth the first cauity and the holes thereof Figure 4. 5. shew the Labyrinth the Snayly shell called Cochlea two windowes and three semicircles TABVLA VI. FIG I. FIG II. FIG III. FIG IV. FIG V. Fig. 1. 2. Fig. 3. 4. 5. Arteries it hath from the inner branch of the Carotis or sleepy Artery which passe to The arteriesâ— of the eare the backeside of the Eare Tab. 13. Lib. 6. o that those parts and the in-bred ayre also might be refreshed with vitall bloud and spirits Two small nerues it hath from the backeward and two from the sides of the second coniugation of the marrow of the necke and these are very small sayeth Galen in the sixth Chapter of his 16. Booke de vsu partium in Men and Apes because their temporall muscles bee very small and the substance of their eares is immouable but in other creatures sayth he whose temporall muscles and eares are very large these nerues also are large because of the strength required to those motions The vse of them in men is to bring Sense to the eares and sometimes to mooue the muscles for those muscles are not alwayes found CHAP. XIII Of the Muscles of the outward Eare. MEns Eares are for the most part immouable yet they may be moued as appeareth as well by their muscles as also by the nerues which as we said euen now are founde in some bodies But the muscles are so small and the nerues so threddy that their motion is hardly perceiued and Nature made them small because too much motion would haue vitiated the hearing and therefore the head is rather made to moue speedily on euery side toward the sound or voice which is not so in beastes whose eares are mouable Such as they are Falopius first found them out and therefore the honour of their Inuention belongeth to him They are of two sortes Common and Proper The first is Common to the Eare and both the Lippes and is a portion of that muscle which is accounted the first of those which moue the cheeks and the skinne of the face and is called Quadratus Tabl 7. fig. 1 L The square muscle it is inserted with ascending fibres into the roote of the eare table 6. fig. 1. O. Table 7. Fig. 1. Sheweth the muscles of the Forehead the Eye-lids and the Cheekes Figure 2. sheweth the muscles of the Nose Lips the lower Iaw and of the bone Hyois TABVLA VII FIG I. FIG II. μ 2 the insertion of this muscle into the lower iaw ν 2 A small nerue running to the forehead out of the orbe of the eyes Ï€ 2 a nerue propagated to the face 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 2 two beginnings of the seauenth muscle of the head T 2 His insertion into the Mammillary processe â— 2 The clauicle or the coller-bone φ 2 A place where the vessels attayning to the head and the nerues of the arme do passe through The second is a proper muscle Table 7.
three causes of this variety the Humors the Coats and the Spirits The Humors of the Eye are three first the watery secondly the Cristalline thirdly the Glassy This last because it cannot be perceiued and is placed in the hindmost part of the eie doth The first cause referred to the humours conferre nothing or verie little vnto the diuersitie of colours but this vertue of alteration and changing the colour of the eye dependeth most vppon the watery and Glassy or Cristal humor In these humors also three things are to be considred their Substance Quantity Situation By the name of Substance I vnderstand the purity or impurity the splendor darknesse teuuity and density The Quantity doth note the plentie or scarsity of the In humors 3 things to bee obserued humour The Site is either more hollow and profound or more prominent and bearing out There be therefore three causes in respect of the Cristalline of a wally and white colour in the eie First the plenty of the Cristalline secondly the purity and splendor thereof and his prominent Situation for so the Cristalline humor by his own proper brightnesse illuminateth the watery humor and the whole eie By reason of the waterie humour there bee two causes of this wallinesse the splendor and the paucity or scarsity of it for a small and pure watery humor doth lesse hinder the fulgor or brightnesse of the cristalline Humour The causes of blacknesse are quite contrary as in the behalfe of the Cristaline the paucitie or smalnesse of it his impurity and deep situation and in respect of the watery the impurity The cause of blacknesse and plenty is the cause thereof But haply that which Aristotle writeth in the 14 Probleme and the 14. Section may seeme to contradict our assertion where hee saith the Ethyopians haue blacke eies and those that inhabit the North white but in the Ethyopians Obiection there is lesse plenty of the watery humour by reason of that ambient Ayre exicating or drying vp all things in those of the North it is more aboundant I answer that the Eyes of the Ethiopians be blacke by reason of the paucity of their Visiue spirits for they are resolued and dissipated by the heate whereby it happens that Solution the light of the spirits failing the Eye appeares as it were darke or ouershadowed But the Northerne people doe abound with many spirits The intermediate colours doe depend vpon intermediate causes The second cause of the diuersitie of colours in the Eye may be referred to the Coate called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is vueam or the Grapy coate for this onely because it is diuersly coloured The second cause of the diuersity of colours causeth a variegated or diuers coloured Eye So in the circle of the Eye which they call the Iris or Rainebow diuers colours doe appeare because in that part the Grapy coate is diuers coloured Lastly we thinke that the Visiue spirits doe also conferre something to the varietie of these colours for thin pure cleare and copious spirits cause whitenesse but crasse impure The 3. cause foggy and few are the cause of blackenes Now that there be spirits in the Eye may be manifest by these arguments First because while the creature is a liue the Eye seems to be exceedingly stretched neither is any part thereof loose and corrugated and the one of thē being shut the pupilla or Aple of the other is presently dilated to wit because the spirits passe more plentifully through the Netlike-coat into the Grapy Lastly because sometimes the Eyes appeare languide and obscure sometime chearefull and splendide or bright QVEST. XXVI Of the Muscles of the Eyes and their motion SEeing the Eyes be as scoutwatches night and day watching for our good it is of necessity that they ought readily to bee mooued euery way that with facility they might be conuerted whither soeuer we would and to this motion a Nerue of the second coniugation and six Muscles do serue The first whereof lifts vp the second doth depresse the 3. doeth draw forward the fourth draweth backeward and two doe leade the Eye about By all these performing their functions together and stretching their Fibers is the Eye stayed and fixed For it is not as Galen would haue it and almost all Anatomists following his steps established or fixed by a seuenth Muscle compassing the Opticke Nerue because this Muscle is onely found in foure-footed beasts which looke prone toward the earth lest their Eyes should fall out of their Orbes which Muscle in a man is neuer to be found This motion whereby the Eye is thus firmed the Physitians call it Tonicum or a set Motion and it is twofold the one 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or according to Nature when the Fibres of all the Muscles are equally intended or stretched so that the Muscles seeme then to be at rest the other 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 beside Nature when the Eyes remain fixt immouable whether we wil or no. Which position Hippocraetes in his book de victus ratione in morbis acutis cals 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is a Congelation and Immobility or Setting and fixing of the Eye This fixednes or immobility hapneth when the facultie of the Muscles which moue the Eye is resolued weakned or wholly extinguished or because these muscles are al equally gathered or contracted into their heads This posture of the Eye they call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is a ballanced or equall fixing of the Eye which affect or disease is contrary to that they call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 where in the eyes haue a wandring vnconstant staring as a horse looks that is full fed whence also the disease tooke his name There are therfore only sixe Muscles of the eie not seuen and of these foure haue the gouernmēt of the right motions two do obliquely lead the eye about And thus may certain differing places in Galen be reconciled for in his tenth booke de vsu partium hee saith that there are onely foure motions of the Eyes but in the fourth de locis affectis he determines that there be sixe Concerning the originall of these Muscles Anatomists are not al of one minde Some of them suppose that they spring from the hard meninx within the scull but wee are of opinion that the foure right Muscles together with that oblique whose Tendons is compassed about with the pully doe arise from that inside of the Orbe which is made by a portiō of the wedge bone this we are taught saith my Author both by experience by Autopsie or ocular inspection But from the membrane they neither ought nor can haue their originall They ought not because a membrane of an exquisite sense doth compasse the Optick nerue and therefore the muscles in their motions would compresse this nerue and so offer violence to the Sight they could not because they should not
arise from the Brayne and the spinall Marrow and are called by Galen organa 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Instruments of Sense and voluntary Motion because by them the animal Faculty and those that mooue within that is the impetuous spirites are conuayed as it were by strings or chords into the particular parts Auicen cals them Latores cadgers in our language Of these Hippocrates wrote in his Booke de locis in homine The whole body is full of Nerues that is throughout the whole body the Nerues doe run from the Braine and the Spinall Marrow and in his Book de arte he calleth them meteors in the flesh because they are sprinkled through the flesh that is through the Muscles Galen in his first Book de motu musculorum compareth these three kinde of Nerues among themselues on this manner A Ligament is insensible a voluntary nerue of most Compared together exquisite Sense and a Tendon of a middle nature not altogether insensible because it hath some filaments or strings of Nerues therein neyther yet of so quicke a Sense as is a Nerue There are also many other parts in the body which because of the similitude betwixt them and Nerues are called neruous although they cannot bee referred to any of these three kinds so we say the wombe the bladder and the guts are neruous as also the vreters the passages of the choller and the eiaculatory vesselles In this place we take the The description of anerue name of a Nerue properly for an organ by which the animall spirit and the faculty floweth into the whole body The nature of this organ may thus be described It is a common Instrument of the body like a Chord white round and long without any cauity which our sense can discerne vnlesse it bee the Optickes but porous in some vnited in the greater nerue made vp of many small strings carrying as a Canale and motion which are conducted by the animall spirit from the Braine and the Marrow thereof vnto those parts of the body which are capeable of sense and motion Their substance is white and marrowy much like the marrow of the braine from which Their substaÌ„ce they take their originall for I account the marrow of the Braine and the backe to bee of one and the same substance but more compact and faster for it was necessary the braine should be very soft because it was to receiue the species or formes of sensible things So that by how much the nerue descendeth lower or is more separated from the brain by so much doth it become the harder that it might be better able to endure outward iniuries They are inuested with a double membrane produced from the two Meninges or Membranes Membranes of the braine the vtter whereof is the thicker produced from the dura mater whose office is to safegard and defend the marrow of the Nerue and if it consist of many small chords or threds it ioyneth them altogether and when it hath encompassed them about it receiueth into it branches from the neighbour-veines The inner membrane is thinner by much and lyeth next vnto the marrowe or substance of the Nerue It ariseth from the pia Mater and hath the exquisite sense of touching which saith Fernelius it communicateth to the parts whereinto the nerue is inserted Fernelius for as the Braine is couered with these two membranes so also are the nerues throughout the whole body a nerue being nothing else indeede but a production of the Braine But this threefold substance of a nerue as Falopius hath it in his obseruations and out of him Bauhine may better be distinguished by reason then by sense for Anatomy is not able to shew the difference betwixt the harde and soft membranes of any nerue except it be the optickes The substaunce which is in the middest or in the center of the nerue is the principall part thereof and performeth the action for the sensatiue and motiue faculty is conuayed from the Braine vnto the parts not by the coates but by the marrow Hence it is saith Which is their chiefe part Galen that if you cut asunder the marrow of a nerue presently the part into which that nerue is inserted is depriued of sense and motion as for the membranes they do the same office vnto the nerue which they did to the Braine for the nerues are not properlie the instruments of sense and motion for the immediate organ of motion is a Muscle but they are like pipes by which the whole sensatiue soule and the faculties thereof both of sense and motion are led by the guidance of the Animall spirit from the Brayne vnto the parts of the body as they stand in neede either of sense and motion or therefore the Physitians do vse to call them the organs of sense and motion For they communicate vnto those parts into which they are inserted either sense alone or onely motion or both together for no part hath sense or voluntary motion without a nerue if the nerue that belongeth to any part be compressed or intercepted or cut asunder or corrupted the sense and motion of that part doth sodainly perish Hence it is as Aristotle also remembreth in his third Booke de Historia Animalium that How a Nerue is the Organ of Sense no part of the body hath any stupor or dulnesse any palsie or resolution any spasme or convulsion that hath not a Nerue in it Now stupor is a diminution of sense the palsie a priuation of sense and motion and a Convulsion is a motion involuntary or against our willes Galen in the third and fift chapters of his sixteenth Booke de vsu partium sayeth that The reason of the softnes or hardress of a nerue those nerues which were made for voluntary motion are hard and those that were made for sense are soft and that the softe nerues do make for sensation and the hard for motion nay he goeth further in the eight chapter of his 7 booke de Administrationib Anatom and affirmeth that the soft Nerues are onely fit for sense but vnfit for motion Some again conceiue and not without great reason that the softnesse or hardnes of a Nerue is diuersly occasioned first from the substance whereout they yssue and so the first nerues which are saide to arise out of the Braine are the softest those harder that arise from the spinall marrow and those hardest of all which arise from the marrow contained in the racke-bones of the Loines and the Holy-bone Secondly in respect of their production so those Nerues are soft which run but a little way as if their iourney be not out of the scul wheras those that are led further off as vnto the muscles are harder then they were at their Originall In like manner those that run anfractuously that is with turnings and windings are very hard as a branch of the third paire of the Braine Againe those are hard which pâ—sse thorough a
hard body as that surcle of the fift coniugation which creepeth through the hole Galens opiniō of the Temple-bone which the Ancients called Coecum or the blinde-hole is made harder by the contaction of the bone then his beginning was Galen attributeth the cause of hardnesse and softnesse to the counsell of Nature because saith he the instrument of Sense needed a soft nerue A nerue as a Canale to leade along the Animall and sensatiue spirit and a soft nerue because it was to be affected and to suffer somwhat from the sensible obiect applying vnto it from without Nowe because that which is soft is fitter for passion that which is hard for action therefore saith he it was necessary that the instruments of the senses should haue softe nerues communicated vnto them and the parts which were to be mooued by voluntary motion should haue harder nerues And this hee prooueth because vnto those Instruments of sense which haue not only sensation but motion there is a double kind of nerue communicated one for Sense anotehr for Motion as wee see in the eye vnto which the first coniugation is allowed for Sense and the second for Motion so in the tongue which receiueth the third and fourth coniugations so Anatomists do vsually distinguish them for Tasting and the seuenth for Motion By the way hence it appeareth that Nerues beside their vse haue also an animall action Bauhines opinion His reasons because they are affected by the obiect and therefore the softer nerues are fitter for Sense and the harder for Motion Notwithstanding all this saith Bauhine yet wee conceiue that the nerues of their owne nature are indifferently disposed both to sense and to motion so that they may be called Sentientes or Motores perceiuers or mouers from the instruments or parts vnto which they are conducted and in which they are disseminated for if they be inserted into the instruments of motion that is into the muscles then are they called Motorij or moouing nerues If into the instruments of Sense then are they called Sensorij or perceyuing nerues yea we see that one and the same nerue doth conuey An Instance motion and sense according to the diuersity of the instruments for example the seuenth Coniugation of the Braine conueyeth vnto the Membranes of the bowels which are in the middle and lower belly the Sense of Touching and yet the same paire being on eyther side reflected makes the recurrent nerue which distributeth surcles into euerie muscle of the Larynx or Throttle to mooue the same And if the same nerues shoulde meete with the instruments of Seeing of Hearing and of Tasting the same perceiuing moouing nerues would also become seeing hearing and tasting nerues In like manner the nerues which are conueyed to the muscles to affoorde vnto them voluntary motion do together with that power affoord vnto the membranes of the muscles into which their fibres do determine the sense of Touching and so it commeth to passe that by the mediation of the nerues the braine is to bee found in euery part of the body because the animall faculty which is seated onely in the braine doth notwithstanding transfuse it selfe through the nerues Although out of that which hath been said we may easily collect the vse of the nerues yet it shall not be amisse to remember that Galen in the ninth chapter of his fift booke de vsu partium and out of him Vesalius in the first chapter of his fourth book makes a threefold The vses of the Nerues vse of them The first to conuay sense vnto the instruments of sensation to the eyes to the tongue to the eares and beside these to the palmes of the hands and the insides of the fingers yea to the vppermost mouth of the stomack also for these after a sence are organs of sensation For the best iudge by touching is the hand and the mouth of the stomacke hath an exquisite sense of the want of aliment which wee commonly call Hunger The second vse is to affoord motion to the moueable parts so the muscles which are the instruments of voluntary motion haue nerues conuayed vnto them and because they were made to moue the whole members therefore their nerues are great and large and because the same muscles stood in need of the faculty of discerning Tactile qualities for the security and preseruation of our liues therefore also they had nerues by which nerues they haue this faculty of sensation The third vse is that for which all other parts haue nerues to wit that they might perceiue those things which would be grecuous vnto them although this vse may wel be referred to the former for so wise so iust so skilfull is Nature saith Hippocrates wee say the great God of Nature and so prouident for the behoofe of the creatures that she hath distributed nerues to all the parts although not in the same measure but to some more liberally to other with a strayter hand and that according to the proportion of their magnitude of the dignity of their actions of the intention or remission of their motions of the assiduity or intermission of their vses So making an exquisite estimate of the neede of the dignity and of the vse of euery part to some she hath allowed greater nerues to some lesser but to euery one that is fittest for it For there is great difference betwixt the magnitude of nerues the thickest are those which are distributed vnto the remorest places and into the most parts such are they that The magnitude of nerus are sent vnto the ioynts which because they needed greater aboundance of spirits haue a greater proportion of originals of sinewes granted them out of the stocke of the spinall marrow which is in the rack-bones of the necke and of the loines that from their marrow they might receiue a competency of spirits as it were by many rootes which yet being gathered together do make one thicke nerue but are againe though almost insensibly distributed into lesser branches Those nerues are Meane which are conuayed to the organs of the senses in the head for being neare vnto the braine and very soft they could not be very small Those nerues are small which are distributed into the next parts as into the muscles of the face We will also say something concerning the originall of nerues The originall of the nerues is not from the heart though Aristotle so conceiued in the fift chapter of his third buoke de historia Animali and in the fourth of his third de partibus Their originall Animalium for in dissection we meete with no nerue produced therefrom and those that are led vnto it from the sixt coniugation of the braine are so small that Vesalius witnesseth that he could finde but one and that with great difficulty Neyther haue they their originall as Erasistratus thought in his youth out of the Dura mater or thicke membrane of the braine as their substance
connexion of these coniugations the second the second with the third the third with the fourth the fourth with the fift as it is demonstrated in the first figure of the 23 Table after the same manner altogether as the Nerues of the arme are implicated one within another CHAP. XXIX Of the nerues of the Holy-bone OVt of the marrow concluded within the rackes of the Holy-bone doe yssue sixe coniugations of Nerues Galen reckoneth three of the Holy-bone and Sixe coniugations of the Holy-bone three of the rumpe-bone But Vesalius and Columbus do heerein reprooue Galen with what euidence of truth I cannot say it appeareth manifestly that he was not ignorant of these bones euen in the bodies of men The first Coniugation Tab. 23. char 25 yssueth betwixt the last racke-bone of the The first loynes and the first of the Holy-bone after the same manner as it was in the coniugations of the loynes and is diuided into an anterior and a posterior branch The Anterior branch although the greatest part thereof be mixed with the Nerues which are conueyed vnto the legge yet notwithstanding it sendeth a propagation Table 23. char 53 vnto the inside of the hanch-bones from whence surcles are offered to the Muscles of the Abdomen and the seuenth muscle of the thigh which is called Iliacus internus The posterior branch runneth after the same manner as do the other Coniugations and shooteth a propagation Tab. 24. char 54 into the muscles produced from the haunch-bone especially into the first moouer of the Thigh from whence issue surcles consumed into the skin of the buttockes The fiue subsequent Coniugations Tab. 23. from char 26 to 30 are produced after one and the same manner for before their egresse they are on both sides double and on The fiue last either side one Nerue falleth forward and on either side one Nerue backward The three vpper Anteriors or forward nerues as also that of the first coniugation doe run vnto the legge the two lower vnto the muscles of the fundament and the bladder haply also to the priuie parts in some bodyes vnto the Necke of the Wombe of the bladder and of Their anterior branches the yard Finally others are conueyed vnto the Perinaeum that is the place betwixte the Cods and the Fundament and vnto the cods themselues The Posterior branches Tab. 24. char 54 55 are distributed into the muscles which take vp the posterior part of the hanch and holy bones into the muscle of the backe called Their posterior branches Longissimus into that which is called Sacer or the holy Muscle into the Membranous beginning of the broad muscle of the Arme and the sixt of the Chest called Sacrolumbus finally into the foure extenders of the thigh and into the skin of the buttockes But the termination or end of the spinall Marrow Tab. 23 and 24. ch 56 yssuing out of the Holy-bone doth on either side part with a propagation which sometimes is distributed into many surcles on the right hand and on the left which is disseminated through the fourth muscle of the thigh through the skin which is betwixt the buttockes euen vnto the fundament yet some say that it is distributed as other nerues are and call it Nâ—ruum sine coniuge the Nerue without a companion and thus it is in man But in Apes Dogs there are three Coniugations of which the two lower onely are produced forwarde and backward the rest of the Coniugations yssue out at the sides of the rumpe bone as they do out of the rackbones of the Chest and of the Loynes From this History of the Nerues of the spinall marrow we conclude that it hath thirty The sum of al coniugations or paires of Nerues seauen of the marrow of the necke twelue of the marrow of the backe or of the Chest fiue of the marrow of the Loynes six of the marrow of the Holy-bone And all these with their seuerall originals places of egresse and distributions not onely Physitians but Surgeons also ought necessarily to knowe that they may How necessary the knowledge of this is for Chirurgeons be able to apply their Vnguents and Cataplasmes vnto the right places of the spine or ridge when either the Nowle or the face or the necke or the hands or the partes of the chest or the muscles of the Abdomen or the wombe or bladder or the fundament or the yard or the legs shall be depriued of motion or sense or both together Thus much concerning the nerues of the spinall marrow and the parts thereof CHAP. XXX Of the Nerues of the Hand in the large acception THE Hand is the Instrument of Instruments that is to say the Instrument of the minde or Soule whereby she frameth and fashioneth all Instruments The Hand which consist of any matter whatsoeuer or haue respect vnto any commodity or profit of man And therfore that it might more freely do the seruice it was ordayned for it hath in allowance not only muscles the instruments of voluntary motion and veines which conuay bloud and nourishment vnto it and arteries to giue it vigour and viuacity but also it hath nerues as wel to conuay the motiue vertue vnto the muscles as also to furnish it with the most exact sense of touching There are Hath 5 paire of sinewes therefore disposed vnto the Hand sometimes fiue payres of sinnewes sometimes sixe arising from the spinall Marrow contained in the racke-bones of the Necke and Chest that is to say out of the fift sixt and seuenth of the Necke and the first and second rackes of the chest These Nerues do yssue out of the common perforations of the aforesaid rack-bones and presently after their egresse are vnited at the sides of the spondils afterward they are separated againe conioyned and finally separated so seeming to make the meish of a net tab 25 fig. 3 or saith Columbus and that out of Vesalius it is like the strings of a Cardinals hatte This implication was made for more security that the nerues which were to walke a longer iourney might become harder and so stronger to propulse or endure any iniury that might be offered vnto them These nerues run vnder the clauicle or cannell bone vnto the inner processe of the Why wounds about the clauicles are dangerous and the luxation of the shoulder shoulder-blade where the Basilica veyne and the Axillary artery keepe their way and hence it is that wounds in this place are so very dangerous and luxations of the shoulder do easily bring a consumption vppon the Patient From this fore-saide implication or complication of the sinewes do the nerues of the hand or of the arme arise and creepe betwixt the skinne and the fleshy membrane deeply drenched in fatte in the bodies of men and by their mediation that fleshy membrane is indissoluebly fastened to the skinne but they do not alwayes retaine the same magnitude position and number alwayes they are distributed into many
as are the wombe the bladder the stomacke the guts and such like which make a part of themselues and wherein all the three sorts of fibres do appeare That it is cold and dry Galen teacheth in his Booke de temperamentis but yet it is lesse cold and dry then a Tendon a Ligament a Gristle or a Bone but more cold and dry then Arteries Veines and Sinewes The matter of Membranes is the slimie part of the seede which by the power of heate is stretched or distended whence it is that a Membrane may easily be dilated or compressed without danger onely the Membrane saith Galen may bee safely distended and contracted and therefore all parts which were to bee distended and contracted are made membranous A membrane is broad and extensible to inuest preserue the part thight and fast for strength and beside that it may not so easily receiue an influxion of humors yet thin least the waight of it should be offensiue Notwithstanding though it be thin and appeare simple yet euery Membrane is double thorough which duplicature there runne Veines for nourishment Arteries to conuey life and Nerues to conuey Sense which vessels being slender and fine it was fit it should be conueighed betwixt two coats The common office of a membrane is to be the organ of the Sense of Touching as the The organe of Touching eye is the organ of Seeing and therefore the sense of a membrane is most exquisite A Nerue is indeede the conueyer of the spirits and carrieth downe the commandments of the Soule but as in a muscle it is not the primary organ of motion as in the eye it receiueth not visible obiects so it doth not receiue the first tactiue qualities onely the Membrane is it which we must esteeme the organ of Touching and if you despoile the partes of their membranes you make them also insensible Hence it is that the flesh of the lungs of the liuer of the spleene and of the rest of the bowels is insensible As therefore the sense of Touching is diffused throughout the whole body of the creature because it is euery where necessary so likewise are there membranes sprinckled through the whole body almost internally and externally On the outside the body is inuested with the skinne and the fleshy membrane On the inside the peculiar membranes are almost infinite If it be obiected out of Galen in arte medicinali that membranes haue onely inbred Obiection not influent faculties such as is sense We answere with the Reconciler that Galen then speaketh of membranous and broade ligaments which issue from the bones The three last particles of the definition do elegantly expresse the three principall vses of membranes They inuest the parts vnder them like a couering whence they haue Galen expounded the name of coates They conserue the fibres to make the flesh more firme and stable they containe the substance of the parts and enclose it round about least it should dissolue and separate part from part Moreouer they fasten one part to another from whence proceedeth the admirable The vses of membranes simpathy or society of the parts So by the periostia the bones are all continuated one to another by their common membrane all the muscles are vnited by the skin the whole body hath his connexion though it be diuers in respect of the structure of parts which are of diuers kindes Finally by the helpe of membranes parts are separated from parts as wee may perceiue in our sections of muscles There are other peculiar vses of membranes to sustaine parts as appeareth in the Mediastinum to hinder the refluence of humor as the values that are in the heart in the great veynes and such like places and to leade along and establish the vessels that are to be distributed into other parts as into the mesentery the kel the fleshy membrane The differences of membranes are manifold and are taken from their substance magnitude The differences of membranes The first site figure conformation or texture and from the nature of the parts which they inuest or containe If you regard the substance which is the Mansion-house and Ancient seate of the determinate and particular faculty then wee say that membranes are either lawfull and true or illegitimate Those are true membranes to which the definition before giuen wil agree such are the membranes or Meninges of the braine the Peritonaeum the Pleura the Periostium and such like Illegitimate membranes may more truely be called membranous bodies Of these there are three kindes some arise from the bones are broade and insensible and fasten the ioynts together Such are called Ligamentall membranes or membranous ligaments Others are made of the tendons of muscles dilated and so become more like a membrane then a tendon such are the thin ends of the oblique and transuerse muscles of the Abdomen also the tendon of the muscle that leadeth the leg backward which they commonly call fasciam latam the broade swath To the third kinde I refer those membranous bodâ—es which make parts by themselues which although they be inuested with coates yet are altogether made of membranous bodies Such are the bladders of vrine and gall the stomacke the guts and the wombe Againe those membranes which I called legittimate are eyther of a thin or slender substance like vnto broade cob-webbes such as appeareth in that membrane or coate of the eie that compasseth the Cristaline humor called Arachnoides or the cob-webbe coate likewise in the Pia mater of the braine and in the coates of the Lungs and the Liuer or they are thicke as the Dura mater and the membrane of the bladder or they are fleshy as in the face or altogether neruous From the magnitude some membranes are broade and some are long The figure the second c of membranes is manifolde according to the variety of the parts which they doe inuest From the situation some are internall some are externall some supernall some infernall From the context or conformatioÌ„ some haue fibres of all three kindes some of two kinds some of one kind onely others are without fibres and may be torne euery way as paper may And so much of membranes in generall of their Nature vses and differences Now we come vnto their history CHAP. XIII Abriefe enumeration of all the Membranes THE number of Membranes is almost infinite and we haue handled many of them before as they fell in our way in the order of Dissection nowe we will gather them into a briefe sum The Membranes therefore do some belong to the Embryo or infant before it be borne others to the creature after it is borne also The Membranes The Membranes of the Embryo that inuolue the infant are three called Chorion Amnios and Allantoides the Chorion is so called either because it conteyneth the infant or because it compasseth it like a circle or a crowne it cleaueth wholly to the wombe by the interposition of
proper substance of the part for the fibres are as it were the first stamina or the warpe whose empty distances the flesh like the woofe filleth vppe There are also other peculiar vses of Fibres in the Veines and Arteries to wit that therby they might be better extended after all the violent motions of the bloud and so become lesse subiect to mischiefe CHAP. XV. Of the differences of Fibres THE differences of Fibres are to bee taken from their site hardnesse sense texture and from the variety of the Organs From the site they are called Right Transuerse and Oblique for if they run lengthwise then they are called The differences of fibres Right fibres If they run according to the breadth and intersect or cut the right then are they called TraÌ„suerse or round and circular fibres If they haue a middle situation and intersect both the right and the transuerse at vnequal angles then are they called Oblique fibres The office of the right fibres is to draw the office of the transuerse to expell and that of the oblique to retaine If the right fibres worke alone then the length of the part is shortned and attraction made if onely the transuerse bee contracted then the latitude or breadth is diminished and expulsion made but if all the fibres together the right the oblique and the transuerse be intended then the whole part is contracted and retention made which also they call Amplexation Retention therfore is made not when any one kind of fiber doth worke but when all are in action together for so when we would firmely retaine any thing in our hands we compasse iâ— about on euery side yet the oblique fibres are said peculiarly to retaine because when they are contracted How Retention is made they do onely imbrace for they compasse the part on euery side constringing and closing together the particles thereof but the right and the transuerse fibres when they are contracted do not only serue for retentioÌ„ but these for expulsion those for traction The second difference of fibres may be taken from the hardnes for some are hard strong as those of the heart for the feruent force of the inbred heat did require so much as also the perpetuall agitation of his necessary motion others are softer as the fibres of The second difference muscles The third difference is taken from their sense Of fibres some are sensible as those which arise from nerues Others insensible as those that proceede from the ligaments of The third bones If you regard the texture of fibres some are so permixed that they make a continuall body so true membranes haue their fibres yea they are nothing else but fibres conioyned one within another Others are separated from the substance of the part and haue another vse beside the vse of the part and these are eyther simple as in the muscles for all The fourth the muscles excepting a very few haue but one kind of fibres eyther right or transuerse or oblique or manifold and so wouen together that no arte is able to make separation between them So the flesh of the heart is wouen with al 3 kinds of fibres in the naturall organs which serue for natural motion if the part haue one proper coat as a veyne the womb the two bladders then in that coat are al the fibres placed but if it haue two coats one external the How the fibres are placed in the Necturall organs the other internal then are the transuerse fibres placed in the external coat the right â—â— oblique in the internal From this general rule you must except the guts and the arteries because the guts do serue for distribution and excretion and the arteries for the expurgation of the heart Now nature is more carefull for the expulsion of that which is hurtfull then for the traction of that which is profitable The last difference The last difference of fibres is taken from the variety of Organs some serue the animall Organs as the muscles the nerues the ligaments and the tendons others serue the vitall as the heart and the arteries others the naturall as the Gullet the Stomacke the Guts the Bladders the wombe and the veynes But what euery one of these fibres in their seuerall courses doe performe and how they are disposed in the parts we haue declared before in the particular history of euery part And thus much concerning the fibres Now we proceede vnto our last taske of the Bones The end of the Twelfth Booke THE THIRTENTH BOOKE Of the Bones The Praeface A Ship that hath bene long at Sea discouered many strange Continents and Riuers strugled through many hiddeous tempests escaped many Rockes and Quicke-sands though she hath made no rich Returne yet when she commeth within ken of her owne Countrey and sees the Land lye faire before her If thou canst imagine Gentle Reader how sodainly she forgetteth her irkesome Trauell thinke also how well apaid I am that I am come within view of the end of this my Tedious Voyage For I also haue trauelled about a Worlde and that for thy behoofe In my Iourney if I haue not made many new Discoueries yet certainely I haue sounded the Depths more truely Entered farther into the Continents Coasted the Shores plyed vp the Frythes Discouered the Inhabitants their Qualities Tempers Regiment of Life their Diet their Apparrell their Imployments And in a worde I haue made it easie for thee to reape the profit of many mens Labors and of mine Owne Yet thou must Vnderstand this but as a Letter of Aduertisement from the Coast I haue not yet brought my Barke about Many haue shunned Scylla and Charibdis and haue miscarried euen in the Mouth of the Hauen where there are more Rockes then in the Maine Many Reaches which we must haue diuers windes to fetch and therefore thou must haue Patience if wee make not so fresh a Way but bee constrained to winde in by Bourds and in the meane time forget not Thou to follow vs with thy Vowes For this Shore is buttrest with Rockes on euery hand the Currants swift the Shallowes many To breake off our Metaphor The History of the Bones is a busie piece of Worke their Articulations and Compositions many dissolute and laxe many strict and close Their Coalitions hard to be discerned harder to be expressed Their Perforations Cauities Bosomes Appendancies Prominences and Processes difficult to distinguish Now therefore if at any time I stand in neede of thy patience Gentle Reader for my Stile heere must be abrupt and broken hard and harsh of necessity according to my Argument If thou canst finde Profit loooke not for Pleasure and if thou finde it hard to Reape in this vnequall Field remember hee had something to do that brake vp the Swarth and sowed it for thee CHAP. I. Of the definition and differences of Bones THE Bones saith Hipocrates 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is doe giue to
the Bookes of vulgar Diuinity and the Doctors and teachers of Diuine wisedome How profitable Anatomy is to Philosophers and in a manner to all Artificers and Handy-crafts men CHAP. VII THese two fruites of Anatomy as they are abundantly beneficiall and profitable so they seeme to be common to all in general first the knowledge of our owne Nature and then of the inuisible God There are also other benefites and commodities of Anatomy proper and peculiar to Poets Painters yea and to the most part of handy-crafts men and Artificers to teach them the better to bring their Arts to perfection And first Galen dooth account Anatomy verie Anatomy verie profitable for a naturall Philosopher proper to a naturall Philosopher though it were but onely for speculation sake or otherwise to teach him the singular workemanship of Nature in euery particular part For inasmuch as the proper and proportionable subiect of his art is a body Naturall and the body of Man is as it were the square and rule of all other bodies he ought not nor cannot be truly accounted a Naturall Philosopher who is ignorant of the historie of Mans body and for this cause that most excellent Genius and interpreter of Nature Aristotle wrote those elegant and eloquent Books of the History of the parts and of the generation of liuing Aristotle creatures Anatomy is also very profitable for a morall Philosopher for hee shall Anatomie is profitable for a morall Philosopher easily learne by the mutuall offices and duties of euery part and by the constitution of the Naturall houshold gouernment appearing in our bodies how to temper and order the manners and conditions of the minde how to rule and gouern a Commonwealth or Citie and how to direct a priuate house or family I spare to speake how profitable it is for Poets and Painters for the perfection of their Art and Science for euen Homer himselfe hath written many things and those verie excellent Profitable for Poets painters Homer concerning Anatomy But my purpose is onely to shew that for a Physition a naturall Philosopher a Chirurgion and an Apothecary it is not onely profitable but euen also absolutely necessary Wherein is demonstrated that Anatomy is not onely profitable but of absolute necessitie for Physitions and Chirurgions CHAP. VIII AS Geographie is worthily accounted a great euidence for the credite of an History so to them that any way appertaine to the art of Physicke the knowledge of mans body seemeth to be very necessary 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 For the Nature of the body is the first thing to be spoken of in the Art of Physicke Againe Hippocrates in his Booke de Flatibus maketh but one Idea of all diseases It is onely the variety Hip. de locis in homine Hip. de flatibus difference of places that maketh the difference of diseases Hee therefore that will be ignorant of the Historie of the parts of Mans bodie he shall ill distinguish and discerne the affections of the same worse cure them and worst of all foretell who are likely to recouer and escape and who not The discerning and iudging of a disease consisteth in two things namely the knowledge How necessary the knowledge of the parts is to the discerning of diseases of the euil affect the knowledge of the part so affected The signs of the part affected are drawne and deriued from many Fountaines as it were but especially from the scituation and from the action empaired For hee that knoweth the action of the stomacke to be concoction if the concoction be empaired he may easily discerne that the stomacke is ill affected He that knoweth the Liuer to bee placed on the right side of the paunch if the right hypochondrium or side before or do swell hee will presentlie affirme that the Liuer and not the spleene is ill affected Now this scituation as also the actions of all the parts are taught and demonstrated vnto vs by anatomy onely For Prognosis or prediction of the euent of diseases Hippocrates maketh three chiefe and maine heads of it Those things that are auoyded the action impaired and the habite of the body Anatomy necessarie for Prognosis or praediction Galen in the colour figure and magnitude or quantity all which are discerned onely by Anatomy Now how much the knowledge of the seuerall parts of the bodie auayleth towardes the curing of diseases Galen hath verie well expressed in the beginning of his Booke de Ossibus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 saith hee 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is All things that concerne the action of healing haue that for their scope or direction which is naturally disposed or in a Necessary for curation Hippocrates good and lawdable constitution Hippocrates in his Booke de officina Medici giueth this rule That the Physition should first looke into those thinges that are alike one to another and then to those things that are vnlike insinuating thereby that he that knowes the perfect Sanitie or health of euery part shall easily discerne if it fall from that perfection by the perfection which remaineth in other like parts not tainted Aristotle in his first Booke de Anima vsurpeth a rule of Geometry That which is straite and right saith he doth not onely measure it selfe but bewrayeth that which is oblique or crooked In like manner how shal a Physition restore or set right bones that are broken or out of ioynt if hee be ignorant of their naturall place figure and articulation The exquisite method of healing cannot bee performed but by indications and indications are not onely deriued from the disease but also from the part affected and the remedies must bee changed and altered according to the diuers and seuerall nature temperature scituation connexion and sence of the part Neither is Anatomy needefull onely for the Physition but euen also for the Chirurgion and Apothecary The knowledge of the outward parts as the Muscles the nerues the Anatomy necessarie for a Chirurgion veines and arteries is most necessary for a Chirurgion for feare least in his dissections launcings he should mistake a broad Ligament for a Membrane and around Ligament for a Nerue or sinnew least he should diuide an arterie in stead of a veine for he that is ignorant of these things shall euermore be in doubt in things safe and secure still fearefull and in things that are to be feared he will be most secure and audacious Anatomy profitable for an Apothecarie An Apothecarie also shall finde it very needful for him to vnderstand the scite and figure of the parts for the better applying of such remedies as shall bee requisite For hee must apply his Topicall and locall medicines fomentations oyntments or Liniments and Emplaisters in their apt and proper places as if the Liuer be ill affected on the right side if the Spleene be ill on the left side if the wombe or bladder be diseased then vpon the hypograstium or
water-course betweene the nauell and the priuie parts if the heart be ill affected then on the left brest must the remedies bee applied Hee must also make his plaister or other remedy of the same figure that the part affected is of least the parts adioining be couered therewithall Profitable for the vnderstanding of the writings of the Ancients I forbeare to speake how profitable and necessary it is for the explaining of the writings of Hippocrates Galen and all the ancient Physitions For in them there are many passages darke and obscure whereunto the knowledge of Anatomy will giue a great light and splendor and therefore in old time Physitions were woont to propound vnto their young Schollers the precepts of Anatomy as the first rudiments and principles of the art of Physicke and Chirurgery With what Method Anatomy may be best taught and demonstrated CHAP. IX SEeing then the profite and necessity of Anatomy is such and so great I would perswade all Students in our art especially and in Chirurgerie that they woulde very heedefully and diligently employ themselues in the studie of the same neither shall they neede to be deterred or affrighted with the difficulty for it is very easie and feasible if it be laide downe in a good order and Method otherwise the most easie and obuious art prooues harde and obscure The Method therefore of learning and teaching Anatomy is on this manner The Art of Anatomy as I suppose may bee attained two wayes by Inspection which Anatomy to be attained two wayes by Inspection by Instructiō we call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and by Instruction and both these wayes are very necessary if the perfection of the art be desired but the first is the more certaine the latter carrieth with it greater grace and state the former may be called the way of Historie or the historicall way the latter the way of Science or the artificiall way The first which is Inspection is either of figures depainted or carued and printed on Tables onely or of the bodies themselues of Men or Beastes of Men onely when they are dead of beastes both dead and liuing for the better obseruing of the diuers and obscure motions of the inward parts In like manner the way of Doctrine or Science is double One by the writinges of most famous and renowned men another by the liuing voyce of a Teacher or Instructer The Inspection of Figures some haue disallowed because they are bare shadowes Galen disallowed pictures of Plants and Anatomy which in their opinion doe rather hinder then further young Students For if Galen would not haue Plants and Hearbes painted or desciphered no nor so much as described but taught and deliuered by hand onely how would hee haue endured the delineation of the parts of our body But I am not altogether of that opinion to thinke these pictures vaine and ydle because I see euerie day represented vnto mine eyes by these Pictures manie things and those oftentimes of great consequence which were vnknowne to the skilfullest artists The benefites of pictures Geometricians are Anatomistes of the Great World of former ages Neyther do the Geometricians and Geographers who are but the Anatomists of the Great world as we are of the little despise those demonstrations which in Cards Maps they receiue one from another Again it is not alwaies or in each place easie to find obtain such store of humane carkasses and therfore that want is well supplied by a curious draught or delineation of such obseruations as are made in true dissections by cunning artists that so both the memory of those that were present may be refricated and refreshed and such as were absent made also partakers of their labors yet for all A Caution this I do not thinke it fit to trust too much to these silent shadowes For as it is not possible to make a good Commander or a skilfull Pilot by any typicall or representatiue army fortification or water carde but onely by practise and experience so it is a very vaine Comparison thing to take in hand to learne Anatomy by the bare inspection of figures without practise vpon the body it selfe and because our art concerneth the cure not of Beastes but of Men we must therefore exercise our selues chiefly in the anatomy of the bodie of Man and that not aliue but dead I am not ignorant that some of the ancient Physitians as Herophilus and Erasistratus by the License of Princes whom they had possessed with the profit thereof did anatomize Who vsed to butcher men aliue the bodies of condemned wretches euen whilst they were aliue which also in our age hath beene done by Carpus and Vesalius But for mine owne part I hold it a very friuolous and vaine thing beside the horror and inhumanity of the fact which almost no necessitie The cutting vp of man aliue is not only inhumane but also of no profit or vse Obiection Answere can sufficiently warrant For liuing dissections as wee call them are then put in vse when we would finde out some action or vse of a part which by the dead carkas cannot bee discerned now all those we may find aswel in Beasts as in Men. If it be obiected that there is some difference betweene the actions of men and of beasts especially the animall and that the organ of voluntarie motion to wit the Muscles are not alike in both kindes I answer that for the discerning of actions that belong to motion and sence ther is no need of dissection for they are almost all of them apparent to the sences onely the motions of the hidden and secret parts as not being subiected to sence must be sought out by dissection Now of those hidden motions that of the heart and arteries the midriffe the brain and the guts which are of greatest consequence are all one in men and in beasts wherefore it is not anatomy but butchery to mangle the trembling members of mans body and vnder I know not what slender and idle pretence of profit or behoofe to violate the sacred Law of nature and of religion The ancient Physitians were not allowd to cut vp dead carkasses of men as we now vse disection but it was held a verie impious prophane thing how abhominable then is it sauoring of Caniball barbarisme because we would make a nearer cut to our vnderstanding by our eyes then by the discourse and labor of our minds to gather knowledge by the dissection or rather butchery of liuing men if there were any vse of it as we haue shewed that there is none Let vs therfore content our selues and giue due thanks vnto our State by whose Lawes we are allowed dead bodies for dissection euery yeare a competent number and if there be any where want of such wee may haue resort to the bodies of Beastes and make dissection of them both aliue and dead aliue more sparingly albeit by anatomy of liuing bodies
other both Greeks and Arabians but they bring for confirmation of their opinion no necessary arguments but such onely as are probable shadowed ouer with a veile of truth It is more honourable say they and monarchical that there should be one principle The arguments of the Peripateticks The first then many and that the very name of a principle doeth necessarily import so much For if the soule of the Creature be but one in number and that indiuisible then must the bodye likewise of it bee either one whole or at least haue some one principall part for essences must not be multiplied without necessity And as in the great vniuerse which we behold there is one Principle which Aristotle in his eighth booke of his Physicks calleth Primum mouens and Primus motor that is the First mouer 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Ti 's naught to haue moe Kings then one Let him that raygnes raygne King alone So in the Microcosme or Little world there must be but one principle one prince which The dignity of the heart is the Heart whose excellencie and dignity aboue the rest of the partes these things doe cleerely demonstrate First because it first liueth and dyeth the last and therefore is the originall of life and the seat of the soule Next because it endureth no notable disease but yeildeth presently to Nature if it be afflicted Againe because it obtaineth the most honourable place that is the middle of the body Fourthly for that by his perpetuall motion all thinges are exhilerated and doe flourish and nothing in the whole Creature is fruitfull vnlesse the powerfull vigour of the Heart do giue foecundity vnto it There say they is the mansion and Tribunall of the soule where heate is to be found the first instrument of all the functions but the Heart is the springing fountaine of Natiue heate which by the arteries as it were by small riuerers is deriued into the whole bodie Moreouer The second the seate of the faculties is there where the Organs of the same faculties doe appeare but all the veines arteries sinewes doe arise out of the Heart For the arteries no man euer made doubt The veines doe surely arise thence where their end and termination doeth The third The heart the original of the veines appeare but that is about the Heart for the implantation of the great arterie and the hollow veine are alike Beside all the veines are continuated with the heart to it are they fixed where they also haue membranes set like dores vnto them which seeme to bee the beginnings and heads of the veines but through the Liuer they are onely disseminated and The heart the original of the sinewes Aristotle the rest of the entralles they make a passage through and so end into haire strings Aristotle also is of opinion that the hart is the originall of the nerues for his flesh is hard thight and somewhat membranous but the ventricles thereof haue in them infinite textures of manifest sinewes Finally the Heart is the first 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the first 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the first 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The 4. argument The heart the first store-house of bloud that is Sanguifier Liuer Mouer Sensator That it is the first Sanguifier or the work-house wherein the bloud is made the Philosopher demonstrateth because in it the bloud is contained as in a vessell or conceptacle and receptacle whereas in the Liuer it remayneth but as in a pipe or conuayance and beside no where in the whole body is the bloud contained out of his vessels saue only in the Heart which therefore is the Treasurie thereof and therefore in all sudden passions of the minde it returneth and flyeth to the heart as to his fountaine not to the Liuer or to the Braine That it is primum sensorium the first sensator that is that the faculties offence motion The heart the first sensator The first reason and appetite are deriued from the heart the Peripateticks proue by these arguments Because in a Syncope that is a swounding where the vital spirits faile there appeareth a sodaine and head-strong ruine and decay of all the faculties Because in all sodaine motions of noysome and hurtfull things as also when we would auoide them the heat of the heart The second being drawne inward there appeareth a pale wannesse in the face and on the contrary when we conceiue ioy for any thing that is profitable or when wee pursue such things the heate of the heart being called outward there appeareth in the countenance a ruddinesse and alacritie Because if the arteries called Carotides be tyed or obstructed then followeth The third presently a sencelesse dulnes and a priuation of the Animality if I may so speake the patient lying like a senceles stocke Because Ioy Sorrow and Hope are motions of the The fourth Heart in which consisteth all the Appetite wee haue to pursue that which we like or to flye and auoyde that we dislike and abhorre Finally because in sleepe the Animall faculties The fift doe rest and cease from their labours now sleep is nothing else but a retraction or calling backe of the heate to the heart from the other partes wherein it was in continuall expence and that is the reason why a man after sleepe is so much refreshed and riseth strong againe to the labour either of minde or body albeit in both he were well wearied yea tyred out before As for the Braine they say it cannot be the authour of sence because it is of a cold temper vnapt for motion and made only to refrigerate and coole the exceeding heat of the Heart being of it selfe without all sence These and such like are the arguments of the Peripateticks by which they perswade themselues that there is but one Principle of mans body which is the Heart But these conceits of Aristotle and the Philosophers are long since hissed out of the A consutati of the Peripateticks Schooles of the Physitians and banished from amongst them because they assume those things for true which are vtterly false and obtrude things probable as if they were necessary And what I pray you is more absurd then to preferre the probability of a Logicall argumentation before the euidence of sence reason and experience ioyned togither Nowe that the veines doe arise from the Liuer that the nerues or sinewes which are soft and medullous or marrowy within and without cloathed with membranes are deriued Demonstratiue argumēts to proue that the heart is neither the original of the veines nor of the sinewes from the substance of the Braine he that hath but one eye may clearely discerne That great Philosopher obserued in the heart many Fibrous strings in both his ventricles wouen out of the extremities of the smal membranes and mistooke them for threddy nerues whereas indeede it hath but one smal nerue arising from the sixt coniugation of the
motion And these are the arguments whereby the opinion of the Peripateticks is expulsed out of the Schoole of the Physitians Auicen Fen prima primi doctrina quinta cap. primo interpreteth Aristotles opinion playing How Auicen interpreteth Aristotle the stickler in this manner All the faculties sayth he do reside in the heart as in their first Root but yet they Shine in the other members that is the Heart is the originall of diuers faculties but vseth the Braine as the instrument of sence so that Radically that is his word the Animall faculty is in the heart but by manifestation in the braine Some againe intercede for the Peripateticks and say that the principal faculties motiue The opinion of some later writers and their diuers distinctions and sensatiue are in the heart as in their originall and fountaine That the rootes of the nerues are in the heart but because it is too narrow to yeelde out of it selfe all their propagations they think the braine was framed as a second principle wherin the animall functions might not obscurely as in the heart but euidently manifest and exhibite themselues And this power or faculty when the braine hath once receiued it from the heart standeth in no neede of continuall and immediate assistance therefrom but onely of a supply after some time Euen as the Commander of an Army who hauing receiued his authority and his company from the Prince standeth in no farther neede of the Princes protection vnlesse Comparison it be now and then vpon especiall seruices They conclude therefore that the Braine and the Liuer are truely called principall parts but this principality is but delegatory from the heart no otherwayes then the Lieutenants of Princes by them chosen for such and such imployments doe receiue from them an order and power of dispensation and disposition whereby they are authorized and so taken as if they were immediate commaunders themselues Some others vse another distinction and say that materially the nerues proceede from the Braine and the veines from the Liuer but the first and the formall principle they say is in the heart That Prince of humaine learning at least he that affected that soueraignty Iulius Caesar Scaliger in the two hundred fourescore and ninth Exercise of his booke de subtilitate Scaligers opinion maketh many principles in the Heart The first or primarie is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or the liuing the secōdarie 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or the mouing principle these do neuer cease neither are they hindred or intercepted in our sleep or repose yet are they not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 tametsi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is they are not the first Sensators though they be of or from the first Sensator Thus learned men labor to reconcile the Peripateticks the Physitians But they seem not to hold themselues close to Aristotles meaning for hee doeth not thinke that in any sence The late writers did not vnderstand Aristotle well the Braine can be sayd to bee the author or original of Sensation neither that the nerues doe arise from it No where doth he attribute any delegatory power of Sensation vnto it but thinketh it was onely made to refrigerate or coole the heat of the heart whereas notwithstanding all he can produce it is the first principle of sence and motion neither receiueth any power for the performance of either of them from the Heart And whereas the Arabians say that the Animall facultie is Radicall in the heart and but by Manifestation in the braine we can no way admit of that distinction for if that faculty The opinion of the Arabians consuted were in the heart as in the roote then when the braine is obstructed the body should not become senselesse and without motion because there should be a remainder both of sense and motion in the roote that is in the heart But though the heart bee obstructed or the passages intercepted between it and the braine yet there followeth not any sodaine priuation of sence and motion Instances hereof wee haue in Sacrifices where the Beast sometimes Sacrifices run from the altar without their heart hath beene heard to cry and sometimes also seene to runne a little way after his heart hath beene cut out and we haue seene the same tryed in a Dogge which ran crying a while after his heart was cut out the vessels arising from it vpward being before bound Galen in his first booke de Placitis illustrateth the whole matter by an elegant demonstration Galens elegāt demonstratiō If the Heart sayth he did giue vnto the Braine the Animall faculty then should that power be deriued either by veines arteries or sinewes for there are no other vessels which goe betweene them and are common to them both By veines or arteries Aristotle himselfe doth not thinke it is conuayed beside these vessels do not directly passe vnto the Braine but after diuers contorsions and aberrations from a right direct progresse That it is not deriued by or through the nerues is manifest because if the nerue which is disseminated through the substance of the Heart be either diuided and cut asunder or intercepted yet the Creature doth not presently fall but onely groweth mute and dumbe It is therefore more consonant to right reason that seeing the soule is but one and a The conclusion of the whole disputation simple substance and wholly in the whole and wholy in euery particle of the body and therefore must necessarily haue the helpe of Organs for the accomplishing of her seuerall functions to assigne the seate of the faculty there where the Organs of those faculties are especially to be discerned Wherefore seeing the Peripateticks doe confesse that the Organs of sence and motion are more conspicuous in the Braine then in the heart why will they not yeeld to the Physitian that the Animall faculty is in the braine the Vitall in the Heart and the Naturall in the Liuer but make all the worlde witnesses of their refractarie mindes then which in a true Philosopher nothing is more illiberall Howsoeuer to conclude we subscribe to the opinion of the Physitians who haue banished this Vnitie of Principles out of their Schooles QVEST. III. How many principall parts there are BY those things which we haue thus at large discoursed it is manifest to all men that there is not one but many principall parts of mans body it remaineth that we shew you now how many there are The number wee cannot better aportion then from the nature and definition of a Principle First therefore we must make it appeare because Physitians heerein doe not agree what a principall part is Galen in his Booke de vsu partium defineth this principality by Necessity That is a What a principall part is Galen Principall part which is of absolute necessity for the life of Man I will shew you saith he by what markes you shall know a principall part to wit
Creature could haue moued locally to gather his phantasmes out of diuers obiects as the Bee flyeth from one flower to another to gather hony and therefore Nature ordained the organs or instruments of motion the muscles the tendons and the nerues These vnlesse wee should haue crawled vppon the earth like wormes did necessarily require props and supporters to confirme and establish them whereupon the bones and the gristles were ordained and ligaments also to knit and swathe them together now all of them stand in neede of perpetuall influence of heate to quicken them and of nourishment to sustaine them both which are supplied the former from the Heart by the arteries the latter from the Liuer by the veines so that truth to say there was no other end of the Creation of all the parts and powers of the body but onely for the vse and behoofe of the Braine It will be obiected that the braine cannot accomplish his functions without the spirits of the heart and the influence of his heate I answere that that is an inuincible argument Obiection Answere of the soueraignty of the Brain for the end for which a thing is ordained is more noble then the thing ordained for that end the life therefore and the heart are but handmaids to the Braine We will adde also this argument which happely will seeme not incompetent The Braine giueth figure vnto the whole body for the head was made onely for the Brayne how Hippocrates sayth that the nature of all the rest of the bones dependeth vpon Hippocrates the magnitude of the head not that all the bones deriue their originall from the head but because it behooued that they should bee all proportionably answerable to the bones to which they are articulated as the legges to the thighes the thighes to the haunches the haunches to the holy bone the holy bone to the spondles or racke bones the racke bones to the marrow of the backe and that to the braine For satisfaction to the arguments before vrged by the Peripatetians and the Stoicks we say That the Etymon or deriuation of the name of the heart is but friuolous not worthy The former arguments of the Peripateticks Stoicks answered the standing vpon For the scite of the heart in the middest it doeth weigh tantundem as much as nothing neither indeede is the ground of it true for of the whole body the nauel is the Center and for the trunke or bulke who euer said that was an Anatomist the heart was in the middest of it But if wee will draw an argument of dignity from the scituation The argument retorted then will the true superiority fall to the Braine because it is placed vppermost as the fire aboue the inferiour elements the highest heauen the seate of the blessed soules aboue the subiected orbes for to be placed aboue is high superiority and praeeminence to be thrust downe below betokeneth base subiection and inferiority As for that place of Hippocrates Exposition of Hippocrates where he placeth the soule in the left ventricle of the heart either he speaketh to the capacity of the vulgar or else by the soule he meaneth the heate as happely wee shall haue more occasion to shew hereafter We conclude therefore that of the principall parts the first place belongeth to the Braine the next to the Heart the last to the Liuer Againe in the Oeconomie or order of the parts this rule is obserued that those which are first in order A rule in the disposition of the parts of nature are last in dignity and excellencie so the Infant first liueth the life of a plant then like a beast it mooueth and becommeth sensible finally it receiueth it's perfection when it is indued with the reasonable soule as hauing then the last hand and consummation from the Creator when he setteth his stampe or image vpon it Galen in the last Chapter of the seauenth booke of his Method compareth the dignity and necessity of the three principall parts one with another in these wordes The dignity Galen of the Heart is very great and in sicke patients his action and the strength of it of absolute necessity A conference of the dignity necessity of the principal parts the Brayne is of equall moment for the preseruation of life yet the strength of his actions is not so immediately necessary in those that are diseased for their recouery the action of the Liuer is as necessary as eyther of them for the maintenance of the particular parts but yet for present immediate sustentation of life it is not so instantly necessary as both the former To conclude this question there is a threefold principle one of Beginning another of Dignity a third of Necessity The parenchyma or flesh of the Liuer is the originall principle the Braine is The decision of the whole question A three fold principle Comparison the most noble principle and the Heart of most necessity yet they all haue such a mutuall connexion and conspiration that each needeth others assistance and if one of them decay the rest doe forthwith perish Euen as in a wel gouerned Citty or Common-wealth there is a wise Senate to guide it a stout and valorous strength of souldiours to defend and redeeme it and an infinite multiplicity of trades and occupations to maintaine and support it all which though they be distinguished in offices and place doe yet consent in one and conspire together for their mutuall preseruation And this conspiration Galen expresseth Galen to the life in his booke deformatione foetus and the fift chap. thus When the Heart is depriued The mutual conspiration of the principal parts of respiration it ceaseth to moue immediately death ensueth now it is depriued of respiration when the nerues which come from the Brayne are either cut or obstructed or intercepted As therefore the Heart needeth the helpe of the Braine and being forsaken by it maketh a diuorce betweene the soule and the body so it also maketh retribution to the Brain supplying it with spirits of life out of which the Animall spirits of the Braine are extracted and the Liuer though it lye below yet it yeeldeth matter to them both wherof and whereby their spirits are made and sustained But against this doctrine of the consent of these principall parts there is a notable place of Galens in the fourth chapter of his second booke de placitis which needeth to bee cleared Obiection Galen before we fall from this discourse for hee sayeth As Pulsation and voluntary motion belong to diuers kindes of motion so neyther of those principles needeth the helpe one of another Which place we interpret thus that the hart doth not transmit the Animal faculty to the A hard place in Galen expounded braine nor the braine the faculty of Pulsation to the heart because the temper and formes of the faculties are diuers and therefore the heart conferreth nothing to
is to moysten and supple the hotte and drie parts as the Heart to make the motion more glib and agile The vses of Adeps and to keepe the ioynts of the greater bones and the out-side of some Ligaments from being exiccated as also the ends of the gristles Of the fleshy Membrane CHAP. VIII THe fleshy Membrane first so called by the Arabians or Pannicle called Panniculus Carnosus in Greeke 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is onely fleshy among all the The fleshy membrane membranes and that especially in Beastes Galen calles it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is a membrane some call it the musculous Membrane because in those creatures which mooue their whole skinne it is so sprinkled with fleshy Fibres that it seemes indeed to be a muscle The Third and Fourths Table shew the Skin-Veines which are opened and scarified the third those on the Fore-side the fourth those on the Backe-side which Veines are for the most parts alike in euery body especially those that vse to be opened TABVLA 3. TABVLA 4. This Membranous part as all other Membranes is made of seede In a Man it is vnder The connexion of it the fat but in Apes Dogges Sheepe and such like it lyeth immediately vnder the skin It compasseth the whole body and closely cleaueth to the skin by the mediation of manie Veynes but fewer Nerues and Arteries diuersly propagated and through it climbing vp thither whereto also helpe the addition of fleshy Fibres It cleaueth also to the Membranes of the Muscles vnder it but by more slender Fibres It is saide by some to haue his Originall from the backe because it cleaueth thereto most inseparably and there resembleth the other Membranes but where it toucheth the arme holes it becommeth in dogs and Apes very fleshy Galen saith musculous In Infants it resembleth Flesh altogether because of the aboundance of blood wherein it is steeped in grown bodies by reason of continuall exiccation it becommeth like a membrane Gal. 1. Admin 5. eiusdem 7. yet so that in the fore-part of the necke and in the forehead it cleaueth to it so fast with his fleshy Fibres that it can â—neath be separated and to the broad Muscle that it is thought to giue him his body It is in a man except the forehead immooueable in beasts it is not onely mooueable it selfe but also maketh the skinne mooueable especially in the necke by shaking whereof they driue away the Flies but a horse in shaking of his skin will Where it is mooueable in Men. sometime shake an vnskilfull rider out of his seate In the inner part which is next to the membrane of the Muscles this fleshy panicle by reason of a slimy moisture wherewith almost all Membranes are couered it is slippery that it may not hinder the motion of the In Beasts Muscles and it hath an exquisite sense so that if it be goaded by any sharpe humor it causeth a rigor or shiuering The vses of this Membrane are To compasse the whole bodie The vses of it to couer and defend it To hinder the fat from being melted by the continuall motion of the Muscles It supporteth also saith Galen 3. Amintstrat Anat. 2. the vessels which attaine vnto the skin because there passe betweene it and this Membrane not onely many Capillarie Galen and threddy Veines but also those which wee vse to diuide in bloud-letting together with many Arteries and Sinnewes Finally it helpeth to consolidate or heale vp the skin when it is wounded or otherwise violated for without flesh it cannot revnite so saith Aristotle in his third Booke de Historia Animalium 11. Wheresoeuer the skin is without Flesh Aristotle there it cannot revnite being diuided In brute Beasts the thickenesse and fastnesse of this Membrane reteyneth the bloody vapors and turneth them into good blood and besides it maketh their skins mooueable And thus much of the Common Containing or Investing parts But because we made mention euen now of the Veines which run betweene the skin the fleshy Membrane which are vsually many of them opened in Phlebotomy and for that young Chirurgions had neede be betimes acquainted with them we haue on the former side of the leafe added two Tables and their expositions at large by which hee that listeth may in one view see all the branches of the skin veines how they are seated and beside learne to call them by their names that when he is commanded he may know how to buckle himselfe to his businesse CHAP. IX Of the Investing or Containing parts proper to the lower Belly THe proper containing partes whereby the Lower Belly is invested are the Muscles of the Abdomen or Paunch and the Peritonaeum or 8. Muscles of the paunch Rim of the belly The Muscles are in all Bodies alwaies eight foure on eyther side matched equally in Figure Magnitude Strength and Action Of these there are foure Oblique two Right two Transuerse all of them haue these appellations from the scituation and the texture of their Fibres In Dissection the Oblique external paire do first offer themselues which are the broadest of all the rest Next follow the Oblique internall the Anatomists do vsually call the former oblique descendents the latter oblique ascendents but how properly or improperly wee shall shew heereafter Next to these follow the two Right Muscles in whose inward parts do appeare those veines ascending and descending which conioyne about the Nauill Vnder all these lye the two Tranuerse Muscles Two other Muscles lately found out There are also in some Bodies two other smal muscles called succenturiati assisters or Piramidales that is the spiry Muscles The History of all these Muscles as also the Controuersies and diuerse opinions concerning them we will at large prosecute in our Booke of Muscles whither for satisfaction we referre the Reader Next vnder these lyeth the Peritonaeum or rim of the belly a thin Membrane like vnto Peritonaeum or rim of the belly a Spiders web which enwrappeth all the inward parts in this venter conteined Towardes the bladder especially it is euidently duplicated betwixt which duplication those vessels which the ancients cal Vasa vmbilicalia the Nauill vessels are caried Of al which if followeth The vmbilical vessels now that we snould intreat beginning with the Peritonaeum CHAP. X. Of the Peritonaeum or rim of the belly THE Muscles of the Abdomen and their Tendons being remooued we meet The rim of the bellie or Peritonaeum with a Membrane ingirting the whole cauity of the lower belly which they call the peritonaeum Immitating heerein Hippocrates and Galen who giue it that name because it compasseth all those parts which lye between the Midriffe 7. Epidem 6 admin An. 4. and the Thighes Or because it firmeth or strengthneth all the viscera or entrailes that it conteineth The Arabians call it Ziphachi as they call all other Membranes and particularly Charmel others call
mitigation it gathereth still to the center afterwarde nature hauing gotten the victory she driueth it as farre from her as is possible euen to the skin as we see it falleth out in Criticall sweats in the Meazels small Pocks and such like Now if the putred excrement haue no disposition to the Circūference in liuing bodies when the secret passages of the body are open the skin porous the faculties euery where at work how shal it passe that way after those passages and pores are falne the habit forsaken of the spirit the trāspirable wayes locked vp vnder the seale of death It seemeth therfore more reasonable to thinke that the matter of the haires which is added after death was a surplusage of the last concoction celebrated in the habit of the body and remaining in the extremities of the vessels which determine in the skin which being in that place intercepted by the extinction of naturall heate and hauing no spirits to guide it backward yet hauing before attained the perfection which the faculty could impart vnto it worketh it selfe a way through the skin But this knot will easily bee vntied if we consider that after death the Answere haires do not grow or encrease in any place of the body but onely in such as wherein there were haires standing in the time of life to the roots whereof as I saide before the heat proceeding from putrifaction is sufficient to driue though not any humor yet a vapor which may passe where the way was before thrilled and bored but cannot where the skinne was not notably perforated Againe there is a double limit beyond which the excrescence of the Haire dooth not proceede For if either the confluence of the vapour to those pores make a dampe as in processe of time it will or the putrifaction of the vapour grow to a Venom then the Haires cease to encrease but fall not so soon in dead carkasses as in liuing men because the aire exiccateth and drieth the skin wherein the roots are fastned but in those that are aliue whose skin is open they fall not vpon a dampe for there can be no such thing in a liuing body but vpon a confluence of a venemous vapor as we see in the French disease and the Leprosie And so much of the Haires Whether the Skin be the Organ or instrument of touching QVEST. II. THE Philosophers and Physitians striue about the instrument of The Peripatecians arguments touching Aristotle and Alexander call flesh sometimes the medium or meane through which wee feele sometimes the Organ or instrument of feeling it selfe but neuer the Skinne First because the Skin is of it selfe insensible and sensible only by reason of the flesh For the skinne of the head which is without flesh say they is insensible Secondly because flesh bared or exposed to the ayre is more paynfull then the skin Thirdly because there is a more exquisite and discerning sence in the flesh then in the skin For that Iewellers and Lapidaries doe more accurately discern the differences of roughnesse and smoothnes and such touchable qualities by the toung then by the hand and are able to distinguish betweene natural and fictitious precious Stones only by the touch of the tongue Lastly because it is a rule in An axiome Philosophy that the sensible subiect beeing placed immediately vppon the instrument of sense is not sensible but such sensible subiects placed immediatly vpon the skinne are felt therefore the skin is not the instrument of touching To these may be added the authority of Auicen who writeth that the skinne feeleth not Auicen Fen. 1. cap. Doctr. 4. cap. 1. equall bodies or obiects if it feeleth not equall obiects then is it not the proper organ or instrument of touching because euery instrument of sence which the Greciās cal 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 apprehendes both extreme also middle obiects so the eie seeth both the extreme colours which are blacke and white and also al middle colours made of their mixture whether they contain lesse or more of either of the extreames On the other side the Physitians affirm The Physitians opinion Their arguments taken from the temper of the skin the skinne to bee the instrument of touching which will appeare to be the probable and likely opinion whether we consider the temper the structure or the scituation of the skin For the temper the skinne is the most temperate of all the partes in the very midst of the extreames and is as it were the canon or rule of them all and therefore can giue a more perfect iudgement of the tactible qualities Aristotle hath determined that euery 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or instrument of sence should be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 2. de Animal Why Iaundy eyes think all things yellow that is deuoyde of all qualities whereby that sence is affected So the Christaline humour which receiueth the Images and spectres of visible thinges is deuoide of all colours the yellow eyes of those that are full of the Iaundise imagine all things to be yellow If the tongue be moystned with choller all things though sweet haue a bitter tange in the nose there is no particular and peculiar sent no sound naturally residing in the eare right so the skin which hath no excesse of qualities is to bee esteemed the organ or instrument of touching If we consider the structure of the skinne there are moe nerues disseminated into it then into the flesh but the nerues are the common conuayers of all sensible spirits which they continually minister vnto the sences whereby their operations are perpetuated And for The structure of the skin The scituation of the skin the scituation of the skinne it is much more commodious then that of the flesh because it is nearer to the occursation or confluence of outward obiects because it is the limit and border as it were of all the parts The skin therefore is rather the instrument or organ of touching then the flesh As for the forenamed obiections of the Peripatecians they are easily Answers to the Peripatecians arguments The first answered for first we deny that the skin feeleth by helpe of the flesh I instance thus cut a nerue which endeth into the flesh presently the motion will cease but the sence of the skin will remaine but if a nerue be cut which passeth vnto the skin presently the sence it selfe will be abolished Againe true it is that flesh when it is bared is more sensible and The second painfull then the skinne but the reason of that is because it is looser and lesse accustomed to outward iniuries of the ayre or ought else whereas the skinne is so accustomed to the ayre that it feeleth it not So the teeth being vsually opposed to the ayre are not affected therewith but other bones if they be bared doe presently putrifie To proceed the tong hath a more exquisite apprehension of the coldnesse and inequality of precious stones
exolution or fainting away of the appetitiue Faculty On the contrary in the Dogge-appetite there is no Inanition or emptinesse of the parts but an exquisite sense of suction by reason of a coole and sowre humor there impacted The cause of the dog appetite and it is cured Theorexi that is by drinking of wine as Hippocrates witnesseth Hence therefore it is manifest that the animall appetite is stirred vp in the mouth of the stomack Hippocrates Apho. 21 sect 2 Hippocrates which is endued with so exquisite sense that it is called the Organ or instrument of touching by Hippocrates in his Booke of the Instruments of smelling There remaineth yet one scruple how the appetitiue faculty standing in reference to the sensitiue should haue his seate in the mouth of the stomacke seeing it is of al hands determined Obiection that the seate of all the animall faculties is in the braine The answere is easie and at hand to wit that the faculty it selfe is in the braine but the worke efficacy and action thereof in the stomacke So the faculty of seeing is in the braine but the sight is accomplished Answere in the eye The moouing Faculty is likewise in the braine yet is the Muscle the immediate organ of voluntary motion If any man obiect that the Liuer is the seate of the appetetiue faculty wee answere that Obiect the appetite residing in it is concupiscible and without sence and not sensitiue at all But we must not there forget that though this appetite of the stomacke bee with sence yet it is Answere not ioyned with knowledge or discretion Caution QVEST. IX Of the scituation and consent of the vppermost mouth of the stomacke THE difference or controuersie concerning the scite of this Orifice is neither light nor vnprofitable because the resolution thereof stinteth the strife among the Physitians concerning the application of Topicall or locall medicines All men doe agree that it inclineth rather to the left hand then to the right but the question is whether it bee nearer the spine of the backe or the gristle and blade of the breast Some thinke that Nature framed this gristle to be a defence for it and for no other cause The scite of the vpper orifice and therefore hath placed it there-under for say they those that vomit or reach for it doe finde a paine at this gristle and none at the spine or racke of the backe And Hippocrates conceiueth that the extuberation or distention of the stomacke at the orifice is not backeward but forward whereas he sayth That the repletion of the stomacke is a direction for broken ribbes Wee with Galen doe assigne the place of this orifice to bee in the left part toward Hippocrates Lib. de articulâ—s sect 3. the spine not that it lyeth or resteth vpon it as the gullet doeth but because it commeth nearer to the spine then to the breast-blade And therefore it is that when the gullet or the vpper orifice are affected we thinke it fit to apply locall medicines both to the back-part Where to apply local medicines and to the fore-part That that was propounded concerning the paine of them that reach to vomit and the direction for the ribbes is to be referred to the bottome and not to the vpper mouth of the stomacke for as we haue obserued the meate which wee eate is not conteyned in his mouthes or orificies but in his cauitie which wee doe not deny doeth rather leane to the breast-blade then to the spine But the reason why the breast bone is payned when the vpper orifice is affected is The reason of the paine at the breast bone when the mouth of the stomack is affected meerly Anatomicall the midriffe being tyed to the bone and the mouth of the stomacke adhaering to the large passage made in the midriffe for his conueyance thereout and therfore the breast-blade is payned by this continuity because paines are rather felt in the extreamities or ends then in the middest as is to bee seene in streatched membranes Concerning the sympathy or consent of this orifice with the heart and membranes of the brain Hippocrates and Galen are very plentifull for this mouth being affected the syncope or The consent of the mouth of the stomack with the heart and the braine sounding the exolution or fainting of the spirits and such like symptomes doe ouertake vs as when the heart it selfe suffereth violence whence this part amongst the ancients as wee sayd before is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 In wounds of the head the skull being either broken or sâ—iuered and the Dura meninx or thicker membrane of the braine exposed or layde open to the ayre which is vncouth or strange vnto it the Patient presently vomiteth yellow and Why vomitings follow the wounds of the braine Galen Aeruginous or greene choler because the stomack by reason of societie is drawne into consent and sympathizeth with the membrane as well because of the similitude and likenesse of the substance as also of the community of vessels which are the chiefe causes of consent or sympathy as Galen obserueth in his Commentaries vpon the first section of the 3. Booke of Hippocrates Epidemia QVEST. X. Whether the Chylus be made by the heat or by the forme of the Stomacke and why the stomack doth not breede foure substances and excrements as well as the Liuer THE remouing of these two obstacles and dissolution of the doubts arising in them shall neede no great curiosity the first wee will determine thus The Chylus is formed not so much by the power of the heate as by the ingenite property of the stomack True it is that all concoction is accomplished by Why the stomacke is incompassed with warme parts the help and assistance of heate and therefore Nature hath prouided that the stomacke should be cherished and comforted on euery side aboue and below on the right hand and on the left before and behinde but this concoction belongeth not to the heate as it is heate for by that reason fiery and aguish heate which corrupteth all thinges should be the cause of concoction but as it is the instrument of the soule But that which wee call chylification or making of the Chylus proceedeth alone from the forme and proprietie of the stomacke because in other parts sauing this the naturall heate though it be very strong A double reason why the stomack breedeth not 4. substances and intense yet doth not chylifie Now why the stomacke as the Liuer doeth not beget or breede foure kinds of substances there may bee a double reason assigned one from the matter another from the efficient The Efficient or working cause is naturall heate which if it be very strong it powerfully The first froÌ„ the efficient and effectually or really separateth Hetrogenia that is partes that are vnlike or of different natures But all men know that the Liuer is so much hotter then
scituation of the hart and particularly the fore-parte thereof TABVLA IX FIG I. The second Figure FIG II. The coate is proper to the heart very thin and fine Vesalius likens it to the Membrane that compasseth the Muscles this inuesteth it as that of the Muscles and so strengthneth The Coate his substance from which it cannot be seuered The fat called pinguedo with Columbus or Adeps with Galen and Aristotle or both with Archangelus is very plentifully gathered about it like Glue especially at the Basis where the greater vessels are placed because there is the concoction celebrated of those things that are conteined in it not in the Cone or point The Fatte of what kind it is This fat is harder then it is in any other part and therefore it should seeme rather to be Adeps then Pinguedo and that is Galens and Aristotles reason for if it were Pinguedo it would melt with â—â—e extreame heate of the heart to great disaduantage Howsoeuer the vse of this fat â—â—to moisten the hart least being ouer-heated with his continuall motion it should The vse of fat grow dry and exiccated but this kinde of fatty humidity is hardly consumed but remaineth to cherish it and to annoint and supple the vessels that they cleaue not with too great heate and drought Moreouer the heart being the fountaine of heate which continually flameth it serueth for a sufficient and necessary Nutriment whereby it is cherished and refreshed in great affamishment nourished and sustained least otherwise the heart should too soone depopulate and consume the radicall moysture Wherefore Galen ascribeth this vse to fat that in great heates famines violent exercises it should stand at the stake to supply the want of Nature at a pinch So sayeth Auicen Fat 's of all kindes are increased or diminished in the body according to the increase or diminution of heate wherefore heate feedeth vppon them We haue often obserued in opening of the ventricles of the heart in the very cauities of them a certaine gobbet or morsell if not of fat yet of a substance very like it so that A substance like fat obserued in the ventricles of the heart we haue more wondred how that should in such a furnace congeale then the other in the outside The cone is alwayes moystned by the humor contayned in the Pericardium The vesselles of the heart are of all kinds which doe compasse the heart round about table 9. figure 2. l and branches from these LL table 10. figure 2. D The veine is called Coronaria The veine called Coronaria or the Crowne veine arising from the trunke of the hollow veine table 6. E before it bee inserted into the right ventricle and sometimes it is double this engirteth round like a crowne the basis of the heart and hath a value set to it least the bloud should recoyle into the hollow veine From this crowne veine are sprinkled branches downward along the face of the heart which on the left side are more and larger because it is thicker more solid then the right side This bringeth good and thicke bloud laboured onely in the Liuer to nourish this thicke and solid part that the Aliment might be proportionable to that it should nourish What nourishment the hart needed By this vessell also it may be beleeued that the Naturall Soule residing in the Naturall spirite is brought into the heart with all his faculties It hath also two Arteries called Coronorias table 12. figure 1. BB proceeding from the The Arteries descending trunk of the great Artery which together with the vein are distributed through his substance to cherish his in-bred heate and supplying vitall spirites doe preserue his life for if the heart did liue by the spirits perfected in his left ventricle and carried vnto his substance without Arteries then also might the same spirit passe through the pores of the hart By what spirits the heart liueth and so be lost It hath also Nerues but very small ones from the sixt coniugation table 10. figure 1. K or from the nerues which are sent vnto the Pericardium which are distributed into his basis The nerues table 10. figure 2. h close by the arteriall veine but not very perspicuously and as some thinke for sence onely and not for motion because his motion is Natural and not Animal But saith Archangelus if there must be but one and not two principles of motion in vs then shall the Brayne be also the originall of all motions because it is the seate of the sensible Soule for that opinion of Aristotles who attributeth vnto the heart onely all the powers and faculties of the foule Galen and the later writers do with one consent disauow and so Archangelus his conceit that the motion of the hart commeth froÌ„ his nerues this nerue shall minister vnto the heart not onely sence but also motion and both their faculties and also the faculty of pulsation or the motion of dilatation and constriction And this nerue sometimes though seldome is suddenly stopped whence commeth hasty and vnexpected death which wee call sudden death the faculties of life and pulsation being restrayned so that they cannot flow into the heart But we with Gal. in the 8. Chap. of his seauenth A cause of sudden death Booke de Anatom Administ will determine for our partes that the faculty of pulsation ariseth out of the body of the heart not from the nerues for then when these are cut away the pulse should cease and the hart taken out of the chest could not be moued which we find otherwise by dissection of liuing creatures CHAP. XII Of the substance ventricles and eares of the heart THE substance of the heart is a thicke table 10. figure 3. sheweth this and red The substaÌ„ce of the heart Why so thick flesh being made of the thicker part of the bloud it is lesse redd then the flesh of muscles but harder more solide and dense that the spirits and inbred heare which are contayned in the heart and from thence powred into al parts of the body should not exhale and that it might not bee broken or rent in his strong motions and continuall dilatation and constriction And it is more compact spisse and solid in the cone then in the basis because there the right fibres meeting together 〈◊〉 more compact right as it is obserued in the heads or tendons of the muscles This flesh is the seat of the vitall Faculty and the primary and chiefe cause of the functions of the heart which Where is the seat of the vital faculty consiste especially in the making of vitall bloud and spirites For it hath all manner of fibres right oblique and transuerse most strong and most compact and mingled one with another and therefore not conspicuous as in a muscle as well for the better performance The heart hath all kinde of fibres of his motion as for a defence
neruous for many tendons reach vnto it beside almost all the nerues arise from about that part in Latine occiput or occipitium as Plantus hath it we call it the nowle The middle part of the scalpe betweene these is gibbous or round called in Greeke 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to hide as it were 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because that part of the head is especially couered with haires Galen in the 11. Booke of the Vse of parts and the 14. Chapter calleth it aruumpilorū the Field of haires the Latines call it vertex because in that place the haires runne round Galen in a ring as waters doe in a whirle-poole Finally the sides of the scalp betwixt the eyes the eares and the necke are called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 sayeth Aristotle in his first Booke of his History and the eleauenth Chapter because the pulse is there very manifest the Latines cal them Tempora because their gray haires and sunken flesh bewray the age of a man Againe the parts of the scalp are contayning and contayned The contayning parts Another diuision of the parts Containing are some of them Common some proper The Common are the Cuticle or scarfe-skinne the true skinne bearing a wood or bush of haire the fat and the fleshy pannicle The proper contayning parts are either externall or internall The externall are two membranes pericranium and periostium certain muscles and the bones of the head The proper inward conteyning partes are the two mothers called Meninges dura and Pia which encompasse both the skull and the braine The parts contayned are the braine and the Cerebellum or after-braine from which ariseth the marrow which when it is gotten out of the skull is properly called the marrow of Contained the backe or pith of the spine from which doe arise many nerues as well before it issue out of the skull as after Of these we will first entreat and then after of the part without hayre or the face in the booke following CHAP. II. Of the common containing parts of the head THE common contayning parts of the head are fiue the Haires the Cuticle the Skinne the Fat and the fleshy pannicle of all which wee haue spoken 5. common parts heretofore at large yet because in euery one of these there is some difference from the same parts in other places of the body wee must a little here insist vpon them and first of the haires Albeit therefore the haire is generally more or lesse all ouer the body as before is sayd yet aboue all places the head is adorned with the greatest aboundance of them The haires of the head are the longest of the whole body because sayeth Aristotle in his first Booke de Generatione Animalium and the third Section the braine affoordeth toward their nourishment Aristotle a large supply of humour or vaporous moysture whether you will which also is most clammy and glutinous For the braine is the greatest of all the glandulous bodies They are also in the head stiffest because the skinne of the head is the thickest yet is it rare and full of open pores so sayeth Galen in his ninth Booke de vsu partium and the first Chapter Galen In the head Nature hath opened conspicuous and visible waies for the vaporous and smoky or sooty excrements for the head is set vpon the body as a roofe vppon a warme house so that vnto it doe arise al the fuliginous vaporous excrements from the subiected parts Pollux Eschylus The haires of the head are called in Latine Capilli as it were Capitis pili by Pollux and Eschylus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to cutte In men they are called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Caesaries because they are often mowed in women 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to dresse with diligence from whence haply wee haue out worde to combe or rather from the Latin word Coma whose signification is all one with the former In woemen they are diuided by a line which separation the Greeks call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Latins discrimen and aequamentum in English we cal it the shed of the haire The skinne of a man although in comparison of other creatures it is most thinne yet if The skin of the head you compare the skinne of the head with that of the chest or the lower belly it is very thick as also is the cuticle And therefore Columbus insulteth ouer Aristotle for saying that the skinne of the head is very thinne .. The place is in the 3. Booke of his history and the eleauenth Section where hee doth not say that the skinne of the head is very thinne for in the Aristotle redeemed fift Booke de Generatione Animalium and the third Chapter hee calleth the skinne of the head 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is very crasse and thicke but he saith and that truely that the skinne of a man in respect of his magnitude is very thin Well the skinne of the head as it is the thickest so sayeth Galen in his second Booke de Temperamentis and the 5. Chapter it is so much drier then the skinne of the rest of the body by how much it is harder yet is it rare sayeth Aristotle in the place next aboue named that the sooty excrements might be auoided for the generation of haire as before is sayed It hath vesselles running in it Veines from the outward braunch of the externall iugulars The veines which creeping on both sides are vnited in the forehead and are sometimes opned in grieuous paines of the head and these veines running vnder the drie and hairie skinne carrie bloud vnto it for nourishment Arteries it hath also from the outward branch of the Carotides Arteries deriued to the rootes of the eares and to the temples especially which bring Vitall spirits vpward from the Heart It receyueth also certaine endes of Nerues reflected vpward from the first and seconde coniugation of the Neck to giue it sense I saide ends of Nerues for so saith Gal. in his sixeteenth booke de vsu partium and the 2. Chapter The skinne hath not a proper definite An elegant place in Galen Nerue belonging vnto it as euery Muscle hath his Nerue disseminated in or about his body but there attaine vnto it certaine Fibres from the subiected parts which connect or knit it to those parts and also affoord sense vnto it The sense of this skinne of the heade is not fine and exquisite as in the Chest or the Lower belly Aristotle in the third booke of his Historie and the eleuenth Chapter saith it hath no sense at al and rendreth a reason because it eleaueth to the bone without any interposition of Flesh But Galen disprooueth this opinion in his sixeteenth Booke of the Vse of Parts and the second Chapter It may bee Aristotle meant the Cuticle and
it was called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because it was contained 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the head Of the generation of it Hippocrates hath learnedly discoursed in his booke de Carnibus to which wereferre the learned Reader as also for the order of the generation thereof to Aristotle in his booke de generatio e Animalium and the sixt Section It is the principall part of the whole body which may be proued by the scituation the figure the defences it hath and the vse of it The scituation is in the highest part of the The braine the principall part of the whole body and why body as it were in a defenced Tower that it might bee better secured from outward iniuries The figure is round which is the most noble figure of all the rest for it was proportionable that the diuinest part should haue the most perfect and absolute figure The defences of the braine are very many the haire the skinne and that the thickest of all the body the fatte the fleshy Membrane the Pericranium the Periostium a double tabled Scull and two Meminges or membranes by all which it is of all sides defenced from The defences of the braine violence so that it cannot be hurt or offended but with extreame wrong But neyther the heart nor any other part is so prouided for by Nature wherefore it should seeme she made more of store as we say of it then of all the rest In respect of the vse it will easily carry away the prize of Excellency for the soule The excellency of the vse of it of man saith Varolius being not tyed to any bodily instrument cannot apprehend those out ward things which are without it selfe vnlesse it be by the mediation of a corporeall organ into which the species or formes of materiall things may be transmitted by which afterward they may be exhibited and in which they may be apprehended and contemplated euen as Comparison he that is shut vp in a roome cannot see those things which are or are acted without vnlesse there be some Tralucent body wherein the Images of those outward things may first be receiued and after represented to him that is within Such an instrument is that which wee call Commune sensorium the common sence for nothing can come into the vnderstanding vnlesse it be first in the sence Now this first or common sense according to Plato and Galen is the braine for Aristotle Arist dreame did but dreame that it was the heart and they thought well For not onely Galen but Aristotle himselfe did resolue that that was the first Sensorium or common sence which is The common sence is the braine the originall of sinewes Nowe Anatomy teacheth vs that all the sinewes arise from the braine Hence then it is manifest that the Braine is the seate of the Sensatiue Soule for if a nerue which is directed vnto any part be obstructed that part is depriued of sence and motion so of the sensatiue Soule If the originall or beginning of the spinall marrow be obstructed all the parts vnder the head doe loose both sence and motion when as yet the head enioyeth them both But if the fourth ventricle of the Braine be obstructed then not onely the whole bodie but the head it selfe looseth motion and sence and is depriued of the sensatiue Soule Who then will deny that the Brayne is the most noble of all the members seeing it is the seate of all the Animall faculties Imagination Reason or discourse Memory wherfore Aphrodisaeus called it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Organ of wisedome and the beginning or originall Aphrodisaeut of sence and voluntary motion and beside seeing from it doe issue and on it do depend all the instruments of the senses of seeing hearing smelling tasting touching yea and speech also And therefore Plato did worthily call it because hee could giue it no higher a stile Platoes The deuine Member For what the Heauen is in the worlde the same in man is the Braine The Heauen is the habitation of the supreame Inteligence that is of God and the Braine the seate of the Soule that is the demi-God of this Little-world Hence it was that Homer called it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is the Heauen because as from the Coelestiall Comparison influence all things below it are moued both in heauen and earth so all the parts of the body haue sense and motion from the influence of the Braine Wherefore with Galen we determine that the Braine as well as the Heart is a Principall part not that wee think as some doe that the Braine is the Prince and King of all the rest no more then we thinke with Aristotle that the Heart is the most noble of all the parts But The braine not the prince but a principal part we say that as the heart is of greatest and most instant necessity for life so the place of dignity belongeth to the Braine Columbus giueth an elegant reason hereof taken from Generation The Liuer sayth hee is ingendred by the mediation and helpe of the vmbilicall veine Columbus his reason the heart by the mediation and helpe of the vmbilicall arteries and these are ingendred by the vessels of the wombe but the nerues which are the instruments of sence and motion doe immediatly arise out of the braine of the Infant The Braine is commonly called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Galen in his Book de motu musculorum calleth The name of the braine it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The marrow of the head for a difference betweene it and the marrow of the backe which is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and the marrow of the bones from which it much differeth because it is not dissolued by fire nor consumed in hunger nor contained in the skull to nourish it Wherefore Galen in his 8. Booke de vsu partium and the 4. Chapter putteth a difference betweene it and the marrow of the bones because this is fluxible and like vnto fat neither couered with coates nor wouen with vcines and arteries neither hath any communion with the muscles and nerues all which is contrary in the Braine Apollidorus thought that none of the Antients had giuen any name to the Brain in any Sophocles of their writings and that therefore Sophocles called it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the white marrow imitating therein Plato who when he would giue a name to the Brayne called it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and True Loue the Grecians say is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 euen at the vppermost marrow or at the Brane of the Soule no doubt because they thought that the Soule was in the Braine A greeke phrayse It is scituate in the head as in a Castle most safe because of the defences thereof before mentioned as also because it is the highest place as it were the Tribunall or throne of her body For as God who
soft and softer saith Galen in his 8. Booke de vsupartium and the sixt Chapter then the Cerebellum because it is the originall of the soft Nerues pertaining to the Organes of Why soft sense but the Cerebellum is the originall of the hard Nerues commonly thought to bee the Nerues of motion In Children the Braine is so soft that it is fluid The reason of the softnesse is because it is to receiue all the species or representations of the outward senses as also of the imagination and vnderstanding For vnlesse the alteration or impression that is made in any of the senses do proceede first from the Braine and after returne againe vnto it the creature hath sence of nothing which is proued by the example of suâ—h as are taken with the Apopleixe Wherfore seeing sensation is a passion it was requisit that the braine should be of such a substance as is fit to receiue the impressions of other things Yet it behooued not it should be so soft as that the impressions made therein should presently sink Why not like to Fat away and be obliterated as it hapneth in water and other fluide bodies but that it should haue with the softnes a kind of consistence of solidity which solidity is so exquisitely mingled with the softnes that the fire cannot melt it as it doeth fat or wax and such like To conclude it is like the substance of a nerue of which also his marrow is the originall but a Why it melteth not little softer Hippocrates in his booke de Glandulis likneth it vnto a kernell because as a kernel it is white and friable and beside is of the same vse to the head that a glandule would bee drawing vp the exhalations of the lower partes which after vapour out by the Sutures of the skull The Temperament of the brayne is cold and moyst as wee may easily with Galen in The temperament of the Braine the 8. booke of the Vse of parts conclude from the softnes and moystnes of his substance Wherfore Hippocrates in his book de Carnibus calleth it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Metropolis or chiefe seate of cold and glutinous moisture Glutinous to hold and conteine the subtile Animall spirits which otherwise would soone vanish and decay and colde that the part ordained for the exercise of reason and therefore fulfilled with hot spirits should not easily be set on fire or enflamed For when the braine by any accident or distemper growes hot as we see in phreniticall patients the motions thereof are furious and raging and the sleepe turbulent and vnquiet And indeede the Heade is verie subiect colde although The Reason thereof it be by nature to hot distempers partly because of the perpetuall motion thereof and of the spirits partly by reason of the aboundant Veines and Arteries and great quantity of blood therein conteyned and finally because whatsoeuer hot thing is in the body either naturall or vnnaturall if it be inordinately mooued flieth vp vnto the braine or at lest sendeth hot vapors vnto it CHAP. X. Of the Substance parts of the Braine AS the Braine is the Originall and seate of all the Animall Facuties so for the exercise of the same it hath diuerse and different parts cast into why the brain hath diuerse parts sundry moulds which we will now take view of according to Anatomicall Method alwayes remembring that by the Braine wee vnderstande whatsoeuer is conteyned within the Scull and compassed about by the hard and thin Membranes The Braine therefore wee deuide into three parts For first it is parted into a forepart 3 Parts and a hinde-part by the dura meninx quadruplicated or foure-foulded The forepart because it is the greater and most principall for in it the Animall spirites The forepart are especially laboured reteineth the name of the whole and is properly called Cerebrum or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The hinder part is much lesser and is called by a diminitiue word Cerebellum we call it the After-braine Herophilus as Galen witnesseth in his 8. book of the Vse of parts and the 11. Chapter calleth it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Againe the forepart or the Braine by the dura meninx duplicated and resembling a Subdiuided Mowers Sythe is parted in the top throughout his whole length into two equall parts one right another left tab 8. fig. 2. from A to A tab 9. fig. 3. from N to K. This partition reacheth altogether to the Center of the Braine and stayeth at that body which we call Corpus callosum table 9. figure 3. at L L. And this is the reason why alwayes the same part of the head is not pained but sometimes one part sometimes another sometimes the whole head Some sayth Laurentius haue dreamed that the braine is deuided quite through but they are much deceiued for the callous body vniteth the parts together As for the after-braine though it bee not vnited to the braine yet is it in two places continued with the beginning of the spinall marrow and the same marrow by two originalles ioyned vnto the Braine The vse of the diuision of the Braine is first out of Vesalius and Archangelus that the The vse of this diuision Out of Vesalius braine might be better nourished for by this meanes the thinne membrane together with the vesseles there-through conuayed doe insinuate themselues deeper into the substance thereof for without this partition and those deepe conuolutions which wee see in it when it is cut it could not haue beene nourished The second vse wee will adde out of Laurentius to wit beside the nourishment for the better motion of the same for as water is not so easily moued where it is deep as where iâ— Out of Laurentius is shallow so if the braine had beene one entire massie substance it would not so willingly and gladly as we say haue risen and falne in the Systole and Dyastole The vse of this diuision out of Bauhine is more expresse for the safe conduct of the Sinus or pipes of the hard meninx mentioned in the seauenth Chapter from whence doe issue Out of Baubine small surcles of vessels to conuay nourishment into the conuolutions of the braine For because the quantity of the braine is very great through which the Capillarie vessels were to be dispersed for his nourishment if the vesselles themselues so small as they are veines and arteries should haue passed from the backepart to the forepart from the right side to the left or on the contrary they would in so long a iourney through so soft and claÌ„my a body haue beene in danger of breaking wherefore the braine was deuided into three parts betweene which diuisions there runne foure Sinus or pipes of the hard meninx into which the internall Iugular veines and the sleepy arteries called Carotides ascending from the Basis of the Nowle of the head doe powre their bloud and spirits which is conuayed on either
three you must shew the spectators the Mamillary processes and the payres or coniugations of the sinewes which otherwise in the search for these will be defaced Table 13. Figure 13. exhibiteth the vesselles of the Braine and their distribution especially through the right side whither they proceede from the internall Iugular veine or from the sleepie Arterie or from the sinus of the Dura Meninx Figure 14. sheweth the wonderful Net as Galen describeth it Figure 15. sheweth the pituitary Glandule with the Bason and the sleepy Arteries Figure 16. sheweth the Rete-mirabile or wonderfull Net together with the glandule as it is found in the heads of Calues and Oxen. TABVLA XIII FIG XIII XIV XV XVI A A brāch attaining to the right ventricle ♌ The complication of vessels called Plexus Choroides formed on either side of the branch marked with A. Fig. 14 A B Arteries climbing the scull and making this wonderful net CD Branches into which the surcles of that net are ioynedin to E the pituitaryglandule or kernel of flegm Fig 15. A the Glandule receiuing the bason B the bason it selfe or if you wil the Tunnel called Peluis or infundibulum CC the sleepy Arteries D A branch of the artery going to the side of the Dura Meninx E Another branch of the same artery going to the nostrils FF An artery in one side diuided into 2 branches but in the other side meeting togither againe G A partition of the artery creeping through the durameninx H Another branch which getteth out of the scull and reacheth to the eies Figure 16 A The petuitary Glandule B C. The sleepye arteries going into the scull D D. The wonderfull Net The vse of the Braine For the vse of the Braine Aristotle in his second booke de partibus Animalium and the 7. chapter writeth that the braine was made as a commō good for the behoofe of the whole Creature to temper the feruour and heate of the heart which opinion because it is sufficiently refuted by Galen in his 3. booke of the Vse of parts and the second chapter wee wil not insist long vpon it only these two things we open First that the heart is sufficiently refrigerated by our perpetuall inspiration and expiration Secondly that if Nature had intended the brayne to coole the heart she would not haue set them so farre distant but placed it eyther about the heart or at least in the Chest as well therefore might he haue saide that the Heele was made for the vse of the heart as the Braine Wherefore we determine the vse of the braine to be first for a habitation for the soule whereby she performeth her Animall functions as well those that are principall as also Diuerse those of sense and motion Secondly that in the substance thereof the Animall spirits might bee laboured therein conueyed and from thence deriued into the body For so saith Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of parts and the 13. chapter and the 9. booke and the Galen 4. chapter In the whole substance of the body of the Braine is the Animal spirit wrought and reserued not onely in the ventricles and in his 12. booke of Method the 5. chapter the third de locis affect is and the 7. speaking of the falling sicknesse he saith It is caused in the braine the humor hindering the Animall spirits which are contained in the ventricles that they cannot yssue out Thirdly that the Nerues and spinall marrow might proceede from the marrow thereof which is so manifest as we neede not cite the places of Galen to proue it For the Nerues receiue from the braine as from a principle as we say á quo and of dispensation the Animal vertue and sensatiue soule which do reside in his substance and do distribute the faculties of sense and motion into the Organs or Instruments of sense motion as it were through Channels hauing in thē the Animall spirits to conuey the same faculties This Animall spirit although it performe many seruices is one and the same leading The Animall spirit all the faculties of the sensatiue soule through the Nerues into all the parts of the body but the Instruments into which out of the braine it is powred into the Nerues are manifolde Wherefore if they runne into the eyes which are the Organs of the sight they make Vision if into the eares Hearing c. This Aristotle in his second booke de generatione Animalium Aristotles Comparisons and the last text elegantely declareth by the example of a Smiths hammer for as the hammer is but one instrument yet doth many seruices according to the variety of the subiect vpon which it worketh so is the spirit in the worke of Natures administrations as the beames of the Sunne are one and the same yet appeare diuers if they light vpon diuers coulers so is it with the Animall spirits The substance of the Braine although it be deuoide of Animall motion and sense for The seate of the sensatiue soule it is not deuoide of Naturall yet is it the originall of sense and voluntary motion which we may better perceiue if we consider that disease which we cal the Apoplexie For those that are Apoplecticall although all their Instruments of the senses are perfect yet because the Animal spirits are intercepted they haue no sense at all For the originall of the spinall marrow being totally stopped all the parts vnder it doe loose doth sense and motion so also if the Nerue which is conueyed to any part be obstructed that part is depriued of sense Animall motion sense motion Hence it followeth that the braine is the seate and residence of the sensatiue soule and the fountaine of sense and motion Of sense because it receiueth the impressions of all sensible things Of motion because it dispenseth the knowledge of auoiding that which is hurtfull and desire to follow after that which is profitable and behoouefull As for Natural sense and motion there is a great question whether the braine haue them Natural sense or no and first for sense Hippocrates in his booke de vulneribus capitis saith that the braine hath present and exquisite sense about the Sinciput or sides of the head because in this place the bone is the thinnest and most of the braine is there contained beside the skin of the head is there thinnest also Moreouer saith he the diseases of the braine are the most acute and dangerous yea for the most part mortall and hard to be iudged of by those that are not very well experienced Galen in his first booke of the cause of Symptoms and the 8. chapter saith that the braine was not made by Nature an instrument with sense but so that it is able to comprehend or Galen perceiue all those things by which it suffereth as if he should haue saide The braine is not made to be a particular instrument of sence so as it can perceiue
or apprehend colours onely as the eyes sauours onely as the tongue c But it is a common instrument of sensation discerning colours sauours smels sounds and tactile qualities and in a word all sensible obiects Wherefore the braine feeleth vniuersally whatsoeuer is offered vnto it not with choice as the eye which receiueth not the sound but onely his owne obiect and so in the rest It remayneth therefore that the Naturall sence of the braine is none at all or at least so weak and dull as it is hardly perceiued for in his substance there is rather a faculty of Touching then an instrument of Touch. Fernelius thinketh that all motion is from the marrow of the braine and all sence from Fernelius his Philosophy about this his membranes because the body of the braine is perpetually moued but hath no feeling at all on the other side his membranes are of themselues immouable especially the Dura mater but feele very exactly So in the Lethargy or Phrensie which are diseases of the substance of the braine there is no paine at all but if a sharp vapour or humour be raised vp vnto the Meninges then grieuous paine followeth Moreouer the spinall marrow and all the nerues haue their marrow from the braine that couered with the Meninges al which haue the same and no other power or faculty then what they receiued from their original wherefore the forepart of the braine is the beginning of Sence the hinder part of Motion but of Touching the Meninges or Membranes are the originall Those nerues which are full of marrow are the instruments of Motion of Touching those whose greater parts are produced by the Meninges And this is Fernelius his Philosophy concerning this poynt but how consonant to reason we shall see afterward Concerning the motion of the braine great difference there is among Authors Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of Parts and the second Chapter sayth it hath perpetuall motion The motion of the braine Vesalius denies it answeres his arguments addeth that he could neuer perceiue any such Vesalius against Galen motion either in great woundes of the head or which is more in his dissections of liuing Creatures Fallopius halteth in this poynt he sayes it but hee dares not auouch it Platerus thinks that those that say it moues mistake the motion of the braine for the motion of the third Sinus which beateth like an artery Columbus Archangelus and Laurentius doe all consent that it moueth continually and instance in woundes of the head Laurentius Laurentius is so confident that he sayth he is a mad man and wants his sences that will deny it To resolue vpon somewhat among so many opinions we think that the braine is not moued by any Animall or voluntary motion but by a Naturall and that double one proper of his owne another from the arteries albeit this last Archangelus doth deny because those What we resolue of arteries that runne aboue are too small but those that are in the bottom of the brain much lesse yet it giueth the power of voluntary motion to other parts This motion is proper and peculiar to the braine for the generation nourishment and expurgation of the Animall spirit for it is dilated and againe constringed as may be seene The vse of the motion in wounds of the head where a notable part of the Scull is taken away as also of the membranes sayth Bauhine And in children new borne in the mould the braine is so manifestly How the motion is discerned seene to beate and pant that euen the bones which at that time are very soft are mooued therewith When it is dilated it draweth out of the Sinus of the dura mater some say out of the wonderful net or web of the soporarte arteries vitall spirits and ayre by the nosthrils for the restauration and preseruation of the Animall spirites when it contracteth it selfe it driueth out the Animall spirits laboured in his substance through the nerues as through The Animal spirits pipes and canals into the organs of sence and motion or as Archangelus hath it out of the foreward ventricles being contracted into the third and fourth and so into the organs aforesaide which spirites when they ariue in the particular parts they nourish the Animall spirits bred and fixed in those partes For the Animall spirit floweth through the nerues into all the parts not onely to be the conuayer of the sensatiue and mouing Soule but also to giue nourishment to the Animall spirits fixed in the parts and this spirit is the medium or Meane by which the Sensatiue Soule and al his faculties which are incorporeal are ioyned with the body The outward parts because their instruments are farther off stood in neede of nerues as it were Channels through which the Animall spirites accompanied by the Vital as it were by guides might be conuaied but the inward parts because their instruments are neare and at hand needed no nerues but receiue the same by blind and inuisible by-waies yet guided by the same Vital spirits We haue also sayd that at the entrance into and at the out-gate from the heart there are A witty conceit of Archangelus certain Values or floud-gates set and their vses wee haue allotted Now Archangelus is of opinion that the Buttocks and Pine-glandule of the Braine doe here the same offices that the values did in the heart For sayth he in the dilatation of the braine the way out of the third ventricle into the fourth closeth it selfe and beside is shut vp by the glandule falling betweene the Buttocks that no part of the spirits can returne out of the fourth ventricle into the third On the contrary in the contraction the glandule is lifted vp and the Buttocks are diuided and so away is made for the Animall spirit to flow out of the third ventricle into the fourth Concerning the generation of Animall spirits there are diuers opinions especially Diuers opinions of the generation of the Animall spirits seauen one of Galen another of Vesalius a third of Columbus a fourth of Argenterius a fift of Archangelus a sixt of Laurentius and a seaueth of Varolius to which Bauhine our author subscribeth Galens opinion was that they were made of the vitall spirite brought by the soporarie arteries Galens and of ayre breathed in mary as for the place of their generation he seemeth to be altogether vncertaine for sometimes hee assigneth the Plexus Choroides sometimes the ventricles sometimes the substance and body of the braine Vesalius sayeth they are laboured in the right and left ventricle by a power and efficacy Vesalius receiued from the brain and haue for their matter vitall spirits from the heart aire drawn in by inspiration ascending through the third ventricle Columbus sayth they are made of ayre drawne by the nosethrils and altered in the cauities Columbus of the forehead bone and the wedge-bone and carried through
yet beateth and is moued wheras this marrow albeit be contayned within mouable spondels or rack-bones is not it selfe at all moued But if that motion bee in the substance of the braine by an in-bred faculty and the spinall marrow hath the same nature and substance that the braine hath me thinks it should bee reasonable that this marrow should be moued in like manner as the braine is moued albeit our sence is not apprehensiue of it And truely Archangelus conceiueth that it hath a motion and when it is dilated receiueth Animall spirits from the fourth ventricle and when it is contracted powreth them againe forth into the nerues which arise there-from The figure of it is long thicke and large at the originall Table 17. figure 1. from D to The figure ◠tab 16. fig. 2. from A to B and though being gathered together it become somewhat narrower yet is it not as some thinke by little and little continually attenuated till it come to the extremity of the os sacrum for as far as the vertebrae of the loynes table 16. fig. 1. from ◠to ◠it keepeth an equall thicknesse almost although Galen and Vesalius did thinke that it was consumed as it sent more nerues out from it Fallopius in his obseruations and Platerus doe not thinke that it groweth lesse at all Yet we must needes acknowledge that we find it fuller thicker in the neck whence those great nerues issue which are dispersed through the armes Table 16. fig. 1. from I to K and in the loynes whence proceede the great nerues of the loynes which descend vnto the thighes tab 16. fig. 1. from B to C and that afterward when it commeth nearer to the os sacrum his marrowy substance is somewhat abated A cauity or Sinus there is formed in it presently after his originall whilest it yet remaineth His cauity Calamus scriptorius within the Skull which is like a writing pen and therefore it is called Calamus scriptotorius Table 12. fig. 10. MNO for it is hollowed into a poynt or neb becomming lesse by degrees because in that place there are no more excrements This cauity maketh the middle part of the fourth ventricle of the braine for the rest of the ventricle is formed by the After-braine table 15. figure 21. H at which place the After-braine is ioyned to this marrow Table 15. fig. 21. GG is ioyned to BC as also in the 12. tab and fig. 10. Archangelus conceiueth that this cauity is vnder the fourth ventricle and continued Archangelus with it and that out of the fourth ventricle into it the Animall spirits doe flow and that from this cauity they are distributed most what into all the fiue sences Table 16. Figure 1. sheweth the true forme of the spinall marrow properly so called together with his membranes the nerues proceeding from the same Figure 2. sheweth the spinal marrow naked bare as it appeareth both within the Skull without together with his nerues as most part of the Anatomistes heretofore haue described it TABVLA XVI FIG II. FIG I. Figure 2. Now although the Nerues yssuing from the spinall marrow be almost infinite yet according Whereof his nerues are made how they yssue to the number of the out-lets or holes of the vertebrae they are said to be so many coniugations as the vertebrae haue holes For euery Nerue doth indeed consist of many hairy strings or marrowy fibres which by the helpe of the Membranes at the holes of the vertebrae are conioyned and making as it were a knot do yssue outof the bone so that one Nerue seemeth to be made of one propagation Table 16. the first figure sheweth it at L L which thing as it is true in those Nerues which proceede out of the Marrow whilest it is simple and angle so is it also in them which after the diuision are distributed into the lower parts Table 16 fig. 1 at M M To put an end to our discription of the spinall marrow we will take leaue to insert in this placea description therof out of Rondeletius and Laurentius which is on this manner Rondeletius All the Nerues saith Rondeletius which no man before me hath obserued are diuided frō the very beginning of the spinall marrow in the Brain Wherfore the cause of the Paralysis or Palsie doth not so much proceed from the marrow of the backe as from the very heads of the sinewes thence it is that Galen so often repeareth that the Palsie hapneth when the heads of the sinewes are eyther obstructed or resolued Thus Rondeletius hath it in his chap. of the Palsie Laurentius thus All Anatomies haue hitherto beene ignorant of the originall and propagation of the Nerues of the spinall marrow for they al thinke that the nerues Laurentius of the necke come onely from the marrow of the necke the nerues of the backe from the marrow of the backe and of the Loynes from the marrow of the Loynes But how miserably they haue bin mistakē is conuinced by a new and vnheard of obseruation of mine own Separate therefore the marrow from the rack-bones but keepe it whole then take from it both the Membranes wherewith it is compassed cast it into water and shake it a little and you shall perceiue that the whole marrow from the top to the bottome is made of innumerable surcles and filaments like a Horse tayle composed of infinite hayres and that the A hard probleme explained nerues of os sacrum do arise from the same beginning with the nerues that are aboue This new and admirable obseruation maketh plaine an obscure probleme why when the marrow of the neck is offended the motion of the thigh is sometimes taken away when as the motion of the armes and of the Chest is not at al vitiated thus far Laurentius To conclude The vse of the spinall marrow properly so called is saith Galen in his twelfth booke de vsu The vse of the spinal marow partium that from it as from one other brain there should proceed many nerues as it were small riuerets which might conuey the Animall faculty sense motion and the Animall spirit which they receiue by continuation from the braine to the parts vnder the head excepting those whereto are transmitted certaine propagations from the sixt payre table 17 fig. 1 and 2 e of the marrow of the braine which also are disseminated through the middle and lower bellies For because it was no safe in consideration of the length of the way that all the nerues should be transported vnto the inferior parts from the marrow of the braine contained in the Scull and yet it was necessary that those inferior parts should be supplyed with voluntary motion and sense to apprehend annoyances it was most requisite that from this marrow as from the braine elongated or produced those sinewes should be deriued for if a man had wanted motion hee had beene more like an Image
then a creature And thus much of the vse of the marrow properly so called But if you take it in the larger signification then the vse of it is that from it where it is included within the Scull on both sides should yssue seauen Coniugations or payres of nerues as is commonly thought we say eight which are called the nerues of the braine table 15 fig. 20 ◠G H I K M N O together with the Organs of smelling table 14 fig. 19 D ◠But as it consisteth in the spine without the Scul there are produced there-from thirty paire table 16 fig. 1 euen al the nerues that passe through the whole body And thus much of both the braines and the spinall marrow now it followeth that we should intreat of the nerues yssuing there-from CHAP. XVI Of the Nerues of the Braine and first of the Organs of smelling called Processus Mammillares THE Nature of the Braine the After-braine the Spinall Marrow being thus manifested it remaineth that we should speake of the Nerues proceeding frō The 5. senses each of them and first of the Nerues of the braine Whereas therefore there are fiue outward senses the Sight the Smell the Hearing the Taste and the Touching which from the braine it selfe or rather from the Marrowe thereof doe receiue by nerues as it were by Channels some of them the faculty of Sensation and their nerues alone some of them of Sensation and motion together which nerues are sayed thence to arise as from a principle of dispensation radication from whence they bring the Sensatiue and mouing faculties of the Soule to the instruments of the Sences it is very fit that in this place we should deliuer their history Wee will therefore begin with the Organs of smelling Although the Nose be the way path of smels yet is not the instrument of smelling neither yet his bindmost coate but farther within the skull there are certaine processes or productions esteemed for the very organs of this sence which the Anatomists looking onely vpon their prominent part haue called Processus mammillares and some the organs of smelling Vnder which Title Galen hath written of them at large These are two some thing like nerues but scituated in the Basis of the braine they are whiter softer and broader then nerues are Notwithstanding like nerues they are round and slender In men they are very small in beastes as Oxen Goates Sheepe and Dogges they are much larger Why be asts smell better then men Their originall whence it is that all these Creatures haue this sence of Smelling more exquisite then men These processes arising out of the marrowey substance of the braine in his Basis tab 17 Tab. 17. Fig. 1. Sheweth the Basis of the Braine and After-braine freed from their membrane that the originall of the Nerues of the brain might be better perceiued Fig. 2. Sheweth one side of the Braine the After-brain the spinall marrow and the Nerues TABVLA XVII FIG I. FIG II. CHAP. XVII Of the nerues of the Eyes or of the first and second Coniugations ALbeit in a particular discourse hereafter following wee intend more districtly and carefully to prosecute the Nature and diuarications of nerues in generall and euery one in particular yet because all the nerues of the head haue their originall from diuers partes of the substance of the same Wee cannot chuse in this place but make some mention of them though The optick nerues it be the briefer The first coniugation therefore of the nerues of the braine are the Opticks Table 17. figure 1. and 2. G larger and softer then all other simple nerues Larger because they bee sensibly perforated softer because they arise out of the Center of the Basis whence proceeding forward with a slow course they are vnited aboue the saddle of the wedge-bone tab 17. figure 1. H table 14. figure 19. O and so make a common body After being againe separated Table 14. figure 19. M N Table 17. figure 1. aboue H they passe obliquely foreward through their proper hole table 4. figure 10. B the one to the Center of the right eye the other to the Center of the left ta 3. lib. 8. fig. 8. a or together with the membrane fig. 2. abc Their double substance They consist of a double substance the one marrowey the other membranous The marrowey is soft like the substance of the braine which you shall perceiue to yssue if it bee Marrowey hard pressed and of this marrowy substance dilated in the orbe of the eye is that coat made which of the similitude of a net is called Retina tunica Tab. 17. fig. 1 and 2. I and this compasseth the glassy humour like a sphere Their membranes It hath two membranes from the two Meninges of the braine The thin membrane inuesteth it from the originall to his out-let from the skul the thick Meninx is added to it frō thence to the eye and so the thicke membrane degenerateth into the horny coate the thin is consumed or spent in the Vuea and so the Animall spirit is transported through the continuation of this nerue vnto the pupilla or Apple which is the hole of the grapie mēbrane They are called therefore Opticke nerues from their action because they communicate to the eye the sence of seeing The second coniugation is of the nerues which moue the eyes table 18. figure 1. and 2. The 2. coniugations of the mouing nerues Their fraine ◠tab 15. figure 20. G which is distinguished from the former only by a little and thin bone and riseth from the Basis of the braine tab 25. fig. 1. C a little behinde the former as Vesalius saith This is smaller and slenderer by much then is the opticke as also harder because it was to be inserted into the muscles It yssueth by a proper hole of his owne tab 4. fig. 10. G which is the second of the wedge-bone where after it is diuided into notable braunches which are sent into the muscles In some bodies though it be but seldom they send small Note this twigs to the temporall muscles whence it is that sometimes if that muscle be offended the eie also suffereth with it and so on the contrary Their vse is to afford to the muscles the facultie of Motion as also a drawing power to their membranes Now the reason why when one eie is mooued to the side the other also Their vse Why both eies moue together necessarily followeth is because these nerues are continued one with another in their originall CHAP. XVIII Of the third and fourth coniugations of the Nerues of the Braine THE third coniugation Tab. 19 fig. 1 and 2 I. Ta. 15 fig. 20 H is sent vnto the Muscles of the face is commonly called the smaller roote of the third The 3. Coniugation paire but it deserueth we think to be a particular coniugation because it is not ioyned with the following paire Tab. 15.
absolutely an Organicall action because it is impaired in those that are Melancholicall and Phreniticall when the structure of the braine is not at all violated neither yet purely Similar because the brain is offended when his ventricles are cōpressed or stuffed vp all be the Temperament be not offended Furthermore this Ratiotiation is neither inchoated nor perfected by the Temperament alone neither yet performed by any particle of the braine but is an action mixed or compounded of an organicall and Similar such as is the action of the heart the stomack For the heart indeed is moued and hath his pulsation from an ingenite faculty and proper Temper of his owne But it could neither haue been contracted nor distended vnlesse it had beene excauated or hollowed into ventricles QVEST. IIII. Of the vse of the Braine against Aristotle IF euer that great interpreter and inessenger of Nature Aristotle the Prince of the Peripateticks doe lesse sufficiently acquite himselfe it is in the matter of Anatomy The vse of the braine after Aristotle more especially in that he hath written concerning the vse of the brain in the seuenth Chapter of his second Booke de part Animal where he cannot be redeemed from palpable absurdity The braine sayth he was onely made to resrigerate the heart First because it is without blood and without veines and againe because a mans braine is of all other creatures the largest for that his heart is the hottest This opinion of Aristotle Galen in his 8. booke de vsu partium confuteth by these arguments First seeing the braine is actually more hot then the most soultery ayre in Summer how shall it Aristotle confuted refrigerate or coole the hart Shall it not rather be contempered by the inspiration of ayre which it draweth in and as it were swalloweth from a full streame If the Peripateticks shal say that the externall ayre is not sufficient to refrigerate the heart but that there is alsorequired an inward bowell to asist it I answere that the braine is farre remoued from the heart and walled in on euery side with the bones of the Scull But surely if Nature had intended it for that vse she would eyther haue placed it in the Chest or at least not set so long a necke betweene them The heele saith Galen hath more power to coole the heart then the braine for when they are refrigerated or wet the cold is presently communicated to the whole body which hapneth not when men take cold on their heads Beside the braine is rather heated by the heart then the heart cooled by the braine because from the heart and the vmbles about it there continually arise very hot vapours which beeing naturally light do ascend vpward Adde heereto this strong Argument which vtterly subuerteth the opinion of Aristotle and the Peripateticks If the braine had beene only made to coole A very strong Argument the heart what need had there bin of so admirable a structure what vse is there of the 4. ventricles the Chambered or Arched body of the webs and textures of the Arteries of the pyne glandule of the Tunnell of the Testicles and Buttocks of the spinal marrow and of the manifold propagations of the sinewes Finally if this were true that Aristotle affirmeth then should the Lyon which is the hottest of all creatures witnesse his continuall disposition to the Ague haue had a larger braine then a man and men because they are hotter should haue larger braines then woemen which things because they abhorre from reason and sense wee doubt not to affirme that the brain was created for more noble and diuine imployments then to refrigerate the heart The body therefore of the braine was built for the performance of the Animall Sensatiue Motiue and Principall functions and it is hollowed into so many ventricles The true vse of the braine furnished with so many textures and complications of vessels for the auoyding of his excrements for the preparation and perfection of the Animall spirits besides the Nerues serue as Organs to lead out the same Animall spirit together with the faculties of motion and sense vnto the sences and the whole body Auerrhoes Aristotles Ape and where occasion is giuen a bitter detractor from Physitions endeauoreth to excuse Aristotle and saith What Auerrhos opinion is That the braine doth therefore refrigerate the heart because it tempers the extreame heat of the vitall spirits But let vs grant that the braine tempers some spirits yet it will hardly temper the spirits of the heart of the large Arteries if it at all temper those spirits which But confuted are contained in the substance and membranes of the brain which spirits so tempered seeing they do not returne vnto the heart how shal they temper the heat of the heart Alexander Benedictus in the 20. Chapter of his fourth booke seemeth to follow the opinion of Auerrhoes Albertus Magnus a man better stored with learning then honesty although hee be a Peripatetick yet in this point he falleth from his Maister Aristotle and saith in his 12 booke de Animal that the braine by his frigidity doth no more temper the heat of the hart then the siccity or drinesse of the heart doth temper the moysture of the braine Whether the braine be the originall of the sinewes Whether the Nerues be continued with the veines and Arteries Whether the Nerues be the Organs of sense and motion Whether the Nerues of motion differ from the Nerues of sense Why the sense may perish the motion being not hindered or on the contrary VVhether the faculty alone or a spirit therewith doe passe by the Nerues By which part of the Nerue the inner or the vtter the spirit is deriued All these questions and difficulties with their resolutions you must seeke for in the third Where these questions are disputed part of our booke of the vessels The rest of the questions we now prosecute QVEST. V. VVhence it is that when the right side of the Head or Brayne is wounded or enflamed a Convulsion falleth into the opposite partes WEe haue a double Probleme heere to discusse The first how it commeth to passe that when the right side of the Head is wounded or enflamed it oftentimes falleth out that the lefte parts of the bodie suffer Convulsion The second why one part of the Braine beeing smitten or obstructed it sometimes happeneth that the contrary side of the body is resolued or becommeth Paralyticall Both these questions haue in them many difficulties For the affections or diseases almost The affectiōs of the partes are communicated according to Rectitude of all the parts are communicated 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is by rectitude not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is by Contrariety because the right side with the right and the left with the left are 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is haue a similitude of substance And therefore when the Spleene is affected the left side is pained
duplication of the Dura Meninx called the Sythe because it is like a Mowing Sythe or Siccle The other why when as the same Acrimony of the Pus or quitture pricketh the Membrane of the wounded part it doth not stir vp convulsion in the same but in the opposite part The dissolution of the former is fetched from Anatomy The hard membrane which How the Ichor passeth into the opposite part toucheth the Skull in the vpper and exterior part is wholly continuated and lined as it were or smeared ouer with a watry humour betwixt it and the bone of the Skull is the purulent matter gathered which may be both Expressed and Propagated out of the right side into the lefte by the continuity of the membrane and furthered by the orbicular figure of the head A small portion of the Ichor expressed out of the affected into the sound side sometimes by reason of the tenuity sweateth through the membranes into the marrow of the braine and out of it into the nerues whence comes their inflamation sometimes by the outside of the membranes it falleth into the spinal marrow which is inuested with the same membrane where goading the originall of the nerues it procureth a convulsion by sympathy or consent so that when the membranes are vellicated or enflamed a convulsion sooner ensueth then if the internall or marrowey substance of the nerues were affected But why is the convulsion not in the wounded but in the opposite part It is obserued that sometimes when the right side of the head is wounded the right parts of the body are also conuelled sometimes the opposite parts onely oftentimes both together When saith Galen the Inflamation toucheth the originall It is not therefore perpetually true that when one part of the head is wounded the opposite part is conuelled but because it hapneth so for the most part let vs enquire the reason thereof The convulsion is in the opposite not in the wounded part because the purulent matter Why the woūded part is not conuelled which is expressed or diffused out of the wounded into the sound part hath no issue but is there stabled or gathered and breedeth an inflamation and from thence comes the convulsion but the sanies or Matter which gathereth in the wounded part hath free egresse by the wound and by the section of the bone and so the Membrane is not affected And this haply Hippocrates meaneth when in the history of the wench he saide that the left parts suffered Hippocrates convulsion because the contusion was on the right side VVe may also assigne another reason of this convulsion and that very probable The wounded part is not conuelled Another reason of it but the opposite because the faculty of the wounded part is extinguished and dissolued and the temperament which is the cause of all actions is notably depraued wherefore though the faculty be prouoked yet it answereth not neyther doth any motion follow such prouocation Now that vpon a suppuration or notable inflamation the part is almost mortified Hippoc. is witnesse in his book de vulneribus Capitis but the opposite part hauing a quick sense is presently contracted draweth into consent with it all the nerues of the same side and so convulsion followeth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 by a rectitude of vessels And this our coniecture the place of Hippocrates aboue named maketh good For when the convulsion falleth vpon Hippocrates the opposite part then the case is desperate pustules arise in the tongue and the patient dyeth in a delirium or light phrensie QVEST. VI. Why when the right side of the head is wounded or obstructed the opposite part is resolued or becommeth Paralytical COncerning the Palsy the difficulty is greter the knot harder to cleaue namely why when one part of the head is wounded or one of the vētricles of the braine obstructed or compressed the opposite parts are resolued or become Paralyticall That it is most true the examples That the opposite parts are resolued prooued by authorities are infinite and all Physitions both ancient and moderne in their writings do agree vpon it Hippocrates maketh mention of this kinde of Palsie in his booke de vulneribus capitis and in Coacis praenotionibus Those saith he that becom impotent of wounds in their head do recouer if an Ague without horror ouertake them otherwise they become apoplecticall in the right parts or in the left That is paralyticall For Hippocrates often saith Crus apoplecticum for the leg taken with the Palsie In the history of the sonnes of Phanius and Euergus in his 7. booke Epidemiωn hee writeth A history out of Hippocrates that they become impotent if the wound be in the right part on the left side and on the right side if the wound were on the left part Aretaeus in the 7. chapter of his first booke de Causis et sigmis diutur norum morborum is of the same minde If saith he the head be wounded at first on the right part the left side is resolued if on the left the right side Salicetus setteth this down for a Catholike or vniuersall Theoreme or Maxime Whensoeuer any man is wounded in the head so that a Palsie happen thereupon if the wound be in the right part of the head the left side will be paralytical and contrariwise The same hath Iohannes de Vigo obserued and Hollerius in his Commentaries in Coacas praenotiones Hippocratis And wee also saith Laurentius Diuers opinions how this Palsie commeth our Author haue obserued the same Wherefore that it is so there is no controuersie all the question is why and how it commeth so to passe and that indeed is much disputed Some imagine that the nerues in their originall are so implicated that the right nerues run along the left side and the left along the right side intersecting themselues in manner of a S. Andrewes Crosse which The first intersection is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and therfore it is say they that when the right part is obstructed or otherwise affected the left side is conuelled or resolued and on the contrary because the originall is affected And this is the opinion of Cassius and Aretaeus Cassius thought that the nerues do so take their originall from the Basis of the Braine that those Of Cassius and Aretaeus that the nerues crosse one another which arose from the right part were carried into the left and those which arose from the left side into the right crossing one another ouerthwart Aretaeus is of the same opinion The right nerues saith he do not proceede directly into the right parts vnto their terminations but as soone as they spring vp they cut ouer to the other side crossing one another like the letter X which the Graecians call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 But the leuity of this opinion needeth no Consuted 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 consuration For ocular inspection which wee call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉
and the Nerues is voluntary Furthermore we are not to thinke that the Nerues are so much the fitter for motion Second by how much they haue more marrow rather we beleeue the contrary that the harder Nerues are fitter for motion and the softer for sense because sensation is a passion but motion an action we know also by experience that the Opticke Nerue which is the softest of all the Nerues hath more Marrowy substance then the Nerue of the seconde Coniugation yet the Opticke is the Nerue of Sense the other the nerue of Motion Add heereto that Motion should bee rather ascribed to the Membranes then to the Marrow because the Marrow melteth away but the Membrane is stretched contracted so the Nerues of children are weake and soft and vnfit for motion To all these let vs add the authority of Galen in the third chapter of his seuenth Book de Placitis Hip. Platonis where he saith that the faculties of Motion and Sense are only conteined in The authority of Galen the Marrow of the Braine and that the Membranes were made to cloath and norish the Marrow for no other vse We conceiue therefore that this Paradox although it be witty yet will not holde at the Touchstone and therefore we determine that the Marrow of the Braine is without all sense and Animall motion and yet is the fountaine and originall of all Animall The Braine hath neyther sense nor motion and yet is the original of both Sense and motion Of Sense because it perceyueth the representations and receyueth the impressions of all sensible things Of Motion because it dispenseth and affoordeth al that power and command for the auoyding of that which is noxious and prosecution of that which is profitable from whence it commeth to passe that when the Braine is il affected the inferior parts haue neither Sense nor Motion QVEST. XI Of the Temperament of the Braine THE Physitians and the Peripatetikes in this do agree that the brain in the Actiue qualities is cold in the Passiue moyst But heere in they differ that Aristotle in the seuenth Chapter of his second booke De partib Animalium and in the fift Chapter of his booke De Somno Vigilia determines that the braine is actually cold and ordained to refrigerate or coole the heart Contrariwise the Physitians say that it is Actually hot For Galen in his eight booke De Placitis Hip. Platonis saith that the brain is hotter then the most soultry aer in summer Reconciliatiō of Aristotle and Galen Some there are that do thus reconcile Galen and Aristotle There is say they a double temperament of the braine the one In-bred the other Influent by the In-bred temper the proper composition and the marrowy substance the braine is very cold but by the influent temper it is hot for it is full of spirits and intertexed with very many small Arteries If you respect the in-bred temper then is the temperament of the braine and the spinall marrow one and the same because they haue the same marrowy substance If you respect the Influent temper then saith Galen in the ninthe chapter of his second booke De Temperam the braine is hotter then the spinall marrow as well because there passe vnto it more Arteries as also because many fumid exhalations do ascend vnto it Some say that the braine is simply and obsolutely hot but colde comparatiuely because it is the coldest of all the bowels And Galen in Arte medica writeth That a hot braine is colder then the coldest heart In which respect Hippocrates in his booke de Glandulis calleth the braine 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Seate of Coldnesse But I cannot approue this opinion For if the brain be colder then the skinne which is in a meane betwixt the extremes then it is simply cold and not hot Now that it is colder then the skin Galen teacheth in his second booke de Temperamentis It will be obiected that if the braine be laide bare it will presently be refrigerated Obiection by the aer whereas the skin is not affected therewith I answer that the braine is altered Solution by the aer because it is not accustomed thereto as the skinne is so the Teeth beecause they are accustomed to the aire do not grow blacke as other bones do if they bee layde bare Or againe that the braine is hotter to feele to then the skin because it is couered with the scull and the membrane and hath many complications of the arteries therin We determine therefore that the Braine of his in-bred temper is colder then the skin but by his influent temper is hotter That the Braine should be colde it was very necessary least a Member set a part for continuall cogitation or discourse should bee enflamed and set Why the braine ought to be cold on fire Againe that the animall spirits which are very fine and subtill might be retained and not vanish away Finally that our Motions and Sensations should not be rash or phanaticall as they are in such as are phreneticall that is haue their braines in flamed It may be obiected if the Braine be cold how then doth it ingender animal and attenuate vitall spirits for these are Obiection Solution the workes of a vehement heare I answer that the spirits are attenuated in the textures of the small arteries in the strayghtes of those passages that the animall spirit is formed not so much by any manifest qualitie such as is heate as by an in bred and hidden proprietie But the reason why the spirits of the extreame hote Heart are thicker then those of the Why the spirits of the extreame hot heart are thicker then the Animall spirits very cold Braine must not be referred to the weaknes of the heate which is the worker but to the disposition of the matter which is the sufferer For the heart maketh vitall spirits of of thicke blood brought vnto it through the hollow veine the Braine maketh Animall spirits of subtill and thin vital blood and spirits so a weaker heate boyleth a thin and easily concocted aliment whereas a very strong heate will hardly ouercome a thicke aliment It remaineth therefore that in the actiue qualities the braine is cold That in the passiue qualities it is moist both by the in-bred and influent temper no man I thinke is vnresolued for it appeareth euen to the touch Now it was by nature Why the braine was made moist created moist as well for more perfect sensation for sensation is a passion and those things that are moyst do more easily receiue the images and representations of things offered vnto them as also for the originall and propagation of the nerues which would not haue beene so flexible if the braine had beene hard Adde heereto that if the braine had beene hard it had also beene heauy and the waight and hardnesse thereof would haue bin offensiue to the sinewes Finally it
Membrane and this is the reason why when we desire to view a thing curiously we often winke with our eye-lids The second vse of the lids is that the visible vertue might sometimes be turned from the light especially in sleepe that a man might take the better rest and hence it is that in The second those creatures which want eye-lids as Locusts Lobsters Crabs such like insectiles nature hath prouided certaine cauities whereinto in the time of their repose as into certaine chambers they receiue their whole eies and shoote them out againe when they looke abroade for shoe hath an especiall care of this that euery sense should be kept fit to performe his owne action And hence we may imagine the vnnaturall and cruell punishment which the Carthagenians inflicted vpon M. Atikus kegulus whom in the first Punicke warre they had at vnawares surprized who being by them sent to Rome after he had before taken his Oath to returne did in the Senate-house disswade them from making exchange of captiues wherefore when he returned they cut off his eye-lids and set him in the sunne vntill the brightnesse of the obiect ouer-came not onely the spirites of his Eyes but also of his life A third vse of the eye-lids is to recreate the sight least at one time too great a number The third vse of spirits should be exhausted for if the eyes should be so long open as wee are awake they would be wearied and many things falling vpon their coates would offend them Againe if they be not quite shut vp they direct our sight if we desire to take a true ayme at any thing which is somewhat farre off Finally they serue to defend the soft eyes from the incursion of outward iniuries because it is much better sometimes not to see at all then by offering to see suffer our eies to be offended And thus much concerning the circumstances of the Eies Now we proceede vnto the Eye it selfe CHAP. IIII. Of the Fat Muscles of the Eyes THE parts wherof the Eye consisteth are fiue Fat Muscles Vessels Coats The partes whereof the eie is compounded and Humors The Fat which Anatomists do some of them call Adeps som of them Pinguedo is verie plentifull about the eyes Tab. 1. Fig. 6. T especially it is found in those spaces which are betwixt the Muscles and the Nerues It is also more plentifull at the vpper Muscle because that is greater and ordained for more frequent strong motions In like manner toward the lower side of the Orbe there is plentie of fat which like a pillowe is laide vnder the Eyes In what places of the eye the fat is foūd that with their weight they should not presse themselues vpon the bones Againe betwixt the Muscles and the globe of the eie there is aboūdant fat that when the Muscles worke the eie should not suffer compression Finally there is also fat found neere the Veines and Arteries whereby the vessels are smeared ouer and their distention preuented in the motion of the eies The vse of the fat in as much as it is warme is to heate the eye which by nature is waterish and cold and beside to defend it from the coldnesse of the outward aire And that is The vses of the fat the reason why we neuer feele any manifest coldnesse or stiffenesse in our eyes Againe the humidity of the sat doth moysten the Muscles that they becōe not exiccated or dried vp in their often motions The softnesse of the fat keepeth the eyes from being offended by the bones about them The vnctuosity or oyly fatnesse maketh their motion swift and facile and beside when the Muscles are somewhat dried because of their motion and as it were consumed it affoordoth Aliment vnto them The Muscles of the Eyes although they belong to another place namely to the Booke Why the muscles of the eye are described in this place of the Muscles yet because wee are desirous to absolue the History of the Senses in this present Booke wee will take liberty to varry something from our scope and set downe as perfect a description of them heere as we can And that was the reason why before we were so large in describing the Muscles of the eye browes and eye-liddes concerning all which we will spare our labour and yours when wee come to the History of the Muscles Because therefore our eyes were giuen vs as spies and scout-watches that wee might pursue things profitable and eschew that that is hurtfull Nature made not the eyes immouable for then they shoulde haue discerned onely that which is opposite vnto them for so saith Aristotle in his second booke Departibus Animalium and the tenth chapter Gerimnus We see by a right line per directum that is we see by a straight line not in euery position saith Galen in the eight Chapter of his tenth booke de vsupartium because oblique side backward higher and lower Obiects do not fall in with the ball of the Eye Nature therefore hath so disposed the Eyes that they may moue turn themselues on euery side at their pleasure But Galen addoth in the place before quoted that not only the eyes are moued but also the neck and the head are made mooueable for the behoof of the eyes because there are six positions of place vnto all which the eye ought to mooue that is to say vpward downeward forward backward on the right hand and on the left It was therfore of necessity that the eyes shuld haue other helps beside their own motion for the eyes are not mooued forward and backward partly because there was no absolute necessity and partly because it was impossible it was not necessary they should moue forward sayth Aquapendens because the eye doth not attaine vnto the light but the light vnto the eie which in a moment enlightneth an infinite space euen vnto the eie yea insinuateth it selfe thereinto But the wise Creator hath made amends for the defect of this motion of the eyes by the help of the motion of the head which out of hād conuerteth it selfe to see those things which the eie could not by his proper motions perceiue Moreouer that wee might see As also the motion of the thighes whatsoeuer is behind our backe which could not be done onely by the circumuolutions of the head Nature hath so prouided that the thighes can carry the body round In like manner the motion of the eye vpward is assisted by the backeward motion of the head and of the whols spine which they haue experience of that striue to take view of the pinnacle of a high Steeple so also the motion of the eye downeward is furthered by that motion of the head and of the necke which is forward Seeing therefore it was necessary that the eyes should bee moued with voluntary motion and all voluntary motion is made by muscles therefore our wise Creator hath giuen Why their muscles
middest thereof hath it a bosome Table 3. figu 9. r and 18 β whereinto it receiueth the chrystaline humour And although it be compassed about by the net-like coate called Amphiblestroides whereby it is nourished from the veines disseminated there through yet notwithstanding it hath a proper coate of his owne called Vitrea which if it be broken this humour presently melteth and resolueth into water CHAP. X. Of the vse of the Humours of the Eye and of the Sight HAuing declared the admirable wisedome prouidence and goodnes of God our Creator in the conformation of this diuine member which wee call the Eie although we haue spoken somewhat in the History of euery particular part concerning their vse yet there remaine many things worthy our obseruation A philosophicall discourse of the vse of the eie touching the humours which being ioyned to that that hath bin sayd before will better absolue and accomplish this discourse of the vse of the eye and the true manner of sight Which though I must confesse that they are more Philosophicall then Anatomicall yet because they pertaine to the same subiect I presume the Reader will not abhor from them That the Eyes are the instruments of the sight by which it perceiueth all visible things as well Proper as Common there is no man ignorant Proper as all colours Common as the figure magnitude number motion and scite which are sensible qualities common The proper obiects of the sight Common to all the Sences so that it is truely sayed that the Eye seeth not a Man but those thinges which are visible in a Man as colours together with the scite figure magnitude number and motion of his partes out of which afterward the Soule collecteth that that thing is a Man The Eie is framed of many parts all which were created for the vse of the sight But because in euery organ which is compounded of many parts there is one similar particle vppon Particular vses of the parts which the action of that organ doth especially depend it would be knowne what this particle is in the eye we answere that it is the Chrystaline humour which is the authour of the action because in it the species or formes of visible thinges are receiued and by it iudged of Beside this there are some particles without which the action cannot be as the optick nerue which leadeth along the faculty vnto the christaline some also by whose helpe the action â—â— made more perfect as the membranes and the muscles and finally some particles aâ—â— ordayned for the conseruation of all these as the Eye-liddes and the partes about them Seeing therefore the faculty is deriued from the braine by the opticke nerues vnto the eyes which are set as scout-watches to take knowledge of the ariuall of outward thinges that they may better apprehend the knowledge of such outward obiectes it was necessary that whatsoeuer is to be perceiued should touch the nerue for Aristotle sayeth in his third Booke de Anima That euery action is made by contaction This contaction is here made by a medium or meane for the Sences doe perceiue All sense is by contaction their obiects through a meane Wherefore seeing the nerue is separated from the visible obiect that there may bee sight it is necessary there should bee a contaction either of the nerue to the obiect or of the obiect to the nerue or else that either of them should be moued in a certaine proportion to the other The two first wayes it cannot be as euen Sense it selfe teacheth vs and therfore it must How many wales contaction is made be done the third way If vision be made the third way then either something must proceed from the nerue to the visible obiects or on the contrary something must be sent from the obiects to the nerue or else both must be that is Sight must bee made either by an emission of spirites or a reception of beames or else by emission and reception both together Now the spirit is not carried from the nerue to the thing that is to bee seene for then it would follow that the nerue alone by which the faculty yssueth can absolue and perfect the action of sight and the iudgement should be made without the eye Againe neither is there any corporeall thing transported from the body which is sent vnto our eyes for then the obiects by continuall diffusion would be diminished Neither is Vision made the third way so that a spirite or a beame or a light should yssue out of the Eie vnto the obiect and againe something of the obiect should be moued vnto the spirite that so the contaction might be made in the middle for then the nerue alone would haue sufficed for the action and the iudgement should haue beene made without the eie VVherefore How sight is made we thinke with the Philosopher that this contaction is made by a medium so that a certaine quality with some colour affecting and changing the ayre that is cleare and lucid betwixt the eie and the obiect doeth transferre from the things themselues the visible species by one right line from the obiect to the eyes yea to the center of the chrystaline humour So the ayre which is in the middest betwixt the eye and the obiect leadeth along that which is perceiued and first of all the colour for the ayre is altered by colours which it receiueth by contaction for euen as the Sun attayning by the brightnes of his light vnto the Element of the ayre illustrateth the same so coulours when they touch the ayre make a kinde of impression therein for the ayre is alwayes capable of colours when it is cleare light and illustrated by the brightnes of the Sunne beames Vision therefore or sight is made by the Reception of visible forms when the light affected with those formes entreth into the eies through their translucid bodies first of al with right beames afterward diuersly refracted or broken and affecteth the chrystaline with some colour which chrystaline as the primary instrument of sight doth in an instaÌ„t receiue those visible formes whereof refraction is made in the membranes perfection in the coniunction of the Opticke nerues and finally a perception in the braine For the light is the Whether in mans eie ther be an ingenit light proper obiect of the sight whereby it is moued and affected Light I say stayned with the formes of colours and externall light for the eie of a man hath not in it any In-bredlight for then he might see in the darke by sending out a light from his eye Albeit Suetonius reporteth that Tiberius Caesar had such an eye and that excellent Philosopher and Physitian Tiberius Caesar Cardanus Ioh. â—ap Porta Cardan as also Iohn Babtista Porta of Naples do affirme the same thing of themselues Some creatures there are we know which see worse in the day time then in the night and therefore they seeke their
haue beene broken For if it had bene but one bone the membrane in impulsion could not haue giuen place because the bone would not haue bent therewith or if the processe of the bone should haue yeelded being necessarily so fine and thin it might easily haue crackt a sunder Wherefore the membrane of the Tympane is to fastened so the tayle of the Hammer that it might not breake when it is violently driuen inward And againe the taile or handle of the Hammer cleaueth vnto the membrane that it might not be driuen too much outward But that it might better resist any violent motion outward or inward there were two other bones added to the Hammer to helpe the flexion and two muscles whereby the motion is restrayned when the hammer with the membrane is driuen with violence either inward or outward The double motion of the hammer For the bone which we compare to a Hammer hath a double motion as Arantius elegantly obserueth pressing forward and recoyling backeward Forward or inward according to the motion of the membrane whereto it is annexed which membrane being shaken by the outward ayre is driuen inward and vpward remaining so long gibbous on the inside til the Inbred ayre is affected with the sound which Inward ayre wandring through the circles conuolutions and burroughs of the eare maketh the repesentations of the sounds to be receiued by the branches or tendrils of the fifth payre of Synewes by which they are conueyed in a moment of time vnto the Braine But that this membrane should not be driuen too farre inward the Hammer opposeth it selfe The Hammer determineth at the small cauity of the Anuill whereinto the head of the Hammer is articulated wherefore the Anuill being a firme and stable bone stayeth the inclination of the membrane euen as sayth Arantius in clocks there are certaine points of iron which wil nor suffer the wheele to run beyond the number limited for the time of the day And as the Anuill is assistant vnto the Hammer by laying a law vpon his motion and therefore hath two legs or processes whereby it is fixed to the stony bone and the stirrop so also the stirrop standing vpon the cauity of the stony bone neere the circles as it were vpon a stable basis doth elegantly sustaine vpon his head which is built in the maner of an arch the longer processe or leg of the Anuill The second motion of the hammer is outward for the membrane of the Tympane Outward together with the Hāmer when the violence or constraint which before bare them inward is remitted do returne vnto their natural station partly by a naturall motion whereby they recouer their former position when the violence is intermitted partly by the muscle which is an instrument of arbitrarie motion for that muscle is contracted toward his originall and so the head of the Hammer is separated from his iuncture with the Anuile and the recurued processe of the Hammer beareth the membrane outward But beside these twoe bones the 2. muscles also of the inward eare doe assist the membrane one of them against the inward impulsion and the other against the outward expulsion The substance of these bones is hard dense and smooth Hard for that helpeth the The substāce of these bones hearing as also addeth a greater strength and firmitude vnto the membrane They are also dense and smooth for the better reception and transportation of the Sound yet Columbus and Coiter are of opinion that the two first are within spongy and medullous The third is so small that there can be no holes perceiued therein And as these bones in forme and figure doe differ much from other bones of the body so also and especially they haue two notable dissimilitudes or disproportions from How they differ from other bones the rest The first is that they are not compassed about with the Periostium least sayth Aquapendens and Placentinus they should be vnfit for the reception of Sounds for if you couer a hard body with a soft cloth and then strike vpon it it will not yeeld so shrill a sound as it doth when it is bare or naked Againe herein they differ from other bones as all Anatomistes doe concurre that they are perfect and accomplished at the very birth hauing the same magnitude then that they haue in olde age partly because man at all times euen from his Infancy hath greate neede of the Sense of Hearing as wel to learne to speak as to gather knowledge partly because the membrane of the Tympane is as much subiect to danger by outward violence in our Infancy as in any time of our life Notwithstanding they are not so hard Why children do not heare so well as grown men in Infancy as in old folke for children are full of moysture whence it is that children do not heare so suddenly as grown men because to the exact perfection of the Sence there is required a notable drinesse Aquapendens addeth a third difference betwixt these bones and other bones of the body for sayeth hee these bones of the Eare doe hang suspended from a membrane Whence it commeth to passe that the externall aire together with the sound is moe easily communicated by the Hammer and the Anuill to the aire implanted in the eare for Soundes are more liuely communicated to hard bodies which hang loose as you may perceiue if you tie a peece of Iron to a string and strike vpon it it wil yeeld a shriller soūd then it will if it be not suspended But this conceit of Aquapendens sounds but harsh in Placentinus eares These bones are also hollowe as well to make them the lighter as also to containe Marrow for their nourishment whereto we may adde that that which is hollow maketh Why they are hollow a better resonance And albeit these three bones are of all others the least in quantitie yet by that which hath beene saide we may conceiue that they are of great vse and necessitie In a word their vses are first to establish and defend the membrane of the Tympane least it should Their vses be torne either by inward windes gathered in the brain or by the violent motion of the outward aire as in thunder shooting off Ordinance or such like Secondlie they yeeld some assistance vnto the Sense of Hearing for by their help the Sound is conuaide by a kinde of consequence or succession to the auditorie Nerue For vpon their commotion the Chord is shaken the implanted aire is moued to receiue the Sound Now the Chord could not haue beene so vehemently moued by the membrane alone as by the membrane and the bones and so these bones together with the Chord being shaken by the appulsion of outward aire doe conferre vnto the distinction of Sounds as the Teeth doe to the explanation of the speach I am not ignorant that many men haue busied themselues to finde out the particular vse of each of these
haue adhaered to a firme basis or foundation QVEST. XXVII Two obscure and intricate questions concerning the motion of the Eyes are resolued WE will now proceede to discusse a very hard probleme concerning the motion of the Eyes the enodation of which knots for ought I know hath First question not as yet beene performed of any man And it is this wherefore the eyes considering they haue seuerall distinct muscles by themselues are yet Why the Eies are moued together with the same motion not moued with diuers motions but are guided together and at the same time with one and the same motion Neither can it be that the right eye should be moued and the left stand still neither can the right be lift vp and the left depressed which identitie of motion is not to bee found in any other part of the body For I haue free liberty at the same moment to mooue my right hand vpward and my left downward Aristotle propounds this question in his Problemes which thus hee endeauoureth to resolue The Solution of Aristotle Though saith he the eyes be double yet there is but one beginning of their motion and the same originall to wit in the Coition or meeting of the Optick nerues Hee therefore referres the cause vnto that Coition Auicen the Prince of the Arabians seemeth to bee of the same minde and Galen in his bookes of the vse of parts where he thinketh the Opticks doe therefore meete in one that one Obiect should not appeare double These things haue some shew of probability but they doe not giue vs full satisfaction For the meeting of the Opticks doth conferre nothing to the motion of the eyes the Opticke nerue doth onely see and carie the visiue spirits vnto the Christialine neither is it inserted into the muscles of the eye It is onely the second coniugation which mooues the eies in that oppilation or stopping Arist answere disallowed our reasons of the opticke nerue and in the disease which the Arabians call Gutta serena the action of Sight doeth wholly perish and yet the motion of the eies is not a whit hindred the meeting therefore of the optick nerues doth nothing further the motion of the eyes Some haue obserued that in many men who all their life long neuer complayned of their Sight the Opticke nerues were so framed that they were continually seperated and did neuer meete together It is therefore very fond and absurd to thinke that both the eyes are moued with the same motion because there is one onely beginning of motion in the meeting of the Opticks seeing neither that Coition nor yet the Opticks themselues doe any whit further the motion but onely the Sense of the Eyes We doe acknowledge a double cause of this motion the Finall and Instrumentall The Finall cause is the perfection of the Sense And this is the perfection of the Sense that The true resolution of the question the Obiect appeare euen such as it is but if the Eyes were moued with diuers motions that one might be caried downeward the other vpward surely euery Obiect though in it owne nature one and the same yet would continually appeare double and so the most noble Sense would be deceiued and the action of Sight would bee imperfect If this seeme harsh to be beleeued you may thus make triall of it If you either lift vp the one eye or depresse it with your finger you shall see all Obiects double and discerne the one to be higher and the other lower because the one eye is moued vpward the other downward But if you shut either of them this double apparition of the Obiect will vanish although you presse that eye with your finger Also if you mooue your eye to the right hand or to the left the Obiect will not appeare double because the Aples of the eyes remaine both in one line But wherefore vpon the diuers motion of the eyes the Obiects are doubled is a thing Question Solution worthy to be vnderstoode Galen in the thirteenth Chapter of his 10. booke de vsu partium writeth that the Diameters of visible Cones or turbinated formes must be placed in one and the same plaine least that which is but one should appeare double But if one of the eyes be moued downward the Aples of them both will not be in the same plaine and the same superficies and so the Obiect would appeare double For then because the beame of the one eye doth not equally reach the Obiect as neither doth the beame of the other that which the Sense perceiueth twise it perceiueth as if it were double or two seuerall things which also happeneth in the Sense of Touching for if one finger be so folded with the other that it be layed aboue it and therewith a man touch a stone the Touch will iudge that to bee double which is but one In the Palsie or the conuulsion of the muscles of the eye it hapneth that the Obiects present themselues in a double forme because the eyes depart from the same superficies so also the Opticks being either loosened or conuelled the pupilla or Aple doth not reteine his equality whence it commeth to passe that all things appeare double and so sometimes a drunken man will thinke all thinges that he seeth double In like manner some that are Strabones that is Squint-eyed doe see things double because one of the Pupillaes is either raised vp or depressed But if the eyes be in the same plaine though they be two yet the visible thing is presented simple before them because the same Species and the same magnitude at the same time is receiued of both the eyes and are together offered to the Common Sense which doth not discerne any thing but that which is present We conclude therefore that first in respect of the finall cause which as wee haue often The conclusion repeated out of Aristotle is the first and chiefe cause in the works of Nature it is that the two eyes bee together and at once mooued I say this is because it doth much tend to the perfection of the Sense And Nature doth continually fit her Instruments as they may best further the finall cause which whither you call the vse of the necessity it is no great matter And therefore she hath so disposed the nerues of the second coniugation which doe carie the commaund of motion and the animall spirit into the muscles which are therefore termed Porters and Cadgers that in their beginning they are continuall making as it were on chord whence it is that the right cannot be moued but the other will follow his motion And this is a new and a most elegant obseruation The other question we shall discouer out of Cassius to wit wherefore the disease of The second question why the disease of the one eye onely doth more prouoke vs. Solution one eye doth more vexe vs then if both were diseased Whether it is
foure extenders doe serue the thumbe which they doe either simply extend or leade to the fingers or from the fingers the tendons of which foure muscles as Galen obserued in the 17. chapter of his sixt Booke de vsu portium are infixed in the ioynt of the bone that is to be moued But because in dissection wee meete first with the muscle which is called Palmaris therefore in the first place we will intreat of it CHAP. XXVIII Of the Muscle of the Palme and 2. or 3 other yssuing from the fleshy Membrane THE Muscle of the palme so called by Laurentius and Bauhine lyeth vppon all the interior Muscles of the Hand Ta. 22. fig. 1. 2. Ta. 23. fig. 1. ◠It is seated in the cubit and is neruous and round arising with a neruous beginning from the sharpe poynte of the inner protuberation of the Arme leaneth vppon and groweth to the middest of two muscles which bend the wrist Ta. 22. fig. 1. δ θ and proceede out of the same protuberation with it Presently His original after his originall it becommeth fleshy yet is the belly of it but small and before it attaine vnto the middle of the cubit it paceth somewhat obliquely afterward it is againe attenuated progresse and groweth small or slender and determineth into a round narrow and long tendon Ta. 23. fig. 1. μ which riding ouer the inner Ligament of the wrest passeth vnder the skinne and his tendon in the ball or palme of the Hand is dilated attenuated and groweth to the skinne yet so that it lyeth not vnder that part of the skinne which couereth the muscles in the hillocke of the thumbe Ta. 22. fig. 3. vnder p and those which leade the little finger from the rest Tab. 22. fig. 1. and 3. S Finally it is ioyned with so strong and fibrous tyes to the rootes of the Fingers that although there be a certain fat or substance Insertion like vnto it of which Galen maketh mention comming betweene yet you can scarce separate the skin of the hand from the sinewy thinnesse of this Tendon The vse of this muscle is firmely to corrugate or contract the skinne of the palme when Vse we would hold any thing fast for by that meanes the skinne becommeth immoueable which if it should moue we could not hold a thing so steddily or so safely Haply also this Tendon is the cause why the skin of the palme hath more exact sense then the skin of the whole body not that so quicke sence is giuen to the hand by this Tendon but because of the foure nerues which run vnto the foure fingers Table 22. is the same with Table 18. Folio 778. Fallopius thrice or foure times found this muscle arising out of the same place in each arme double whereof one did end into abroade Tendon the other was inserted into the Fallopius his obseruation transuerse ligament of the wrest on the contrary Vesalius saith that hee found more then once the fleshy part thereof wanting and then the broade Tendon was made of a portiō of those Tendons that bend the wrest Tab. 22 fig. 1 δ θ before they ascend vnto the same Sometimes also saith Bauhine the broade Tendon is produced from an interall transuerse ligament which runneth ouer the Tendons of the wrist which also Columbus obserued in the dissection of some theeues Beside this muscle of the palme in the beginning of the inside of the hand at the lower A musculous substance arising from the fleshy pannicle The formes of it The fibres part of the hillocke called by some Mons Lunae by some Mons Martis by others Veneris but we will cal it the Mountaine of the Moone where the eight bone of the wrist is seated there is found a certaine flesh It proceedeth out of the fleshy pannicle or from the membrane of that muscle which frameth the foresaide Mountaine of the Moone This flesh carrieth the forme sometimes of two seldome of three slender and short muscles It hath transuerse fibres and runneth to the middle and inner part of the ball of the hand and is implanted at the broade Tendon of the palme muscle where it receiueth a complication with the fleshy panicle which in that place is fatty The vse of this flesh is in great contractions of the palme to draw the Mountaine of the Moone to the middle of the hand His vse when wee would make it as hollow as wee can or else to binde in the two hillocks at the thumbe and the little finger for the same vse Of this muscle if so you will call it none of the Ancients made mention but it was first found by Iohannes Baptista Conanus first described in print by Valuerda who yet mistaketh the vse for he saith it was made for extention CHAP. XXIX Of the substance which commeth betweene the skinne of the palme and of the fingers and their Tendons BEtwixt the Tendon and skinne of the Palme and the inner side of the fingers there appeareth a certaine fleshy substance like vnto far of which it shall not be amisse a little to discourse Although the whitish colour it hath and the hardnes do more resemble fat then flesh yet we conceiue that it may more fitly be referred to a kinde of flesh as well because it is full of sinewy fibres as also because there are many small and threddy Veines disseminated there-through Add also that though a man be neuer so much extenuated or consumed yet there alwaies remaines some part of this substance whereupon it is that Galen cals it flesh and the Arabians thought it to be a kinde of simple flesh different from the body of a muscle It may That it is flesh not Fat. be obiected how then comes it to be so hard I answere by the contaction of the bones and of the Neruous parts which lie vpon it and therefore it is like the fat which ioyneth vpon the ioynts of the bones The vse of this substance is to be as it were a pillow or bed whereon the many propagations of sinews might lie soft which were deriued from greater Nerues to make the hand of exquisite sense Such a substance also is found betwixte the Tendons that bend the fingers and their skin least when we are constrained rudely to take hold of any hard substance the tendons should be pressed or otherwise offended for which cause also it is very plentifull vnder the skin of the soale of the foote yet it is to bee noted that there is lesse store of it about the Ioynts least it should hinder their Motion especially when they bend into an acute Angle In like manner in the sides of the Fingers there is some of this flesh to fill vp the spaces In what parts of the Finger this substance is betwixt the Ioynts which otherwise would haue bene hollow because the side knuckles at each bone doe stand somewhat out from the length of the bone which equalitie was not
Inmate The Nerues are nothing else but productions of the marrowy and slimy substance of the Brayne through which the Animall spirits do rather Beame then are transported inuested with the two Membranes wherein the Braine it selfe is inuested commonly called the Pia and Dura mater And this substance was indeede more fit for Irradiation then a conspicuous or open cauity which would haue made our motions Sensations more sudden commotiue violent and disturbed whereas now the members receiuing a gentle and successiue illumination are better commaunded by our Will and moderated by our Reason The Natures of these three kindes of Spirites wee haue partly handled before in the third the sixt and the seauenth Books therefore we will no longer detaine the Reader by way of Introduction but descend vnto their particular Histories CHAP. I. What a Veine is HAuing wrought our way through the darke and shady groue of the muscles Nulli penetrabilis astro into the secret whereof I thinke no wit of man is able to reach And therefore it shall be no wonder if we bring some scratches out of so thorny a copse we are now ariued in these medows where the vessels like so many brooks do water and refresh this pleasant Paradise or modell of heauen and earth I mean the body of man And surely by these streames doe grow many pleasant flowers of learning to entertaine and delight our mindes beside the maine profit arising therefrom vnto the perfection of that art we haue in hand Vnder the name of vessels we vnderstand three kinds veines arteries and sinewes because out of these as out of riuers doe flow into all the parts of the body Blood Heat Three kindes of vessels Spirits Life Motion and Sense Wherefore Hippocrates in his booke de Corde calleth them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the riuers of the body of man Neither let any man taxe vs for inuerting our order when wee first begin with the history of the veines then descend vnto the arteries and lastly vnto the nerues because the veines are most simple as hauing but one proper coate and that thin the arteries two and those thicker but the substance of nerues is manifold as being within soft and marrowy without membranous For they must remember that the maine guide of our labour is the order of dissection Now the originall of the veines is in the lower region at which we began our discourse The originall of the arteries in the middle region and that of the nerues in the vpper A veine therefore is by the later Greeke writers absolutely called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Eudox calleth it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Hesychius 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because it is the canale of the blood The Antient Physitions The names of veines as Hippocrates vsed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as a common name to veines and arteries so in his booke de carnibus There are two 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 saith he two hollow veines issuing from the heart the one is called a veine the other an arterie Sometimes Hippocrates distinguisheth betwixt these two veines by adding the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which signifieth to beate as if he should say arteries are beating veines veines those that doe not beate Many places might be alledged to prooue this distinction if wee thought it needfull Auicen cals the arteris beating and bold veines Cicero venas micontes which doe sometimes lift vp themselues and sometimes sinke againe Celsus calleth them veines fitted for the spirits and the true veines he cals quietas still veines Hippocrates in his boooke de morbo sacro to distinguish the veines from the arteries which are the conceptacles of the spirits calleth them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 bloody because they conuey the blood The latter Grecians haue included this name within narrower bounds and restrained it onely to quiet or still veines which haue but one simple coate in whose footesteps we also doe insist calling the arteries not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 but 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 so the vessels beeing distinct their names also are distinct Furthermore the vessels are distinguished in their structure motion and vse In the How veines arteries differ structure because a veine hath a thin coate whereas the coate of the artery is very thicke In their motion because an artery is mooued perpetually and conspicuously with a diastloe and systole that is a dilation and contraction whereas the veine is altogether immooueable In vse because the artery transporteth the vitall spirit together with exceeding thin blood The veines carry a thicker blood and a more cloudy spirit the veins haue an inbred faculty to alter and boyle the blood the arteries haue no such faculty because their blood attaineth his vtmost elaboration and perfection in the heart But let vs come to the definition of a veine A veine may be considered two manner of wayes either as it is a Similar or as it is an originall part Galen in his 2. booke de Elementis accounts it Similar if not indeed Two considerations of a veine yet at least according to the iudgement of the sense againe in his booke de morborum differentiis he proueth that it is organical for hee calleth veines arteries and muscles organs of the first kinde and most simple organs If you regard a veine as it is a Similar part then must you define it by his temper for the temper is the forme of the similarity that I may so speake to be A cold and drie part generated out of a slimy and following portion of the seed I sayde it was cold In respect of his naturall temper for otherwise by the contaction of the blood and the perfusion of the spirits it is very hot And in Galens first booke de temperamentis It is sayd to be hotter then the skin If you consider a vein as it is an organicall part then shall you define it to be A vessell long round excauated or hollowed like a reede hauing but one and that a thin coate wouen with all kindes of fibres arising from the liuer and appointed or set a part by a Nature to contain boyle and distribute the blood In this definition you haue the figure compositton originall vse and action of the organ elegantly described The roundnesse and cauity of the vessel expresseth the figure of the organ whereby a veine is distinguished from a nerue for nerues haue onely pores but no sensible cauities Praxagoras therefore was in an error and so are those that follow him who call nerues venas continuatas continued veines The explication of the definition The simple and thin coate noteth the structure of the vessell and discriminateth or putteth a difference betwixt a veine and an artery for an artery hath a double coate one outward and another inward and if we may beleeue Erophilus it is fiue-fold thicker then a veine because it containeth thinner and more spryghtfull blood which if it were not concluded or shut vp
are not so vnited but that they remayne a good while two distinct Nerues contayned in one membrane which was the cause of the errour They get out of the Scull at the second hole of the Nowle-bone by which the greater branch of the internall Iugular veine did ascend into the braine The one of these Nerues is the anterior and the lesse the other is the posterior or the greater The lesser when it hath gotten out of the Scull descendeth directly vnto the muscles of His egresse the Tongue to whose roote it affoordeth a branch and to those muscles which occupy the Fauces or chops and into them most part of it is consumed The greater Nerue not farre from his egresse sendeth a branch backward tab 22. fig. 2. f which is distributed with many surcles into the muscles that occupy the necke especially into the Cowle muscle which is the second of the shoulder-blade The Trunke it selfe descending is connected or tyed to the seauenth Coniugation tab 22. fig. 2. â— to the Sleepy artery and to the internall Iugular veine by the interuening His descending trunke or interposition of a membrane and at the sides of the Larinx or Throttle it is increased by a branch from the seauenth Coniugation tabl 22. fig. 2. i with which branch notwithstanding it is not mixed for Platerus in this mixtion mist his marke but colligated or tyed thereto Presently after it sendeth surcles ouerthwart ta 22. fig. 2. g vnto the muscles of the Larinx especially those on the inside thereof It affordeth also a few small branches distinct from the former to the muscles of the Fauces or chops From thence it descendeth vnto the Chest and runneth quite through his capacity as also thorough the capacitie of the lower belly and distributeth many branches vnto the bowels of both bellies as wee haue partly declared already and shall do heereafter towards the end of this booke And because it runneth almost through all the bowels of the body it is therefore called Coniugatio vaga the gadding or wandering coniugation Falopius tels vs that the Membrane wherewith this sixt nerue is inuested as it falleth through the perforation assumeth vnto it selfe sometime manifestly sometime secretly a Falopius his conceit of the Oliue-like bodies few small and capillary fibres of the nerue and when it is out of the scul produceth a certaine long bodie resembling an Oliue which is sometimes single sometimes double in both sides and the colour fleshy although the substance be neruous and hard This Oliue-like body endeth into a certaine neruous fibre which falling down the neck together with some propagations of nerues coupled together which yssue from the first and second and fourth and fift and sixt or from the first and second and fift and sixte and seuenth paires of the necke doth make a texture or complication of vesselles like a little net which descendeth on either hand downe the forepart of the whole necke and in that complication saith he other new Oliue-like bodies do sometimes grow togither whose number is vncertaine consisting of no other substance but as it were a heape of nerues growing together into a callous or fast body like a scarre And this coniunction of nerues he calleth sexti paris plexum the texture or complication of the sixt coniugation from which texture many nerues saith he do descend vnto the basis of the heart Here from also very often doth a nerue take his originall which on both sides is conueyed vnto the midriffe although it receiue a further increment or encrease from the fourth and fift coniugations of the necke Hee affirmeth further that from this complication there yssueth a nerue which descending through the Chest along the rootes of the ribs is conueyed to the roots of the Mesentery Thus farre Falopius Now that from this sixt coniugation nerues are sent vnto the bowelles and not from Why the bowelles haue nerues from this coniugation and not from the spinall Marrow the marrow contained in the rack-bones this reason may be giuen because hauing not voluntary motion they did not stand in neede of so hard Nerues as doe arise out of the spinall marrow properly so called yet that they might not be altogether without Sense they receiue Nerues of Sense that is soft nerues issuing out of the marrow of the Braine whilst it is yet contained in the scull and the rather saith Galen in the 11 chap. of his ninth Booke de vsu partium because the substance it selfe of the bowels is but soft but because these Nerues were to go a long iourney least they should be offended they are inuested with strong membranes and besides fastned to the bodies by which they passe It is also worth the obseruation that the nerues which are disseminated from the sixt A notable obseruation coniugation into the trunke of the bodye are as large almost at their terminations after they haue bene diuersly diuided and subdiuided as they are in their originall which cannot be saide of any other vessell It hath bene also publickly deliuered I thinke from no other warrant but speculatiue Learning that this nerue descendeth into the ioynts and A nouell conceite in the feete is the cause of the great consent betwixt the feet and the head For mine own part I could neuer haue light of any such diuarications out of Classicke Anatomists beside what neede we search for an imaginary way of consent when we know that which is direct and agreed vpon by all which is the branches of the nerues of the spinal marrow wonderfully vniting themselues in the Tendons of the Muscles of the foote by which any annoyance may at the first hand be conueyed vnto the marrow of the backe and so vnto the Braine Moreouer Galens reason of the allowance of these Nerues of the sixte coniugation to the bowels in the place last before quoted were but of small moment if the feet also had nerues deriued therefrom But this onely by the way The seauenth Coniugation which Archangelus accounteth for the eight because he maketh the organs of smelling a coniugation of nerues the seauenth coniugation I say The seauenth coniugation Tab. 22. fig. 1 h fig. 2 H mooueth the tongue and is the hardest of all those that yssue out of the Braine within the scull and indeede it taketh his originall from a harder beginning that is to say in the bindpart of the Nowle-bone where the marrow of the Braine endeth saith Galen in the twelfth of his ninth Booke de vsu partium From the beginning of the His originall spinall marrow saith Vesalius but before it yssue out of the scull From the Braine not from the After-braine saith Columbus Archangelus saith from the backpart of the marrow where the cauity is that is compared to a writing pen. From the marrow of the Braine saith Bauhine when it is ready to fall out of the scull Tab. 22. fig. 1 2 E that is to say at the
the whole body stability rectitude and forme for they are as it were the carkasse of a Shippe whereto the rest of the parts are fastned whereuppon they are sustayned and the whole mountenance of the body is built and consuinmated From their figure and magnitude we esteeme of the figure and magnitude of The knowledge of the bone necessary the rest of the parts without the knowledge of the bones we must needes bee ignorant of the originals and insertions of Muscles of the courses of the Veines of the distribution of the Arteries and of the partitio is of the Nerues The vniuersall syntax or composition of the Bones from the Head to the Feete the ancient Grecians called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as it were a dryed or arrid carkasse Galen defineth the Bones to be the hardest the dryest most terrestriall part of the creature Galens definitions But this definition doth not please the pallats of the new writers as being not exquisite or Philosophicall but made onely for the ruder and more ignorant sort by way of innitiation Laurentius defineth them more accuratly thus A Bone is a similar part the dryest and coldest of all the rest made of the earthy crassament Laurentius definition and fatnesse of the seede by the formatiue faculty assisted by the strength of heate for the stability rectitude and figure of the whole body And this definition he sayth is Essentiall because it designeth all the causes of Bones the Efficient the Materiall the Formall and the Finall The forme of similar partes according to Physitians is the Temper because it is the first Power whereby and wherewith The explications thereof the forme worketh and suffereth whatsoeuer the similar part woorketh as a similar Siccity therefore and Frigidity dryeth and coldnes doe expresse the forme of a bone It is drye because of the exhaustion of moysture and fatnes made by an intense or high heate Cold it is because the heate vanisheth away for defect of moysture These primary qualities The forme are accompanied with secondary hardnes heauines and whitenes A Bone is hard not by concretion as yee for then it would be dissolued by the fire not by tention as the head of a drum but by siccity as wood Heauy it is because it is earthy as also because the aire and the water in it are extreamly densated and thickned and it is white because it is spermaticall The matter of the Bones is the crassament of the seed that is the thicker and more The matter earthy part Aristotle cals it Seminale excrementum the excrement of the Seede For though the Seede seeme to bee Homogeny yet it hath some parts thicker then others There is in it also something fat and something glutinous or slimy Of the glutinous part because it may best be extended or streatched are made the nerues membranes and the ligaments Of the fatty part are made the bones and this Hippocrates confirmeth where he sayth Where there is more fat then glew or slime there the bones are formed The Efficient cause of a bone is the Formatiue power which some call the Idoll or The efficient the Idea of him that ingendreth this faculty vseth the heat for his architect and the spirit for his chiefe worke-man and to these the Philosopher attributeth Ordination Secretion Concretion Densation and Rarification The heate therefore drinketh vp and dryeth the fatnes whence comes hardnes and solidity So saith Hippocrates Bones are condensated by heat and so grow hard and dry Futhermore this heate although it be moderate for the substance of our natiue heat is well tempered yet because it maketh a longer stay in a more dense and fast matter it bringeth forth the same effects that an intense or high heat doth yea it seemeth to burn whereupon Hippocrates doubted not to say that the generation of bones was made by exustion that is by burning The finall cause of Bones which Galen is wont to call their vse is well expressed in the The end last particle of the definition For the primary and most common vse of bones is to giue the body stability rectiude and figure Stability because they are as it were propugnacles Stability or defences against all violence beside they sustaine the body as the bases or finials of a house sustaine the roofe Rectitude because without bones the creature cannot stand vp Rectitude right but would creepe vpon the ground as a Serpent or a worme Hippocrates secund◠Epidemiωn maketh mention of a childe borne without bones yet were the principal parts of his body separated and fashioned but he was not aboue foure fingers big and dyed soone after he was borne Finally the bones do giue the figure to the body because from them dependeth the procerity or stature and the limitation of the growth For those that haue a great head haue large braines those that are narrow chested their Lungs also and bowels are but short and narrow those that haue small iawes haue also small muscles By reason of this finall cause which being it selfe immoueable mooueth all the rest the bones are of that substance which we see hard solid and insensible hard and solid for so it behooued a pillar or prop to be insensible ad 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that they should not bee so apprehensiue of payne for because they sustaine the burthen of the body and are continually moued they could not haue endured so diuers motions without paine if they had beene sensible therof and then the life of the creature should haue beene alwayes sad and quaerulous But this want of sense comes not from their earthly substance for then the teeth which are Why bones are insensible the hardest of all bones should haue no sense but because there are no nerues disseminated through their substance The differences of Bones are to be taken sayth Galen as also the differences of singular parts from those things which follow the essence or happen thereto The differences of bones The essence of a bone that is his cold and dry temper doe the Tactile qualities follow Hardnesse Softnesse Density and Rarity the accidents are Magnitude Figure Situation Motion Sense and the like The first diuision therefore of bones is from their hardnesse Some bones are very From the hardnesse hard as those that are called Stony bones and the Teeth others soft in respect as the spongy bones and those which we call Appendices or Appendants others are simply hard as all the rest From the magnitude some bones are great some little and some moderate There Magnitude are among the Anatomists that account those bones to be great which are of a large bore or very hollow and medullous or marrowy But wee make account of such bones for great as are great in quantity whether their marrow be lesse or more for the hanch-bones and the shoulder-blades which are not hollow nor medullous are yet great bones But because
the quantity belongeth to Dimentions and Dimention is three-fold long broad and deepe therefore from the magnitude of bones may be taken a three-fold diuision of them For some are long as the thigh bone others are short as the bones of the fingers some are broad as the shoulder-blade and hanch-bones others narrow some crasse or thick others fine or thinne From the figure some bones are plaine some round some haue three sides some Figure haue foure some are like a boat some like a Cube or Dye some like a Mallet or an anuill or a stirrop c. To the figure also we referre as the best Physitians doe the passages and cauities the smoothnes or roughnesse Some therefore are solid others not solid some smoothe and some rough I call that solid which is not hollow Solid bones therefore doe eyther appeare altogether solid hauing no cauities or dens in thē or at least none sensible as the bones of the eares and the nose or else they appeare solid on the outside but within are full of perforations and holes like sponge as are the bodies of the rackbones To solid bones we oppose those that are hollow that is such as haue a sensible or conspicuous cauity which Galen calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a belly In these is that substance contained which we properly call marrow in latine Medulla and therefore such bones we say are medullous that is marrowy bones From the situation there may a twofold difference of bones be taken because vnder the Site name of situation we comprehend the position and the connexion If you respect their position some are vpper others are lower some on the fore-side others on the hindside c. If their connexion with other parts some are fastened by muscles some by ligaments and some by gristles From motion some bones are mooued as those that are articulated Motion by Diarthrosis some are immooueable as those that are fastened by Synarthrosis From Sense some bones are sensible as the Teeth all the rest without sense Sense Finally we will adde that difference of bones which is taken from the order of generation For some bones are generated perfect and compleate as the small bones of the eares the ribs and the cannell or coller bones The bones of the eares because it was fitte they should be very hard and very dry the better to resound The ribs because they were to make the cauity of the chest wherein the heart was to moue from the very birth The coller bones because they tye the armes to the bodye and strengthen the breast Other bones are at the first imperfect or little differing from Gristles as the bones of the Heade and many in the body beside And thus much of the differences of bones now we proceede vnto their parts CHAP. II. The particular parts of bones and an exposition of many appellations or names of which we shall haue frequent vse in the History of the Bones IN Bones two things are to be considered their parts and their cauities The parts of a bone are three-fold the principall part whereof the bone Three parts of a bone consisteth the parte that groweth to the bone or the bunching part of the bone The principall part of the bone hath no proper name belonging thereto but is called by the name of the whole bone The part that groweth to the bone is properly called Epiphysis That part which buncheth or beareth out beyond the plaine surface is called Apophysis The principall part is the primary bone made by Nature as a man should say at the first hand or according to The principal Natures first intention This is the basis of the rest and occupieth the middle place as being the hardest part for it is in the generation of bones as in the structure of the vniuerse that which is hard and earthy is placed in the Center To this principall part often times groweth another which the Graecians call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Latines Appendix we may call it an Additament or if you will we may retaine the Latine word Appendix because it is growne in vse amongst vs. For as if Nature had forgotten The appendix her selfe made the bone too short she eeketh it out by this Appendix as workmen vse to lay stones or timber vnder their postes or pillars to lengthen them when they are too short This appendix Hippocrates often calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which wee note but by the way An appendix therefore is a bone by it selfe fastened to the whole bone by Symphysis or Coalition not the vnition it selfe of one bone with another for so there should be no difference betwixt Symphysis and Epiphysis Coalition and the Appendix That it is a bone by it selfe is manifest because it hath a proper and peculiar circumscription and in young creatures may easily be separated without coction or putrifaction yea it hath often been obserued that in young children it hath beene luxed if I may so say by a blow or by a fall and separated from his bone This Appendix is fastened to the principall bone b◠that kinde of Symphysis or Coalition which is made without a Meane because the extremities or ends of the primary bone are softer then their middle parts Now the substance of an Appendix is rare and lax but saith Aristotle Soft things are easily contained in the termination of another and yeelde vnto them This Coalition is not made by a plaine superficies or Their Coalition surface but by a mutuall ingresse of a head and a Sinus or bosome which kind of coniunction doth much resemble that which afterward we shall call Ginglymos The substance of an Appendix is rare and lax at first gristly but in processe of time it groweth harder and drier because in the motion of the ioynts and their attrition the heat Their substance is stirred vppe which drieth and hardneth it To the extremity of the Appendix Nature hath added a gristle that they might not be so subiect to outward iniuries or if they happen to be broken yet the softnes of the gristle may helpe them to revnite againe In old bodies they are so vnited with the principall part of the bone that they can very hardly be separated yea they seeme to be very parts of their bones All bones haue not this Appendix for in the lower iaw there is none In some bones there is but one as in the rootes of the ribs and in childrens teeth in others it is double one at eyther end as in the Legge the Brace the arme the Ell and the Wand In others it is treble as in the haunch bone some haue foure as the bone of the thigh three in the vpper part and one in the lower The vertebrae or rack bones haue fiue two in the transuerse processes two in the bodies and one in the Spine There are many Appendices which are ordinarily by the people taken for processes as the tooth
Scythiās cure of the Scyatica which the Scythians did vse to open to helpe the Scyatica or hip-gowr The Iugular veynes he describeth in the fourth Booke de Morbis In his Booke de Natura ossium hee commandeth to open the veynes of the hams and ankles in pains of the Loynes and Testicles In the first Section of the 6. Book Epidemiωn in fits of the stone or inflāmations of the Kidneyes hee openeth the Ham veynes The shoulder veyne he describeth in his Booke de ossium Natura calling it sanguiflua or the blood-flowing veine In his Booke de victus ratione in morbis acutis in the Plurisie he openeth the Basilica or Liuer veine which he calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is the inner or internall veine Now the common Originall and vse of the veines he declareth in his Booke de Alimento as also of the arteries 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is the radication or roote of the veynes is the Liuer of the Arteries the Heart out of these blood spirits and heate are distributed into the whole body Of the Nerues you shall reade many things yet dispersedly but for their cōmon Originall which all men were ignorant of he pointed it out manifestlie All Hippo. discouered the Original of the Nerues men almost do hold that the softest nerues or nerues of sense doe arise from the brain the hard such as serue for motion from the Cerebellum or little braine but now it is resolued especially since Varolius his curious search by a new manner of anatomizing the head that all the Nerues euen the Opticks themselues doe arise from this Cerebellum or backeward Varolius commendation braine which me thinkes Hippocrates insinuateth in his Booke De ossium Natura 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 saith he 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The originall of the Nerues is from the Occipitium or hinder part of the head euen to the racke bones the hippes the priuities the thighes the armes the legges and the feete Of Glandules or Kernels hee wrote an entire Booke and so much of the similar parts Of the Organicall parts also he wrote much and that excellently Of the Heart a Golden booke wherein he so excelleth that I thinke neither Galen nor Vesalius haue gone beyond Hippocrates Golden book of the Heart him for exact description but in it there are many things obscure which needes an Interpreter if the world were so happy The history of the infant the Principles of generation the conceyuing forming norishment life motion and birth hath he most excellentlie described in his bookes De Natura pueri De septimestri and De octimestri partu We conclude therefore that Hippocrates wrote very diuinely of Anatomy but withall so obscurely as his workes euen to this age seeme to be sealed from the greatest wits I think therefore An exhortation to take paines in Hippocrates that he shall merit most of Physicke who hauing all his furniture about him shall labour to make manifest to the world those diuine Oracles which hitherto we haue rather admired then vnderstoode What Galen hath written of Anatomie and how vniustly he is accused by the later writers especially by Vesalius CHAP. XI ALmost all the Grecians Arabians and Latines do very much extoll Galen as after Hippocrates the second Father of Physicke forasmuch as he hath The prayse of Galen in such sort amplified and adorned the whole Art by his deep and diuine writings that vnder him it may seeme to be as it were borne anew For indeede howbeit there were extant before many excellent Monuments Records yet were they so confused and shuffled out of order that it seemed a new worke to gather together those thinges that were dispersed to illustrate that which was hard and difficile rude and vnpolisht to distinguish and order that which was confused beside many things which he obserued in his owne particular experience For other parts of Physick I will say nothing but for Anatomy I will confidently auouch that Galen hath so beautified and accomplished it that he hath not onely dispersed the blacke clowds of ignorance which hung ouer the former ages but also giuen great light splendor to the insuing posterity For whereas there are three meanes which leade vs as it were by the hand to the perfect and exact knowledge of Anatomy namely Dissection of the Three things acomplishing an Anatomist parts their actions and their vses he hath so accurately described them all as he hath gotten the prize from all men not onely before him but euen after him also The manner of Dissection he hath manifested in his Bookes de Anatomicis administrationibus de Dissectione musculorum neruorum The actions of the seuerall parts he hath elegantly described to the life in his Booke de naturalibus facultatibus de placitis Hippocratis Platonis But aboue all are those seuenteene golden bookes of the Vse of parts which are truly called Diuine labours and hymnes sung in praise of the Creator So that the benefites we all and those before vs haue receyued by Galen are indeede very great and yet the more the pitty almost all the new Writers do continually carpe and barke at him yea teare and rend him whether it be by right or wrong wounding and lancing his credite vpon euery slight occasion one by way of cauill another ambitiously seeking to make himselfe esteemed by Galens disgrace and few with any desire that truth should take place But as flouds beating against the rockes by how much they rush with greater violence by so much they are more broken and driuen backe into the maine so such are their bootlesse and ridiculous endeauors who enterprize by the disgrace of another especially of their Maisters and Teachers to gaine reputation vnto themselues But let vs see wherein these Nouices do blame Galen First they say hee hath giuen vs onely the Anatomy of bruite beasts and not of Man hauing neuer dissected a mans body The slanderof the new Writers against Galen Againe they vrge that he was ignorant of many things which at this day are generally commonly knowne Thirdly they say he deliuers many things repugnant and contrary to himself Lastly that he hath written all things confusedly without Method or order For say they what Method can ther be obserued in his books of the vse of Parts which you cal diuine First he treats of the hand then of the legges and feete and last of all of the lower belly and the naturall parts How sillie these calumniations are and how miserably these The confutation of the first slander men are by their owne ignorance deceiued let all men heare and iudge For to begin with the first I say and affirme that Galen did not onely cut vp the bodies of Apes but manie times also the carkasses of men My witnesse shall be the author himselfe In his thirteenth booke de vsu partium I am determined saith he
in the particular History of the creature and in Dissection age of men may stand in competition with him but in the second how many things hee knew not how absurdly he vnderstood diuers things hee knew Galen and all the whole Schoole of Physitians haue prooued by demonstrations but especially by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or the sight of the eye which is of all arguments the most demonstratiue He writ Bookes of the Generation of the parts and of the History of the creatures but he bequeathed vs many things out of the testaments of other men neither is it likely that hee did euer cutvp the body of a man for if he had hee would not haue so fowly erred in that which is obuious to the sence For both in the History of the similar parts and in the description of the dissimilar he hath set downe many things very grosse and absurd as in that where he writeth that the Veines do originally proceede from the Heart which also hee maketh the wel-spring of the Nerues where he saith there are three ventricles in the Heart that the Braine was made onely to refrigerate or coole the heart and such like many more which we shall meete withall in our Treatings of the bones the veynes the arteries the nerues the heart the braine and other particular parts and therefore in those places the diligent and studious Reader may looke for and finde them What the other Greeke Authors haue written of Anatomy CHAP. XIII THere were after Hippocrates time certaine famous men that did diligentlie practise the art of Anatomy and deliuered many things in writing which haue all perished I know not by what mishap or destiny whether I should call it Alcmaeus Crotoniata as Calchidius reporteth did vse to anatomize Alcmaeus Diocles. mens bodies Diocles Carystius in his Epistle to King Antigonus diuideth the bodie of Man into the head the chest the belly and the bladder Lycus Macedo was accounted cunning in the Dissection of the Muscles and his bookes as saith Galen in his 4. Lycus Galen Quintus Marinus booke de Anat. Administ were with great commendation dispersed all abroad Quintus Lycus his Schoolemaister wrote some things of Anatomy Marinus published 20. bookes of those thinges which Lycus was ignorant of in Anatomy Erasistratus did much in this kinde also Herophilus as Tertullian saith cut vppe aboue seuenty bodies and oftentimes Erasistratus Herophilus the bodies of liuing men of him Galen writeth thus Herophilus aswell in all other things that appertaine to out art as also in Anatomy did attaine to a most exacte and exquisite skill and knowledge and for the most part made his experiments not in bruite beastes as most men vse to do but euen in the bodies of men Pelops Galens Schoolmaster Diog. Apollon Asclepiades Eudemus Praxagoras Philotimus Elianus Polybius Colistus Pelops did publickly teach Anatomy and was the Schoolemaister of Galen he affirmed that all the vessels of the body did originally arise from the Braine Diogenes Apollonata wrote a Booke of Veynes Asclepiades Eudemus Praxagoras Philotimus Elianus Polybius Calistus in their seuerall times did all of them excell in this art Yet none of their writings remaine with vs but if we beleeue Aristotle and Galen they had many foolish and ridiculous conceites There haue beene also Greekes of later times who haue done somewhat in Anatomy as Aretaeus Theophilus Oribasius but Galen hath wonne the Girlond from Aretaeus Theophilus Oribasius them all as we haue already prooued Who haue beene the chiefe Authors of Anatomy in our owne times CHAP. XIIII MAny things also haue the Arabians written of the matter of Anatomy of whom Auicenna is worthily accounted especially for the speculatiue part the Prince and Chieftaine but amongst all the Latines haue taken most Auicen Latine writers pains in this argument and amongst them those of our owne age so that now the Art is so beautified that it seemeth the last hand is put vnto it and the art of Anatomy may now be accounted to haue attained the very height of her glorie Among the ancientest of them we haue Mundinus who wrote very perspicuously by way of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or resolution following the order of dissection Carpus wrote large Commentaries vpon him but we must needes taxe them both with many ydle and absurd passages Mundinus Carpus besides the lamenesse and imperfection of their workes Thomas de Zerbis set forth a large worke but we imagine that he tooke much from other men and had little of his owne neither Tho. de Zerbis had he as we suppose any great practise himselfe in dissection After these came Vasseus Carolus Stephanus Andernacus At length appeared Andreas Vesalius who wrote very Vasseus Caro. Stephanus Andernacus Vesalius an acurate writer accurately and some thinke he balked nothing that may appertaine either to Dissection or to the actions or vse of the parts but he is condemned of many and haply not vnworthily for that hauing transcribed almost all his worke out of Galen yet hee cannot affoord him scarse a good word but either pricked by ambition or with an itching desire to contradict so great an Author he neuer leaues goading and wounding his reputation and that very often vndeseruedly Iacobus Syluius heerein hath carried away the reputation that he hath digested in a most exquisite order the vast and wilde Forrest as it were and confusion of all the Muscles and Vessels and giuen them particular and proper names but hee was little beholding to his Syluius his coÌ„mendation Printer who hath let slip many escapes and by your leaue added as we thinke somthings to him very superfluous These two Vesalius and Syluius flourished both in one time but Vesalius was too tart and sharpe in his calumniations Syluius too obstinate a desender of Galen Vesalius hath rashly and vnaduisedly written many things against Galen Syluius in defending his Maister Galen is enforced to maintaine many vncouth Paradoxes Gabriell Fallopius the most subtile and acute Anatomist of this age hath deserued exceeding much of vs all for in his obseruations he hath opened many things altogether vnknowne to the Fallopius his commendation former ages he wrote also an excellent Commentary vpon Galens Booke de Ossibus Columbus couched the whole Art very succinctly in xv Bookes and penned them very neatly Valuerda the Spaniard hath done also exceeding well and with great commendations Columbus Eustachius hath published some small workes of Anatomy concerning the bones and the frame and composition of the Kidneyes Bauhinus first exceeded all men and since in a later Eustachius Bauhinus worke hath exceeded himselfe both in his descriptions and in his Tables Archangelus Picholominaeus a Cittizen of Rome hath set forth very learned readings of Anatomy interlaced Archangelus Picholomineus Var. Arantius Pâ—gâ—feta Volcherus Coeiter Platerus Guillemaeus with many disputations concerning things controuerted Varolius Arantius and Pigafeta haue added
whatsoeuer is solid the same is similar and the action of a similar part is Nutrition Contayned parts are the humors concluded or shut vp in their proper vessels and conceptacles as it were in Store-houses Galen calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is humours 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 What are contained parts that is such as are contained in the vessels and dispersed through the whol body Some had rather cal them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Things deteyned the better to signifie those things which are conteined within vs as also which do preserue the substance of the part and therefore we haue called them Nourishers to restraine the word Humors to the Alimentarie and not to include the Excrementitious 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is impulsiue or impetuous thinges Fernelius referreth to the faculties of the soule not to the spirits but in my opinion he is in this out of the way For Impetuous or impulsiue things as the Spirits though the spirits be conteyned and haue proper conceptacles to wit the veynes arteries and nerues yet they are truly called impulsiue substances and Hippocrates spake of the body bodily things therefore not of the Faculties which are but abstracted Notions Hippocrates Now by the word Spirit I do not vnderstand a wind for these are 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Bastard or as Auicen termeth them Fraudulent spirits whose violence is sometimes so great furious Auicen that they are the cause of many tumults in the houshold gouernement or naturall constitution of the body which is oftentimes miserably distressed with their furious gusts read what Hippo. in his Book de Flatibus hath written of the power of winds But by spirits we vnderstand the primary and immediate instrument of the soule which the Stoicks calleth Hippocrates the Band which tyeth the soule and the body The force of these spirits is such so great the subtilty and thinnesse of their Nature that they can passe suddenly through all parts do insinuate themselues through the fastest and thickest substances as wee may perceyue in the passions of the minde in sleepe and in long watchinges By the ministerie of these spirits all the motions of liuing creatures are accomplished both naturall vitall and animall and by these life nourishment motion and sence do flow into all the parts Finally The continuall motion of the spirits Their motion double Per se aliud the motion of the spirits is perpetuall both of themselues and by another By themselues that is they are mooued continually from an inbred principle both wayes vpward and downward vpward because they are light downward toward their norishment They are mooued by another when they are driuen and when they are drawne The vitall spirits are driuen when the heart is contracted the animall when the braine is compressed The spirits therefore are 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 impetuous substances They are fiery and ayery and therefore very fine subtle and swift so the seede although it be thicke and viscid yet in a moment it passeth through the vessels of generation which haue no conspicuous cauities and that because it is spirituous or full of spirits There are also other differences of parts according to Hippocrates in his Booke Deveteri Differences of parts acording to Hip. medicina which are drawne from their substance figure and scituation From the substance some are dense others rare and succulent or iuicy others spongie soft From the figure some are hollow and from a largenesse gathered into a narrownesse or constraint others are stretched wide others solid and round others broad hanging others extended others long From the scituation some are Anterior some Posteriour some deepe others middle vpper-most lower-most on the right hand and on the left A diuision of Parts into Principall and not principall CHAP. XIX THE diuision of parts into principall and lesse principall is verie famous and hath helde the Stage now a long time We define that to be a Principall What is a principal part part which is absolutely necessary for the preseruation of the Indiuiduum or particular creature Or which affoordeth to the whole bodie a faculty or at least a common matter In both senses there are only three principall parts the Braine the Heart and the Liuer the Braine sitteth aloft in the highest Three principall parts place as in the Tribunall or Iudgement seate distributing to euery one of the Instruments of the sences their offices of dignity The Heart like a King is placed in the midst of the Chest and with his vitall heate doth cherish maintaine and conserue the life and safety of all the parts The Liuer the fountaine of beneficall humor like a bountifull and liberall Prince at his proper charges nourisheth the whole family of the bodie From the Braine the Animall Faculty by the Nerues as it were along certaine Chords glideth into the whole frame of Nature From the Heart the Vitall spirits are conneyed through the Arteries as through Pipes and Watercourses into euery part From the Liuer if not a Faculty yet a Spirit if not a Spirit yet at least a common matter to wit the blood is diffused by the veynes into euery corner So that onely three are absolutely necessary for the conseruation of the whole Indiuiduum the Braine the Heart and the Liuer all which are fitted and tyed together in so straite a conspiracy that each needeth the helpe of the other and if one of them faile the rest perish together with it Not that I thinke these The Braine more excellent then the Heart parts are of equall dignity for the Heart is more noble then the Liuer the Braine more excellent then the Heart aswell because his actions are more diuine beeing the seate and Pallace of Reason which is the Soule as also because all other parts are but handmaides vnto it and besides Hippocrates saith it giueth the forme to the whole body For saith he Hippocrates the figure of the rest of the Bones dependeth vpon the magnitude of the Braine and the Scull Galen addeth to the Principall parts the Testicles because they are the chiefe Organs of procreation by which alone the species or kinde is preserued But we thinke that they Galen How the Testicles may bee called principall parts What parts are called ignoble why confer nothing to the conseruation of the Indiuiduum or particular creature because they neuer affoord any matter to the whole body neyther faculty or spirit but onely a qualitie with a subtile and thin breath from whence the flesh hath a seedy rammishnesse a harsh taste and strong sauour and the actions of strength and validity All the rest of the parts may be called ignoble compared to these aswell because from them proceedeth no faculty spirit or common matter as also because euery one of them do minister to some one or other of the principall parts So the Organes of the senses serue the
the forme worketh and the similar part as it is similar suffereth whatsoeuer the forme worketh So Nutrition which is the common action of the similar parts is inchoated or begun by the temper alone by it perfected and plenarily and perfectly accomplished by euery particle of the part The differences of the similar parts are some of them belonging to the Philosopher The differences of similar parts some to the Physitian The Philosopher raiseth his differences from the first qualities and those which follow the temper The Physitian from the sensible and materiall principles of generation The first qualities are indeed foure but because heat and cold are certain acts A Philosophicall diuision of them into moyst drie Aristotle and an acte is according to it selfe indiuisible therefore the Philosopher raiseth his differences only from the diuersity of drowth and moisture Wherefore Aristotle maketh similar parts some dry some moist The moyst are either properly so called that is such as of their owne nature cannot containe themselues within their owne termini or limits and therefore do stand in neede of conceptacles or receptacles as the bloud or else are softe which do better contain themselues within their bounds as flesh The dry are those whose Superficies or Surface is pressed and yeeldeth either not at all or very hardly and such he calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is solid parts of which he maketh two kinds Some are fragile or brittle which cannot be bent without the dissolution of the part as Bones others are tough or stretching which may bee bent and extended without dissolution as Ligaments and Membranes The Physitians do gather the differences of similar parts from the sensible and materiall Principles of generation There are two materiall principles the Crassament or substance The Physitiās diuision of them into spermaticall and fleshy of the seede for onely the spirits or the workemen and Bloud and therfore some parts are spermaticall and some fleshy The first are immediately generated out of the Crassament of the seede the latter of bloud the first in growne and olde men do hardlie revnite 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 according to the first intention as we vse to speake because of the weaknesse of the efficient for they are colde because of the vnapt disposition of the matter whose affluence is no confluence that is it floweth not together-ward and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 at once because it must passe through many and diuerse alterations ad heereto the siccity and hardnesse of the parts for dry things do not easily admit a vnion or consolidation and the Philosopher in all mixtion requireth a watery moisture that by it as by Glue all partes may be vnited On the contrary fleshie parts because they are hotter softer and nourished with bloud little or nothing at all altered do presently revnite and close together sometimes without any meane immediately sometimes per medium homogeneum that is by a thing of the same kinde There are diuers differences of spermaticall and fleshy parts For the seede though it seeme to be similar vniforme and euery where like it selfe yet hath it parts of a different The differences of spermatical parts Nature some thicker some thinner some fat some slimie some fit for stretching others for concretion or to be gathered together Whilst therefore the procreating vertue worketh vpon that part of the seede which can extend it selfe it maketh Membranes Veines Arteries and Nerues when vpon that which is fitter for concretion it formeth bones and gristles when the fat is more then the glutinous matter then are bones gristles formed Againe Galen obserueth in the spermaticall parts a double substance that which is truly Galen In spermaticall parts ther is a double substance Three sorts of flesh Hippocrates solid and that which is fleshy the first may be moistned but not restored the other is as it were a concreted or congealed liquor cleauing to the solid Fibres There are three kinds of fleshy parts three sorts of flesh One Flesh properly so called to wit that of the Muscles which therefore Hippocrates calleth absolutely 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is Flesh There is another flesh of the Bowels or inward parts which we call enteralles and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as it were an affusion or confluence of blood There is also another flesh of the particular parts We will adde a third diuision of similar parts into Common and Proper I call those A third diuision of the similar parts Common which make and constitute many parts compounded of an vnlike and different Nature as the Bones Gristles Ligaments Membranes Flesh Nerues Veines and Arteries Of which the first fiue are truly similar the others only according to sence for the inner substance of a nerue is medullous the outward membranous I call those Proper which do make the substance onely of one part and such as is not found elsewhere such are the marrowy substance of the Braine the cristalline and glassy humors of the eye Of all similar parts there is a double necessity one that of them dissimilar parts may be compounded The necessity vse of similar parts Auerrhoes What is a dissimilar part the other I find in Auerrhoes that they may be the seat of the Sensatiue vertues for all sence commeth by the similar parts To the similar part we oppose the dissimilar for as the similar part is or may bee diuided into particles of a like so dissimilar into particles of an vnlike or different kinde as the particles of the similar part retaine the name of the whole so the particles of dissimilar parts haue no names at all Wherefore we define dissimilar parts to be such as are deuided into parts of a different nature and diuerse kinde These the Physitians 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 by way of exellence doe call Organicall because their action is more perfect and euident as also because the neatnes of the figure the magnitude number and scituation which foure accomplish the Nature of an organ do more plainly appeare in compounded parts then in simple so that both in respect of the forme and of the actions they are more properly called the Organs of the Soule for the forme of the similar parts is the Temper of dissimilar The dissimilar parts are rather the instruments of the soule then the similar a laudable conformation now conformation doth better answere the functions of the soule then doth the Temper because the soule is defined to be an act of an organicall body The action of the similar is Naturall to wit Nutrition as beeing manifest euen in plants the action of the dissimilar part is Animall and therefore that is sayde to bee the action of Nature this of the Soule Furthermore I define an organ with the ancients to be a part of the Creature which can performe a perfect action by perfect I vnderstand proper What an Organ is for the
brain which looseth it selfe in his substance Hee saw the hollow veine in the heart very large and ample but he did not obserue that it onely openeth into the heart gaping at it with a spacious orifice or mouth to poure into the right ventricle as it were into a Cisterne sufficient bloud for the generation of vital spirits to supply the expence of the whole body but goeth not out of the heart as doeth manifestly appeare by those three forked membranes or values and floud-gates yawning outward but close inward But because wee shall haue fitter occasion hereafter to dispute this question with them of the originall of the veines and the sinewes it shall bee sufficient that we haue sayd thus much of it at this time As for the seate of the faculties of sence and motion is it not against all reason and experience That the hart is not the beginning of animal motion to place them in the heart The heart indeede is moued and that perpetually but that motion is not Voluntarie but Naturall it is moued yet not at our pleasure but according to it owne instinct Dayly practise and experience teacheth vs that when the ventricles of the Braine are either compressed or filled and stuffed vp as in the Apoplexy Epilepsie and drowsie Caros then all the faculties are respited and cease from their functions but when the heart is offended the life indeede is endangered but neither motion nor sence intercepted Againe if the heart were the seate of all the faculties as the Peripatetikes would faine haue it then vpon any affection of the same or notable deprauation of his temperament An elegant argument against the Peripatetickes all the functions should be impeached because all actions come from the Temper But we see that in a Hectique ague or Consumption wherein there is an vtter alienation of the temper as being an equall distemper of all distempers the most dangerous yet the voluntary and principall faculties do remaine inviolate In the violent motions and throbbing Strange motions of the Heart palpitations of the heart which some say haue beene seene so extreame that a rib hath beene broken therewith yet neither the voluntary motions of the parts are depraued nor the minde at all alienated or troubled Who will deny but that by pestilent and contagious vapors and breaths comming from the byting of venomous beasts or the taking of poyson the vitall faculty is oppugned and as it were besieged in his own fortresse But yet those that are so affected do enioy both sence and reason euen to the last breath most times When the Braine is refrigerated sleep presently stealeth vpon vs now Aristotle himselfe Aristotle defineth sleepe to be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The rest of the first sensator If any of the principal Faculties either Motiue or Sensatiue be affected where do the remedies applyed auaile Surely at the Head not at the Heart The Braine therefore not the Heart is the first Moouer and first Sensator But the Peripatetiks obiect that the Braine hath no The sensation of the Braine not passiue but operatiue Why the braine is cold that is lesse hot Answeres to the arguments of the Peripatetiks sence and therefore cannot be the author of it We will giue them a learned answere out of Galen The Braines sensation is not 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 but 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is not passiuely but operatiuely It receiueth not the species or Images of sensible things but like a Iudge it taketh knowledge of their impressions and accordingly determineth of them They say the Braine is vnapt for motion because it is cold we answere it was necessary it should bee cold that is lesse hot for the better performance of the functions For if the Braine had exceeded in heate then would his motions haue beene rash and vnruly and his sensations giddie and fond as in a phrensie In a Syncope the Animall faculties do faile It is true but why Because there is an exolusion and so a defect of vitall spirits by which the animall are cherished The Ligation or interception in like manner of the arteries of the necke called Carotides induceth a priuation of motion and sense onely because the vitall Spirits are intercepted which minister matter to the Animall But one Principle is better then many That we confesse is very true but yet we know there are many reasons why it is not possible it should be so in this Little world We Why in the Little worlde there cannot be one onely principle The first demonstration will instance but in a few It is granted by all men that the substance of the arteries is diuerse from that of the veynes and the substance of the sinnewes differing from them both and as their substance so is their structure very different and their temper not one and the same how then could it be that Organs of so distinct kinds should yssue all from one and the same part Againe it was necessary that these organes should in their originall be very The second large and ample to transfuse sufficient spirites and a common matter suddenly and togetherward into the whole bodye Now the magnitude or proportion of any one part much lesse of the heart could not be sufficient for this purpose either to affoord a foundation for so large vessels or to supply a competent allowance of matter for them all Addeheereto The third that the faculties of the soule follow the temper of the body and therefore so diuers faculties might not issue from one part which hath but one single temperament How can we imagine reasonably that three distinct different faculties yea oftentimes quite contrary Reason Anger and Concupiscence shoulde reside altogether as if they were sworne friends in one Organ Or how when the heart is on fire with anger should reason make resistance which delighteth in a middle and equall temper Do not the vital and animall faculties require a different temper Their Organs therefore must also necessarily The fourth be different and distinct For the heart is by nature fitted to contain and propagate the vital faculty but for the preseruation of the animall it is vtterly incompetent The reason is at hand The vitall spirit is very hot impetuous raging and in continuall motion and therefore stood in neede of a strong organ wherein it should be wrought and contained that the spirit might not because of his tenuity be exhaled nor the vessell by which it is conueyed breake in perpetuall pulsing and palpitation which both wold easily haue hapned if the heart and arteries had bin thin and of a slender texture The animall faculty required another temper in her organ otherwise the motions would haue beene furious the sences giddy and rash Reason would continually haue erred because the property of heate is to confound and make a medley of all things shuffling in one thing hudlingly vpon another through his continuall and indesinent
which is without life cannot be a foundation to build flesh vppon which hath life That a Callus is without life may be demonstrated because it is produced of the excrement of the bone and the neighbour parts If it be obiected that if it bee without life and not nourished it could not endure and grow all the time of a mans life which that it doeth is more then manifest the Obiection Solution answere is at hand It encreaseth not by nutrition but by apposition of the matter as the haires and the nailes againe it endureth as long as the bones receiue any nourishment from which there alwayes redoundeth an excrement whereby it is preserued The second Probleme is why if the Callus come from the excrement of the bone is it not generated in a sound bone which also yeildeth an excrement Because when the bone The 2. probleme Solution is weakned by a wound the excrements are more plentifully driuen vnto it from the neighbour parts euen as all the parts that border vpon a wounded part doe thrust downe their superfluities vnto it And thus I thinke I haue touched I hope cleered all difficulties which concerne the coalition of the spermaticall partes it is therefore nowe high time to turne our discourse some other way But before we leaue the field it shall not be amisse to disparkle all the forces of our aduersaries Answere to the former obiections To the first that we may be sayd to haue gayned an intire and accomplished victory The first argument of the first opinion is true onely in Children for in old men euery man will confesse there is both a weakenesse of the Efficient and a want of the Matter The second is a captious Sophisme made to intrap the ignorāt For it is not necessary that whersoeuer To the secōd there is sence there also should be a nerue for then the whole body should bee a nerue it is sufficient if a nerue be deriued vnto the part by whose illustration and irradiation all the particles of that part haue sence the same we may say of Veines and arteries For Mathematicall or locall contaction is not required to euery action but onely physicall and naturall For their third argument I answere that there is not the like reason of the teeth and of other bones for the teeth after they be drawne doe growe againe by reason of theyr To the third End and by reason of their Matter By reason of their End because they are ordained to chew mittigate and prepare the meate for the stomacke and therefore as they encrease euen till the end of our age for our necessity because they are continually wasted by attrition or rubbing one against another so for the same necessity they are regenerated when they faile Beside if you regard the matter of their generation there is aboundance of it contained in the cauities of both the iawes add heereto that the teeth are not incompassed with any other part which should hinder their generation Fourthly they vrge that Accretion and Nutrition are kinds of generation but bones do grow and are nourished why therefore may they not be revnited Wee answere that To the fourth this is the order and dispensation of Nature that first the part be nourished then if there be any ouerplus that the part encrease into all dimensions and after this expence if there yet remaine any surplusage of aliment that then it may go to the restoring of the want or defect in the part but seede is neuer generated in that quantity that it should be sufficient for nourishment accretion and beside for a new generation In the wombe indeede the Spermaticall parts are easily generated because both the matter is copious and there is moreouer 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a double Workeman one in the seede another in the vessels or as some thinke in the substance of the wombe but after wee are borne they are hardly generated because one of the workemen is absent Answer to the authorities of Galen which formerly was in the seede or assistant vnto it As for the authorities of Galen they do not conclude either that all spermatical parts do admit coalition or som alwayes and therefore we willingly subscribe vnto them without any praeiudice vnto our cause The argument of the other Opinion which denieth the formatiue faculty to the spermaticall parts yeelding it onely to the seede is easily ouerthrowne because the seede according Answere to the argumēts of the second opinion to Hippocrates Aristotle Galen and all Physitians containeth in it the Idea or formes of all the parts which it receiueth from the solid or spermaticall parts True it is that in the Bones there is that I may so say a power to bonify or make bones in the veins to veinefy so there be an apt disposition of the matter But when wee say that Bones are nourished encreased and do revnite by seede we do not vnderstand prolificall seede such as is apt for generation that is onely in and about the Testicles where it attaineth his forme and perfection but we vnderstand something like vnto seede Finally the authorities of Hippocrates and Galen doe conclude onely that the hinder parts cannot revnite which thing we haue already demonstrated in the second Conclusion And thus much of To the authorities of Hippocrates Galen the second question QVEST. IX Whether the Spermaticall parts be hotter then the Fleshie IT were either superstition or ostentation to quote all the places of Hippocrates Aristotle and Galen wherein they auouch that vnbloudy parts are colder then bloudy but no man that euer I read of did euer deny that fleshy parts are bloudy and spermaticall either without bloud or at least but lightly moistned therewith Vpon these premises any man may gather the conclusion or if they will not inferre it it will arise of it selfe Yet there are some among the late writers who would faine perswade themselues that the Spermaticall parts are hotter then the sanguine or bloudy Iobertus sometimes the learned Chancellor of the Vniuersity of Mompelier in France set forth a Paradoxe concerning this matter wherein the disputeth many things with great wit and subtility some probabilitie but lesse substance of truth concerning the in-bred heate of the spermaticall partes I haue alwayes much esteemed the learning and edge of the mans wit yet because he is the Chieftaine Ioberts opinion of the heat of spermaticall parts of them who hath impeached the authority of the receiued opinion concerning this matter I am constrayned to dissent from him and will not thinke it presumption to examine his arguments one by one that the truth may more euidently appeare Those things sayth he that arise of others do sauor of the principles from whence they His first argument arise but the seede from which the spermatical parts do proceed is hotter then bloud and therfore the spermatical parts are hotter then the sanguine or bloudy
Sence by the nerues òr sinewes For my owne part I doe not deny but that many vessels are carried vnto and doe determine in the skin From the Axillary Iugular and Crurall veines many small Surcles and as many Arteries bearing them company interlaced also it is with manifold Nerues but yet I am not resolued that the skinne is wouen together of their threds Galen thought the skin was the first part of the Infant that was formed the trueth of which assertion we shall discusse in another place Some thinke the Skin is made Other opinions of the superficies of flesh dryed because in woundes the flesh dryed degenerateth into a Cicatrice or Scarre which is very like the nature of the skinne this may bee confirmed by the authorities of Aristotle and Galen Aristotle auoucheth that as the flesh groweth old so it turneth into skinne Galen that the skinne is produced out of the flesh which is vnder it But because between the flesh the skin there are many bodies interposed to wit the Fat and the fleshy Membrane which is truely neruous vnlesse it be about the neck the face I cannot see how the skin should grow out of the flesh And that skin or scar rather which resulteth vppon wounds when the flesh is softned dryed by Epulotical medicines as they call them is not a true skin but illegitimate ingendred of a substāce of another kind for it is harder then the true skin more thight therfore neuer hath any haire growing vpon it The differēce between a scar and the true skin Another opinion But proued false and in tanning it will fal away whence comes the holes in Sheep skins when they are made into Parchment Some thinke it is compounded of flesh and sinewes mingled together because in many places of Galen the skin is called a bloudy nerue but this is prooued to bee false by this one argument because where there is most store of nerues there the skinne is not the harder for thē as in the palme of the hand there are more nerues then in the crown of the head and yet the skinne in the crown is much harder then that of the palme I think The determination and for this time determine that the skin is ingendred together with the other parts to wit of seed and bloud mixed together and may therefore be called a fleshy nerue or a neruous flesh because it hath a middle nature between flesh and a knew for it is not vtterly without bloud as a nerue nor so abounding with bloud as flesh That there is bloud in it appeareth An argument that the skin is made of seede and bloud euidently if it be neuer so little wounded that it is of seed this one argument may serue for all that when it is perished it can neuer bee restored for it is impossible to heale a wound where any part of the skinne is taken away without a scarre or Cicatrice more or lesse Whether the Skin performe any common and officiall action QVEST. IIII. MAny Physitians haue the same opinion of the vse and action of the Skinne which they haue of the vse and action of Bones The Bones haue a common The common opinion or official vse so sayth Hippocrates they giue the body stability vprightnes and figure but that they performe no common or officiall action I account Hip. lib. de natu ossium that a common action which is seruiceable either to more parts or to the whole creature In like manner the skinne hath indeed a common vse because it couereth the whole body cherisheth it tyeth it together but it is not thought to performe any officiall or common action Galen speaketh very plainely The skin saith he concocteth not as the stomacke it distributeth not as the Guts and the Veynes it breedeth not bloud as the Liuer it frameth not any pulsation as the Heart and the Artcries it causeth not respiration as the Lungs and the Chest it mooueth not with voluntary motion as the Muscles Notwithstanding all this one common action may bee attributed vnto it to wit an Animall action The common action of the skin is animal For although all sensation is passion because to be sensatiue is to suffer yet there is no sensation without an action The better learned Philosophers in all sensation doe acknowledge a double motion one Materiall another Formall the former motion is in How sensation is made the reception of the species for we must craue liberty to vse our Schoole tearmes the latter in an action the first is in the Instrument by reason of the matter the latter by reason of the power is in the soule the first is not the effectuating cause of sensation but a disposition thereto the latter is essentially sensation itselfe Whereas therefore the skinne is apprehensiue of those qualities which strike or mooue the tactiue sense and is thereupon esteemed the iudge and discerner of outward touching it performeth vnto the whole creature not onely a common vse but also a common or officiall action Beside it hath another The priuate action of the skin priuate action to wit Nutrition to which as handmaids do serue the Drawing Reteining Concocting and Expelling Faculties more then these hath no part in the body of man which serueth for the behoofe of the whole Wee conclude therefore that the skin besides his common vse and priuate action performeth to the body a common and officiall action to wit Sensation QVEST. V. Whether it be heate or colde whereby Fat is congealed THE diuers yea contrary gusts of opinions amongst ancient Physitians about the generation of fat hath raised such a tempest in our Art that the Waues are not to this day setled There needeth therefore some Aeolus mulcere hos fluct us to appease these waues to call in the windes or to abate them into a calme which we will at this time intend to do in want of better helpe as well as we may And because we would not bee accumbred with the variety of names which are vsually giuen to this substance you shall vnderstand that pingueà o adeps auxungia and The names of Fat 2 de partib Animal 4. 11. de simpl med c. Facultat sevum are promiscuously vsed by Physitians albeit Aristotle and Galen haue taken great paines to distinguish them euery one from another To which places we refer those who desire heerein satisfaction For we will onely paine our selues about the temper and generation of fat at this time Galen is of opinion that fat is congealed by colde and that he expressely declareth together How Fat is curdled Galens opinion by cold with the manner of it in this manner VVhen the asery and more oyly part of the bloud sweateth through the thin coates of the Veines in maner of a dew and lighteth vpon the colder parts such as are Membranes it is then by the power of the cold condensed And hence it
degree of concoction as also doth the blood in all the Veines And therfore the substance of the guts is not much vnlike that of the stomack But because they are not so neere the heate of the Liuer as is the stomacke therefore Nature hath assisted theyr cold membranous substance by couering them with the warme happing of the Omentum or Kell whereby their weake heate is cherished The vse of the great guts is to contain the thicke excrements and remainders of the meat together with the choler deriued vnto them from the Liuer by the passage of gall as also The vse of the great Guts the winds that are daily gathered which are stored in the chambers of the Colon and the bredth of the other great guttes and kept in by the Muscles of the fundament as we shall more manifestly shew afterward CHAP. VI. Of the Mesentery IT is called Mesenterium and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in Greek because it is placed in the middle of the guts which as we said before are called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for it is placed in the middest betweene the guts toward their backward position Tab 7 The scituation cause of the name Fig. 1. and incircleth them round It is called also 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from his peculiar substance His figure is circular Tab. 7. Fig. 1 2 and plaine but gathered into folds about the beginning it is narrow in the middle ample His Figure and large and in the sides especially the left side where it descendeth to the right Gut it becommeth more long for which causes Galen sayde it was treble or three-fold His beginning is at the first and thirde Spondell or racke bone of the Loynes from the Originall Peritonaeum from whence are produced membranous Fibres which spend themselues in the two Membranes Tab. 7. Fig. 2 TY of the Mesenterie from whence it is that there is great consent betweene the Loynes and the guts beside there passe also from thence certaine Nerues vnto the Mesentery For it is compounded of Membranes Nerues Veines Arteries Glandules and Fat It hath two Membranes Tab. 7. Fig. 2 TY one lying vpon another in Dogs where it admitteth no vessels they so grow together as if it were but of one simple Membrane His Membranes neyther hath it any fat to make separation and those firme strong as well for the strengthening of the vessels which are manifold and passe together vnto the guts to which Vessels it serueth for a band and strong muniment as also least in violent motions the position of the guts should be altered or confounded and that they might be stronglier tyed to the backe ¶ The first Figure sheweth where the Mesentery beginneth or ariseth his scite connexion and vesselles in it also the guts are remooued from the middle of the Belly and are laide vpwarde and downward vnto the sides that the Mesentery might better appeare The second Figure sheweth the Mesentery taken and freed from the body TABVLA VII FIG I. FIG II. It hath Nerues also sprinkled diuersly as it were into many tendrils Those are two one on eyther side frō the nerues which are reached from the sixt paire to the roots of the ribs Nerues which Nerues being spread abroad after the fashion of a Membrane doe inuest the branches of the Arteries by which meanes the colde Nerues by the touch and society of the Arteries becomming warme the Animal vertue proceeding from the Brain is more freely communicated to the guts It hath Nerues also from the sinnewes proceeding from the Spondels of the loynes and that for his better sense that feeling those things that molest it the expelling vertue being prouoked it might turne them downe into the Guts These nerues together with the Veines and Arteries are receiued into the center Tab. 7. Fig 1 2 H of the Mesentery diffused through the whole body of it and with an innumerable off-spring are carried through his coates or Membranes vnto the guts It hath also glandules The Glandules of the Mesentery or kernels very Tab. 7. Fig 1 2 KK many to which certaine thredy or hairy veines do come from the Meseraickes interlaced with infinite diuarications of the braunches of the Port-veine the great Artery with which they hold a certain proportion for their magnitude but the biggest of them are about his center where the first distribution of the vesselles is made and where they are most gathered together as wel that they may support diuide the vessels as also that they may hinder their compression which would otherwise forslow the distribution of the Chylus like as they doe when they become schirrus table 7 figure 1. 2 II or hard whence followeth for this reason a generall consumption of the whole body Beside it had not beene safe that so many vessels riding so high being so slender and running so long a course from their originall should bee carried to the trunke of the port-veine without a kinde of convoy wherefore these glandules or kernels as it were certaine wedges are set between their diuisions that in vehement motions they be not broken nor offende one against another Finally they serue to moysten the guts that their concoction may be celebrated by elixation or boyling that is by heate and moysture Amongst these glandules there is plenty of Fat made of bloud sweating or falling out The fat of the melentery of those vesselles wee spake of euen now and there retayned by the solidity of the membranes with which fat the middle spaces are filled and the heate of the parts cherished that so the Chylus which is carried through them may be prepared for sanguification And although this Mesenterie be one and continued together yet in regard of his double originall and of the guts which it tyeth together and of the two Arteries it may be diuided into that Mesenterie which knitteth together the small guts table 7 figure ◠L M M in the middest of the belly called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and into that which tyeth the colon table 7 fig. 2 frō N to O both on the right side and the left tab 7 figure 2 from P to Q not vnder the bottom of the stomack for to that it is knit by the help of the Cmentum table 7. figure 2 from O to P in his lower part tab 7 fig 2 from Q to R groweth to the right Gut is called How meseraion differeth from mesocolon by Hippocrates 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Lastly it hath a part which they call the appendixe table 7. fig. 2 from Q to R of the Mesenterie being of the nature of a ligament whereupon Galen diuideth it into the right the left and the middle The vse of the Mesenterie is to tie the Guts together as it were by a common ligament The vse of the mesentery and to fasten them to the Racke-bones of the Loynes that they neither should bee confusedly shufled together or fall
naturall instinct before it come to the Liuer as Galen teacheth Haply that the Gal. 4. vsu part 12. membranes of the stomacke may with it be nourished Or if thou hadst rather say that these veines doe carry the Chylus they haue sucked after the manner of the meseraickes to the rootes of the port veine that are disseminated through the Liuer that there it may be turned into bloud From these veines come those sodaine refections of the spirits by sweete A good note of the sudden refections which come from wine cordiall potions and strong Wine Broths and Cordials which refections would not so soone follow vnlesse the Liuer did suck nourishment by them out of the stomacke That which is called the vas breue or short veine which from the veines of the spleene is by an vnited passage of many braunches carried into his bottome doeth there belch out a sowre and sharpe bloud sometimes to the vpper mouth to stirre vp appetite which yet properly is prouoked by sence of want and to strengthen it by his adstringent vertue It hath Arteries from the Coeliacall branch of the Aorta table 10. figure 1 2. a b d f or The Arteries of the stomack great Artery which doe accompany euery one of the veines excepting the lesse Gastricke table 10. figure 2. c to affoord strength of life to preserue it from putrifaction by ventilation to cherish refresh and increase his naturall heate with their heat and vitall spirit that so concoction might be made more perfect but of these branches more hath beene sayed in the chapter of the Coeliacall Arteries It hath very conspicuous and notable nerues from the sixt paire which at his orificies or The nerues mouths are double tab 10. figure 1 2. T V disseminated from those branches which make the recurrent nerues and yeilde certaine Tendrilles to the lungs and the pericardium or purse of the heart which Tendrils because of their softnesse and the length of their way are couered ouer with strong membranes and doe run crosse one another that for greater security they might passe obliquely or side-long and piercing through the diaphragma or midriffe are on both sides doubly diuided so that the left compasseth the table 10. fig. 1 2. T V X Y right and backe part of the mouth of the stomacke and the right the lefte and forepart which orifice they doe so inuolue that it seemeth to bee made altogether of sinewes from the aboundance of which it hath most exquisite sence to stirre vp and awake the sence of the want of nourishment which sence ariseth from suction for there is the seat The cause of hunger of the appetite to this onely part hath nature giuen the sence of want or of Animal hunger for euen we feele that part especially to be contracted when wee are extreamely hungry The seat of appetite For if we should not feele a kinde of molestation vpon the vtter and absolute exsuction of our nourishment till there be a supply made wee should by degrees be extinguished affamished before wee were aware for our substance is in perpetual wasting and decay the inbred heate continually feeding vppon the Radicall moysture But now it is otherwise because the naturall hunger that is setled in euery particular part hath with it adioyned The appetite of euery particular part a sence of discontent which is onely appeased by assimulation of fresh nourishment These branches of Nerues going downeward make his membranes which were onely membranous before to become neruous being disseminated euen to his bottome These doe also impart the nourishing force or faculty to the fleshy Fibres of the stomacke From the left nerue there runneth a branch along the vppermost seate of the stomacke to the pylorus which when it hath foulded with a few small surcles it goeth thence to the hollow of the Liuer To the bottome of the stomacke doe other two nerues attaine from the sixt Why the brain being stroken the patient casts paire also to wit from the propagation led by the roots of the ribbes Sometime to the left side there are offered nerues arising from the sinewes which runne vnto the spleene Wherefore seeing the stomack hath obtayned so many sinewes it is no wonder if when the braine bee stroken or affected the stomacke also bee disturbed and vomitings caused especially in the Hemicrania or Meigrame And on the other side when the stomacke is affected then the Animall facultie languisheth and melancholly symptoms do happen so that one of them suffering the other hath euer a compassion not as most men haue of others miseries but indeede a reall fellow feeling Furthermore there attaineth to this bottome of the stomacke sometimes a vessell or Vessels from the bladder of gal to the bottom of the stomacke entrance of many vesselles from the bladder of Gall carrying choller thither and causing perpetuall casting A Family of such men are sayd to be at Spire in Germany all of which family euery third day vomit vp a good quantity of Choller they be called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is casters of choller vpward The vse of the stomacke is to receiue meate chewed with the teeth and drinke altered The vse of the stomacke in the mouth through the gullet and the same to retaine till it haue contracted it selfe and embraced them by closing both his orificies and then his naturall inbredde facultie and proper heate boyleth and conuerteth the better part of the Aliments into white creame which we call Chylus That is a substance disposed to be conuerted into bloud For the Galen proper action of the stomacke sayth Galen 5. vsu partium 4. is concoction it being the organ or instrument of the first concoction or the shop and forge of Chilification Moreouer because the substance of the stomacke is membranous and therefore not so hot his ingenit heate is encreased yea doubled by the adiacent parts as the Liuer the What parts assist the stomacks concoction Midriffe the Spleene the Kell the Collicke gut the trunkes of the hollow Veine and the great Arterie the Sweet-bread but especially the Coeliacall Artery compassing it about almost on euery side yeeldeth most immediate assistance For the narrower side of the stomacke toward the right hand is in a manner hid vnder the Liuer the left lieth close to the Spleene and so of the rest which are all as so many coales set together vnder a vessell to make it boyle After the Aliment is concocted the pylorus or lower mouth of the stomacke is loosened and the Chylus thrust downe into the duodenum from thence to supply Aliment to the whole body and so much of the stomacke Of the Oesophagus or Gullet CHAP. X. NOw although the Oesophagus or gullet is for the most part of it scituated The reason why we discourse of the gullet in this place in the Chest or second Region yet because it is continued with
the wonderfull web texture or plat of Veines in respect of which it is likely the Liuer is saide to be the beginning or originall of veynes for the perfecting and absolute confection of the blood But there is one peculiar and notable Anastomosis or inocculation to bee obserued Tab. xiiii M which is a manifest and open pipe and continuated passage into which you may passe a good bigge probe and from which there lyeth an open way through all the least threds of the Gate and hollow Veines And so much the rather are these inocculations of the Veines one with another more diligently to be obserued because through them the humors offending passe when the habite or vtmost region of the body is by purgation emptied by the siedge The lower Tab. xiii Fig. 4 FF Tab xiiii KKKK of these roots are by little and little gathered The port or Gate-veine The Hollow-veine into greater and these into other till at length in the lower part of the Liuer they consent together into the trunke of the port or the Gate veine Tab. xiii Fig. 4. E◠Tab xiiii HH as broad as a thumbe or broader The vpper roots are in like manner Tab xiii Fig 4. CCCC Tab. xiiii EEE vnited by degrees till at length they fall into two notable and great Tab. xiii fig 3 M N braunches reaching to the fore-seate of the Hollow veine where it groweth to the Liuer and lyeth vpon the Diaphragma and there make one trunke Tab. xiii figure 2. F fig 3 D. fig 4 B. Tab xiiii AC Hence it is that the Gate veine Tab viii a is saide to arise out of the hollow side of the Liuer and the Hollow veine Tab viii K out of the conuex or embowed part Amongst these roots certaine fine tendrils Tab xv fig 2 QQ Table xvi figure 1 DDD The passage of Choller to the bladder of Gall. figure 2 aaa hauing the bodies of Veines and being gathered into one stumpe or stalke Tab xv figure 2 a. table xvi figure 1 E are disseminated which carry the choler from the Liuer to the bladder of gall which also are ioyned with the rootes of the gate-veyne that the blood before it come into the branches of the Hollow veine may bee purged and clensed from that cholericke excrement The same substance of the Liuer whereof wee spake before by compassing about these vessels strengthneth them and warranteth their tender threds from danger by whom also How the Liuer is nourished it receyueth in lieu a proportionable good for it is nourished by blood laboured in the roots of the Port veine and out of those small ends powred on euery side into his lap the remainder which he refuseth is carried into the roots of the hollow vein and thence both thrust out and drawne for nourishment into the whole body There are a few small Arteries Table 4 figure 1 H from the Coeliaca diffused in his substance The Arteries of the Liuer which do appeare more vvhite then the Veines on the hollow side where the branches of the Gate Table 4 figure 1 t and figure 2 Y table xi L veine do ioyne together into their common trunke or stumpe that they might ventilate and so preserue the naturall heate of the Liuer wherfore they runne onely through the hollow part for the embowed part is wafted with the continuall motion of the Diaphragma as with a Fan. They also carry vitall heate that the heate being doubled the sanguification might better succeed and that the Liuer also might not be destitute of the vitall faculty for in the whole bodye the Veines and Arteries are in a league and helpe one another these ministring spirits to the veines the veines blood to them It hath two smal Nerues Tab iiii fig 2. y tab xi M from the sixt paire one from that branch that is sent to the vpper mouth of the stomacke tab xv fig 1 o tab xvi fig 1 O The Nerues of the Liuer the other from the branch table xv Figure 2 f which passeth to the roots of the ribbes of the right side both of them dispersed into his coate that he might not be altogether like a plant without sense albeit seruing onely for nourishment it stoode in no need of any quick or notable sense wherefore his Nerues are so very small Hence it is that the paines of the Liuer are not acute or sharpe but obtuse or dull and grauatiue onely But the bottome or center of the Liuer is altogether without sense because of the many motions of the humors therein The vse of the Liuer is by his affused substance to part and separate the vessels that they The vses of the Liuer cleaue not together to sustaine and establish them to cherrish them with his heate because in that place their coats are thinner sayth Galen 4. vsu partium 13. than in any other part of the creature For by this helpe sanguification which is celebrated in the rootes of the gate veine which are in the substance of the Liuer is duly administred to affoord vnto them the naturall Faculty as it were by irradiation euen as the vessels of seede receiue the faculty of Seed-making from the Testicles as also to procreate the Naturall spirite which some deny but Archangelus by many arguments doth establish and last of all to preserue Columbus and maintaine the Nourishing Soule as they call it which is seated in euery particular part of the body But because there are many opinions concerning the manner of sanguification I haue heere thought good to set downe Bauhines conceite as the opinion of a man to whome I am especially in this worke beholding All Aliments aswell solid as liquid are taken by the mouth and after mastication or chewing as there is more or lesse neede are swallowed into the stomacke and there concocted The maner of sanguification as Bauhine hath described it and turned into Chylus This Chylus afterward when the pylorus or lower mouth of the stomacke is opened is thrust downe into the guts and if any part of it escaped elaboration before is there reuised and re-concocted The thin and lawdable part of the Chylus for the thicke excrements called Aluinaefoeces are forced into the great guts together with that humour which is as it were a watery excrement and was engendred in the concoction of the stomacke is suckt away by certaine branches of the Gate-vein deriued from his trunke which is fixed in the hollow part of the Liuer vnto the stomacke but especially vnto the guts These veynes which are called Venae Meseraicae and wee must call the Meseraick veines do attenuate the Chylus which they receyue prepare it and giue it the fyrst When the Chylus becōmeth Chymus rudiment of blood so that now it beginneth to be called Chymus that is a Humour which when it approacheth to the trunke of the Gate-veine is vnburdened of his thicke part the Spleene drawing it away by the Spleenicke
spondelles or racke-bones of the loynes and are distributed into the proper membrane of the kidneyes Moreouer from about the originall of the Arteries of the mesenterie there doe proceede a fewe tendrils of sinewes mingled together part of which goe vnto the kidneyes and the glandules that lye vpon them the other part together with the emulgent Arteries doe insinuate themselues into the hollownesse of the kidney and are distributed through their substance Hence it is that Nephriticall patients haue not onely a certaine dull sence of paine but also most vehement torments in their kidneyes not onely therefore because their holes or dennes as Galen sayth are not wide but narrow and the kidneyes because of the firmenes of their substance cannot be stretched as the bladder may but especially because of these nerues distributed through their substance notwithstanding the paine of the stone is greater when it entreth into the vreter both because of his exquisite sence as also because of the straightnes of the passage through which the stone falling must needes teare it almost with stretching Especially which paine wee see not alwayes to follow those whose passages are dilated by the often comming downe of stones The inner venter or cauitie of the kidney hath a hollownesse made of a sinewey membrane The inner venter of the kidnies which the emulgent vesselles doe not produce for they determine into exceeding hairy threds but the vreters which becomming first broade in the hollownesse table 21. figure 1. F of the kidneyes are the matter of it At whose side on either part before the vessels are diuided into lesse braunches the substance of the kidneyes appeareth loose and vnequall the Anatomists call it Cauernosa spongi formis erosa when the fat that compasseth it about is diligently remoued The vreters are diuided into great braunches first double or treble as in the next chapter shall appeare and then into many others not after the manner of other vesselles still The Vreters lessened into hairie threds but broade in the end so that a man may obserue eight or ten branches like canels or pipes that they may better receiue the Caruncles before spoken of For those Caruncles which are like small glandules in the endes of all the vessels and of a paler colour because they are of a harder flesh then the rest of the kidney being produced out of the substance of the kidney and somewhat sharpe like vnto the nipples of breasts insinuating themselues into the said vessels in manner of a couer or stopple doe stoppe them vp which if they be cut according to their length a man may obserue in them certain furrowes and tunnelles as small as hayres Wherefore being so finely bored that they will scarcely admit a haire by them the whay or serous humour coloured with choler is separated from the bloud and is insensiblie percolated or drayned into the pipes of the vreters or membranous tunnels this is called the Colatorie and gathered together in that common hollownesse and thence is sent downeward by the vreters into the bladder it may bee The colatorie these furrowie passages are hollowed in the substance of the kidney like as the holes in the nipples of the breasts And these spongie Caruncles had neede to be so finely bored least the bloud which together with the vrine and choler is drawne by the emulgents but for their proper nourishment should with them also passe away into the bladder which we see sometimes to happen and that without paine when either the separating or reteyning vertues of the kidneyes are decayed or those small passages widened considering that this separation The separation of the whey is by transfusion not by concoction How the kidnies are nourished is made not by concoction where Nature is her owne chooser but by transfusion although wee doe not deny but that these excrements do here receiue a kinde of elaboration though not a concoction This bloud thus remayning behind is as it were sucked by the flesh of the kidneyes and is sprinkled vpon it like a kinde of dew from whence by degrees after the manner of a vapour it is scattered into his whole body cleaueth is vnited to it and finally becommeth the nourishment of the kidneyes But because being so thin it nourisheth but slenderly it is continually and in great quantity drawne in together with much vrine which the bloud remayning behinde insensibly droppeth through those Caruncles These things although they differ from the common opinion of some others yet may The triall of the truth in this discourse of the passage of the vrine they fitly be demonstrated if you put a Probe into the vessels as they enter in and the vreter as it goeth out and then make incision at the saddle side of the kidney and yet much better more elegantly are these passages shewed if you separate the flesh of the kidney from his vesselles which separation hath aboundantly satisfied vs in this point and therefore we haue exhibited it in the xxi Table and the first Figure But because these things doe not so appeare in Dogges as we haue nowe saide and yet young Students for want of Mens bodies are often faine to dissect the kidneyes of Dogs we thought it not amisse here brieflie to insert the description of Dogs kidneyes also The structure therefore of a Dogges kidney delineated in the second Figure of this 21. Table is on this manner Fig. 1. sheweth the vesselles of the Kidneyes separated from the flesh Fig. 2. sheweth the Kidnies Dissected according vnto Vesalius The first is the Kidney cut according to the length through the gibbous part so as the slit reacheth vnto the second sinus or cauity of it no part of the kidney taken away The second exhibiteth the Kidney where all the substance or partition which is called Septum renis is sliced away in a compasse that the second cauity may better appeare The third sheweth al the branches of the first cauity or sinus the flesh of the Kidney being quite taken away Fig. 3. expresseth the deuise of some men concerning the per colation or streyning of the whey the first sheweth the Kidney dissected from the gibbous part toward the Hollow part together with the Cribrum or Siue the second sheweth the middle part of the Kidney TABVLA XXI FIG I FIG II. FIG III. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. Vpon this Membranous body lyeth the cauity of the Kidney in the middest whereof hangeth a part of the substance of the Kidney regarding the gibbous side differing in colour from the rest and wanting the Membranous couer before named It is like a new Moone and hangeth like a partition so leaning vpon the Membranous body that the cauities of the same Kidney seemeth to be double But in the Kidney of a man there are no such cauitie to be found but the emulgent vessels and the Vreters are diuided through his substance into many branches and the cauities which are in the
The mammary arteries The nerues of the breasts It hath nerues from the sinewes of the Chest which are carried through the skinne partly to the nipples but the thicker nerue is that which commeth to the nipple from the first nerue of the Chest and doeth communicate thereto exquisite sence and is the cause of the pleasure conceiued by their contrectation The Glandules or Kernels which they call in Latin mamillae or mammae or rather glandulous The Glandules of the breasts bodies which make the body table 27. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or bulke of the Pap are the greatest of the whole body white and do not as in most of the other creatures make one body but are many and distinct spongious and rare or porous that they might better drawe the Aliment vnto them and conuert it into milke of these one is the greatest placed vnder the nipple and about it are set all the other small ones which cleaue to the muscles of the Thorax or Chest Among these are infinite vesselles with many windings and turnings wouen together that the bloud before in the veines and arteries perfected receiued by the breasts might in these boughts and turnings through the glandulous bodies bee conuerted into milke which is a surplusage of profitable Aliment Tab. 27. sheweth the breast of a woman with the skin flayed off For the rest of the Table belongeth to another place Plato calleth it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to bud forth in Latine Papilla because it is like a Papula that Why rugged is a pimple whelke or wheale It is of a fungous or Mozy substance somewhat like that of the yard whence it is that by touching or sucking it groweth stiffe and after will againe grow more flaccid or loose In virgins this teate standeth not much out from the brest is red and vnequall very like a strew-bery in Nurses because of the childes sucking it groweth longer and blewer in old folkes it is long and blackish About this teate is a circle called in Latine Areola in Greeke 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 we know no English The circle of the Teate name it hath vnlesse we call it the ring of the Pap but in Virgins it is pale or whitish in women with childe and nurses it is duskish in olde women blacke and the skin more rugous and vnequall From the disease of the Wombe it is also sometimes yellow sometimes blacke For Hippocrates saith a man may iudge of the wombe by the colour of the Nipples for if the A good note for women nipple or his ring which was wont to be red grow pale then is the womb affected The colour of the nipples and the ring about them is also often made duskish and black by setting The cuill euent of drawing glasses to the Nipples drawing glasses drawing heades or such like vppon them to make them stand out that the Infant may take them which may notwithstanding bee preuented if care be had The proper vse of the breasts is to be a Magazine or Store-house of meate for the Mothers owne childe or that in them so long milke should bee generated as the Infant for his The vse of the breasts nourishment should stand in neede of it For whereas it was accustomed in the wombe to be nourished by the Mothers blood conueyed vnto it by the vmbilicall veines it cannot so suddenly change that liquid for more solid nourishment for it could not digest it because when it is newe borne it is but tender and weake beside sudden changes are very daungerous wherefore it had neede of such a nourishment as should not be too remote from the nature of blood and that it might more easily bee nourished should also bee liquid sweete and after a sort familiar vnto it but such is milke which is made in the brests For so in growne men and women the Aliments are in the stomacke turned into Chylus which is a Creame or substance like vnto Milke Wherefore according to Galen the first and chiefe vse of the brests is the generation of Milke that they may be ashamed who for nicity and delicacie do forfeite this principal vse of these excellent parts and make them onely stales or bauds of lust A Secondary vse of them is in respect of their scituation that they might be a kinde of couering and defence for the heart and that themselues hauing receyued heate and cherrishment from the heart might again returne vnto it warmth such as we get by garments we buckle about vs especially this vse is manifest in women in whom these breasts growe oftentimes into a great masse or waight so as they being farre colder then men their Entrals vnder the Hypochondria are warmed by them It may also be added that they are giuen for ornament of the Chest and for a mans pleasure as is partly touched before Hippocrates in his booke de Glandulis addeth another vse of the Pappes that is to receiue excrementitious moysture for if sayeth Hippocrates any disease or other euent take away a Note this womans Pappes her voyce becommeth shriller she proueth a great spitter and is much troubled with payne in her head And thus much of the Pappes of women Now men likewise haue Paps by Nature allowed The Paps of Men. them scituated also in the middle of the breast and lying vpon the first muscle of the arme called Pectoralis They are two a right and a left but they rise little aboue the skinne as they doe in women because they haue scarcely any Glandules for they were not ordayned to conuert or conteine milke Yet we do not deny but in them is generated a humour What humor is in them like to milke which Aristotle in the xii booke of his historie of Creatures cals Milk but it will not at all nourish albeit we haue seene it in some men something plentifull The Pappes of Men are compounded of skin fat and nipples which appeare yea sometimes hang forth in them because of the abundant fat which in corpulent bodies is more about that place then in any part of the Chest beside the nipples of men are somewhat fungous Their composition and also perforated They haue Veines Arteries and Nerues for their nourishment life and sence Their vse is to defend the heart as with a Target or Buckler or it may bee sayed that they are giuen for ornament that the breast should not be without some representation in Their Vses it The Nipples are the Center in which the veines and nerues doe determine which also are therein conioyned And heere we will put an end to the History of Parts belonging to Nutrition or Nourishment and prosecute our intent to discusse the Controuersies and Questions vvhich may arise concerning them A Dilucidation or Exposition of the Contouersies concerning the parts belonging to Nutrition QVESTION I. Whether the Guttes haue any common Attractiue faculty THE Physitians of old
fleshy Like as Galen calleth the wombe somtime a Membranous sometime a Fleshy part Concerning the scite or position of the guts the Ancients seem to haue erred because they thought that the great guts did occupy the lower part of the belly and the smaller the The error of the Ancients about the scituation of the guts vpper but the truth is that the Colon which is the greatest of all the rest runnes vp vnto the hollownesse of the Liuer and the bottome of the stomacke but the Ileon is extended downward vnto the Share bones I conceyue that the Dissection of Dogges and foure-footed Beasts deceyued them Galen himself speaking to the capacity of the common people Galen Com. in 3. Epid. calleth the great guts the lower the small guts the vpper yea and many Physitians at this day are mistaken distinguishing the Dysentery of the smal guts from that of the crasse Diuers opinions or thicke by this that if the paine be in the vpper parts then the disease is in the smal if in the lower then in the great guts Concerning the scituation of the Collick gut there are diuers opinions some do therefore thinke it ascendeth vnto the bottome of the stomacke that by his contaction as also by that of the neighbor parts the concoction of the stomacke might be furthered others Different conceits about the ascending of the Colon. imagine that it is therefore conueyed to the hollow of the Liuer where the bladder of gal is seated that the expulsiue faculty of the Colon which lyeth as it were asleepe might by the sweating yssue of choler be better awaked and set on edge Another sort there are who imagine that the Colon giueth way to the smaller Guts walling them about in manner of a fence or rampert comming not neere the center of the Mesenterie and that therefore it taketh vp the left side of the body that the greater branch of the Port-veine called Mesentericus might with a shorter cut be inserted into the guts and carrie or transferre the meate vnto the Liuer by a nearer way Some there are who thinke that the Colon adhereth or cleaueth to the bottome of the stomacke and hollow of the Liuer that by their contaction the remainder of the Aliment which stayeth in the chambers of the Colon might receiue more perfect concoction Moreouer they giue this reason of his scituation aloft that that part of the Chylus which is therein contained might not so soone passe away and so there might be more perfect accomplished exsuction of the creame for which cause also the cels and chambred convolutions of the Colon as also the blinde gut were ordained This Collick gut is indeede the largest or most ample of all the rest but where it toucheth Why the pressing of the Spleene makes melancholy bodyes to auoid wind downward the Kidnies and the Spleene it becōmeth narrower lest it should compresse the spleen whence it comes to passe that those whose Spleens do swel or be notably stuffed can hardly auoide any winde downward vnlesse the Spleene bee pressed And thus much concerning the difficulties or curious questions about the guts wherein we haue beene somewhat more prolixe that such as delight in the contemplatiue part of Anatomy might not go away from vs altogether vnsatisfied The stomack followeth QVEST. VIII Whither the vpper mouth of the stomacke be the seate of Appetite SEeing the liue-tide of euery creature is inconstant and like a poaste passeth swiftly away because of the continuall effluxion or expence of the threefold substance wherein it consisteth Nature being vigilant and carefull about her owne preseruation endeuoureth continually to make vp the The reason of our threefold nourishment breach by Respiration and Nourishment By respiration the spirituous by nourishment the fleshy and solide substaunce is restored And hence it is that our nourishment is threefold Aer meate and drinke But because there can be no nourishment without Appetite nature hath dispensed to euery part a certaine desire whereby as by goades they are pricked forward to draw and sucke into themselues conuenient and familiar Aliment But this desire in the particular parts of the body is without sense for they feele not neyther perceiue when they draw or sucke such conuenient aliment Wherefore least the parts shoulde pine away when they are exhausted and as it were hunger-starued The vpper mouth of the stomacke the seate or appetite nature hath framed one part of exquisite and perfect sense which alone fore-apprehending the suction and so the want of the rest should stirre vp the creature to prouide and cooke their nourishment for them For if the sense of this suction or traction were in euery part then in the time of affamishment or thirst they would perpetually languish so the creature leade his life in a perpetuall disease This part so by nature set out is the vppermost mouth of the stomacke which the ancient Galen Graecians as Galen witnesseth called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 And all men doe concurre that in it the Animall appetite and hunger which is nothing else but a sense of suction haue their peculiar residence And this sense is exhibited in this place by two notable nerues called Stomachici or the Stomacke Nerues arising from the sixt paire or coniungation of the Braine But after what manner this Animall appetite is stirred vp Galen hath elegantly taught vs in his first Booke of the causes of Symptoms For the better vnderstanding of which place these things are first to be obserued that the animall appetite is double one naturall another The Animall appetite double depraued to the first these fiue signes or symptoms must necessarily concurre first an exhaustion or deepe expence of the substance of the parts next there must bee in the same parts a suction or traction for the exhausted parts do draw from their next neighbors and those from others till by continuation it do come to some extreame which extreame is the vpper mouth of the stomacke where the traction ceaseth from this traction ariseth 5. signes or Symptomes required to appetite the third signe which is a divulsion or kinde of violence offered to the mouth of the Stomacke which divulsion or violence striketh the nerue whence commeth the sense and from the sense the appetite In the depraued appetite the same order and degrees of Symptoms are not obserued For in the disease called Boulimos there is hunger without appetite and in the Dog-appetite What Boulimos is there is appetite without hunger In the Boulimos all the parts being exhausted or hunger-bit do draw from the stomacke which on euery hand is torne and as it weee launced yet doth not that divulsion strike the sense and so no appetite followeth in the mean time the other parts being defrauded of their aliment doe wast away and consume The cause of this insensibility is the refrigeration of the nerue the obstruction of the same and the
wherein it may be transported because it distendeth the parts in which it is entertained and occupieth a place for when the creature is dead both the ball of the eye is corrugated or wrinkled and the Membranes thereof doe also fall being no more illustrated by the beames of the spirits It is therefore a body but the finest and subtillest substance that is in this Little world For as the winde it passeth 〈…〉 wind repasseth at his pleasure vnseene but not vnfelt for the force and incursion thereof is not without a kinde of violence so the seede although it be thicke and viscid yet passeth thorough vessels which haue no manifest cauities the reason is because it is full as it were 〈…〉 houen with spirits Galen in his third Booke of Naturall Faculties saith That blood is thin 〈…〉 vapour thinner and Spirits thinnest of all I saide moreouer that it was alwayes in motion for the spirits are continually moued not by another onely as the humors which whither they be drawne or driuen are alwaies 〈◊〉 the 〈…〉 in 〈◊〉 motion mooued by a power without themselues but also by themselues that is by an inbred principle of their owne So that there is a double original of the spirits motion on homebred another but a stranger by the homebred principle they are mooued as the flame vpward 〈…〉 and downward as Galen teacheth Vpward because light for they are fiery and airy and downe-ward towarde their nourishment If either of these motions bee hindred the spirit is corrupted and that by consumption or extinction by consumption for want of 〈…〉 nourishment when it cannot mooue downward by extinction from his contraries when it is choaked by cold and moysture because it cannot mooue vpwards Againe they are moued by an externall principle when they are Drawn hither or Driuen thither They are 〈…〉 driuen the Naturall from the Liuer the Vitall from the heart in his Systole the Animall from the Braine when it is compressed They are drawne the naturall by the veines the vitall by the particular parts together with the Arteriall blood the Animall verie rarely vnlesse a part be affected either with paine or pleasure For in such a case neyther dooth the vehemency of the obiect suffer the faculty to rest nor the heate cease to draw the spirits vnto it The spirits therefore haue a body mooueable It followeth in the definition that they are engendred of blood and a thin vapour so 〈…〉 that they haue a double matter an exhalation of the bloode and aire and therefore it is that all our spirits are cherished preserued and nourished by aire and blood The last part of the definition designeth the vse of the spirits as being the last and finall 〈…〉 cause for which they were ordained For the spirits are the vehicles or carriages not of the soule but of the faculties thereof for if the Vessels Veines Arteries or Nerues be tyed 〈…〉 the life motion and sense of the parts to which these vessels passe do instantly abate are in short time vtterly extinguished vpon the interception of the spirits not of the faculties themselues which are incorporeall because the band or tye dooth neither interrupt the continuity of the vessell with his originall neither yet his naturall disposition And this is the nature of spirits in generall Now some spirits are ingenit or in-bred which are so many in number as there are seuerall kinds and fortes of parts some influent which flowe as it were from diuers Fountaines 〈…〉 and serue to rowze and raise vp the sleepy and sluggish operations of the former Concerning the number of the influent spirits Physitians are at great difference among themselues Argenterius thinketh that there is but one sort of spirits because there is but one soule and that hauing but one organ one bloode and one ayre which is breathed in But the Ancients farre more acutely haue recorded three manner of spirites because there 〈…〉 are three faculties of the soule the Naturall the Vitall and the Animall three principles the Braine the Heart and the Liuer and three kinde of Vessels Veines Arteries and Sinnewes That there is an Animall spirit beside that Galen inculcateth it in sundry places many reasons do euict it For to what purpose else was the braine hollowed or bowed into so many arches To what purpose are those intricate mazes and laberynthes of small Arteries which in the Braine we call Rete mirabile the wonderfull Nette And why are the sinewes propagated into so many braunches But of this we shall haue occasion to speake more hereafter as also of the vitall which no man yet euer opposed and of which the Poet maketh Ouid. mention calling it a diuinitie Est Deus in nobis agitante calescimus illo In vs there is spirit seated And by his motion we are heated Onely concerning the naturall spirit there hath been some difference many labouring That there is no natural spirit to blot his name out of the rowle whose arguments we will here scite before the tribunall of Reason to see how they acquite themselues First they say that the naturall faculty needeth 1. de loc affict 12. meth in arte parua 1. Reason no vehicle or weftage because it is inbred in euery part for which they auouch Galen Againe there is no matter whereof this naturall spirit should bee made because there bee no vessels whereby ayre may be conuayed vnto the Liuer neither is there any place for his generation there be no such cauities in the Liuer as are in the Heart and the braine Adhereto 2. Reason that there be no currents or channels to be found whereby it should be led through the body for the coates of the veines are too thinne to hold or contain an aetherial spirit 3. Reason And truely Herophilus well conceiteth that therefore the Artery is manifolde sixe fold 4. Reason Herophilus sayth he thicker then the veine because it was made to conteine the spirits which by reason of their tenuity if they had not beene inclosed within stronger wals would easily haue vanished away Moreouer seeing the spirits as Hippocrates sayth haue in them a kinde of nimble violence 5. Reason Hippocrates 6. Reason and impetious motion if they were contayned within the veines they would make the veines to beate as do the arteries Finally if it be granted that the spirits doe passe and repasse through the veines yet with what nourshment shall they bee preserued For heate sayth the great Dictator Hippocrates is nourished by moderate cold nowe there is no ayre Hippocrates led vnto the veines to serue that turne These and such like are the arguments whereby they casheere this naturall spirit which Answere to the former arguments To the first if they be weighed in equall balances will be found too light to sway an established iudgement For first Galen doth not absolutely deny that
very notable which ascendeth vnder the share-bone through the middle bifurcation to the coate of the yarde and from thence runneth diuersly dispersed to his muscles and to his whole body togither with the arteries through his back as farre as to the Nut or glans to giue it a more exact sence especially the Nut where it is of most vse to stirre vp pleasure in the act of generation In Ganglia what they are these Nerues hapneth that tumor which we call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is a knotty tumor of a sinew resisting the finger that presseth it yet not dolorous which ganglia here are the cause that when the yarde is erected stiffe like a Rams horne a Falopius speaketh it is not distended beyond his ordinary magnitude but onely groweth full and turgid Finally the vpper part of the yarde is carnous or fleshy table 4. figure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 7. 9. D The glans or nu of the yarde and looketh alwaies as if it were swollen and indeede it hath a greater compasse then any part of the whole trunke as Archangelus calleth it of his body that like the bottome of a glasse Still or cupping glasse it might gather more heate vnto it selfe then any other part It is equall smooth and turbinated that is broad at the basis or bottom and growing smaller His figure yet keeping his roundnes euen to the top much like a Turkes cap or turbant and it is called glans or the Nut of the yarde and it is girt with a circle like a crowne It is very soft that it might not offend the wombe somewhat acuminated or sharpned also at the top the better to fit it for the orifice of the matrixe of exquisite sence it is that in the attrition and Substance motion together with the intention of the imagination which is most powerfull in both sexes in the matter of procreation the seede might be more plentifully eiaculated It is couered with a fine membrane produced from that membrane which wee sayed before His mēbrane did encompasse the pipe or Canale and it groweth not vnlike to a mushrum vppon the heads of the two bodies of the yarde It is as we sayed of a spongy substance which yet is not hollow within but somewhat more solid and firme then other ordinary spongy bodies But that it might be kept smooth soft and glib it hath a couering which ariseth from The prepuce or fore-skin the skinne of the yarde brought forward and againe reflected or returned which the Grecians call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Galen in his 15. Booke of the vse of Parts calleth it Cutis epiphysin in Latin praeputium we cal it the fore-skin that part which hangeth ouer the end is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because in coition it is mooued vp and downe that in this attrition it might gather more heate and increase the pleasure of the other sexe Some say it was ordained for ornament also and not without good reason because vpon the more dishonest part God Nature or rather the God of Nature hath put the more honour that is the more couering This fore-skinne in the end of it is sometimes so contracted or drawne together that it cannot be drawne backe nor the Nut discouered without the helpe of a Chyrurgion But when the Nutte is vncouered that it may recouer his couer againe this prepuce is tyed in the lower part with a membranous band or tie which the greekes call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 some 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 vinculum caninum the Latines frenum in English the bridle Archangelus calleth it a Ligament others will haue it to be made of the extremities or ends of the sinewes and this is it which bridleth or reyneth vp the fore-skinne on the lower side to the toppe of the Nut. It also furthereth the prosusion of seede communicating by the Canale motion and heate to the prostate glandules which conteine the seede ready for eiaculation For oftentimes in lustfull disports or imaginations if this bridle be but lightly moued the seede will incontinently issue foorth euen as after a full meale if a man but touch the end of his throate with his finger the stomacke by reason of the continuity of the parts contracteth it selfe and returneth the crapula or vndigested gobbets into the lap by vomit In the middest of this Nut is a passage or hole through which both the seede and the vrine is powred foorth for it compasseth the common Canale at which place it is larger but presently is contracted againe that the seede hauing there a kinde of momentanie stay or stop might procure more pleasure in this part Wherefore those that labour of the gonorrhaea caused by the acrimony of rotten seed heaped vp in this large place are here tortured with vlcers The vse of it The vse of the Yard is as hath beene saide in the particular parts thereof onely wee will add that the auoiding of vrine was not the cause of the making of this member For we see women make water without it but for procreation Euen as Nature hath ordayned the nose for smelling yet shee vseth it secondarily for purging the mucous excrements of the braine So vpon a second intention this member serueth to deriue away the vrine wherewith otherwise we should lightly defile our selues And thus much shall suffice for the parts of Generation in men wherein I haue bin indeed as particular as the Anatomicall History did require but yet withall hope I shall finde pardon because the Reader may perceiue at least if he haue any knowledge that I haue pretermitted many secrets of Nature which I could and would heere haue somewhat insisted vpon if I had imagined that all into whose hands this worke should come had bin competent and fit Auditors for such kinde of Philosophy CHAP. IX Of the proportion of these parts both in Men and Women IT was the opinion of Galen in his 14. Booke de vsu partium and the 11. Chapter that women had all those parts belonging to generation which men haue although in these they appeare outward at the Perinaeum or interfoeminium in those they are for want of heate reteined within for seeing The same parts of generation in men and women a woman is begotten of a man and perfect also in makind for Natures imperfections are not so ordinary it is reasonable that the substance yea and the shape of the parts in both fexes should bee alike as comming from one and the same set as it were of causes Neither is it so vncouth in Nature that those partes which in some creatures are prominent and apparent should in others be veyled and couered for Moles indeede are not without eyes but haue them lying deeper in their heads and ouercouered whence Virgil saith Aut oculis Captifodere cubilia talpae that is Virgil 1. Georg Or hood-winkt Moales haue dig'd their Bowers So we call
vsu partium and the 9. Chapter may take to it selfe some small portion of whaey humidity which may by his acrimony stirre vp his action A cause of pleasure and procure pleasure as we see the whaey humors that are gathered vnder the skinne if they be heated they stirre vp itching and a kinde of pleasure withall By this veine also the chiefe part of the menstruall blood especially in women but not with childe dooth flowe foorth The Veine from the Hypogastricall The other Veine ariseth from the Hypogastricall braunch of the hollowe Veine at the sides of the great bone about the share it is the greater and ascendeth by the sides of the necke vnto the middest of the wombe where it mingleth it selfe with the former This is distributed partly through the bottome of the wombe partly through the necke of it But the vessels that passe through the bottome are alwayes vnited which saith Fallopius Anatomists haue much neglected by some branches and that eyther without the wombe or in his substance without the wombe the boughs of the vpper vein are ioyned with the small branches of the lower at the necke of the womb Tab. 9. fig. 2 e with h where on both sides there are many vesselles and those notable ones finger-fanged or placed like crosse Fingers and being vnited doe passe into his substance and end or open into the cauity which Anastomoses or inoculations of veines are more conspicuous in women with childe and those whose courses do slowe or are neere vpon it But if they be not vnited then from the lower veine some branches are carried vpward to be planted in the bottome The branches of this Hypogastricall veine being entred the substance of the wombe do Acetabula and Cotelydones what they are mingle themselues with the vpper braunches proceeding from the spermaticall and the mouths or extreamities of them reach vnto the inner cauity of it and are called Cotelydones and Acetabula to which in the conception the Liuer of the wombe or the after birth doth cleaue from whence the infant receiueth aliment through the vmbilicall vesselles and by which it is tied to the wombe Through these there arriueth more blood at the wombe then is necessary for the nourishment thereof all the while the Woman is childing that when conception shall happen to bee there may bee some quantity of the Mothers blood at hand which is one of the principles of generation as also that when the infant is begotten and doth encrease it may not want aliment according to that proportion it standeth in neede of all which blood after the infant is brought into the world returneth back to the breasts and there is turned into milke TABVLA XIII The first Figure sheweth an Infant of 14. dayes olde in which all the parts are exactly delineated FIG II. The second figure sheweth an abortiue Infant which was auoided the xxv day after conception being depriued of blood to nourish it because the vmbilical vessels were broken The magnitude of that infant is perfectly described Finally the other part of the lower veine is inserted into the necke of the wombe Tab. 9. fig. 2 e The other part of the Hipogastrical veine whether if too much blood be brought by the spermaticke vessels whilst the woman is with childe it is exonerated not by the orifice or mouth of the wombe but by the Anastomosis or inoculations of the veines into the neck of the same Wherefore by these veines are some women with childe euacuated which haue plethoricall and ful bodies and How and by what wayes women with child haue their courses so more affluence of blood in the first months after their conception then is required for the nourishment of the Infant and not by the bottome of the wombe as otherwise in maides and women the menstruall blood vseth to bee purged otherwise the Infant would be choaked with the aboundance of bloud and the orifice of the wombe must necessarily be opened which would bring a danger of abortment That which we haue sayed of the veines wee must say of the arteries which accompany Of the arteries of the wombe Their vse them whose vse also is in those that be not with childe to encrease the heat of the womb to bring vnto it spirit and vital bloud together with vital faculty and heat and by their motion to ventilate or breath the in-bred heat to stir the bloud and so to preserue it from putrifaction But whether in the time of the courses the arteriall blood bee also euacuated we ingenuously confesse our selues to be ignoraÌ„t saith Bauhine sure we are that from these forenamed vesselles or that which is called the lap or priuy veine there are carried certaine small veines and arteries to the lap and the hillocks or Caruncles thereof The nerues of the wombe though they bee small yet are they very many implicated or couched one within another like a net that they may confer exquisite sence vnto it To the The nerues of the wombe higher part of the bottom of it they come from the termination of the branches of the sixt coniugation which go vnto the roots of the ribs To the lower part of the bottom and to the neck from the marrow of the loyns and the great bone whence is that admirable consent between the womb and the head especially the backpart of it that feeling those things The cause of the conseâ—t betweene the wombe the head A cause of pleasure that are troublesome the expelling faculty might be prouoked and pleasure also conceiued in coition therefore about the lower parts they are more plentifull as also the motion of the wombe wherein it draweth and imbraceth the seed of the man quickned and strengthned For there are certaine fleshy fibres in the wombe as wee haue shewed already which are in stead of small muscles And thus far of the simple and similar parts of the wombe or matrix now followeth the compound or dissimilar CHAP. XIIII Of the simple or similar parts of the wombe and particularly of the bottome and the orifice ALthough from the bottome of the wombe to the very lap or priuities there be but one continuated passage yet because in it there are many and diuerse The parts of the wombe parts therefore it is diuided into the vpper part or the bottom the mouth or inward orifice of the necke the necke it selfe and the outward priuity or lap The bottom which is properly the wombe the matrix Hippoc. in his booke de nat pueri calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 sinus the bosom Galen so also lib. 14 15. de vsu partiuÌ„ the 3. The bottome or soale chapters and somtimes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is a cauity or hollownes This is the chiefe of all the parts of it because for it al the other parts were made for in it is the Infant conceiued of the seed that we may so say
diuulsion sence sence Appetite is called Animall and yet the motion wherby the greedy stomacke sometimes snatcheth vnchewed meate euen out of the mouth is Naturall so the erection of this member because it is with sence and imagination is sayed to bee Animall but the locall motion whereby it is mathematically inlarged is Natural arising from the inbred faculty of the ligaments such is also the motion of the wombe when it draweth seed and of the heart when it draweth into it selfe ayre and bloud Yet it must be confessed that this naturall motion is holpen by the Animal because the foure muscles before mentioned though they be very small yet they helpe to enlarge the distention and doe also for a time keep it so distended If it be obiected that in the running of the Reynes called the venereall Gonorrhaea there Obiection is erection without imagination or pleasure yea with payne I answere with Galen that there is a twofould erection one according to nature another vnnaturall the first is from Solution the ingenit faculty of the hollow ligament the other is symptomaticall the first with pleasure the other without it yea with payne in the first the yarde is first distended and after filled with a vaporous spirite in the latter it is first filled then after distended In a word Comparisons there is the same difference betweene these two distentions which is between the two motions of the heart In the Naturall motion of the heart which is accomplished by the vitall faculty because the heart is dilated it is filled with ayre and bloud and because it is contracted it is emptyed but in the depraued palpitation of the heart the heart is distended because it is filled So smiths bellowes because they are dilated are presently filled with ayre for the auoyding of vacuity but bottles are distended because they are filled with wine or water Wherefore the Naturall erection euer followeth imagination and hath pleasure accompanying it but the vnnaturall which Galen calleth Priapismus is altogether without Priapismus lust or appetite The cause of this is a plenitude of thick crasse wind proued because the motion is so sudden and so violent for all violent and sudden motions are of winde not of The causes of it humor as Galen saith and this wind or vapour is generated either in the hollow nerues and ligaments or is thither brought by the open passages of the arteries But of what Surely of crasse and thicke humours and that is the reason why melancholly men are most troubled with this vnnaturall erection as also are Lepers and therefore the Antients called the Melancholly men subiect to it and why Leprosie satyriasis And thus much concerning the parts of generation in men now it followeth concerning those of women QVEST. VIII How the parts of generation in men and women doe differ COncerning the parts of generation in women it is a great and notable question Whether the parts of generation in men and women do onely differ in scituation whether they differ onely in scituation from those of men For the ancients haue thought that a woman might become a man but not on the contrary side a man become a woman For they say that the parts of generation in womenly hid because the strength of their naturall heate is weaker then in men in whom it thrusteth those parts outward Women haue spermaticall vessels aswell preparing as Leading vessels and Reasons for it testicles which boile the blood and a kinde of yard also which they say is the necke of the wombe if it be inuerted Finally the bottome of the wombe distinguished by the middle line is the very same with the cod or scrotum This Galen often vrgeth in diuers of his works as before is saide so Aegineta Auicen Rhasis and all of the Greeke and Arabian Families Authors with whom all Anatomists do consent For confirmation also heereof there are many stories current among ancient and moderne writers of many woemen turned into men some of which we will not heere thinke much to remember First therefore we reade that at Rome when Licinius Crassus and Cassius Longinus were Consuls the seruant of one Cassinus Examples Cassinus Maid-seruant of a maide became a young man and was thereupon led aside into the desert Island of the Sooth-sayers Mutianus Licinius reporteth that at Argos in Greece he saw a maide named Arescusa who after she was married became a man and had a beard and after married Arescusa another woman by whom she had yssue Pliny also writeth that he saw in Affrica P. Cossitius a Citizen of Tisdetra who of a woman the day before became a man the next day The Hyaena also a cruell and subtle Beast Cossitius The Hyaena doth euery other yeare change her sexe Of whom Ouid in the xv of his Metamorphosis saith Et quae modo foemina tergo Passa marem nunc esse marem miramur Hyaenam The same Hyaena which we saw admit the male before To couer now her female mate we can but wonder sore Pontanus hath the same of Iphis in an elegant verse Iphis. Vota puer soluit quae foemina vouerat Iphis. Iphis her vow benempt a Maide But turned boy her vow she paide Of later times Volateran a Cardinall saith that in the time of Pope Alexander the sixt he A story of Volateran the Cardinall Another in Auscis saw at Rome a virgin who on the day of her mariage had suddenly a virile member grown out of her body We reade also that there was at Auscis in Vasconia a man of aboue sixtie yeares of age grey strong and hairy who had beene before a woman till the age of xv yeares or till within xv yeares of threescore yet at length by accident of a fall the Ligaments saith my Author being broken her priuities came outward and she changed her sex before which change she had neuer had her couses Pontanus witnesseth that a Fishermans A Fishermans wench of Caieta Emilia wench of Caieta of fourteene yeares olde became suddenly a young springall The same happened to Emilia the wise of Antonie Spensa a Citizen of Ebula when she had been twelues yeares a married woman In the time of Ferdinand the first K. of Naples Carlota and Francisca the daughters of Ludouike Carlota and Francisca Amatus Lusitinus his story Hippocrates his Phaetusa Quarna of Salernum when they were 15. years old changed their sex Amatus Lusitanus testifieth in his Centuries that hee saw the same at Conibrica a famous towne of Portugall There standeth vpon record in the eight section of the sixt Booke of Hippocrates his Epidemia an elegant History of one Phaetusa who when her husband was banished was so ouergrown with sorrow that before her time her courses vtterly stopped and her body became manlike hairy all ouer and she had a beard and her voice grew stronger The same also
the Controuersies of the Fourth Booke THE FIFT BOOKE Wherein the Historie of the Infant is acurately described as also the principles of Generation the Conception the Conformation the Nourishment the Life the Motion and the Birth of the Infant as neere as may be according to the Opinion of Hippocrates The Praeface FInding this following discourse of the forming of the Infant in Laurentius immediately following his History of the parts of Generation and considering that it contained many things not only profitable but pleasant also I thought good gentle Reader to make thee partaker thereof And the rather I heere to perswaded my selfe because at the first sight I conceiued that my selfe also in this my conception shold find pleasure But it hapneth all otherwise with me then it is in naturall generation where the infant is begotten in pleasure though brought forth in paine For this I assure thee was begotten with much paine trauel and if thy gentle hand help not in the birth that also wil be very irksome I know I shal be taxed by some for hanging too long in this argument but I also know that all the Authority blame hath is frō the Authors therof The subiect of our present discourse is the history of the Infant of the Principles of his generation his Conception Conformation Nourishment Life Motion and Birth Verilie a knotty snarled skaine to vnreele a thicket wherein he that hasteth with bold rashnesse The argumēt of the Booke following and temerity shall offend stumble at euery step he that is diligent shall entangle himself and he that is guided by blinde ignorance shall light vpon pits and bogs so that it will bee impossible for any man that enters into these Listes fairely to acquite himselfe The further he wadeth in this Riuer the greater confluence of waters wil ouertake him the deeper must he sound if he will finde the bottome We begin with the seed which is like the Chaos Vpon which as the spirit of God moued whilst it was without forme first to preserue it after to distinguish it so it is in this masse The maner of the Infantes production outof the seed of seed the Formatiue spirit broodeth it first After as a Spider in the center of her Lawnie Canopy with admirable skil weaueth her Cipresse web first hanging it by slender Ties to the roose and after knitting her enter braided yarn into a curious net so the spirit first fastneth the seed to the wombe with membranes and ligaments after distinguisheth it into certaine spermaticall threds which we call Stamina corporis the warpe of the bodie To these when the second principle which is the Mothers blood accrueth it filleth vp their voyde distances and so amasseth them into a solid body which euery day is nourished and encreased into all dimensions furnished also with motion sense and finally with a reasonable soule Then as impatient of so close imprisonment as vnsatisfied with so slender allowance it instantly striues till this Little world arriues into the great After we haue thus perfected the History we descend vnto the many and busie Controuersies depending thereupon These concerne the differences of the sexes the Nature of The Controuersies conteined in this Booke the Seed with the maner of his excretion the qualities of the Mothers blood the accidents hapning vnto vs there-from with the causes of the monthly euacuation of the same the manner of Conception as well lawful both simple double manifold as illegitimate and Monstrous the order and times of Conformation not onely of the infant it selfe but also of the membranes and vessels to which it is fastned the Similitude of the children to theyr parents the admirable effects of the Imagination the causes of superfoetation the maner matter of the infants Norishment the admirable Vnion and communion of the vessels of the heart how he breatheth by Transpiration not by Respiration the works of his Vital Animall spirits his Scituation or position in the womb and finally the nature differences times and causes of his Birth togither with the consequences thereof All these with many more falling in with our disputations we heere exhibit for their satisfaction whome they may concern who are more desirous to know them then able of themselues to attaine thereto CHAP. I. What things are necessary toward a perfect Generation THE propagation of kindes as it is made in the Elements by Transmutation and in Mettals by Apposition so it is in creatures by Generation But of Generation there are diuers maners The propagation of kindes diuerse For some creatures engender without coition onely by affrication Others quite contrary to the ordinarie course of Nature by a reception of the instrument of the female Some females also do engender within themselues without the help of the male There are also some creatures which are engendred onely by putrifaction without either male or female others are sometimes bred out of putrifaction other-whiles out of seede But all these kinds of generation are maimed and imperfect and therfore the Insecta Animalia creatures so procreated are called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 vnbloodye and insectile creatures of which a man of worthy memory among vs D. Muffet hath written a learned and D. Muffet curious discourse which happely time may communicate vnto the world The Generation of man and of the perfect creatures is farre more noble as whereto three things are alwaies required a diuersity or distinction of sexes their mutuall embracements and copulations Three things required to perfect generation and a permixtion of a certaine matter yssuing from them both which potentially containeth the Idea or forme of the particular parts of the body and the fatal destiny of the same this the Grecians call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The distinction of the Sexes is especially necessary because Generation is not accomplished but by seeds which must be sowne in a fruitefull ground that is shedde into such a place as wherein their dull and sleepy faculties may be raised and rowzed vp which we call 1 Distinction of sexes Conception and afterward that which is thus conceiued may be cherished nourished and so attaine the vtmost perfection of his kinde But because man was too hotte to performe this office for his heate consumeth al in him and leaueth no remainder to serue for the nourishment of the infant it was necessary that a woman should bee created for wee will insist now onely in mankinde which might affoord not onely a place wherein to cherish and conceiue the seede but also matter for the nourishment and augmentation of the same Both these sexes of male and female do not differ in the kinde as we cal it or species that is essentiall form and perfection but only in some accidents to wit in temper and in the structure and scituation of the parts of Generation For the female sexe as well as the male is a perfection of
genitura de morbo sacro or of the Epilepsie de aere aquis locis for ther he saith That seed yssueth from al moysture which Hippocrates is contained in the body And in another place Seede falleth from all the parts sound seed from sound parts and sicke or diseased from diseased parts Hence it is that lame men beget lame children bald men bald children and Spleniticke men children afflicted with the Spleene This opinion is confirmed by foure reasons First because in the acte of Generation or Confirmd by foure reasons Copulation the whole bodie is delighted and as it were stupified with an extasie of pleasure or if you wil suffereth a pleasant Convulsion Whence it was that coition is called parua Epilepsia a light Fit of the Falling sicknesse as we saide euen now The second reason is because the Childe beareth the Carracter of the Fathers imperfections Balde men balde children Lame men lame children and so likewise in all the Cense of Hereditary diseases Thirdly because those that are immoderate in the vse of Venus doe waste and consume all the parts of their bodies Finally because children do resemble their parents in all parts of their bodies There is an elegant History of a Boy in Calcedo who bare in his right arme from his An elegant history birth certaine markes which were seared before in his Fathers right arme also But this opinion is gainsayed and disprooued by Aristotle in the 17. and 18. chapters of his first Booke de generatione Animalium that with weighty arguments which we list not Aristotle Fernelius heere transcribe Fernelius also in the seauenth Booke of his Physiologia and the second Chapter addeth other reasons to which we referre the studious Reader It shall suffice vs in this place to answere the former arguments The argument drawne from the vniuersall pleasure and tickling delight of the whole body The former arguments answered is of no force for euen in itching the whole bodie is tickled though onely one part itcheth Moreouer if the pleasure were therefore conceiued because the seed floweth from the whol body it shold not be perceiued in all the body at once but by degrees first in one part then in another as the seede fell from this or that part For we cannot imagine that in one moment of time the seed is deriued from al the parts into the Testicles and so into the Why all the body is tickled in coition eiaculatory vessels We therefore acknowledge another cause of that pleasure whereby the whole body is delighted in Coition to wit the high heate froathinesse and aboundant spirites of the Seede for that Seede so qualified as it tickleth the partes of Generation which are of exquisite sense vvith his suddaine motion it draweth the vvhole bodye into a sympathy and consent with them For as if a Membrane be affected any way with paine all the Membranes of the body conceyue a sense of dolour therewith so when a Membrane is tickled the vvhole body receyueth a sense of delight and is likewise mooued therewith That lame men beget lame childeren or maymed maymed is not perpetually true for we see oftentimes that lame men beget perfect childeren and hee that wanteth a ioynt begetteth a childe with all his ioynts That in immoderate coition the whole body is resolued and consumed happeneth because the remaynders of the Aliment and the Spirits are in such men exhausted whereof when the partes are defrauded then they must of necessity waste and consume And therefore Auicen sayeth that the great expence of Seede wasteth the bodye fortie times so much as the expence or the losse of bloud if the losse of them both bee proportionable Finally that which they obtrude concerning the likenesse of Childeren to their Parents belongeth to a higher contemplation and shall bee disputed at large by and by in a more conuenient place yet thus much in the meane time wee say for answere that the similitude they speake off proceedeth not so much from the crasse and thicke matter of the Seede as from the formatiue faculty seated in the particular partes and communicated to the Testicles and at length to the Seede by the influent Spirites which are neare of kinne vnto those which haue their perpetuall residence in the parts of the body Wee therefore doe protest against that old errour as a beggerly rudiment receiued from hand to hand among the Auntients that the Seede falleth from all the partes of the body Some there are who deriue the greatest part of the Seed from the Brayn and the Spinall Another opinion of those that deriue the seed from the brayne marrow This opinion of theirs I will illustrate by authorities examples and reasons The authoritie is that of Hippocrates in his Book de Genitura where he sayeth that the Seede is diffused out of the Brayne into the Loynes and the marrow of the backe from thence into the Kidneyes from the Kidneyes it attayneth through the middest of the Testicles to the priuy partes In his Booke de Natura ossium hee wryteth that the Iugular Authorities to proue it veynes proceede from both sides of the heade into the Testicles and thither conuay the Seede wherefore from the Brayne to the Testicles Hippocrates sheweth a double way the spinall marrow and the veines behinde the eares Plato in his Timaeus defineth Seede to be A defluxion of the spinall marrow Alemaeon A small portion of the Brayne whence it is that the common people think that the braines and marrow of the bones do engender much seed For the confirmation of this opinion there are elegant Histories in Hippocrates Book Histories de aëre aquis et locis The first is of such men as were called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the other of the Scithians There were in tymes past among the inhabitants of Europe certayne men called macrocephali who were had in great esteeme whose heades were long and such were accounted Macrocephali what they are noble and generous spirites And therefore the Nurses were wont to presse the tender heads of Infants and to lengthen them with swathes till at length those that by custom and constraint had long heads begat children with long heads naturally and by conformation without any constraint at all The Scithians hauing no skill at all in Horse-manshippe and riding without stirrups The Scythians cut the veines behind the eares grew all of them almost to be troubled with the hipgowt or sciatica which disease that they might cure they caused the veines behind their eares to be opened which being cut a sunder they after proued barren and some thought this came to passe because the cicatrice or scarre closed vp the way of the seede descending from the Brayne To which conceit a Lawyer it may be alluding wrote that Theeues should haue their eares cutte off least they should beget young Theeues They conclude therfore that the greatest part of the fruitfull and best
we acknowledge to bee many and diuerse to omit the rest we will make mention onely of three which are the especiall and most immediate 3. Efficient causes The first is the tickling of the turgid and itching seed now the seed is turgid that is houen or frothy by reason of the impetuous motion of the spirites for seede without spirites such as is anoyded in the Gonorrhaea breedeth no pleasure at all after the same manner those that abuse the vse of woemen by frequent copulation haue lesse pleasure then other men because they haue fewer spirits Yet is not this cause of it selfe sufficient to procure pleasure such especially as is conceiued but another cause is required which is the celerity or svviftnesse of the motion and of the excretion For as paine is neuer caused vnlesse there bee a sudden and svvift alteration so vvhen the seed issueth by little and little or vveepingly there is no pleasure at all Finally to these tvvo is added the exquisite sence of the partes of generation and their narrownesse For so the parts being tickled and the vesselles which were distended returning into their naturall scituation and constitution there is stirred vp a wonderfull delight and pleasure But that these things may be made more euident we will handle heere two problemes The first why the spirits as they passe through the other parts Veines Arteries 2. Problemes The first Sinnewes Membranes these last especially being of exquisit sense together with the blood and the humors do not induce the same pleasure which they doe in the spermaticall Organs Haply it is because this kinde of sensation by the wonderful prouidence of Nature is bestowed onely vpon the genitals for the conseruation of the species or kinde like as she Solution hath giuen onely to the mouth of the stomacke the sense of divulsion and appetite Or we may say that in the other vesselles there is not so sudden and headstrong an effusion of humors and spirits together The other Probleme is why men and woemen that are asleepe haue great pleasure in The second Probleme their Nocturnall polutions seeing that in sleepe the sensatiue faculties are all at rest for the Philosopher calleth sleepe 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the rest of the first sensator Wee answere The Solution first that the imagination in sleepe is stronger then when wee are awake as appeareth in those that walke and talke in their sleep Againe in sleep the senses are not so drowned in sencelesnesse but that they are rowzed vp by a violent obiect and therefore such awake if they be violently stirred and for the most part such nightly pollutions doe awaken those who are troubled with them If you prick a sleeping man with a Needle euen before he awake he gathereth vp his body and if you continue he will awake though hee sleepe neuer so soundly Now the excretion of seede in a dreame is indeede a very strong obiect to the spermaticall parts These therefore are the causes of pleasure in the excretion or auoyding Whether mē or woemen haue greater pleasure of seede But whether the pleasure of the man or of the woman be the greater it would be a vaine and fruitlesse disquisition to enquire Indeede the woman conceiueth pleasure more waies that is in the auoyding of her owne seede and also in the attraction of the mans for which cause the Tyresian Priest who had experience of both sexes preferred The answere the woman in this kinde but the pleasure of the man is more intense partly because his seede is more hot and spirituous partly also because it yssueth with greater violence and with a kinde of Almaine leape or subsultation And thus much concerning the first principle of generation that is the seed of both sexes Now we come to the second principle which is the Mothers blood QVEST. VIII Whether the Menstruall Blood haue any noxious or hurtfull qualitie therein COncerning the Nature of the Menstruall blood there hath been and yet is so hard hold and so many opinions euen among Physitians themselues that it were a shame to make mention of all their differences much more to insist vpon them But because we would pretermit nothing that were worthy of your knowledge wee will insist vppon the chiefe heads of the Controuersie The first of which shall bee concerning the matter of the Courses All men do agree that this blood is an excrement for like a superfluity it is euery month Of the matter of the courses driuen foorth of the wombe but because there are two kinds of excrements the one Naturall and profitable the other altogether vnprofitable and vnnaturall wee must enquire of which kinde this menstruall blood is That it is an vnprofitable excrement and of a noxious or hurtfull quality may bee proued by the authority of famous learned men as also by strong reasons Hippocrates in his That it is ill qualitied Hippocrates authority first Booke De morbis mulierum expresseth the malignant quality thereof in these words It fretteth the earth like Vineger and gnaweth the body of the woman wheresoeuer it lighteth and vlcerateth the parts of generation Aristotle in the 19. Chapter of his fourth Booke De Natura Aristotle Galen Animalium writeth that that kind of blood is diseased and vitiated Galen in the eight Chapter of his Booke de Atra bile saith that euery moneth a superfluous portion of blood vnprofitable not onely in quantity but also in quality is auoided Moses that great Law-giuer as we read in holy Scripture made an Edict that no Menstruous woman should come Moyses into the Sanctuary Let her touch no holy thing nor enter into the Sanctuary whilst the dayes of her purgation be fulfilled By the Lawes of the Zabri those women that had their courses The lawes of the Zabri were interdicted the company and society of men and the places where she did stand were cleansed by fire Hesiodus forbiddeth that any man should frequent those bathes vvhere menstruous women haue bathed themselues Pliny also in the 28. Chapter of his 7. booke Pliny Columella doe think that this bloud is not only vicious but poysonous For by the touch thereof the young vines do wither the buds of hearbes are burnt vp yea glasses are infected Columella with a kinde of tabes If a Dogge licke of it he will run mad and wanton women are wont Reason and experience to bewitch their Louers with this bloud whence Outd calleth it Lunare virus the Moone poyson wherefore it is not onely superfluous in quantity but in the whole quality a noysom excrement This poysonous quality thereof women haue dayly and lamentable experience of in their owne bodies for if it bee suppressed it is a wonder to see what horrible and how many symptomes doe arise there-from If sayeth Hippocrates in his first Booke de morbis mulierum it bee stabled without the wombe it ingendereth Inflamations Cancers
are to discusse three questions The first whether at the same coition a Male and a Female may bee procreated Secondly whether Twinnes are included within the same membranes and conteyned in diuerse places Lastly why Twinnes are commonly so like one another and all these we will resolue out of Hippocrates For the first wee say that at once two Males two Whether in one coition a male and a female may bee conceiued Females a Male and a Female may be conceiued at one and the same coition The manner is thus expressed by Hippocrates in his first Booke de diaeta and in his Booke de Natura pueri If from both Parents masculine seed doe issue then are two Males generated if feminine seede two Females if both masculine and feminine then of the masculine is a Male conceiued and a Female of the feminine Moreouer Twinnes that are both Males or both Females do for the most part suruiue but if they prooue a male and a female the female doeth scarce suruiue or at least is very weake because it is not formed and perfected at the same time wherein the Male is formed and perfected This Aristotle expresseth very plainly in the sixt Chapter of his fourth book de Generatione Animalium If the Twins be a male and a female they rarely suruiue because this duplication in men is vnnatural for that the male the female are not distinguished in the same time vnlesse the males conformation bee foreslowed or the females ouerhastned The second question Hippocrates answereth in his Book de superfoetatione The woman sayeth he that is with childe with Twinnes trauelleth of them both in one day and if they be both of one sex they are conteyned in one after birth VVherefore the Twinnes of the same sexe are wrapped in the same membranes yet each of them haue their particular vmbilicall vesselles but if they bee of diuers sexes they haue their diuers coates Againe if they be both of one sexe they are carried in the same side of the wombe two boyes in the right side and two wenches in the left but if they bee of different sâ—xes the male shall bee concluded in the right side of the wombe and the female in the left The third question was why Twinnes are so very like one another Hippocrates in his first Booke de diaeta acknowledgeth a threefould cause of this similitude First of all sayeth he the places wherein they receiue their augmentation are equall whether they be conceiued in the right or in the left side of the wombe because by a wonderful prouidence of nature the right are equall to the left that so the whole body might be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is equally ballanced Againe because they are conceiued together lastly because they vse the same Aliments for they sucke the same bloud and enioy the same vitall spirites which they draw from their mother by the vmbilicall arteries And thus much of Twinnes now wee proceed to superfoetation QVEST. XXII How Superfoetation is made why onely a woman when she hath conceiued desireth the company of the Male and by what wayes she then elaculateth Seed THere are so many difficulties concerning the nature and manner of superfoetation that many men haue imagined there can be no such thing but we must not giue eare vnto them For Hippocrates wrote a booke De superfoetatione there is a notable example of superfoetation in his first booke Epidem in a woman of Larissa who the fortieth day after her deliuerance of a legittimate Diuers exaÌ„ples of superfoetation childe auoyded another preposterously conceiued Famous also is that birth of Alcmoena when she brought forth Hercules and Iphiclus his brother after him Aristotle in the fifth chapter of his fourth Booke De generatione Animalium saith that some creatures admit superfoetation others do not admit it and of these that do some are able to nourish both burthens some are not able sometimes at other times they are able And in his Booke De Historia Animalium he alledgeth some examples of superfaetation A certaine adultresse saith he brought forth one infant like her husband another like the adulterer another being with child with twins had a third by Superfaetation Another brought forth one the seuenth moneth which died and in the ninth was deliuered of two others which did surviue Galen makes mention of superfaetion but seldome Rhazis 22. Continent Alzaraâ—ius and Anieen are all of opinion that those women are subiect to superfaetatation who whilest they are with childe haue their courses Plinie in the eleuenth chapter of his 7. Booke writeth that Proconnesia a seruant accompanied the same day with her maister his man and conceiued by them both and bare either of them a sonne like to the father That another was deliuered of a childe at fiue moneths and went out her iust time with a second that another was deliuered of a child at seuen moneths and went out her whole time with two twins beside Dodoneus in his obseruations telleth stories to the same purpose Wee conclude therefore that there may be superfaetation Now this superfaetation is nothing else but a second conception when a woman already with child accompanying with a man What superfoetation is conceiueth againe as if it were a new conception aboue another before conceiued This superfaetation or iterated conception is not common to all creatures as Aristotle teacheth in his fourth Booke De generatione Animalium to women it happeneth oftener then to others creatures vnlesse it be Hares and Swine notwithstanding whensoeuer it happeneth it is beside the ordinary course of nature Now the reason why superfaetation happeneth most in women is because women and they almost only after their conception do desire the company of their husbands Other creatures when they are pagled as we say do neuer Why superfoetation belongeth most to women Dinus or very seldome admit the Male but what may be reason hereof Dinus in his Comentaries vppon Hippocrates booke de natura pueri saith that other creatures after they haue conceiued doe not desire the company of the Male because all that which should bee the matter of new seede is consumed in the nourishment of their young and therefore they are not goaded with their wonted lust But a woman because she hath in her aboundance of moysture hath also her vessels full of seede from whence comes the motion and sense of the obscoene parts But this reason I cannot approue For although the infant do consume Disproued almost all the reliques or surplusage of the blood yet doth it not defraude the parts of the mothers body of their conuenient nourishment neither taketh from the Testicles their proper faculty of drawing and altering the blood So women at sixtie years old haue no surplusage of blood and therefore their courses faile yet they continue to procreate seede euen to their extreme age which also in coition they auoyde which though at that age it be not
another vpper arising from The membranes of it the pleura with which it is compassed for more strength although it haue another coat of his owne but a very thinne one that it might bee distinguished from all other parts by proper circumscription Veines it hath arising from the trunke of the hollow table 1. m table 6. A veine called Phrenicae sometimes also it receiueth branches from the fatty veine called His veines Adiposa which are accoÌ„panied with arteries from the great artery tab 1. c called also Phrenica the veines table 1. n. table 6. c the arteries table 1. co table 13. KK the veines carry vnto Arteries it bloud for his nourishment the arteries vitall spirits together with the vitall faculty beside by ventilation with their motion they preserue his naturall heat It hath two nerues table 2. figure 1. P P proceeding out of the lower rackebones or vertebrae of the necke made of three surcles on each side and this is peculiar to this muscle for Sinewes other parts vnder the patell bones or clauicles receiue none from the marrow of the necke A propriety which nerues being carried through the cauity of the Chest are contorted or wound about the Mediastinum by it fastned and stayed aloft least they should be hurt And it was necessary that these nerues should come from an vpper place that they might more equally exteÌ„d their action into euery part of it wherfore they are disseminated through his whole Why his nerues come from aboue substance that they might affoorde vnto it all sence and motion whence it is of very exquisite sence and when it is iniured for the most part death followeth It hath two passages or holes one on the right hand table 1. and table 2. figure 2. m in The passages the middle neruous part for the ascent of the hollow veine out of the vpper and gibbous part of the Liuer vnto the Heart another on the left hand table 1. and table 2. figure 2. l a little backwarder greater through which passeth the Oesophagus or gullet and 2. nerues vnto the stomacke vnto which not withstanding his membranes do grow and encompasse streightly and very strongly At the originall or beginning of this muscle or midriffe betweene his productions tab His diuision for the artery and the veine non parill 1. and table 2. figure h i at the racke-bones there is a diuision table 1. and table 2. figure 2. k resembling a semicircle or halfe Moone for the descent of the great Artery the vein without a peere or non parill and for nerues of the sixt payre fixed to the ribbes which are carried vnder the pleura and this diuision imbraceth the racke-bones vpon which the great artery leaneth The chiefe vse of the Midriffe which Galen found out as appeareth in the 15. and 7. The vses of the midriffe The chiefe vse Chapters of his 5. Booke de vsu partium and which dependeth especially vpon her scituation is that it might be the organ or instrument of free gentle and voluntary respiration or breathing euen as the instruments of violent or deepe breathings are the 64. muscles which are about the Chest exactly dilating or contracting it For his fibres being equally retracted or drawne together all the bastard ribs are drawne toward the centre of the Chest and so they draw the vtmost parts of the Chest vnto the rack-bones and constringe or contract the lower part whereupon the Midriffe is lift vp streached and serueth for expiration Hence it is that in a dead body it alwayes appeareth contracted and streatched for the life endeth with expiration and if the Chest be perforated within the ribs or Midriffe it falleth straight loose downeward and suffereth the Liuer the stomack which before were somewhat suspended to fall But when the fibres are loosened the Midriffe falleth for the bastard ribs are loosened the lower parts of the Chest and consequently the Lungs are dilated so we draw in breath wherfore when the Midriffe is hindred or affected then must needs follow difficulty of respiration as Galen saith in the 8. Chapter of his 4. Booke de locis affectis This motion according to some authors Archangelus among Of what kind the motion of the midriffe is the rest is mixed of a voluntary a naturall motion voluntary it is but not simply because there is a necessity which vrgeth and exacteth this motion as in respiration a necessity of cooling the hart vrgeth euen as in vnburdening the belly making water the excrements do vrge and prouoke the sphincter muscles of the Fundament and of the Bladder The first Figure sheweth the middle Belly the Skinne and the Muscles being cut away the Breast-bone also is remooued and the ribbes broken that the capacity of the Chest the Membranes thereof and the Lungs might better be discerned TABVLA II. FIG I FIG II. Figure II. sheweth the midriffe taken out of the body Another vse of the midriffe is to ventilate or fanne the Hypochondria especially the Liuer Another vse because in his conuex or vpper part it wanteth Arteries to doe that office as also the moyst vapours contayned in the capacity of the lower belly least being at rest they should putrifie and corrupt for which cause Hippocrates in his first Booke de morbis mulierum calleth it the breather or bellowes of the lower belly Another vse of it is as Galen aduiseth vs in the 9. Chapter of his second Book de motâ— A third vse musculorum to helpe forward the expulsion of the excrements and the Infant in trauell by helping the muscles of the Abdomen as wee haue shewed in the former Booke for which it is the more conuenient because of his oblique scituation For aboue it presseth the guttes as it were with hands and so driueth the excrements downward which otherwise might as well be excluded vpward as downward if this helpe were not The last vse is that according to Plato it might deuide the Irascible or Angry part and The last vse of the midriffe Plato Aristotle Plinâ—es conceit faculty of the Soule from the Concupiscible lustfull or according to Aristotle it might distinguish the naturall parts from the vitall the ignoble from the noble that the vapours which arise from the lower parts as from the sinke of the body might not offend the heart the seate of life and sence as he thought Pliny ascribed to it the subtility or nicenesse of the wit and esteemed it the seate of mirth which appeareth by tickling for if the skinne about the Hypochondria be gentlely touched we are tickled and laugh presently but more rare was that of a young man in my knowledge who had the cause of an Epilepsie in his foot which at certaine times would rise vp and might be stayed by binding the legge and thigh but when the vapor or breath came vp about the place of the Midriffe then would
an example propounded by Hippocrates for sayth he if you giue That it is part of our drinke a Pigge that is very dry water mingled with minium or vermilion and presently stick it you shall finde all his winde-pipes along dyed with this coloured drink some would haue it to be generated from moyst vapours and exhalations raysed from the humours of the heart and driuen forth by his perpetuall motion and high heate vnto the Pericardium by whose density they are turned into water and of that opinion are Falopius Laurentius Archangelus who remembreth sixe opinions concerning the matter of it which we shall hereafter make mention of This humour is found not onely in dead bodies as some would but also in liuing but That it is found in liuing bodies But more in dead and why more plentifull after death except in those that die of consumptions in whome it is little and yellowish because the many spirits which are about the heart the body being cold are turned into water euen as those vapors which are raysed from the earth are by the coldnes of the middle region of the ayre conuerted into water wee also affirme that it must of necessity be in liuing bodies and not onely in those that are diseased as they that are troubled with palpitation of the heart but also in all sound bodies yet in some more plentifull in others more sparing but in all moderate because if it bee consumed there followeth a In sound bodies as wel as in diseased consumption if it be aboundant palpitation of the heart and if it bee so much that it hinder the dilatation of the heart then followeth suffocation and death it selfe That it is in liuing bodies may be proued by the testimony of Hippocrates in his Book of the heart where he sayeth there is a little humour like vnto vrine as also by the example of our Sauiour out of whose precious side issued water and bloud It appeareth also by the dissection of liuing The example of our Sauior creatures which euery yeare is performed for further aduertisemēt especially a sheep or such like great with young Vesalius addeth an example of a man whose heart was taken out of his body whilest he liued at Padua in Italy Finally the vse and necessity of it doth euict the same For the vse of it is to keepe moyst the heart and his vessels a hot part it is so as the left The vses of it ventricle will euen scald a mans finger if it be put into it and so continually moued that vnlesse it were thus tempered it would gather a very torrifying heate by cooling it also it keepeth it fresh and flourishing It moystneth also the Pericardium wherein it is conteyned which otherwise by the great heate of the heart would bee exiccated or dried vp By it also the motion of the heart becommeth more facile and easie and this motion spendeth it and resolueth it insensibly by the pores as it is bred but if in the passage it bee stayed then saith Varolius are there many hairs found growing right against it on the brest Finally it taketh away the sense or feeling of the waight of the heart because the heart swimmeth as it The cause of haue vpon the brest were in it euen as we see the infant swimmeth in sweate in the wombe aswell to take away the sense of the waight of so great a burthē from the Mother as also that it might not fal hard to any part in her body you may add to this if you please that it helpeth forward the concretion of the fat about the heart In the cauity also of the Chest there is found such a like water mingled with blood with Another water and blood mingled in the Chest which the parts of the chest are continually moistned and cooled And thus much of these circumstances of the heart Now followe the Vesselles of the chest CHAP. IX Of the ascending trunke of the Hollow veine Tab 5. Fig. 1. sheweth the diuision of the Hollow-vein in the Iugulum or hollow vnder the Patel-bones On the right side is shewed how it is commonly beleeued to bee diuided into two trunkes the one called the Sub-Clauius the other Super-Clauius from whence came that scrupulous choise of the Cephalica and Basilica Veines in Phlebotomy or blood-letting On the right side is shewed how the trunke is but one out of which both the foresaid veines of the arme do proceede Fig. 2. sheweth a portion of the Hollow veine as much as ascendeth out of the right ventricle of the hart vnto the Iugulū wherin is exhibited the nature of the Fibres which are in the bodies of the veines TABVLA V. FIG I. FIG II. The 2. Figure FIG III. Fig. 3. sheweth a rude delineation of the Fibres in the bodies of the veines FIG IV. Fig. 4. sheweth the distribution of the Veine Azygos which we shal shew more distinctly in the 7. Table Before the diuision it sendeth out foure branches Table 6. sheweth the trunk and branches of the hollow vein as they are disseminated through al the three Regions of the body TABVLA VI. Afterward the Hollow-veine perforateth the Pericardium againe and againe groweth round but much lesse then before and riseth vp where the right Lung is parted from the left and so passeth to the Iugulum but aboue the heart in the middest of the bodye it parteth with a notable trunke or branch to be distributed to the Spondels and the spaces betweene the ribs And this is the third branch called Vena 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or sine pari that is the vn-mated Veyne Vena 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which we haue before called Non-paril Tab. 5. fig. 1. C. fig. 2 B Fig. 4 B because commonly in a man it is but one as also in Dogges and hath not another on the other side like vnto it Although it shewe the Trunke of the hollowe verne disseminated thorough both the Bellies notwithstanding it serueth especially to exhibit the distribution of the veine Azygos and the coniunction of the branches thereof with the veynes of the Chest which heere is onely shewed on the right side TABVLA VII yyyy The outwarde Veines of the Chest which are vnited with the inner braunches of the Azygos z A branch of the Basilica which is ioyned with the Cephalica A. A branch of the Cephalica which is ioyned with the Basilica z B The veine called Mediana or the middle veine Commonly from the trunke of the veine 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Tab. 5. fig. 4. B Tab. 6. FF Tab. 7. d out of the backside of it as well on the left hand as on the right but on the right especially branches The branches of Vena sine pari are distributed to the distances sometimes of all but most what of the ten lower ribs Tab. 5. fig. 4 which are called Intercostales rami Tab. 6 GG braunches betweene the ribs This Veine also without his
yet so that in a man they adhere together by Membranous Fibres so that there is rather a note or footstep of diuision then any true diuision indeede though it bee otherwise in Dogges and the lower is longer then the vpper And it is so diuided as well that the whole Lungs might more safely and swiftly be dilated and contracted the act breathed in more easily penetrating into their narrowest passages as also that they might the more firmely embrace the heart and not be compressed when we bow downward And althogh they be found to be distinguished though not with any true diuision somtimes into three sometimes into more sometimes into two yet rarely shall we find in a man because of the shortnes of his brest fiue Lobes in a dogge and an Ape often and if it happen to be so then saith Galen in the 2. and 10. Chapters of his 7. Booke de vsu part they ly very high into the throat vnder the hollow-vein Their substance Tab. 14 fig 2. is fleshy wherupon it is called Parenchyma a fleshy bowell wouen with three sorts of vessels Tab. 14 fig. 2 BCD and Their substāce couered with a thin Membrane which varieth in softnes and colour according to the age How their substance and colour differeth before after birth of the party In yonger men it is faster in the prime of our age rare caue and hollow For the Lunges being not mooued in the wombe of the Mother as neither the heart are then thicke and firme as is the substance of the Liuer red also from the colour of their nourishment for nourished they are in the Mothers wombe with that wherewith they were generated that is blood brought out of the Hollow veine to the venall artery by inoculation and spirits sent from the great artery to the arteriall veine by the pipe or canale before mētioned but the infant being borne when the heart beginneth to mooue his motion and heate softneth and puffeth vp their flesh by little and little and so being mooued with the motion of the Chest they also become pliable to the motions thereof and are lifted vp and fall againe with ease they lye also bedded as it were betweene the diuisions of the Plato his Mollis saltus Why they ioyne after death being cut or sliced vessels filling vp the empty places and by that meanes are a defence and strengthning vnto them that they be not broken in their continuall motions And this is the reason that Plato calleth their motion 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 saltus mollis a soft motion which is furthered in that their substance is full of a slimy and viscid moysture insomuch that Varolius saith that after death if they be cut yet will they glue together againe by this viscidity Their substāce Their substance also is laxe spongy and rare made as it were of the froth of the blood that it may better admit the aer drawne in like a paire of Bellowes and be freely filled therwith Their colour is yellowish oftentimes ashie spotted with certaine dull and blackish Their colour speckes or cloudye streames and in those that dye of any long and lingering disease they grow yet blacker They haue a Membrane bred out of the Pleura for where the vessels passe into the lungs Their Membrane Tab. 14 fig. 1 CD ther their common coate sprung from the Pleura departeth from them and is finely stretched ouer the superficies or vpper face of the Lungs to forme containe their soft substance which otherwise being shaken with continuall motions would quickly breake off by peece meale This Membrane is thin that it should not be burthensome and soft that it might better stretch with the motion of the Lungs full also of pores though after death insensible that if any quitture or matter should be gathered in the chest in a pleurisy or inflamation of the Why the mēbrane is porous Lungs called Peripneumonia it might by these pores haue yssue so be spit out by Cough albeit we are not ignorant that in both these diseases the Lungs themselues are affected which we are taught by the dissection of Pleuriticall bodies and also by them which haue recouered of Pleurisies in whom doth remaine difficulty of breathing and some payne in the weakned side as long as they liue This porosite also makes their vpper face smooth and bedewed with a kind of slimy moisture Into this Membrane because it needed but a little sense there are smal Nerues disseminated from the sixt coniugation on the right side Tab. 8. fig. 1 t after the right Recurrent is framed but on the left side Tab. 8 fig. 1 q before the framing of the recurrent these Why Vlcers of the Lunges are with paine Nerues do not reach vnto the substance of the Lungs least they should be pained or wearied in their continuall motion and hence also it is that all the vlcers of the Lunges are without paine Table 14. Figure 1. sheweth the fore-side of the Lungs taken out out of the Chest from which the Heart vvith his Membranes are cut Fig. 2. sheweth the backe and gibbous side of the Lunges as it lyeth vpon the backe Figure 3. Sheweth the Arteriall Veine Figure 4. Sheweth the Venall Arterie separated from the substance of the Lungs TABVLA XIIII FIG I FIG II FIG III FIG IV. Two vessels it receyueth from the heart of which wee haue spoken before one called the arteriall veine tab 14. fig. 1 C Fig. 13. the whole arteriall veine which out of the right The Arteriall veine ventricle ministreth to the Lungs Alimentarie blood therein attenuated for their nourishment and with this blood the naturall spirit and the naturall soule therein residing with all her powers and faculties are communicated to the Lungs The other called the venall artery tab 14 fig. 1 D figure 4 the venall arterie separated which is an instrument onely of the spirits but conteyneth also pure thinne and vaporous blood wherefore the aer which was attracted by the winde-pipe and prepared in the lungs it leadeth to the heart and from the lefte ventricle bringeth foorth vitall bloode with the vitall spirit and faculty to the Lungs partly that therewith they may bee nourished partly Whence life it for their life that the in-bred heate may be cherished for life is from the vitall spirite and the arteriall bloud perfected in the left ventricle of the hearte partly that by it the smoake and soot may be carried out of the heart These two vessels are farre greater then the magnitude of the Lungs may seeme to require if the proportion be compared to that of other parts that because the Lungs with their perpetuall motion do consume and dissipate much moysture and moreouer because they serue not onely to carry out naturall bloud and vitall bloud with vitall spirits but also by their extremities doe receiue from the ends of the winde-pipe ayre which they lead into the
they haue gotten the measure of heate that they had in the liuing body will be dilated but neuer fall because there wanteth a faculty but they are both deceiued For if both the Dyastole and Systole came not from the faculty but from the constitution How both were deceiued of the artery then the artery should euer keepe the same magnitude and the same vehemencie of pulsation but we see that the pulse is now greater now lesser as the strength is great or little sometimes the Systole sometimes the Dyastole is greater as the vse of either is increased There want not some who striue to prooue that the motion of the arteries is from the brayne standing vpon one authoritie of Galens where hee sayth in the 2. Booke That the motion of the arteries is not from the braine de causis pulsuum When in a man the pulse beginnes to be convulsiue presently he is taken with a convulsion which seemeth to intimate that there is one originall of the faculty of pulsation and of that to which convulsion doeth belong But Galens owne obseruation bewrayeth the vanity of this opinion For if the brayne be compressed sence and motion will perish but the arteries will still beate If the nerue which commeth from the brayn to the heart bee cut or intercepted the creature becommeth dumbe but the arteries beate still Seeing therefore that the arteries neither moue by a power of their owne nor from the The true cause whereby the motion is moued Elementary forme nor onely from heate nor from a spirit or spumy bloud it remayneth necessary that they should be mooued by pulsatiue power of the heart For if they should be moued by any thing saue by a faculty their motion should be not continual but violent neither would there bee any attraction of ayre in dilatation but the boyling bloud would take vp all the roome This Faculty or power pulsatiue is in a moment carried not through the Cauitie but along the coats of the Arteries and that it is carried in a moment this is an argument that Which waie the Faculty is led all the Arteries are mooued with the same motion all together in the same time vvhen the heart is mooued If it be obiected that Galen in the 1. de different pulsuum de 2 prima cognitione ex puls speaking of those that haue hot hearts and cold Arteries in whom the parts of the Arterie that are neerer to the heart are dilated sooner then those that are more remote is constrained to confesse that the pulsatiue power is mooued through the What may hinder the motion of the heart arterie slowly by degrees I answer that the faculty floweth in a moment vnlesse it be hindred But it may be hindred sometimes by his owne fault sometimes by the fault of the Instrument by his owne when the heate is weake by the instrument when the arteries are either cold or soft or obstructed It remaineth therefore that when al things are aright disposed it floweth in an instant and not through the Cauitie but along the coats of the Arteries Galen in the last Chapter of the Booke Quod sanguis Arterijs delineatur giueth an An instance for experiēce instance from experience If you put a Quill or Reede into the Arterie which will fill the whole cauity yet will the Artery beate but if his coats be pressed with a Tie it will cease instantly If it be obiected that the Arteries in an Infant beate before the heart and therefore the pulse is from the spirit not from the heart I aunswere that the Infants Arteries Obiection Solution do mooue by a vertue that proceedeth from the heart of the Mother for the Arteries of the infant are continuall with those of the Mother and receiueth as well life the pulsatiue Faculty from her as the Liuer and all the other parts do nourishment QVEST. V. Whether the Arteries are dilated when the Heart is dilated or on the contrary then contracted THere ariseth now a more obscure thornie and scrupulous question then A difficult question the former and that is whether the Arteries and the heart are mooued with the same motion For the explication whereof we must first resolue that the Arteries are filled when they are dilated and emptied when they are contracted The Arteries are filled in their dilatatiō that they draw when they are dilated and expell when they are constringed The reason is manifest For the vessels must needs draw with that motion whereby they are made most fit to receiue but the vesselles by how much they are more enlarged by so much are they more capeable now they are enlarged by dilatation therefore when they are dilated they draw and are filled so that Archigines is no way to be hearkned vnto Archigines who was of opinion that in the Systole the arteries do draw and are filled and in the Diastole do expell and are emptied whose argument for this was because in inspiration the lippes are streightned and the Nosthrils contracted but whether this Diastole of the Arteries The first opinion Erasistratus be at once and together with the dilatation of the heart that is indeede a great controuersie Erasistratus was the first that thought their motions contrary that is that when the heart is dilated the Arteries are contracted and when the heart is contracted the Arteries are dilated Amongst the new writers these haue sided with him Fernelius Columbus Cardane Sealiger and truely his opinion may be confirmed by authorities and reasons Galen in his Authorities Booke De Puls ad Tyrenes saith that the Vitall Faculty dooth mooue diuers bodies at the same time with diuers motions which can be vnderstood of nothing else but the motions of the heart and of the arteries Auicen Fen. 1. cap. 4. doctrin 6. affirmeth that the vitall Reasons The first Faculty doth together dilate and constringe The reasons beside these authorities are In the Diastole the heart draweth blood by the hollow veine into his right Ventricle and aer by the venall artery into the left Therefore at that time the heart is filled and the vessels are emptied Contrariwise in the Systole the heart expelleth the Vitall spirit into the arteries therefore at that time the heart is emptied and the arteries are filled but when the arteries are filled they are distended and when they are emptied they fall wherefore when the heart is distended the arteries are contracted and when it is contracted they are distended Beside there is the same proportion betweene the arteries and the heart which The second there is betweene the heart and the deafe eare but it is most certaine which our eie-sight teacheth vs that the motion of the heart and of the eares of the heart are diuers for when the heart is dilated then those eares doe fall and when the heart is contracted then they are distended and filled wherefore the heart and the
it is whitened After it is so praepared it is conveighed to the Epididymis thorough whose insensible passages it sweateth into the spongie and friable substance of the Testicles themselues where hauing atteined the forme and perfection of seede it is deliuered ouer by the eiaculatory or rather the Leading-vessels to the Parastatae and from them transcolated to the Prostatae which reserue the seed being now turgid and full of spirits for the necessary vses of Nature Hence it followeth that that power which is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is the seede-making Faculty or the Faculty of generation is from the Testicles immediately by which Faculty the parts being stirred vp do poure out of themselues the matter of the seede when Venus dooth so require This Faculty is the authour in men of Virility and in women of Muliebrity and breedeth in all creatures that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 by which the heate being blowne vp is the cause 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 so that the bloode being heated and attenuated distendeth the Veines and the bodie or bulke of that part groweth turgid and impatient of his place which the Grecians call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 And thus much of the Lower Region In the Middle Region there are many parts of great woorth but the excellencie of the The Middle Region Heart dimmeth the light of the rest which all are to it but seruants and attendants The Heart therefore is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which signifieth to beate because The Heart it is perpetually mooued from the ingate to the outgate of life This is a Pyramidal Bowell whose Basis is in the middle of the Chest the mucro or point reacheth toward the left side The magnitude but small that the motion might be more free and nimble the flesh very fast and exceeding hot intertexed or wouen with all three kinds of Fibres and nourished with bloode which it receiueth from two branches of the Coronary Veine On the out-side it hath a great quantity of fat and swimmeth in a waterish Lye which is conteyned in the Pericardium wherewith as with a purse the Heart is encompassed On the inside it is distinguished by an intermediate partition into two Ventricles The right is lesse noble then the left and framed most what for the vse of the Lungs It receiueth a great quantity of blood from the yawning mouth of the Hollow-vein and after it is prepared returneth the same blood againe through the Arteriall veine into all the corners of the Lunges This right ventricle hath annexed to it the greater care and sixe Values are inserted into the Orifices of his vessels The left Ventricle which is also the most noble hath a thicker wall then the right because it is the shop of thin blood and vitall spirites Out of this Ventricle do two vessels issue the first called the Venall artery which receyueth the ayer prepared by the Lungs and for retribution returneth vnto them vitall blood and spirits at which artery the left deafe care is scituated and in whose orifice there slande two Values bending from without inward The other vessell of the left Ventricle is the Aorta or great Artery which distributeth vnto the whole body vitall blood and spirits For according as the opinion of some is it draweth the better part of the Chylus by the Meseraicke Arteries into the bosome of the left ventricle for the generation of arteriall blood and at his mouth do grow three Values opening inward We say further that the Heart is the The Vitall faculty habitation of the vitall Faculty which by the helpe of Pulsation and Respiration begetteth Vital spirits of Ayer and Blood mixed in the left ventricle And this Faculty although it be vitall yet is it not the life it selfe and differeth from the Faculty of Pulsation both in the functions and in the extent and latitude of the subiect The Faculty of Pulsation is Naturall to the heart as proceeding and depending vpon the Vitall Faculty For it is not mooued 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or voluntarily as is the Animall Faculty but onely obeyeth the command of the necessity of Nature From the foresaide Faculty of Pulsation do proceede two motions the Diastole the Systole betweene which there is a double Rest These motions in the Heart and Arteries are the same and at the same time but so that the cause of the motion is supplied from the Heart vnto the Artrries as from a principle both mooued and moouing Finally to come vnto that which we are now in hand withall In the vpper Region wee meete with the Braine compassed with the strong battlements of the scull adorned with The vpper Region the Face as with a beautifull Frontispice wherein the Soule inhabiteth not onely in essence and power as it is in the rest of the body but in her magnificense and throne of state This Braine is the most noble part of the whole body and framed with such curiositie so many Labyrinthes and Meanders are therein that euen a good wit may easily bee at losse when it is trained away with so diuers sents in an argument so boundlesse and vaste Notwithstanding we will as briefely and succinctly as we can giue you a viewe of the Fabricke and Nature thereof referring the Reader for better satisfaction to the ensuing discourse wherein we hope to giue euen him that is curious some contentment The substance therefore of the Braine is medullous or marrowy but a proper marrow not like that of other parts framed out of the purest part of the seed and the spirites It is The Braine moouable and that with a naturall motion which is double one proper to it self another comming from without It is full of sence but that sence is operatiue or actiue not passiue For the behoofe of this braine was the head framed nor the head alone but also the whole body it selfe being ordained for the generation of animall spirits and for the exhibiting of the functions of the inward senses and the principall faculties in this brain we are to consider first his parts then his faculties The Braine therefore occupieth the whole cauity of the skull and by the dura mater or hard membrane is diuided into a forepart and a backpart The forepart which by reason of the magnitude retaineth the name of the whole and is properly called the Braine is againe deuided by a body or duplicated membrane resembling a mowerssy the into a right side a left both which sides are againe continued by the interposition or mediation of a callous body This callous body descending a litle downward appeareth to be excauated or hollowd into two large ventricles much resembling the forme of a mans eare through which cauities a thrumbe of crisped vessels called Plexus Choroides doth run wherein the Animal spirits receiue their preparation and out of these Ventricles doe yssue two swelling Pappes which are commonly called the Organes of smelling and do determine at the
spongy bone aboue the top of the nose These two venticles are disseuered by a fine and thin body called speculum lucidum or the bright Glasse vnto which adioyneth the Arch of the braine called Corpus cameratum which is supported by three finials or Columnes which like Atlas do sustaine the weight of the braine so that the thirde ventricle which lieth vnder them is not obliterated This middle ventricle which is a common cauity of the two vpper occupieth the very center of the braine and runneth out with a double passage The first descendeth to the Basis of the braine where the originall of the Nerues is most manifest and the extremity thereof endeth in a portion of the Pia mater or thinne membrane very like vnto a Tunnel through which Tunnell the flegmaticke excrement of the braine is transcolated into the pituitary glandule thereunder disposed and so thorough the holes of the wedge-bone distilleth into the Pallate of the mouth The other passage of the thirde Ventricle which is larger then the former is directed into the fourth Ventricle where the Glandule or Kernell called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is seated at each side of which do adioyne the Buttockes of the Braine and vnder them the Testicles appeare which seuer the passage of the Animall spirit out of this into the fourth ventricle Finally the fourth ventricle succeedeth which is the least and most solid of all the rest and wherein say some the Animall spirit receiueth his vtmost perfection and therefore it is made in the Cerebellum that is the backe-ward or after-braine which for this very reason was framed of a harder consistence then the former And so much of the parts of the braine Now for the faculties we determine that the Braine is the Pallace of the Rationall Soule which soule vsing for her instrument the temper confirmation of the braine according The Animall Faculty to the diuersity of her functions bringeth forth mixt actions by the mediation of the animall spirit These very actions produced according to the variety of the temperament and medium into diuers acts of Ratiocination Imagination and Memory as the soule is best pleased to worke we call Faculties which are seated and established together promiscuously in one and the same place Againe we say that this braine as it is the beginning of the inward so is it also of the outward senses from which each of them receiuing their proper vessels or passages together with their Faculty do suffer the incursions of Species or Images resorting vnto them according to the diuersity of the Organe The eye receiueth the visible formes the care the audible the nose such as cast an odour from them and so of the rest All these indiuiduall formes receiued by the sences are by them resigned vp in token of foealty to the Common sense or priuy-chamber of the soule from whence they receiued their faculties and then out of those formes the soule gathering phantasmes or notions doth eyther lay them vp in the Memory or worke vpon them by discourse of Reason Finally we attribute to the braine the faculties of sense or motion which faculties together with the animall spirit differing in forme and kinde from the vitall and prepared concocted and perfected in his ventricles and substance he doth continually and without intermission transmit through the same Nerues into the whole body to supply the expence of the foresaid spirits which is made either by action or by passion And thus haue wee runne through not onely the two lower Regions to refresh our memories but also the vpper wherein the Reader may haue such a taste of that which followeth as may haply make him sauour it the better when he commeth thereto And so wee proceede to our businesse CHAP. I. Of the Names scituation forme and parts of the head HAuing hitherto as exactly as we could and with great leasure made our progresse through the two lower Regions Naturall and Vitall It is now time we should ascend into the third venter the seate very residence of the soule the sacred Pallace or Tower of Pallas there suruay her royall Court her guard of outward Sences her Councellors of state and all their aequipage This Region therefore is by the Graecians called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Appians Interpreter holds it was called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of a word which signifieth to grow dry because being of a bony substance it must needs be dry Apollidorus deriues it from the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to hide or couer because it is the couering of the braine Others because there The names of the head 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the lights are placed Others 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 from the Cauity or hollownes of it The Latines call it Caput because from hence the sences do Capere initium take their beginning There is a double acception of the word Caput among Physitions one strickt presse another large and ample In the strict signification it is vsed by Celsus out of Hippocrates booke of the wounds of the head and thus discribed The Head is the Mansion and skonce A strict signification Celsus description of the Head of the braine whose skull is made of two Tables between which is a marrow eye substāce called Diplois inuironed with Caruncles and small veines ouer which is spread the membrane called Perieranion which Membrane is couered againe with the hairy scalpe but vnder the skull lyeth the Membrane called Dura mater And in this signification the antients called it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Vessel of the braine we also in our common speech cal it the Skonce Skonce But in the large and ample signification vnder the name of the head we vnderstand all The large signification that is circumscribed within the first racke-bone of the Necke and the top of the Crowne We will intreate of it in this large signification wherein therefore we are to consider of the forme the scituation the magnitude the frame and structure the motion the particular parts thereof First therefore the head was made round and that for diuers reasons Inprimis That it The forme might be of greater receipt and capacity because it was to receiue the vast and huge bulke of the Braynes For the braines of a man are foure times as big as of an Oxe now of all figures the round figure is of most capacity witnesse the world it selfe Secondly the head was made round ad 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that it might bee lesse subiect to Why round outward iniuries nor so easily wounded For this figure as it is most capacious so is it the strongest because it hath no asperity whereupon a blow might fasten but is euery where alike smooth hauing no point whence the dissolution of it should commence Thirdly the head is round for his better motion that it might be speedily and easily turned to euery side The Platomists
not the true skinne Or excuse him as Archangelus dooth Archangelus Why the skin of the head hath but a dul sence who sayth that he meant it of the true skin but as it is a similar part distinct from a Nerue for indeede onely the Nerues haue sense Bauhine and Laurentius giue another reason why the skinne of the Heade is lesse sensible because say they in the Heade the skinne adhereth but to a Musculous or fleshie Membrane whereas in other parts it cleaueth to a Neruous Membrane The vse of the skin of the head is to compasse the scull and be a couering vnto it The vse There is no fatte at all saith Platerus vnder the skinne of the Heade and hee giueth his Reasons first because there is no vse of it for the small vesselles vnder the hairie Scalpe The fat are placed in sufficient safetie there needed therefore no Fatte at all to secure them Secondly because there had beene an abuse of it For in the infant the Head is proportionably Platerus to the other partes exceeding great but if it had any fatte about it it woulde haue bene a great remora or impediment in the birth But Vesalius in his seuenth Booke the 18. chapter saith that a man may easily with his hands diuide the skin with the fat and the Vesalius Columbus fleshy Membrane from the scull And Columbus saith that beside the Yard and the Codde there is no part but a man may finde fat in it The trueth is that in the fore-head there is none at all for because in the fore-head the skin is moued at our disposition it would haue beene a hinderance to his motion for that in this place the skin is vnited to a Musculous substance but in and about the Occipitium or nowle of the heade there is some fat to bee found The fleshy Membrane spred vnder the skin cleaueth close vnto it in the foreheade because The Fleshie Membrane Fallopius there is no fat to separate them and there this Membrane is very thick It also sometimes runneth like a Tendon from the Muscles of the forhead to the Muscles of the nowle and the eares insomuch that Fallopius warneth vs to take heede least we mistake it for the Pericranium and the Pericranium for the Periostium And thus much for the common inuesting parts of the Head how they differ from the same parts in other places of the Bodie CHAP. III. Of the Pericranium Periostium and the Muscles about the Head THE Membrane which lyeth next vnder the fleshye Pannicle is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because it compasseth the whole scull on the out-side The Arabians Pericranium call it Almocat and Almocatin Laurentius woulde haue it called Periostium And Fallopius in his Institutions and in his Booke de Ossibus Fallopius and the 19. chapter saith that this Membrane is common to all the Bones about the scull called Pericranium but by his common name Periostion It is scituated betwixt the fleshy Panicle and the Periostium to both which it is tied by certaine Fibres Soft it is and thin but thight and solid saith Laurentius and of exquisite sense It ariseth from certaine processes of the Dura Meninx like thin Membranes or rather Ligaments for they haue the vse of Ligaments passing through the sutures or seames of the scull For euerie His originall one of these Ligaments are extended ouer that part of the scull against which they yssued and going on meete one with another and are exactly vnited so that all of them put together make a common membrane This membrane dooth not onely encompasse the scull but also the temporall Muscles although the Anatomistes commonly take it in that place Progresse for the coate of the temporal Muscles or for a Tendon of them making them to haue two Tendons one outward another inward whereas indeede saith Fallopius in his obseruations it is nothing else but a part of the Pericranium Yet doth it not clothe these Muscles so farre as to their insertion but onely as farre as the Iugall bones and that for their safegarde and the better it may doe them this good turne because in that place it is thicke and harde it parteth therefore from these Muscles neere vnto the Iugall bone as is said where between the Membrane and the Muscles on either side there is a little what of fat to be found The vse of this Pericranium is to binde and rowle the scull on the outside round about as it were with a rowle or swathing band whereby his bones are firmed it knitteth also the His vse Dura Meninx to the scul and hangeth it so that it cannot fall or presse vpon the Braine Platerus addeth that it tyeth vnto it selfe the skin of the head and that very strongly because there is no flesh nor fat betweene them and that is the reason that onely the skinne of the head when it is wounded needeth not to besewed together because the lippes of it doe Platerus not nor cannot start farre asunder being held together by this membrane Next vnder this lyeth the Periostium which saith Vesalius you may seuer from the Pericranium with the point of a knife although Fallopius thinke they are both one and Laurentius Periostium Falopius Bauhine conceyueth that Anatomists are deceiued by the thicknesse of the Pericranium which heere was necessary because it couereth a noble bone But Bauhine whom we wil now follow describeth them seuerally The Periostium therefore is a Neruous Membrane and therfore very strong and thin It cleaueth very strongly to the scul as also it doth to the rest of the bones the reason is because the bones being very hard substances would not bee How the Bones â—ecle altred or affected with any obiect so want the benefit of the Tactile quality vnlesse they had beene couered with this Membrane of exquisite sense by whose assistance now they are not destitute of feeling whence by the Grecians it is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is Circumossalis about the bone for it compasseth all the bones excepting the teeth onely saith Varolius but we may also except the inside of the scull and the articulations or ioyntes of the bones for if it had beene extended ouer the ioynts we could not haue mooued them without paine Some saith Columbus being ignorant of this Membrane haue maintayned that the bones themselues are not destitute of sense The Muscles about the head are very many some arise from the lower part of the scull The Muscles about the head others are disposed vnder the skinne of the fore-head moouing it for the behoofe of the eyes whereupon the skinne of the fore-head is rugous full of transuerse and right lines some also there are couched vnder the hairy scalpe sometimes for they are not perpetuall by which the whole scalpe and the eares in some men are mooued Finally others belong to the neather iaw for the
Animall spirits are continually supplyed vnto the instruments of sense and motion and by motion are spent dissipated it was necessary there should be great quantity of both kinds of bloode in this place mingled together to make supply of them The vse of the Dura Meninx is to hold together the whole substance of the Brain and be The vse of the Dura Mater a couering thereunto and to all the parts of it for it compasseth about the spinall marrow also yea and all the Nerues that yssue out of the Braine It also defendeth the brain from the impressions of the Scull or compressions if by any outward iniury it be beaten downward It also preserueth the Arteries which runne in the surface of the Brain that in their Diastole they be not offended by the hardnesse of the Scull Moreouer it diuideth the Braine from the after-braine or Cerebellum as also the braine itself into a right part a left Finally it produceth Ligaments through the sutures of the scull to make the Pericranium and to fasten it to the scull that it might not sinke downe toward the braine as also to hold vp the braine it selfe least setling down it should compresse the Ventricles which would cause sudden death And thus much concerning the dura mater or Meninx wherein we haue beene somewhat prolixe that nothing might escape worthy your obseruation Now it followeth that we entreate of the Pia Mater or thin Meninx The Dura mater being taken away we meete with the second Membrane called Pia mater The Pia mater or tenuis Meninx delineated vnto you in the sixt Table and the second Figure but in the ninth Table the third Figure P P sheweth the Dura Mater and O O the Pia Mater of which we now speake This Membrane euen considered of it selfe as also in comparison with the other Membranes of the body is exceeding thin and therefore called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 by Galen in his ninth booke de Administrationibus Anatomicis and the second Chapter The name he had out of Hippopocrates His Names his Booke of the Falling sicknesse where he saith that this 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 diuideth the middle of the Braine or the Braine in the middest Galen also in his eight Booke of the vse of parts and the ninth chapter calleth it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is the Membrane like the secundine or after birth because it conteyneth or holdeth fast the veins and arteries of the brain least whilst they mooue they should be displaced their basis or foundation being but weak and infirme This membrane is for the most part conteyned within the skull immediatly couering the brain and there is iust of his figure In magnitude answerable to the braine the parts His figure Magnitude thereof but the substance or body of it is exceeding thinne and sine and yet Cabrolius and Laurentius say it is double It is thinne that it might more easily insinuate it selfe into the Substance conuolutions of the braine and yet not be offensiue by the waight of it to the brayne vpon which it lieth and beside to carry the vessell quite through the same tab 6. fig. 2. â—â—â— table 9. figure 3 OO It is soft and of exquisite sence because it communicateth the Tactiue vertue to the Brayne and the Nerues and Archangelus sayeth it is the very instrument of Touching This Nature placed betweene the brayne and the dura meninx least the braine sayth Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of parts and the 9. Chapter should be offended by so hard a The counsel of Nature neighbour For euen as sayth Plato betweene the earth and the fire because their natures are very contrary God interposed the water and the ayre so Galen sayeth that Nature betwixt the brayn and the skull which are partes of very different substance hath placed these 2. membranes or minninges For it there had been none but this thin pia mater it could not haue agreed with the skull without offence if there had beene none but the dura meninx yet the braine would haue beene therewith offended That therefore neither the braine nor his couer should endure any vncouth violence Nature hath immediately couered the Braine with this pia mater and then the pia mater hath she compassed with the thicker for by how much the thicker is softer then the bone by so much is the braine softer then the thinner If you would know what distance there is betweene these two membranes you must make a little hole in the thicker and then put a hollow bugle to it and blow it and you shal perceiue that the distance between them will containe a great deale of ayre by which you may imagine how farre they were seuered when the man was aliue This membrane doth not onely cleane closely to the braine and couer it immediatly as The progresse of it his naturall coate as a mother embraceth her infant whence Platerus thinketh it was called pia mater least the soft and moyst substance thereof should be seuered by the continual motion wherwith it is wrought vp and down for we perceiue that the brain wil easily run abroad when it is taken away but also it insinuateth it selfe into the bottome of the braine and extendeth it selfe vnto the inside of the cauity of his ventricles saith Galen in his 8. book of the Vse of parts and the 8. chapter lining them round within The vulgar Anatomistes sayth Laurentius thinke that it passeth into the ventricles from the vpper part of the brayn but the truth is that it ascendeth from below where the InfuÌ„dibulum or Tunnel of the brain is scituate and where those small arteries deriued from the sleepy arteries called Carotides do passe into the brain at the sides of the wedge-bone so that euen in the bottom it meeteth without the skull it cloatheth the marrow of the backe and the nerues The bones also sayth Archangelus doe seeme to bee couered with this thinne membrane which nowe Archangelus hauing with his vse changed his name is called Periostium But how it maketh the Infundibulum or Tunnell called also Peluis the Bason and how it inuesteth the vpper part of the phlegme-glandule we shall declare afterward The Vse of it is to couer and establish the braine the after-brain the marrow of the spine and the nerues as also all the vesselles which runne through it it knitteth together The vse of the pia mater so that they are more safely and commodiously distributed through the whole body of the Brayne and through all his partes Adde hereto that which Archangelus determineth in the first Booke of his Anatomy that it is the most exquisite and proper instrument of the sence of Touching CHAP. VIII Of the vessels disseminated through the Brayne THE vessels disseminated through the Braine are Veines and Arteries and those Sinus or Canalles whereof wee intreated at large in the former Chapter
out of the Cerebellum or After-braine Vesalius saies from the Basis or foundation of the Braine Archangelus from the Globous part of the marrow of the Braine betwixt the Braine it selfe and the Cerebellum for those that say it hath a double beginning say as much as nothing Platerus thinketh that it proceedeth like a new Long Braine from the Basis of the other and receiueth increase of strength from the Cerebellum also Columbus saith it is nothing else but a Long Columbus Braine hauing a double beginning the one greater from the braine it selfe the other lesser from the after braine The beginning it hath from the braine is but single that it hath from the after-braine is double and as it were forked into a right and a left The greater originall is from the forepart of the braine but a little distant from the Region of the Opticke sinewes and therefore saith he I am constrained to confesse that the 3 4 5 6 7 and 8. paires of sinewes do not arise from the braine but from the spinall marrow Varollius who indeed was excellent in dissecting of the head saith that there yssue from the braine and the Cerebellum foure roots making one notable trunke which they call the Varollius spinall marrow out of which do yssue Nerues deriued vnto all the parts of the body Laurentius is also of the same opinion The truth is that it is a production as well of the braine it selfe as of the after-braine out of which it proceedeth as a stemme from the roote which Laurentius we shall more particularly shew afterward This spinall marrow lying vnder the Cerebellum to which it is continewed taketh vp The seimatiō that hollownes of the Scull which is aboue the great perforation or hole in the bone of the Nowle or backpart of the head and the beginning thereof for the length of foure fingers and proportion thereof breadth cleaueth to the braine within the Scull Table 17 fig. 1. from D to F the latitude and depth of that originall are so aequall that it appeareth almost circular neere the quantity and forme of an Hens Egge as Archangelus saith and from this originall those Nerues which are accounted the proper sinewes of the braine together with the Organs of smelling are produced and deriued into the Instrument of the fiue senses as Varollius Plater Archangelus Laurentius and Dominicus do ioyntly agree But the spinall marrow properly so called or the other part of it which is continuall with the former Table 16 fig. 1. is wholy without the Scull For when the marrow of The spinall Marrow properly so called the braine now lengthened attaineth vnto the great perforation in the Nowle-bone Tab. 13 fig. 17. H it discendeth and passeth along through the holes of the racke-bones euen to the end of the os sacrum or holy bone It passeth I say through the bones themselues least being soft and like the substance of the braine as Galen speaketh it should in the length Galen of his production suffer violence by those things which might light vpon it whereas now the bones are as it were a safe conduct and firme defence thereunto all the way that it passeth His course And hence it is that the Graecians call this perforated part of the spine 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 sacram fistulam the holy pipe Sacred or holy because it containeth a principall part and a pipe because it is as it were fistulated or bored through which Cauity such a substance is transported as where from all the other Nerues are produced It is inuested or clothed with three membranes which Hippoc. in his booke de Arte calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The first of which according to Galen arisieth from a strong ligament exactly fastening The 3. Membranes of the Marrow The first the foreparts of the vertebrae or rackebones which ligament in the backpart determineth into a Neruous and strong coate least in the bending or extention of the spine it should be broken or offended by the bones because it is contained not as the braine in any immouable bone but in rack-bones which are not only moued but also sometimes somewhat dislocated Wherefore the Nerues also which arise from the spinall marrow properly so called least they should bee offended by the hardnes of the bones through which they passe are clothed beside the two Menings with this third coate also About this is a thicke and slimy humor powred as also about all the ioynts and parts The vse of the humor that were to be moued least being ouer dried they should suffer paine and so their actions or functions be interrupted which wisedome of Nature men doe imitate when about the Axle-trees of Carts and Coaches they smeare a soft and viscous grease that they might more currantly moue The second membrane ariseth from the dura mater or hard Meninx the third from The second and third Membrane the pia mater or thinne Meninx Tab. 16. figure 1. expresseth the coates ioyned together which two are not separated as they bee in the braine moreouer the thicker secureth the marrow from the bones the thinner infoldeth his vessels and closely bindeth together his soft substance for through the thinne membrane the veines and arteries which nourish The vessels of the marrow the marrow and supply it with vitall spirites are conuayed which vesselles we haue obserued to proceede from the veines and arteries of the loynes as wee haue already shewed in the third Booke The substance of this spinall marrow is all one with that of the Basis of the braine or rather of the globus marrow VVherefore it is somewhat hard compacted and white yet His substance so that it is much harder then the braine it selfe And Galen in diuers places of his ninth Galen Booke de vsu partium sayth that this spinall marrow is the originall of the harder nerues as the forepart of the braine is of the softer for to the strength of motion a harder production was more behoofefull and for the exactnes of sence a softer Note againe that the further it is distant from the braine by so much it is harder and more compact neither is it answerable to the colour and hardnes of the Cerebellum For the Cerebellum or After-brain is onely white in the surface of his ventricle other-where it is yellowish or Ash-coloured but the spinall marrow is very white most like to the marrow of the braine sauing that it is without any contortions or conuolutions because it is made onely to receiue and not further to labour that it hath receiued VVith the Braine it hath these things common first his substance secondly that it is an What it hath common with the Braine originall of sinewes Ga. addeth of all sinewes and is compassed with both the Meninges Yet heerein they say it doeth not communicate with it because the braine though it bee contayned within an immouable bone
the originall of all the sinnewes should be but one simple and single originall For if all the Arteries and Veines be reduced to one originall the Arteries to the Heart the Veines to the Liuer it is agreeable to the wisedome of Nature that the Nerues also should proceede from one originall because these are three common Organs or Instruments of the body through which the Animall Vitall and Naturall Faculties are by the helpe of spirites transported together with the vitall naturall blood And this both Hippocrates Plato seeme to haue known Hippocrates who in the beginning of his Booke De Natura Ossium writeth that the Originall Hipp. Plato insinuate so much of Sinnewes is from the Occipitium which is the seate of the After-brain And Plato in Timaeo speaking of all the Sinnewes writeth that God disposed the Nerues about the lower part of the Head and compassed them with a spinal Marrow which is of a substance like vnto theirs Now the originall of the spinall marrow was to bee out of the middle part of the why the spinal marow ariseth out of the cēter of the braine Braine Tab. 25. fig. 2. b c and character 4. do manifestly shew it because through it as it were through a common water-course the spirits which are perfected in the middest of the Braine were to be deriued into other Riuerets and so into the whole body Wherefore their beginning was to bee placed in the center of the Braine neere the Store-house or shop of the spirits whence they might receiue them as it were with a ful streame like as Anatomy teacheth vs that the Arteries and the Veines do arise out of the middle of the Heart and the Liuer It will be obiected that this Trunke which heere we call the Spinal marrow ought not to haue that denomination till it haue attained into the Vertebrae or racke-bones of the Chine and therefore it is improperly saide that the Opticke Nerues doe arise from Obiection the Spinall Marrow We answere that we haue before sufficiently satisfied this doubte in the 15. chapter of this Booke yet for further contentment if they will bee contented with reason we answere by instance doe not the Nerues of the Sight Hearing and of Answere by instance the rest of the senses receyue their names from the Organes to which they are destinated before they touch those Organes yea whilst they remaine within the scull So also this Marrow may be called the Marrow of the backe or the Spinall Marrow before it enter into the Spine For whilst it remaineth within the scull it is diuided from the Braine and in it may be obserued proper Fibres belonging to it selfe alone Of the After-Braine or Cerebellum Table 25. Fig. 1. sheweth the Braine taken out of the Scul separated from the Dura Meninx and inuerted whose right side exhibiteth the Originall of the Spinal Marrow and the seauen Coniugations of the Sinnewes of the Braine according to the ordinary receiued opinion but the left side sheweth their true originals Fig. 2. sheweth the Braine inuerted the partes thereof in the Basis distracted as also the Original of the Spinall Marrow out of the braine and the After-braine the largenesse of the Ventricle and the originall of the Opticke Nerue out of the Marrow TABVLA XXV FIG I. FIG II The Second Figure a. The right part of the Spinall Marrow reflected vpward to his owne side that so the originall therof which is in the cauity of the Ventricle might be perceyued c b. The beginning of this Marrow as it respecteth the hollownesse of the Ventricle d e. The Optick Nerue reflected about the roote of the Spinall Marrow The first originall of the Optick Nerue f g h. The whole Cauity of the Ventricle f sheweth the Anterior g the middle and h the Posterior Cauity hollowed in the Braine i k. The complication of vessels cald Plexus Choroides about the roote of the spinall Marrow in the ventricle l m. A portion of the Basis of the brain which together with the Spinall Marrow maketh the cleft which entreth into the ventricle n o. the length of the callous body which ioyneth together the two sides of the Braine p q r. Portions of the braine reflected backward that the cauity of the ventricle might better be perceyued This processe is a very notable one tab 25 figure 1 k arising on eyther side out of the The processe called the Bridge Cerebellum neere the trunks wherof the spinall marrow is amassed and runneth ouerthwart forward and downeward by the mediation whereof this After-braine imbraceth the forepart of the spinall marrow after the same manner that the transuersall or ouerthwart muscles of the Larynx making the third paire of common muscles doth imbrace the back-part of the beginning of the oesophagus or Gullet and thence are called oesophagaei and this processe is distinguished by a course of ouerthwart fibres with a kinde of eminency from the right fibres of the spinall marrow This processe Varollius calleth pontem Cerebelli the bridge of the After-braine from the similitude it hath with a bridge because vnder it the spinall marrow runneth as a streame runneth vnder a bridge At this processe the nerue of hearing hangeth and hence ariseth table 25 fig. 1 ii so that we may boldly auouch that the Cerebellum is also the first originall of the sense of hearing How the auditory nerue ariseth out of the Bridge And this beginning of the auditory nerue teacheth vs the cause why more from their infācy are deaf then destitute of any other sense for because the nerues proceed from the after-brain and run no long course they are easily filled and choaked with Mucous and slimy excrements this is the reason as saith Cassius in his 17 Probleme why children from their Two pretty questions resolued infancy loose their hearing of both eares together whereas vpon an accidentall disease it is more vsuall to haue one alone vitiated Seeing therefore almost halfe of the spinall marrow and this processe or bridge from which the auditory nerue ariseth do proceede from the After-braine Varollius thinketh that Galen hath great wrong to be taxed by the late Writers when as they affirme against Galen iniured by the Neotericks him that no nerue hath his originall from the Cerebellum for saith hee some nerues arise onely from the braine and not from the After-braine as the optick sinewes some from the After-braine only and not from the braine as the auditory nerues some from them both together as the nerues of the spine but no nerue ariseth immediately out of any of the two Varollius principles but all out of their owne principles eyther by the mediation of the spinall marrow or by the mediation of that transuerse processe which we called the Bridge Of the Nerues of the eyes Next followeth the nerues of the eyes and because there are two payre of them the one called optici the
QVEST. 1. Whether the Braine be the seate of the Principall Faculties THE Animall Faculties are by the Physitians distinguished into Faculties of Sense Faculties of Motion and Principall A diuision of the Animal Faculties Faculties The sensitiue Faculty is double one Externall whose obiect is singular or one the other Internall vvhose obiect is common or manifold this Internall Facultie the The common sense Philosophers call the Primary or Common sense and this is it which alone maketh the differences of Images as wee call them or Abstracted Notions She sitteth in the substance of the Braine as in a throne of Maiesty beholding the Formes or Ideas of all things vnder her feet This is shee that discerneth betwixt sweete and bitter and distinguisheth white for sweete This common sense Aristotle compareth to the center of a circle because the shapes and formes receiued by the outward senses are referred or brought heereunto as vnto their Iudge and Censor After this inward sensitiue Faculty do follow the principall Faculties and first of all the Imagination which conceyueth apprehendeth and retaineth the same Images or representation The Imagination which the common sense receiued but now more pure and free from all contagion of the matter so that thogh those things that moue the senses be taken away or other wise doe vanish yet their footsteps and expresse Characters might remaine with vs. And this conception or apprehension we call Phansie By this Phansie that supreme soueraign Intellectual power of the Soule is stirred vp and awaked to the contemplation of the Ideas The Intelligence or Notions of vniuersall things Finally all these are receyued by the Memory which as a faithfull Recorder or Maister of the Rolles doth preserue store vp and dispose in due order all the forenamed Notions The memory or abstracted formes And these are the Principal Faculties according to the Philosophers and the Physitians concerning which we haue three things to enquire The first whether the Braine be the seate of them all Secondly whether in the braine 3. Questions these diuers Faculties haue diuers Mansions And lastly whether these principall Faculties do result or arise out of the temperament or from the conformation of the Brain and whither they be Similer or Organicall Concerning the seate of the reasonable Soule the opinions of the Philosophers and Diuers opinions Physitians are very different Herophilus placeth it about the basis of the braine Xenocrates in the top of the head Erasistratus in the Membranes of the braine Empedocles the Epicures Herophylus Xenocrates Erasistratus Empedocles Moschion Blemor and the Egyptians in the Chest Moschion in the whole bodye Heraclitus in the outward motion Herodotus in the eares Blemor the Arabian in the eyes because the eyes are the discouerers of the minde and so fitted and composed to all the affections and affects of the same that they seeme to be another Soule for when we kisse the eye wee thinke wee touch the soule it selfe Strato the Naturalist thought the soule inhabited in the eye-browes because they are the seate of Pride and Disdaine and therefore the Poets were woont to call pride the Eye-brow Strato Physicus Prouethe and we commonly say of an insolent man that we see pride sitting vpon his browe Moreouer from the haires of the browes the Phisiognomers gather signes of the disposition Strato his Phisiognomy of the eie-browes of the minde For if they bee straight it is a signe of a soft and flexible disposition if they be inflected neare the nose they are a signe of a scurrulous Buffon if they bee inflected neare the temples they argue a scoffing Parasite if they bend all downewards they are an argument of an enuious inclination The Perepatetickes and Stoicks doe all of them place the faculties of sence and vnderstanding in the heart because say they that that is the The opinion of the Peripateticks principle or beginning of motion is also the originall of sence But the heart is the principle of all motion because it is the hottest of all the bowels and a liuing fountaine of Naturall heate Moreouer in passions of the minde as Agonies Feares Faintings and such like the spirites and the heate returne vnto the heart as vnto their Prince And for this Hip authority they bring the authority of diuine Hippocrates in his golden Booke of the heart where hee sayth The Soule of a man is seated in the left ventricle of the heart from thence commandeth the rest of the faculties of the Soule and it is nourished neither with meate nor drinke from the belly but with a bright and pure substance segregated from the bloud We with Hippocrates Plato Galen and all Physitions do determine that The braine is the seate of all the Animall faculties for if the braine be offended wounded refrigerated The opinion of the Physitions inflamed compressed or after any other manner affected as it is in a phrensie Melencholia Charos Chatoche or Epilepsie wee may discerne a manifest impeachment of all the Animall functions which if wee desire to cure wee apply our remedies not to the heart but to the That the braine is the seat of the Animal faculties braine But if the heart were the seat of the principal faculties then in all affections or notable distemper thereof all the functions should be interrupted because the action is from the Temperament But in a Hecticke Feuer in which there is an vtter alienation of the Temperament the voluntary and principall faculties remaine sound and vntainted When the heart is violently moued as in Palpitation neither is the voluntary motion of the parts depraued nor reason it selfe Who will deny that the vitall faculty is oppugned by a pestelent aire the byting of a venomous creature or by taking of poyson but al those that are so affected do yet enioy their sence and reason If saith Galen in his 2. booke de placitis Hippocratis Plat. you beare the heart and presse it you shall perceiue that the creature will not be hindred in his voyce his breathing or any other voluntary action And whereas Hippocrates placeth the Soule in the heart happly hee speaketh after the manner of the common people as hee vseth oftentimes to doe now the vulgar imagined Hip. expounded that the Soule was in the heart So he calleth the Diaphragma or Midriffe 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Minde when as notwithstanding those Vmbles haue no power whereby the creature doth vnderstand any thing as he teacheth in his Booke de morbo Sacro or the Falling sicknes Or we say that by the Soule in that place hee vnderstandeth the chiefe instrument of the Hip. often vseth the word Soule for heate Soule to wit the Heate So in his first booke de diaeta he commonly vseth the word Soule for Heat as when he sayth That the Soule of man is encreased euen vnto his death And againe in the same Booke
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 teacheth vs that all the nerues which arise out of the marrow of the braine are altogether distinguished and seperated in their originall progresse and insertion excepting onely the opticks which in the middle of their iourney do meet that necessarily that they might passe directly to the apple of None but the opticks doe intersect the eye that they might not grow flaccid or loose in their long iourny being very soft that the simple single obiect of the eye might not seeme double and finally that the formes and images of visible things might be vnited Onely therefore the opticke nerues do meet yet so that they neuer intersect or crosse one the other VVee haue also of late obserued saith Laurentius that the nerues of the second coniugation haue beene continuall in their originall As for the nerues of the spinall marrow the right are separated from the left neuer cutting one ouerthwart another It is therefore absurd to referre the cause of the convulsion and Palsie which hapneth on the aduerse side to the intersection of the nerues their Crosse permutation as Aretaeus would haue it because it is a meere fable Some conceiue that not the nerues but the veines and small arteries of the braine are The 2. opinion that the spirits passe by the arteries which intersect implicated first in the basis of the braine then in those two labarynthian textures the one called Choroides the other Rete mirabile so that they are diuaricated out of the right side into the left and our of the left side into the right They thinke therefore that when the ventricle on the right side of the braine and the parts therof are obstructed or compressed the left side is conuelled or resolued because the entercourse of the spirites is intercepted by the oppression or obstruction of their common fountaine and at length by stopping of the way of the spirit which they perswade themselues is communicated to the whole body by the arteries not by the marrowey and inward substance of the nerues I cannot but acknowledge this conceite to bee very ingenuous and seemingly true if it were not that it is Consuted contradicted by the principles of Anatomy For to winde vp the matter in a few words this opinion taketh these two positions for good First that the vessels doe intersect or crosse one another and againe that the Animall spirites are conuayed by vesselles not by the marrow of the nerues which how dissonant they are from the trueth may thus be demonstrated by the two common and most competent iudges of all Controuersies reason and sence All the vessels which irrigate or water the whole body of the braine and his membranes The diuarication of the vessels of the braine are propagated from the internall Iugular veine and from the arteries called Carotides and Ceruicales now we are taught by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or ocular inspection that the diuarication of these is on this manner The right Iugular veine powreth the bloud into the right sinus of the dura mater as it were into a Cisterne and the left into the left out of the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Concourse of these two ariseth the third sinus which running through the length of the sagittall suture is conuayed The sinus or duplication of the dura meninx to the top of the nose and from this many small veines are diuersly dispersed into the pia mater the fourth sinus concaued between the Braine and the After-brain determineth at the buttocks of the Braine These sinus as it were riuerets substituted by Nature instead of vessels doe disperse the bloud on al hands and from them as out of a presse the bloud ariving vnto them from the Iugular veines is expressed into the whole body of the Braine The Iugular veines therefore doe meete and vnite themselues in the third and fourth sinus of the dura mater but yet are neuer so implicated that the right doe passe vnto the left side or the left vnto the right there is no intersection of these vessels no 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Neither is there any intersection of the right Carotidall or sleepy arteries with the left because they doe not power vitall spirits into those sinus or duplications of the membrane as the veines doe the bloud neyther are the right implicated with the left but each artery maketh his owne texture the right artery the right texture and the left the left These textures or complications which are manifest in the vpper ventricles and called The arteries of the brayne do not intersect Plexus Choroides doe neuer so intersect themselues that the right should passe vnto the left the left vnto the right parts for the vpper ventricles are disseuered by their proper wall or distinction And if they say that the Carotides are implicated in the Basis of the braine at the sides of the buttockes and there intersect themselues I will indeede confesse that the arteries of the same side are implicated that is are contorted manifould like the tendrilles of a Vine crumpled vp together for the better preparation of the spirits but that they intersect them selues and from the right side passe vnto the left that I constantly deny For the holes of the buttocks do stand off one from the other through which the arteries ascend to the Basis of the braine and from them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or by a right line to the vpper ventricles which he that will not otherwise beleeue may thus proue by his owne experieÌ„ce Put a hollow Probe Experience of Bugle into the right sleepy arterie and blow it and you shall perceiue that the arteries of the right side will be distended more then the arteries of the left Let vs therefore cleare our conceites of this mist and cloud of errour concerning the intersection of the vesselles which Autopsie it selfe conuinceth to be a forged conceite Beside experience we haue good reason also against it for if we admit this intersection Reason of the vessels then it wil necessarily followe that whensoeuer the right partes are stuffed or compressed the left parts shal be resolued because the course of the spirit is intercepted But wee finde it often to fall out that when the right Ventricle is obstructed the parts of the same side are resolued But let vs for disputation sake admit though wee The Artâ—â—ies do not coÌ„uty the Animall spirits do not grant it that those smal arteries and complications of them do intersect one another must it thervpon needes follow that when the vesselles are compressed the Palsye should seize vppon the contrary side The arteries are onely conceptacles of the Vitall spirits Those Vital spirits do onely conferre their helpe to the cherishing rowzing vp and restoring of the in-bred heate of the particular parts but affoord no helpe at all to motion or sense Now in the palsy the part liueth though the Motion and Sense be
the palsy in the sound part not in the affected Another reason because Nature vseth to auoyd the excrementitious humour by the wound as sometimes by a flux of blood sometimes by quitture sometimes by Medicines which draw away and exhaust the humour either sensibly or insensibly so that the affected part is well purged by some or more of these meanes but the opposite part which is not expurged is easily affected either by simpathy or when the matter is transmitted or falleth vpon it Some thinke that almost all the spirits do flow to the part wherein the tumor or inflamation Another is whence it is that the opposite part being defrauded of them is resolued QVEST. VII VVhat is the Nature of the animall spirit what is the manner of his generation and the place thereof WEe haue sufficiently prooued by strong Arguments that to Motion Sense is requited not onely an influence of a Faculty but also of a corporeall spirit Now what name we shall giue this spirit what his nature is what is the maner and place of his generation we will breefely declare Galen calleth this spirit euery where Animalem the Animall spirit because What is the animall spirit Galen the Soule vseth it as her immediate Organ for the performance of all the animall functions of sense and motion and those which we commonly call Principall This spirit in the 17. chapter of his sixt Booke de Vsu partium he desineth to bee an exhalation of pure blood Some thinke it to be a part of the liuing Braine yea both a Similar and an Organicall part Similar as it hath a certaine and designed temper Organical as it is thin lucid subtile pure and moouable This Spirit some haue thought doth not differ in kinde and nature from the Vital but onely in accidents as in temperament place the originall à quo and the manner of diffusion For the Animall spirit is moyster and more temperate the Vitall hotter The Animall commeth from the braine the Vitall from the heart the Animall is dispersed through the nerues for Motion and Sence the Vital through the arteries to maintayne the life We are of opinion that these two spirits are of a diuerse forme and kinde as Chylification is diuers from Sanguification For the Organs are diuers the faculties diuers diuers The vital and animal spirits differ in form kinde is the manner of Generation and as the Aliment by a new concoction receiueth a newe forme and so a new denomination so is it with the spirits Galen in a thousand places distinguisheth this Animall from the Vitall spirit whatsoeuer some new Writers say to the contrary In the 5. Chapter of the 12. Booke of his Method The Animal spirit sayth he ariseth out of the Braine as out of his fountaine The demonstration of the Vitall spirit is not euident but yet it is agreeable to reason that it is contayned in the heart and the arteries And if there be any Naturall spirit that is included in the Liuer and the veines In the 7. Chap of his 3. Book de locis affect is Gal. saith Diuers places in Galen The Epilepsie hapneth in the braine when the humour hindreth the Animall spirit which is contayned in the ventricles thereof that it cannot haue yssue out In the 10. Chapter of his 16. Booke de vsupartium The complications of the arteries doe nourish the Animall spirit contayned in the braine which differeth much in Nature from other spirits In the third Chapter of his 7. Booke de placitis Hip. Plat. The spirit which is contayned in the arteries is indeed Vitall and so is also called that which is contayned in the braine is Animall not that it is the substance of the Soule but because it is the Soules first and most immediate instrument The same also he writeth in the 4. Chapter of his 9. Book de vsupartium In the 8. Chapter of the 9. Booke de placitis Hip. Plat. and in the 5. Chapter of the ninth Booke de vtilitate respirationis By all which places we may gather that Galen made a difference betweene the Vitall and the Animall spirits And truely that there should be an Animall spirit it was very necessary The necessity vse of the animall spirit first to conuay vnto the partes the facultie of Motion and Sense which is not fixed in them and againe that we might be more apprehensiue of outward accidents For seeing that the Organs of the Sences ought to be affected on the sudden by sensible things it was fit they should not be altogether solide but houed and fulfilled with spirits that they might the sooner be altered Moreouer these spirites doe transferre the species or formes of all outward things perceiued by the outward Sēces vnto the brain as vnto a Censor or Iudge The same spirits doe conceiue in the braine the images of those outward thinges so that the Animall spirit may bee called the place and promptuarie of the species or formes So in the Vertigo or Giddinesse neither the thing it selfe nor the Image of it nor any thing beside The nature of the Vertigo the spirit is rowled about and yet notwithstanding all things seeme to him that is so affected to runne round VVherefore this spirite is necessary both for motion and sence As for the principal faculties to the performance of all their functions the braine vseth the ministery and helpe of this spirit so that it worketh both within the braine and without the braine within the braine it helpeth the principall faculties without the braine it conferteth Motion and Sence Nowe it is not onely abiding in the ventricles but also in the pores and in the whole marrowy substance of the braine so that in the pores and substance it is communicated to the principall faculties In the ventricles it serueth more immediately for Sence and Motion Furthermore this spirit which is the immediate Organ of Sence and Motion and of the How the animall spirit is manifold principall faculties is indeede of one kinde notwithstanding it is esteemed manifould according to the variety of the obiects and instruments where about it is imployed which thing Arts̄totle elegantly hath taught vs in the last chapter of his 5. booke de generatione Animalium The spirit sayth he in Naturall things is like the hammer in the Art of the Smith that is to say but one instrument yet profitable for the performance of many offices Actuarius compareth it to the beames of the Sunne which though they bee all of one kinde yet they become vnlike when they light vpon different colours It remayneth now that we should manifest vnto you the Matter of the Animall spirit The matter of the animall spirit and the manner of his generation The matter of it is double Ayre and the Vitall spirit The Ayre is drawne in by the nosethrils the Vitall spirites are conuayed through the Arteries called Carotides and Ceruicales into the
according to the motion of the arteries Reason 1. without that is to say from the Arteries Neither do his ventricles breathe in aer as Galen would haue it neyther are they distended and contracted The reasons of this are first it doth no more become a principle of motion to bee mooued then it becommeth a principle of sense it selfe to haue sense because as Aristotle saith euery 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 must be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is euery instrumēt of sense must be destitute or void of al the obiects of that sense whereof it is an instrument now the body of the braine hath not sense and therefore it hath no motion Furthermore if the braine doe breath by a proper power it would follow that because the substance thereof is soft and the membrane that compasseth the ventricles very fine thinne it followeth I say that that membrane must in the dilatation contraction be violently torne asunder Thirdly the third and fourth ventricles of the brain commonly so called are of the same substance and temper that the vpper ventricles are of for the vse of them all is one and the same but it is granted that the latter ventricles doe not Respire and therefore neyther shall the former be dilated or contracted They vrge further and thinke that this weapon hath a further edge In grieuous wounds of the head when the braine is vncouered the motion of the braine and the arteries doeth not appeare to differ at all but as one Pulse is answerable to another so likewise the motion of the braine and the arteries doe accord Now if the braine did beat by an in-bred power then must it needes be that some time the braine and the arteries should not beat alike and at the same instant Finally there is no Attraction no Expulsion without the helpe of fibres so the heart hath his fibres as also the stomacke the guttes the veines and the arteries but in the brain there appeare no fibres at all Ergo the Motion of the Diastole and Systole of the braine is not proper and peculiar vnto his substance Verily these reasons are so strong that the time hath bin saith Laurē whē I was cōuinced by them constrayned to subscribe vnto this opinion but looking ouer with a little more diligence the works of Galen and considering some passages in his Booke de Odoratus Organo de vsupartium de Placitis Hippoc. Platonis with better deliberation at length I altered my minde and am now resolued that the body of the braine doeth respire by a proper faculty and in-bred Motion Let vs here Galen disputing in expresse words in the last Chapter of his Book de Odoratus Organo Nature sayeth he hath not denyed motion to the braine whereby it might draw Ayre for That the braine doth respire by it owne force his refrigeration and returne the same backe againe for the expurgation of superfluityes Againe in the 4. Chapter of the same Booke It is not impossible that the brayne should yeeld vnto it selfe a kinde of Motion though it be but small sometimes into it selfe sometimes out of it selfe The 〈…〉 Galne so that it should be lesse when it contracteth it selfe and more spred when the parts of it are dilated Thus farre Galen But it shall behooue vs to establish his authority by reason also and waight of argument Reason 1. It is most certaine that the Animall spirit is generated first in the vpper ventricles of the braine which spirit being of it owne Nature ayrie and hot stoode neede of the Inspiration of ayre which was familiar and of kin vnto it as well for his nourishment as that by it it might be refrigerated wherefore when we draw our breath inward the ayre also is drawne into the braine and when we breath outward a fumid or smoaky vapour which is the excrement of the Animall spirit is thrust out and auoyded This Hippocrates elegantly expressed in his Booke de morbo sacro or of the Falling sicknesse When sayth he a man drawes in ayre by his mouth his nose is shut first of all the breath Hippocrates commeth to the Brayne Nowe this Inspiration of the ayre into the vpper ventricles of the braine and the Expiration of the same is not made by arteries but by certaine protuberations or swelling productions of the braine much like the Nipples of a womans Pap which also are the Organs of smelling The Motion therefore of the braine which is accomplished by Inspiration and Expiration proceedeth from the braine it selfe not from the arteries Againe that the ayre is drawne in by these productions may thus be proued The ayre and odours doe passe by one and the same way for no smell can be felt although it be driuen violently into the nose vnlesse therewith ayre be drawne in now odors do passe into the braine by those productions before named not by Arteries and therefore by the same productions ayre is inspirated and transported into the foreward ventricles Furthermore if the braine do beate by the Arteries and not by anin-bred power for Reason 2. the generation of spirits why then is not the spinall marrow also moued You will say haply that in the marrow of the backe there is not so great plenty of Arteries as are found in the braine it selfe I answere it may well be for there is not the same quantity of matter or substance in the braine and the marrow But if you compare both bodies together then will the proportion of the Arteries be as great which runne through the membranes inuesting the marrow Wherefore the spinall marrow is not therefore immoueable because it wanteth arteries but because in it there is no generation of vitall spirits as there is in the Braine The third argument is on this manner There is a certaine distance betwixt the body Reason 3. of the braine and the Dura meninx not to giue way to the Systole and Dyastole of the Arteries for they are not so lifted vp nor to auoid danger because the Pia mater or thin membrane is interposed betweene them the distance therefore is left for the motion of the braine and so we see that in the heart there is a distance betwixt it and the pericardium least if they had touched one another they might haue beene interrupted Fourthly how is it possible that so great a waight and masse of moysture as the braine is should be dilated by a few small arteries for so I worthily call them that are sprinckled Reason 4. through the body of the Braine seeing hat the large and notable Arteries of the spleene are not able to moue his rare and smal body I answere Anatomy teacheth vs that this bowel is wouen with infinite Arteries and yet no man euer saide that the spleene was moued vnlesseit be in a tumor or inflamation and then any part will be moued Fiftly if the motion of the braine bee the motion of the Arteries
and not of the marrowy substance then it was ridiculouâ— to say that the braine is moued because the Arteries Reason 5. are onely moued For so we might say that the stomack the guts and the spleene were mooued because the Arteries do beate euery where And therefore if wee imagine that the marrow of the braine is distended by the Dyastole of the Arteries why should we not beleeue also that all the rest of the parts of the body do beate because they haue all proportionably as many Arteries Finally the processe called vermi-formis the Conarion and the buttocks of the braine do shew that there is a peculiar motion of the braine which differeth from the motion of Reason 6. the Arteries For the wormy processe being made shorter openeth the way which is from the third vnto the fourth ventricle and whilst the same processe is extended it shutteth the passage againe least the spirit should returne into the vpper ventricles so that it seemeth there is the same vse thereof that there is of the values placed at the mouth of the great Artery now the opening and shutting of this clift proceedeth not from the Arteries but from an in bred power of the braine it selfe It is therefore more probable to The Conclusion thinke with Galen that the braine is moued by a naturall motion and that proper to it selfe for the nutrition of Animall spirits the tempering of them and their expurgation The reason and nature of this motion is on this manner When the braine enlargeth it selfe it draweth ayre out of the nostrils by the mammillary processes and spirits out of the The reason of he motion of the braine Textures or complications of the small Arteries This ayre and these spirits it mingleth in that rest or interim which is between the two motions but when in the Systole it contracteth it selfe the sides falling together the inward ventricles are straightned and the Animall spirits powred out of the foremost into the hinder ventricles But heere ariseth a scruple of no little moment which is whether the ayre is deriued to the braine when it is distended or when it is contracted It should seeme that the ayre is A great question drawn in in the constriction because when the brain is contracted it departeth a little from the Scull the Scul because it is immoueable doth not follow the contraction of the brain It is therefore necessary that there must bee a vacuitie betweene the Braine and the Scull or else there must be aire drawne in wherewith that place must be filled But wee thinke that the aire is drawne in in the dilatation of the braine neither doe we allow that there is any emptie place left in the contraction because in the contraction What wee thinke there is an expression of aire and fumed vapours through the sutures Now let vs giue answer to that which is obiected against this our opinion They obiected first That the braine is the beginning of motion and therefore ought not to be moued We answer That indeed it must not be moued with the same Motion The reason of the contrary opinions are answered To the first wherewith it moueth the parts It giueth to the parts of the body voluntary Motion but it selfe is moued with a naturall Motion The braine is moued after the same manner that it hath sense Now the sense of it is naturall as is the sense of bones or the bowels whereby it being prouoked auoydeth that which is offensiue vnto it as we may see in sneezing and in the falling sickenesse It is moued for the generation of animall spirits Their second argument was that the ventricles of the braine did not respire because To the second in that perpetuall distension the thin Membrane of the Braine would haue beene broken But they do not remember that in sneezing and in the Epilepsie the contraction of the Braine is more violent then in the ordinary Motion yet in neither of those is the Membrane broken In Sternutation or sneezing the Braine collecteth it selfe and is contracted the better to exclude that which is offensiue vnto it For the same that the cough is in the chest and the hickocke in the stomach the same is sneezing in the Braine In the Epilepsie the whole Braine is contracted and corrugated Thirdly they obtrude vnto vs that the backeward ventricles do not respire and therfore To the third that the forward ventricles doe not dilate or contract themselues I answer first that I know not by what slight or art they can perceiue that the backeward ventricles doe not mooue But let vs grant that they doe not yet is their consequence not good for the formost ventricles doe stand in neede of more at least of more conspicuous Motion then the other because in the formost the spirit is prepared and purged in the backeward they are contained when they are pure sincere and alreadie purged Fourthly the motion of the braine and the arteries doth not appeare to bee vnlike To the fourth the one vnto the other I answer that they are not indeede vnlike because their vse is the same there is the same finall cause of the generation of the spirits of their expurgation Fiftly they doe not thinke it as moued with any proper motion because there appeare in the braine no fibres at all Wee answer that the bones doe draw their nourishment To the fifth and expell that which is superfluous without the helpe of Fibres Lastly there is not the same reason or nature of the heart and of the Braine for the Heart stood neede of To the last Fibres not for the traction and expulsion of aire but of blood In the Dyastole the Heart draweth blood by the right Fibres and the same blood it expelleth in the Systole by the transuerse But the Braine when it is mooued draweth onely aire with most thinne vitall spirits for the traction whereof there is no neede of the helpe of Fibres Hence we thinke it is sufficiently manifest that the Braine is moued by an in bred facultie and not onely by the motion of the arteries QVEST. X. VVhether the Braine hath any sense IT is a notable Controuersie amongst Physitians whether the Brain haue any sense or no. That it hath sense it may bee demonstrated by authoritie experience and reason Hippocrates in his Booke De vulneribus capitis resolueth that it hath sense where he saith That the braine about the sinciput doth soonest That the brain hath sense The authority of Hyppocrates Of Galen and especially feele any inconuenience that is either in the flesh or in the bone Galen in his booke De plenitudine The Braine saith he and the spinall marrow are accounted amongst those things which haue sense And if in a frensie no paine be felt it is because the mind is disquieted Againe in his book Odoratus organo he attributeth to the Brain manifest sense Moreouer experience
and betwixt them runnes the Nose as a strong wal vnder them the bones of the Cheeke stand out and at their side the hard bones of the Temples They are immediately couered with soft lids that they might not impeach the delicacy of the instrument the vppermost are mooueable and verie nimble which do shut vp the pupils as well in rest to refresh them as also when any outward iniury is ready to annoie them the lowermost are immooueable or at least mooued insensibly These liddes are againe bearded with haires whereby and wherein small bodies or Motes which happly in their approach are not discerned might be intercepted The Eyes themselues haue many Muscles allowed them whereby they are mooued euery way vpward and downward to the right and to the lefte and round they are also by a Muscle susteined and kept stable or firmed whereby the sense is more certaine Diuers Coats they haue wherewith they are couered the first called Adnata the second Cornea the third Vuea the fourth Aranea There are also three Humours the first Watery the second Glassy and the third Christalline which is the chiefe Organe of the sight and is assisted by the other parts aboue mentioned The eye indeede seeth with the Christalline humor but it seeth perfectly and more accomplishedlye with the whole Organ or InstrumeÌ„t The obiect of this sense are those colors which are in the superficies of other bodies Next followeth the Eare the Instrument whereby the Soule discerneth of all manner of sounds and voyces The chiefe part of this Organ is a thin and subtle aire bredde in the â—are and seated within the cauity therof to which aire the ends of the Nerues of hearing The Eares which come from the Braine doe attaine and as the Opticke Nerue encompasseth the Cristalline humour so this nerue of Hearing is thought to encompasse the In bred Ayre and spirit and so the society growes betweene the instrument of the Sense and the inward principle of Sensation Before this Aire is a Membrane stretched which we cal the Drum supported and established with three Bones the smallest of the whole body but none formed with more curious Art the first is called the Hammer the second the Anuile the third the Stirrop Many men haue laboured to assigne to each of these their proper vses and how they conferre to the sense of Hearing but truth to say their discourses do rather feed then fill the minds of their Readers God hath reserued many secrets in mans body to himselfe whereof wee iustlie thinke this is one yet we know that they sustaine the Membrane of the Tympane agaynst which the representation of the sound or voice is beaten and communicated to the inbred Aire These sounds are admitted to the InstrumeÌ„t by the hole of hearing a hard dry entrance full of embowed Meanders and Convolutions lest the outward aer falling or rushing suddenly vpon the Drum should endanger the breaking therof Without the Eare there standeth a gristly substance which partly defendeth the hole of Hearing that nothing fall into it partly catcheth and staieth the sound that it passe not by The third Sense is that of Smelling whose Instrument doth not yssue out of the Scull in those creatures which do respire but is conteined within the substance of the brain wheÌ„ce The Nose it followeth that these 5. are called outward senses not so much because they appear outwardly but rather because their proper organs doe receiue the species or representations of outward things The instrument therefore of smelling is a paire of productions issuing out of the forward Ventricles of the Braine in which the faculty of smelling residing doeth comprehend the odors of things which together with the aer are drawne in thorough the passages of the nose which is raysed higher in the face of a man then of other creatures as well for beauty as because the Braine of a man being large and therfore yeelding abundance of excrements might ther-through be better clensed This nose is diuided in the middest by a gristly substance aswell to breake and diuide the outward aire which in a great part is drawn in this way to be conueyed into the sharp arteries so to the lungs as also to disperse the parts of the obiect of this sense that being so diuided it might equally insinuate it selfe through the small holes of the spongy bone to both the productions which determine on either side The fourth Sense is the Tast the Forme whereof is seated in those Nerues which attaine vnto the tongue and pallat assisted by the spongy flesh of the tongue it selfe For The Tongue when any sauoury quality or affection imparted to a humor or iuice is applyed vnto the tongue it stirreth vp the taste and presently the image or species of that sauour is by the spirit residing in the Nerues conueied to the principall Sensator and if it happen that the sauour be represented to the Instrument in a hard or congealed body as salt pepper or such like it cannot mooue the sense before it be melted by the heate or at least haue communicated his affection vnto the moisture of the mouth and therfore it is that nothing can affect the taste which cannot be dissolued neither is he whose tongue is torrified or parched with extraordinary heate a competentiudge of sauors or Tasts As for the Touch which is the fift and last sense it is not conteined within any proper organ or instrument but equally diffused through the whole body because the necessity The sense of Touching of Nature did euery where require the presence thereof for the security of the life of the creature and yet notwithstanding it dooth not as other senses receiue the impression of all his owne proper obiects For sensation is a passion if therefore the Obiect bee of the same temper with the Instrument the sense is not affected therewith because it doth not suffer by that which is like vnto it but all the other senses do apprehend all those qualities which do fall vnder them for being all vnlike to the instruments they must needs be affected by them But because this sense hath no particular instrument in the head we shall only intreate of it by the way in this place somwhat we haue spoken of it before in our discourse of the skin and more we shal haue occasion to say in the booke of the Ioynts and the Vessels Wherefore we descend vnto our History CHAP. I. Of the other part of the head which is called the Face together with the vessels and muscles thereof HAuing gone through that part of the Head which is couered with a hairy scalfe and therefore by Aristotle in the 7 chapter of his 1. book de historia Animalium called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 it remaineth that we proceed vnto the other part which is without hayre called in man 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which The names of the face name it seemeth to haue receiued
lip The other artery of the by-partition at p creepeth vp the temples and the forehead and is consumed in the muscles of the Fcae And so much of the vessels The Skin of the head is in many men mouable but of the forehead in all men not onely The muscles of the forehead by the benefite of the fleshy membrane which degenerateth into a musculous substance hauing right fibres but also by the help of two muscles assured so to be both by the course of their fibres as also by their motions which appeare in these after the manner of other muscles and not like the motion of the fleshy membrane These are scituated in the forehead Table 6. figure 1. A and doe arise aboue where the hayre determines sometimes as high as the crowny seame neare the Temporall muscles the right at the right and the left at the left Temple where the fleshy membrane cleaueth so close to the Perteranium or skulskinne and the Skull it selfe that it is altogether immouable So that the forehead and the Eye-browes are mooued when the membrane is at rest and toward the common seame which distinguisheth the bones of the head from those of the vpper iaw are implanted with right fibres aboue the eyes and the nose into the skinne at the browes as at the parts which are to be moued I sayed these fibres were right and not oblique as some haue thought and here Chyrurgions A good note for Chyrurgions must obserue that in opening Apostemations in that place they make not their incitions ouerthwart as the wrinckles of the skinne doe goe but according to the right fibres These two muscles are a little disioyned in the middest and that is the reason why the top of the forehead is not moued Vpon this coniunction some haue thought them to be Why the top of the forehead is not moued but one muscle Against whome wee shall further dispute in the proper place where wee create of these in our book of muscles There are also other muscles which draw the skinne of the head backward but those belong not to this place Now we proceed vnto the Organs of the Sences CHAP. II. Of the Eye and parts thereof WEe sayd before that the habitations or residences of foure of the Sences were contayned in the face The fift externall Sence which is the Sence of Touching is dispersed Why 5. sences through the whole body hath no proper seat in the face all the rest haue For the head being the seat of the Animall faculties and the habitacle of the reasonable Soule it was also necessary that the Sences which as Hippocrates in his Booke de morbo sacro or of the Falling sicknesse sayth are the messengers and interpreters of the Soule should also haue their residence in the head These outward Sences are fiue as there are fiue simple bodies the Heauen and the foure Elements VVherefore according to the Platonists the Sight answereth in proportion How the sences answere the elements to the Element of Starres whose obiect is shining The obiect of the Smel is fiery and therefore it is sayd that fragrantia are flagrantia The obiect of the Hearing is ayrie the obiect of the Taste is watery and of the Touch earthy But amongest these the Sight is the principall which with hearing makes a mannes life much more happy albeit without the Tast no man can be so well nourished For those who either by Nature or by Accident are blinde do account themselues therein miserable for as the Sunne saith Galen in the tenth Galen Chapter of his third Booke de vsu partium in the great world so is the Eye in the body of a creature and therefore Hesichius calleth them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Solis portae The dores of the Sun Hesychius and therefore we will first intreat of the Eyes as also because amongest all the nerues the Opticke nerues haue the first place The Grecians call the Eye 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because it is the couch or bed out of which the Sight shineth And therefore the Eyes are called by others 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because from The names of the Eyes them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is the light proceedeth The Latins as Varro and Lactantius call them oculi abâ—culendo vel occultando from hiding because they are couered and hidden within their Liddes These Eyes are the Organs of the faculty of Seeing which we vse sayth Galen in the fift Chapter of his 8. Book de vsu partium as spies not only to auoyd those things which wold offend vs and to leade vs vnto that which is profitable which vse is common to vs with bruite beasts but especially that by those things which are visible we may take consideration of the omnipotency of the inuisible God Hence it is that Plato said wel that if we wanted our Eyes wee should bee ignorant of that excellent order which Nature hath established Their excellency in the frame of the world and of our own bodies Aristotle addeth that the Science or exquisite knowledge of all things is exceeding much furthered by the eyes And therfore Galen calleth them diuine members Seeing therefore their necessity is so great it is no wonder that God the Creator made them after so excellent a manner as it were a curious modell to manifest his Maiesty and wisedome They are scituated in the head as in the highest and best defensed place of the body immediately vnder the forehead as Scoutwatches for as watchmen are placed in high standings Their scituation and turrets that they may further of discerne whether any enemies be approching or lye in ambush so the eyes are set aloft to foresee and giue warning of any danger that may be toward vs. Galen and Auicen haue conceiued that the head was especially made for the vse of the eyes their reason is because the optick nerues being very soft could not safely The reason thereof be placed farre from them They are seated in the forepart of the head whereof Galen in the first chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium rendreth a reason because saith hee the Instruments of this sense do require soft nerues which could not bee produced from the Cerebellum or After-braine as being much harder then the braine it selfe Moreouer being placed before they are directly opposed to their obiects and we moue forward neyther can we discerne eyther on the side or behind vs vnlesse wee turne our heads about They are seated within bony cauities which Pollux calleth 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Orbes that for security haply also because the spirits might be lesse dissipated They are in number two as also are the other instruments of the senses mooued together and at once with the same motion that the sight might be more perfect for if Their number one of them had beene lifted vppe and the other depressed
together with the Trochlea which is in the inner angle and so demonstrate what you please And thus much shall bee sufficient to haue spoken of the Muscles of the eyes Now we proceede vnto their vessels CHAP. V. Of the vessels of the Eyes FOr the same reason for which we intreated precisely of the Muscles of the eye in their Historie we will also handle their vessels more districtly in this place and passe them ouer more lightly in the booke of Vessels The vessels are hete fully handled Veines The vessels therefore which are sent vnto the eye are veines and Arteries to which are added Nerues as being cōmon Organs no lesse then the other The Veines which are sent vnto the eye proceed out of the iugular Veines leade blood for their nourishment The Arteries arise from the Carotides or sleepy Arteries and are dispersed through the muscles to moderate the inward heate and to sustaine their life through which Muscles Arteries as also through the fat they are accompanyed with Nerues and distributed through their Membranes which is shewed in the third Table the second and third figures at h. The Nerues are of two sorts Optici and Motorij that is seeing and moouing they Nerues proceed out of the marrow of the braine yet remaining within the scull and making the spinall marrow The Opticke Nerue tab 2. fig. 1 and 3. x. fig. 5. Λ. tab 3. fig. 2. 4. 8. α. which is called Visorius or the Nerue of sight is on each side one and these are amongst all the nerues of Opticke sense the largest the thickest the softest and Galen also saith the longest in the third chapter of the sixteenth book de vsu partium They are of a rare texture cōpassed with both the Meninges tab 3. fig. 2. a b c. They are the greatest and thickest of all the Synewes that Why the greatest and thickest so aboundant faculty might be transported to the eye that it might sooner haue sense of the light and be manifold wayes affected They are very soft saith Galen in the fifth chapter of his seuenth book de placitis that they might be sooner affected because they are nerues of sense and of a sense so very necessary for all sense is perfected by receiuing and suffering They are softer then any other Why softer because they are affected by the light alone which they receiue also very much broken They are the longest of all the rest because the way is long from their originall to the Orbe of the eye Their texture is rare and thin and therefore Herophilus beleeued that they were perforated and Galen thereupon called the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and meatus visorios For in the third chapter of his sixeteenth booke de vsu partium hee noteth out of Herophilus Galen out of Herophilus that they are in their inside perforated all along their passage and that perforation was the reason why they were made so large By these Galen thinketh not onely that the faculty of sense is transported but also the Animall spirits in which the faculty is established that so their sense might be more aboundant and strong whereas through other Nerues he conceiueth that the vertue or faculty onely is carryed as we may perceiue in the 12. chapter of his tenth booke de vsu Where they are distinct Where vnited partium and in the fifth chapter of his seuenth booke de placitis These Opticke nerues in their end and in their originall are distinct but at the middle of their progresse aboue the saddle or seat of the wedge bone before they fal out of the scul becoming a litle broader the right is vnited with the left tab 21. lib. 7. fig. 1. oo so that they make the forme of the Greekeχ not by cleauing the one to the other or by intercussation or that one rideth ouer the other but by perfect and absolute vnion and confusion of their marrowes they are so ioyned that one cannot be separated from the other tab 21. lib. 7. fig. 1. H for it is a very rare thing in Anatomie to find them separated The vse of this coniunction is partly that the Pupilla or sight of the eye might look vppon the same plaine least otherwise the visible obiects should appeare double because The vses of their coniunction the eyes are double partly that the Idea or formes of visible things might be vnited and so the faculty of sight be common to both sides because the visible spirit may passe from one eye to another in a moment for the more certainty of the sight And this is prooued if we presse or inforce one eye vpward or downward for then all things appeare double wherfore as it was conuenient that the eyes should be pararels so also the nerues which because of the motion of the eyes might decline from the right line especially seeing the muscles do compasse them and cleaue vnto them for when one muscle onely whether is be the vpper or the lower is moued the eye also is rowled to one side And therefore Nature hath worthily ioyned the Opticke nerues together that euen in such motions the faculty might be wholly conuaied to either side And this appeareth to be true because if you put your hand betwixt your eyes along the length of your Nose so that you cannot see the obiect you intend with both eyes you shall perceiue that you see more obscurely on either side then if you lookt vpon the obiect with one eye shut vp for then the faculty which was before dispersed vnto both is vnited into one Adde also this third profit of the coniunction that the soft nerues hauing a long way to go might thus be made strong ande stablished because Nature could not sustaine them with any ties or knots of Membranes After their coniunction they are instantly disioyned and each nerue issueth through the proper hole which is framed in the depth of Orbe out of the scull Tab. 21. lib. 7. fig. 1. aboue H. and so the right attaineth to the right and the left vnto the left eye and there are implanted In a man they are inserted on the backeside into the center of horny coate see the third table fig. 2. 3. 4. 8. because onely man can look directly forward In brute beasts as in oxen and horses whose eyes are much farther a sunder they attain by a line notably oblique vnto the compasse of the eye and do not determine in the Center Hence it is that the eyes of brute beasts doe see the earth on either sides to direct their gate and to finde out their nourishment These Opticke nerus when they are come vnto the eies are dilated saith Galen in the 1. chap. of his 10. book de vsu partium and like a membrane each of them in cōpasse the glassie humor Galen also addeth in the same place that they are inserted into the Cristalline humour The vse of the optick nerues The vse
of these Opticke nerues is to leade the visible faculty from the braine which in the eies is gathered vnto the visible formes where the Nerue is dilated into the Membrans of the eie For if this Nerue be obstructed as it is in that disease which the Arabians call Gutta serena the cleare drop the action of seeing is altogether taken away or intercepted Gutta serena And so much concerning the Optick Nerues The Nerues of Motion are on either side one which sendeth a small surcle to eache Muscle by which it is mooued Tab. 2. fig. 3. 4. sheweth this as he may perceiue who diligently The Nerues of motion shall separate the beginning of the Muscles from the Nerue which also is spred abroad into the Membranes These moouing Muscles in their originall are continuall that is the right is ioyned with the left whence it commeth to passe that when one eye Where they are continual is mooued the other also followeth the same motion for they proceede ioyntly out of one point as it were in the fore-part of the spinall Marrow so that the same obiect and the same light after the same manner and at the same time insinuateth it selfe into either eye that the sense and discerning might be one and the same and this maketh much to the perfection of the sense that one and the same thing might not appear double which doubtlesse would happen if one eye might be mooued vpward and the other downward at the same time That this is true you may easily learne if with your finger you either Demonstrations heereof depresse or lift vp one of your eyes for then all obiects will appeare double one higher another lower But if you mooue your eye toward the side because the pupilla or Sightes are in the same line the obiects will not seeme double Wherefore Galen in the thirteenth chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium writeth that the Diameters of the visible Cones must be placed in one and the same plaine least that which is one do appeare double Hence it is that in the palsye and convulsion of the Muscles of the eye the patient often seeth double Obiects because the eyes do depart from the same plaine So also when the Opticke Nerues are either conuelled or relaxed the pupilla or Sight not beeing in the same line all thinges appeare double which also for the same cause happeneth oftentimes to men when they are drunke From these Instrumentes Veynes Arteries and Nerues are deriued vnto the eye aboundance of Spirits Natural Vitall and Animall which are properly called visible spirits The spirits of the Eies wherfore acording to the plenty of the Spirits conteyned in the eyes their magnitude as also their splendor or brightnes is greater or lesse And hence it is that whē men are nere their death their eyes becom litle languid obscure as also those that do too much follow venerial combats haue their eyes smal and extenuated so also wee see that in liuing men the eyes are full and turgid but when they are deade they become lesse as also laxe and rugous for the presence and absence of the spirits maketh a difference betwixt a liuing and a dead eie Againe according to the diuers disposition of the spirites and of the eyes from them Diuers argumentes to proue there are spirites in them we are able by our sight to distinguish and iudge oftentimes of the affections of the mind which is a cleare argument and euen liable to our sense that the body of a man is ful of spirits which thing Galen also in the tenth booke de vsu partium prooueth by an elegant and demonstratiue argument For saith he if vpon the closing of one eye you do attentiuelie marke the pupilla or sight of the other you shall perceyue it in a verie moment to be dilated because a greater quantity of spirits do fall into the Grapie coate which we call Vuea through that coate which is called Reticularis or the Nette where they dilate the hole of the Vuea which hole is properly called Pupilla or the sight and Apple of the eye Finallie that the eyes are full of spirites is hence conuinced because they are sometimes obscure dull and languid or weake sometimes bright or shining quicke and apprehensiue But least these spirites which are of an admirable finenesse and subtiltye might exhale or euaporate they are kept in and retained by a thick thight and strong Membrane which is called the Horny coate CHAP. VI. Of the Membranes of the Eyes HAuing declared the Muscles the vessels of the eies now remoued them away the eye it selfe round like a bowl appeareth Ta. 2. fig. 3 4. Ta. 1. fi 2 3 which may be compared to the world an egge both for the figure construction To an Egge which consisteth of Membranes the shel which is an indurated Membrane a thin Membrane The eie compared to an Egge vnder it humors the white the yolke So the globe of the eye hath membranes humors Membranes that being of a watery nature it might better be conteined in his positiō and the humors by them encompassed which membranes had need to haue a more solid substance beside they are a great furtherance to the sight Humours onely for the sight Concerning the number of the Membranes the authors are at great difference Hippocrates The Membranes of the eie in his Booke De Locis in Homine acknowledgeth but three the vppermost thick the middlemost thinner and the third thinnest of all which conteineth the humors but in his booke De Carn he saith they are manie The later Grecians reckon four Siluius fiue Vesalius sixe Galen in the seuenth chapter of his tenth book De vsu part seuen vnto whō Fuchsius Aquapendens do consent We wil diuide them into two kinds some are common to the whole eie some are proper to the humors the common Membranes are the Their number verie diuerse according to authors Cornea and the Vuea the horny and the grapie coates The proper Membranes are the Cristaline and the glassye But whereas there are commonly reckoned seauen Adnata Cornea Dura Vuea Choroides Aranea and Retina whereto some haue added those which are called Vitrea and Innominata we wil runne thorough them al after our Anatomical order The first is called Adnata which is the seauenth according to Galen in the second chapter First Adnata of his tenth booke De vsu partium so called as it were Nata circa oculum bred about the eye Galen cals it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because it cleaueth on the outside of the other mēbranes of the eye whereupon it is also called Adherens or the cleauing Membrane This is the vtmost Aquapendens supposeth that it ariseth from the Periostium tendons or chords of the Muscles It first offereth itselfe before Dissection together with the transparant part of the horny Membrane
wisedome and the infinite goodnesse wherewith he hath compassed vs on euery side Moreouer that he would giue me power perspicuously to propound and lay open to your capacities a thing so diuersly and quayntly folded vp that the Eie is scarce able to follow the trayne thereof These instruments are called in Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in Latin Aures ab hauriendis vocibus as sayth Lactantius in English Eares of hearing The names of the eares There are many parts of the Eares which serue as well for the reception of the sound into them as also for the intension thereof Some of them are such as without which there is no reception of sounds others are necessary for better reception and hearing Finally others were created for the conseruation of all the rest Wee will diuide the Eare according to Hippocrates in Coacis into an outward and an inward Eare and first we will entreate of the outward The Eares saith Aristotle are parts of the head by which we heare and therefore it may be immagined they are called Aures quasi audes ab audiendo from hearing Instruments The reasons of the name they are of Hearing indeede as Galen confesseth in the second chapter of his Booke De Instrumento Odoratus but not the principal organs because if the Eares be cut off close by the heade yet a man will heare notwithstanding as if the nose bee cut off a man shall smell though imperfectly The reason is because the principal instrument both of Hearing and of Smelling lies hid within the scul The outward Eares therefore are helping causes and when they are sound and whol they are of as great vse for the Hearing as the nosethrils are for the Smelling These outward Eares properly called Auriculae are in men beasts conspicuous but in Birds and Fishes it is not so for Birds haue onely holes whereby the sound entereth into their Brains because their skinne being harder they want matter whereof this Eare should be framed beside such eares as other creatures are furnished with would haue beene a hinderance vnto them in their flight as wee see a contrary winde blowing vpon a saile staieth the course of a Ship as for Fishes no man that I know hath yet found out the instruments of their Hearing Those holes which are placed before their eyes we doubt whither they serue for Hearing or for Smelling The outward Eares are placed in the same paralel or line with the eyes yet not so What creatures want outward eares much for the better reception of sounds which saith Cicero in his second booke De Natura Deorum of their owne nature do ascend vpward because they haue their consistence in the aire but rather from the commodity of those softe nerues within the scull which were to communicate the animall spirit dispersed through the substaunce of the Braine vnto the principal Organ of Hearing Otherwise if the eares had their scituation onely for the apprehension of sounds they might as well haue bene placed in any parte The reason of the situation of the Eares of the creature as where they are because the sounds are equally communicated to the whole aire that compasseth vs about But on the foreside they might not be placed because that roome was to be taken vp for the eies and the instruments of other senses For the Eies because we see by a right line but we may heare as wel on either side as directly forward as Aristotle saith in the tenth chapter of his second booke de Part. Animalium although I am not ignorant that Galen in the eight chapter of his tenth booke De Vsu partium is not altogether of Aristotles opinion Againe for the Mouth partly for the commoditie of receiuing meates and drinkes directly from the hand partly also because it was fit we should turne not our eies onely but our mouth also toward them with whom we discourse Thirdly for the Nose that the sauours of meates and drinks by which we iudge and discerne whither they be good or ill might more directly strike the sense of Smelling Moreouer the Eares were not placed in the backepatt of the head because there are no Nerues deriued thereunto not in the top of the head least the couering of the Heade should hinder the ingresse of the sound It remaineth therefore that it was most conuenient they should be placed in the sides of the head or the face iust against the region of the eies and also be in man immooueable In bruite beasts their scituation is somewhat otherwise to wit at the toppe of the Face because their heades hang alwayes downeward vnto the earth to seeke theyr Foode In Beastes also the eares are mooueable The Eares of Apes haue a middle position betwixt those of men and beastes because it is a creature of a middle figure betwixt the erected frame of a man the prone Apes Eares or bending posture of a beast And as their position so likewise is their motion not to bee immoouable as in Men nor so mooueable as in other beasts but betwixt both Table 4. Fig. 1. Sheweth the skin of the head together with the fat and the glandules vnder the eares and the muscles of the hinder part of the head and the eares Fig. 2. Sheweth the muscles of the eares of the eye-browes and a few of the iawes TABVLA IIII. FIG I. FIG II. The second Figure The truth hereof may be diuersly demonstrated first because all sounds are most exactly receiued in hollow and hard bodyes as bels and such like Againe those men whose eares are cut away do receiue sounds and articulated voices after an obtule dul or confused maner like the fall of water or chirping of a Grashopper in somuch that the other eare which is not vitiated is notwithstanding impaired vnlesse that which is wounded be quite stopt vppe Finally such as are halfe deafe that they may heare the better do set their hands to their eare with the palmes forward to gather in the sound as we reade that Adrian the Emperor Adrian the Emperour was wont to do Another vse of this refraction of the aire is least it should enter into the Eare too cold if it were not broken and beaten against the sides in the passage whereby it receiueth if not heate yet a mitigation of his coldnesse And finally if it were not for these breaches many violent sounds would suddenly rush into the eare to the great offence of the Hearing These Eares are not alwayes of one magnitude but in some greater in some lesse but most-what proportionable to the magnitude of the body and yet it hath beene obserued that where there is greater store of vitall heate there the eares are some-what the larger The magnitude of the Eares Howsoeuer they are small in man in respect of other creatures as well for ornament as because the head of a man saith Galen in the twelfth chapter of his eleauenth Booke De vsu partium
to the periostium Tab. 11. kk where it couereth the scaly bone and the neighbour parts as also that at the hole of hearing the periostium is dilated where there breaketh or riseth out of the stony bone a little oblique and round processe much like a quill when the first oblique incision is made in it toward the framing of a pen which processe was ordayned that this membrane might be connected with the stony bone This processe is called the ring or the bony circle Tab. 10. fig. 3. * Tab. 11. e. out of The bony ring whose circumference the hole of hearing beginneth This processe hath a double originall Tab. 11. n. the lower groweth out of the scaly bone and resembleth a knub or knot which bending a little obliquely inward is placed before the doore or entrance of the first cauity where on the inside it hath a round furrow or is lightly excauated in the middest round about the circumference with two bony brims or edges swelling out on either side in which furrow the membrane groweth very fast round about that it might bee secured frō the violent motions either of the external Ayre entring in or the internal ayre beating outward as it happeneth in oscitations or yawnings when wee hold our breath long or when we blow our Noses Wherefore it is most like that circle in a Drumme to which the Vellam is fastened Tab. 10. fig. 3. 4. q. Tab. 11. d. And this bony ring in infants is easily separated from the Temple bone but in growne bodyes it is so close ioyned on one side to the stony bone on the other side to the hole of hearing that a man would not thinke it had beene euer separated from them neither indeed can it bee separated in growne bodyes without breaking Yet the furrow remaineth still to be seene And thus the membrane of the Tympane seemeth to be separated in the circumference from the Pericranium But let vs heare what Galen can say of this membrane Galen inquiring into the substance of this membrane and instituting a comparison betwixt the couering or coate of the Opticke and the first nerue of hearing and afterward A passage out of Galen proouing that hee knew this membrane of the instrument of smelling sheweth That it was not fit these Nerues should be left naked because then they would haue bene exposed to all outward iuiuries Seeing then they needed a couering either it must be crasse and thight as that of the eye or rare porous or in a meane betwixt both It behooued not it should bee crasse and thight because such a couering would haue hindered the accesse of the Ayre when it was mooued especially if the motion were but easie as it is when we speake ordinarily one to another Neither ought it to haue beene rare and porous for then the Ayre would haue peirced through it and so the nerues should easily haue bene offended and the Braine it selfe refrigerated Tab. 10. sheweth the eares and the diuers internal parts thereof Figure 1. sheweth the whole externall eare with a part of the Temple bone Figure 2. sheweth the left bone of the Temple diuided in the middest by the instrument of hearing where about on either side there are certaine passages heere particularly described Fig. 3 4. Sheweth the three little Bones Fig. 5. sheweth a portion of the bone of the temples which is seene nere the hole of Hearing diuided through the middest whereby the Nerues Bones Membrans may appeare as Vesalius conceyueth of them Fig. 6. sheweth the Vessels Membranes Bones holes of the Organ of Hearing as Platerus hath described thē Fig. 7 and 8. sheweth the little bones of the hearing of a man and of a Calfe both ioyned and separated Fig. 9. sheweth the Muscle found out by Aquapendens TABVLA X. FIG I. III. II. V. VII VI. IX VIII β The auditory Nerue diuided into two partes where it passeth through the fourth hole γ the iugular vein with a part of a nerue passing through the first cauity ♌ where it passeth through his second hole neere to ♌ εε An artery entring that cauitie thorough the third hole and a nerue falling through the same hole H the same artery falling through the fift hole u the lower part of the 5. nerue reaching vnto the 2 3. cauity θθ A higher part of the 5. nerue broght through the scruing canale or pipe vnto θ where it falleth out x the Tympane or Drum shutting the first cauity λ the three little bones of hearing ioyned together μ the third cauity or the Trumpet of the organ of hearing V the second cauity or the mettall mine running out with three burroughs ξ π Th◠Canale or watercourse carrying a Nerue and an artery opening it selfe with two holes Figu 7 8 ◠The Hammer σ the Anuile τ The Stirrop Wherefore Nature framed a Muniment or defence to helpe the security of the Instrument of a moderate Consistence And thus hee concludeth Nature therefore foreseeing that if shee had made the construction of that Nerue with a strong Maniment it would indeede haue beene fitte to beare off offences but the Instrument of the Sense must of necessity haue beene Deafe Againe if the construction of the Nerue had had no defence it would haue beene very subiect to outward iniuries and therefore shee tooke a way betwixt them both and made for the construction of this Nerue a helpe neither too stiffe to hinder the Sense of Hearing nor too rare that the ayre should penetrate through it but of a moderate Consistence which might not onely secure the Instrument from violence but also receiue and returne the impressions of sounds Againe the same Galen writing of the couering of the Instrument of Smelling sayeth that it needed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a Defence more rare then that of the Instrument of Hearing which is fast and thight because the obiect of the Sense of Smelling is thicker then the obiect of the Sense of Hearing for the obiect of Smelling is a vaporous substance wherein the odour doeth exhale but the obiect of Hearing is ayre altered only by an impression of Sounds By this wee may see that Galen was not vtterly ignorant of this membrane and wee haue the rather inserted this passage out of him because many late Anatomistes haue auouched that Galen made no mention thereof at all but was vtterly ignorant of it VVe returne now vnto the membrane The substance therefore of this membrane is thinne fast dry translucide and of exquisite sence The substāce of the membrane so thinne and fine that Hipocrates compares it to a Spiders webbe the better to transmit an easie voice or soft sound for it was necessary vnto the act of Hearing or if you wil vnto the passion of Hearing that the sound should be communicated with the In bred Ayre although the substances of the outward and inward ayres are not mingled and yet so strong withall that it might be able to
bones wherein what satisfaction they haue giuen themselues I Anatomistes are here at a losse know not certainely to vs that reade their writings they giue but little Their conceites being meere speculations so intricate for the most part as if they did vnderstand what they would haue saide yet they haue not beene able to expresse themselues vnto others Coiter me thinks resolueth very well that their exact historieespecially for the vse is not so curiously to bee sought into because it is impossible that wee shoulde attaine further then a bare coniecture and beside something would be left by vs for admiration especially where our vncertaine guesses cannot bring vs any great profite sauing the satisfaction of an ouer curious conceite It remaineth that we speake of that flender and neruous Chord which is within the The Chord membrane It doeth not indeed compasse the membrane round about but running thorough the middest there of is fastned to that ioynte where the stirrop is articulated with one of the Legges of the Annuill This Chord if it be drawn out is thrice or foure times as long as it appeareth before it be drawne For the substance Eustachius taketh it to be Diuers appellations a branch of the fourth coniugation Fallopius ingenuously confesseth that hee knowes not what to cal it yet resolues to giue it the name of a Nerue and with him Cower consenteth Ingrassias calles it a thred or a chord Aquapendens a slender rope of the Nature of a Ligament or sayth he if it be not so nor any of the other aboue named then is it a body of his owne kinde Howsoeuer it be framed or of whatsoeuer the vse of it seemeth to be for pulsation for as in a Drumme the sound is made by the repercussion of the chord which is streatched ouer The vse of it the Vellam or the Skin so in the eare sayeth Coiter this chord receiuing an impression by a beating made vpon it from the three bones doth strike the inward ayre whereuppon Sensation is made CHAP. XIX Of the Muscles of the inward Eare THE Hammer beeing articulated to the Anuill with that kinde of articulation which we call Ginglymos it followeth that their motion must be very obscure now they are moued together with the membrane at which the Hammer hangeth vpward and downeward hauing one muscle appointed for this motion within the membrane another seated without it The internall muscle Table II. figu 2. 1 described first by Eustachius and scituated in the stony bone is exceeding small there being in the whole body none lesser and yet the The internall muscle frame thereof is so elegant as no muscle in the body may bee compared thereto It ariseth in the Basis of the wedge-bone in that place where there is a hole made with a root of the processe of the stony bone and an additament of the nowle-bone It taketh his originall from a substaunce much like a Ligament Afterward it becommeth fleshy and groweth a little broader euen to the verie middest Afterward it is againe His originall and progresse angustated or straightned and produceth Eustachius sayth but one Tendon Whome Coiter and Aquapendens do follow But Placentinus according to him Bauhine say they are two very small Table II. fig. 5. below i one of which is inserted into the vpper processe of the Hammer the other into the necke thereof But in Dogges a little before the insertion it hath a fleshy and round glandule a little depressed which is not fixed to the membrane lest if it were drawne by it selfe being very small it should be in danger of breaking This muscle when it worketh draweth the head of the Hammer obliquely forward and inward deduceth or inclineth it from the Anuill and bending the processe of the Hammer driueth the membrane outward That this is the vse of this muscle Arantius proueth by an experiment on this manner The vse of it according to Arantius If sayth he in a greene head that is well dissected till you come to this part you drawe this muscle with a sharpe hooke toward his originall you shall finde it hath a double vse one that the head of the Hammer will manifestly recede or depart from the Anuil and be lifted vp the other that the membrane will be driuen outward Now this motion which is made in the eares although it seeme to bee voluntary because it is accomplished by a muscle which is an instrument of voluntary motion yet it can hardly be perceiued by our selues yea wee heare whether wee will or no the reason is because the muscle is so very smal Neither doe we want examples of many muscles which we know assuredly doe worke as well while we sleepe as while we wake which yet wee cannot obserue in our selues but their motion seemes to be without our consent as we may instance in the muscles of Respiration of the eies of the eie-lids the bladder and the fundament Yet in some men this motion is more euident which also they can at their pleasure moue or containe The truth of this Aquapendens proueth on this manner The motion sayth he is Sensible and with a Aquapendens his demonstration of the motion of the muscle kinde of noyse as if a man should stretch three threds a little distant one from another and strike them with a Cittern quill as we do strike an instrument or as if a man should scratch ouerthwart the graine of a wansecoate or imagine it to bee like the noise that the Steele makes when you strike fire out of the Flint This motion is especially perceyued vvhen a man begins to yawne but in the beginning of it we heare a kinde of obscure or dull sound from the commotion of the aire much like the noise that a staffe makes when it is beaten against the aire But this motion or noise in the aire many men do not obserue neyther doth it seeme to me saith Placentinus to haue any vse or to conferre at all to the Sense of Hearing for if there be a noise in the aire and at the same time a man shall striue to stirre vp this motion he shall heare the outward noise more imperfectly And therefore this motion seemeth to happen either from the necessity of the matter the Muscles necessarily following the attrition of the Hammer against the Anuile or else it was ordained by nature for the auoyding of vapours For in Agues wherein many vapors do arise vnto the head this noise is frequently heard which wee conceiue to be when as the vapours which fill the cauity of the eares are by this motion dislodged and yet we may vnderstande that this motion is not altogether at our owne disposition In like manner saith Bauhine when the Eares are purged into the mouth by the passage Bauhines demonstration thereof out of the experiēce in himselfe that way opened I am woont to perceiue in my selfe a kind of tickling within my mouth
large cauity whence it was that Nature framed this stony bone long and round that so it might containe the more Furthermore this cauity is but single whence it comes to passe that though there be many noyses made together yet they are at the same time receiued Why this is single A witty conceit of Aquapendens For if this first cauity had bene distinguished into many dens neither would the sounds haue bene receiued at the same time nor after the same manner intertained and iudged of by the faculty for the diuersity of reception would also haue induced a diuersity of apprehension as Aquapendens very wittily hath obserued The interior superficies or inner surface of this cauity is vnequall being in some parts depressed and thrilled through in others knotty and swelling Immediatly behinde the The fashion of the cauity membrane it runneth vpward toward the forepart where also it becommeth narrower afterward it is dilated and tendeth backeward toward the top then as if it were another cauity it is produced or lengthened downeward which part saith Coiter in a man is like a bladder Tab. 11. fig 8. and 9. In a calfe like a waggeners budget in a kid and lambe like a market womans pouch It is also rough and spongy rough that it might receiue the sounds and not reflect returne or double them for if it had bene leuigated that is smooth and equall like the arch of a Church it would haue returned an Eccho Spongy also that if at Why porous or spongy any time the noyse should happen to bee so strong that it might offend the hearing the force thereof might be abated in those small holes Moreouer in that spongy porosity the Inbred Ayre is laboured and brought to perfection But when I say it is spongy I would not haue you conceiue that it is soft as a sponge but porous for otherwise it is exceeding hard and stony thereby yeelding and returning a quicker sound Againe some parts of this cauity are lined ouer with a membrane produced from the Pericranium for after the pericranium hath framed the membrane of the Tympane it is How lined duplicated and diuersly diuided so as some of it doth inuest certaine parts of this cauity But because this cauity was destined for the reception of the implanted or Inbred The necessity of the parts of this cauity Ayre which was to receiue the outward Ayre altered by the sound it was very necessary that it should receiue some kind of percussion but being by the membrane distinguished or diuided from the hole of hearing it could not receiue the alteration of the outward Ayre without some other helpe which helpe is pulsation and that pulsation is accomplished by the three bones the chord and the muscles Now that the internall Ayre being affected by the pulsation of the outward Ayre altered by the sound might carry this affection vnto the sense there was made certaine canales wherein the inward Ayre might be conuayed vnto the Auditory nerue to wit the two Windowes with a passage into the Labyrinth Furthermore it was also necessary that this implanted Ayre should be preserued pure as also bee cherished and sustayned by the Ayre which we draw in at our mouthes to which purpose Nature hath created a canale or passage out of this cauity into the pallate by which it is purged and receiueth new Ayre for his perpetuall nourishment Of the instruments seruing to pulsation we haue entreated at large in the seuenteenth eighteenth chapters of those seruing for expurgation very particularly in the nineteenth chapter and both we haue repeated in this It remaineth now that we prosecute those Organes which serue for Traiection or transmission of the affected Ayre vnto the auditory nerue and so to the first sensator CHAP. XXI Of the two windowes called Fenestellae and the watercourse in the first cauitie IN this cauity there are two holes very small which some men call Fenestra or Fenestellae the windowes These regard the orbe of the hole of hearing as from a higher place The first which is the foreward and the higher and looketh toward the face Tab. 8. fig. 4. and 5. F. Tab. 10. fig. 2. k. being as it were in the middest of the cauity is of an Ouall figure or like an Egge and The first therefore is it by some Anatomists called Fenestra oualis the ouall window It is somewhat long and flatted on the sides and in the backe side it openeth it selfe into the Colchea or the last cauity with a large mouth and becommeth so like the forepart Fenestra oualis of the Colchea that a man cannot tell whether that this Ouall window open into the Colchea or the Colchea into it This also ioyneth it selfe with the posterior hole and passing inward is dilated and maketh as it were a Market place or is like the cauitie of a mettall Mine for thus the Anatomists haue pleased to compare little things with great from which many streets wayes or burroughs do runne Vpon this lieth the basis of the stirrop and for the most part closeth it vp The other hole or window is the posterior and lower Tab. 8. fig. 3. 4. G. Tab. 10. fig. 2. l. It is rounde and lesse then the former and somewhat narrower in a man but in a Calfe and a Sheep sayth Placentinus it is somewhat larger and a little extuberating or bunching out alwaies open it is and declining toward the backeside of the cauity and yssueth together with the former through the bone making a double canale Betwixt these two windowes Table 10. figur 2. k and l aboue the lower hole is there a little knub or protuberation which together with the round hole and the strutting bunch placed vnder the vpper part may be compared to the little bosse saith Placentinus and before him Vesalius Coiter and Platerus wherewith they vse to adorne the cheeks of a horses bit In this knub lieth the chamber of the third cauity which is called Cochlea of which wee shall heare more in the next Chapter The vse of these windowes is by pulsation to receiue the sound communicated to the implanted Their vse ayre and to transmit the same to the other cauities that follow The lower hole is cleaued into a double pipe which lie one vppon another Table 10. figu 2. ii and are deuided onely by a thinne bony scale the one of them together with the Ouall window passeth to the Cochlea the other goeth into the Labyrinth or the second cauity of the stony bone The more forward of these admitteth a surcle of the Iugular veine and sendeth out a braunch of the first coniugation The posterior is compared to a Water-course The water-course Table 8. fig. 3. H Table 10. figu 2. g because it is like the pipes wherein water is conuayed imagine it to be in a Serpentine Still some call it the Saylie pipe The Auntients and Galen call it Caecum meatum the blinde
beginning to the end and this yssue is narrow and direct For if this cauity had beene blinde without an out-let the ayre being beaten could not haue attained to the nerue of Hearing This is farre lesse then the former two scituate in the forepart of the processe vnder the knub of the first cauity that it might meet with the Soūd which proceedeth from behinde Where situated forward and is distinguished from the canale which wee sayd was like a watercourse placed in the middest of the stony processe by a thinne bone like a bridge Table 10. fig. 2. betwixt n and f. It is long and crooked and hath three gyrations sometimes sometimes foure one of them receiuing another after the manner of the Coehlea or Snaile-shell by which it is intorted The figure some what inward and downeward But the broader scrue standing highest receiueth the nerue the narrower standing lowest determineth in the cauity of the bone and worketh it selfe also a passage Into this endeth the hole of the first cauity called Fenestella cualis which platerus calleth the lower hole and Placentinus the vpper Table 10. fig. 2. l I meane into the greater gyre of this bone This bone of the Cochlea or the Snaile shell consisteth of two kinds of circles whereof one is made of a bony substance very thin and dry which may easily be crumbled and on euery side like a Snake rowled vp into boughts The other was first propounded by Eustachius which is made of a soft mucous matter yet firme and hath I know not what kind of sandy matter mingled therewith It ariseth out of the middle space of the first conuolutions Eustachius as it were out of a large basis and being by degrees extenuated endeth in a sharpe point but it ascendeth not so high as that it toucheth the circumference of the bone wherinto the first gyrations doe determine This wonderfull prouidence of our Creator Empedocles as Galen witnesseth in his Empedocles booke de historia Philosophica did first intimate when hee saith that the sense of hearing is made by the impulsion of the ayre or of a spirit which striketh beateth the part like a Snailes shell suspended within the eare like a bell And with him agreeth Aristotle in the Aristetle eleuenth chapter of his first booke de historia Animalium where he saith that the inward eare which is like the contortions of a Snayles shell endeth in a bone which is like the outward eare This third cauity as also the second and the burroughs thereof are inuested with a The mēbrane inuesting this cauitie Vesalius soft and thin membrane after the same manner that the sockets of the teeth are Vesalius saith it is a part of the nerue of the fifth coniugation and that it doth inuest but some parts onely of the cauity not all throughout Into this cauity as well as into the former do run three or foure holes so small that a haire will scarse passe through them issuing out of that canale through which we sayd the auditory nerue doth passe through which holes certain nerues of the fist coniugation or at least their faculty is communicated to the forēsayde membrane So differeth Bauhine from Vesalius And although it is generally beleeued that the sense of hearing is especially made in Bauhine The vse of these cauities the first cauity yet it cannot be denyed but that it is also made in the others seeing into them as is sayd there are surcles of nerues deriued and in them also Animall spirits and Inbred ayre is contained Notwithstanding the two hindmost cauities were rather made to hinder an Eccho or reflexion of the sound to the first cauity And whereas these cauities haue holes of diuers magnitude length and figure it is reasonable to thinke that they Why perforations are of diuers kinds were so framed for the difference of sounds For a base sound and a great quantity of ayre iequire a large hole The length prohibiteth the Eccho and the reflection of the sound wherefore the greater sound required longer canales and the lesser shorter that the sound in them might as it were be appeased and an Eccho prohibited The varietie of the figure maketh much either for the naturall delation or transmition of the sound and the ayre which runneth for the most part through circled meanders or that the sound in them might rest now we may easily imagine that a sound will sooner ceasse or bee appeased when it runs through many turnings or gyrations then it would doe if it were conueyed by a streight line But the vse of this third cauitie Coiter elegantly sheweth and confirmeth by an instance in a circled instrument put case it bee a Sackebut For if a man lay his eares to the The vse of the 3. cauitie after Coiter holes of such an instrument hee shall here a wonderfull whistling and hissing noyse and murmure where if a man blow into it with his mouth it will sound like a Trumpet And thus much concerning the stony bone and the cauities thereof now we proceed CHAP. XXIII Of the Nerue which ariueth at the Eares AT length we are come to the Auditory Nerue which maketh that coniugation which is commonly called the fift Tab. 21. lib. 7. fig. 1. 2. a. Tab. 15. lib. 7 fig. 20. M. It issueth out of the tranuerse processe of the Cerebellum and is Where it ariseth a thicke and large nerue therefore neerest of all to the After-braine because it was to conuey a great quantity of Animall spirits It insinuateth it selfe into the first hole of the stony bone which a large perforation and made of purpose within the scull for the transmission of this nerue which it hideth all the way it runneth forward till in the middle almost of the stony processe it is diuided into two vnequall parts the one large ample the other small but harder harder I say then the other not through out the length of it but onely in that part which is longer then the former For that wee How many waies a nerue becomes hard and soft may say so much by the way the softnes or hardnes of a nerue dependeth vpon 3. things First vpon the originall so those nerues that arise out of the Braine it selfe are the softer those that arise out of the After-braine or out of the spinal marrow are the harder Secondly vpon their distance as they are farther from their originall or neerer vnto it So the Opticke nerues are the softest of the whole body because they are neerest to their originall the nerues of the hands and feete the hardest because they are farthest off Or thirdly it hangeth vpon their contaction for frō their contactions with hard bodies as bones gristles or with soft as fat and vessels they become harder and softer as Platentinus hath obserued but this by the way This slender production of the nerue through the vpper hole of the fore mentioned
passage entereth into that secret bony canale which we called the Watercourse and so creepeth toward the forepart of the head Afterward it is reflected and entereth into the first cauitie and falling downeward and backeward it issueth out of the bone at the roote of the lap of the eare and is subdiuided into three especiall branches The larger and vpper runnes out into the foreside and the backeside of the roote of the outward eare The lower deriued through the iaw is distributed into the 3 branches Masseter muscle and the first muscle that mooueth the cheeks The third which is the middlemost is very small and Capillary and is dissiminated into the glandulous and membranous parts about the roote of the eare There are also other threedy surcles which are Small threds of the auditory nerue spent into the muscles of the larynx or throtle and of the bone Hyois And this is the cause of the consent betweene the eares the tong and the larynx Hence also it is that when the auditory nerue is originally and in the first conformation obstructed those that are borne Why those that are born deafe are also dumbe deafe are also dumbe and thus much of the lesser part of the nerue The thicker part of the nerue which is soft and is properly the Nerue of hearing because it of it selfe is the cause of this sense is led through the hole of the foresayd passage and runneth out into the dens or caues of the stony processe yet the larger branches doe determine The very nerue of hearing in the first cauitie as being the largest and of most vse where they are dilated like a membrane and make the chiefe instrument of hearing Wherefore the receiued opinion is that in this cauity the sense of hearing is especially administred because into it the Animall spirit entreth through the nerue is there mixed with the Inbred ayre Out of this 1. cauity through small proforations of the foresaid cauitie run certaine small threds into the other two cauities which are communicated to the membrane wherewith they are compassed The vse of this nerue is according to Galen in the sixth chapter of his eight booke de vsu The vse of it partium Auerrhoes 2. Collect. to be the Organ of hearing and to receiue the sensible obiect that commeth from without and to leade the images of the sounds vnto the braine as vnto their competent Iudge and Censor saith Laurentius But from a branch of the fourth coniugation of the braine there departeth a very The Chord small surcle which with a winding passage entereth into the cauity of the Eare neere the bony canale which goeth to the palate then it cleaueth obliquely to the Tympane and after to the Hammer aboue the insertion of the muscle and proceeding on perforateth the stony bone in the backeside of the hole of the hearing then a little reflected it creepeth Eustachius downeward till it meete and ioyne it selfe with a smaller and harder branch of the fift coniugation This Eustachius calleth a Nerue others call it the chord or thred which say they runneth through the middest of the membrane of the Tympane but whence it ariseth and whither it would or whether it be a nerue or an artery they freely confesse that they are ignorant CHAP. XXIV Of the Implanted or Inbred Ayre GAlen in his seuenth booke de Placitis speaking of the instruments of the senses determineth that the instrument of sight is lucid or bright that of the hearing acreall that of the Smell vaporous that of the Tast moist and that of the Touch earthy Wherefore when wee say that the instrument of the hearing is ayry or like vnto ayre we vnderstand that it is a part of mans body taking the The obiects of all the senses Plato How this aire is generated word Part in a large signification which imitateth the nature and condition of the ayre This ayre of which Plato among the Phylosophers made first mention is seated in the eares from the first originall of our generation in the wombe of our mothers I meane as soone as there were emptie cauities hollowed in the bones all which are filled with this ayre And therefore the ancient Phylosophers and Physitians yea Aristotle himselfe in the eight chapter of his second booke de Anima and the 83 text called it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The namâ—s of it or Inbred Others call it Congenit implanted complanted and inaedificated It is made of the ayry part of the seede and that very pure to which the purest ayry part of the mothers blood applyeth it selfe as to a body most like vnto it selfe saith Archangelus This aire is conteined in the cauities of the ears which may be proued because all the dens Where conteined and cauities excepting the first in which are the small bones the Muscle the Chord are empty seeing therfore there is in Nature no vacuity it is necessary that these empty cauities must be full of aire This aire is thin pure without any sound at all immoouable plentifull separated The nature of this aire from the externall aire Thin pure that it might more readily and more perfectlie admit any externall sound for through a crasse and cloudy aire the sound is not so freelie caried but heard with more difficulty whence it is that a mans voice in winter is baser Pure Arist Problem then in Summer because as saith the Philosopher in the 17. Probleme of the 11. Section both the inward and the outward aire is thicker in winter then in summer now beeing thicker it is mooued more slowly This aire is without any sound and therefore in the night we may hear better because without sound Arist Problem there is no noise stirring as Aristotle teacheth in the 33. probleme of the 11. section Ad hereto that which he in the same place addeth that in the day time the aire is dense because it is filled with light and the beames of the Sunne but in the night more rare because the fire and the beames are departed thereout Wherefore the outward aire which is altred by sounds and like a waue of the Sea boundeth to the eares is not admitted into the inward eare neyther dooth it touch the implanted aire for if it had the sense of hearing would haue bene imperfect and the Instrument would soone haue bene vitiated which Aristotle proueth by an instaÌ„ce in those Aristotles instance that yawne in the 29 probleme of the 11. section and in his fift booke de generatione animalium and the second chapter For when we yawne we cannot heare so distinctlie because Why we cannot hear well when wee yawne much of the aire we breath forth getteth into the ears insomuch that we may sensibly perceyue the motion thereof for when the internall aire resisteth the occursation of the outward there ariseth a noyse in the eares which noise as also the circumaction or
that the Nature of Hearing was aiery Mundinus saith there is an audible spirit in the cauity of the Stony-bone which is the Mundinus instrument of Hearing Carpus thus The implanted aire receyueth the species or formes which are brought Carpus to the Sense of Hearing Varolius The included aiery spirit is the proper instrument of Hearing Varolius Coiter Archangelus Coiter This aire is the first and principall organ of Hearing yea a part of the Soule Archangelus It is the most principall instrument of Hearing which the Faculty vseth in the perception of sounds and voices and in iudging of them Aquapendens The office of this aire is to receiue outward and externall sounds so it is the principall author of Hearing Aquapendens Placentinus It is the matter which receyueth the sound the Medium where-through it is transported For after it hath receyued a sound it doth not conceyue it or iudge of Placentinus it as being a thing inanimated now no action of the soul can be performd by that which is not animated Laurentius This Aire is exceeding necessary to the Sense of Hearing without which I can Laurentius scarcely conceiue how we should heare at all but that it is the principal organ of Hearing I could neuer bee perswaded especially because it is not Animated but rather I beleeue it to be an internall Medium Finally our Authour Bauhine setteth downe the vse of it in these tearmes This Aire the faculty of Hearing vseth as an internal Mediū for the susception and transvection Bauhine or transportation of Soundes and Voyces to the Auditorie nerue by it to bee discerned like as in all the instruments of the other Senses there is required a double Medium the one outward the other inward Inward as in the Sight the watery humour in the Taste the spittle in the Smell the spongie bones in the Touch the skinne is the internall An inward an outward Medium Medium although I know Laurentius would haue it the Cuticle in which the formes or Ideas of things are separated from the things themselues and so naked are transported vnto the first Sensator In like manner the implanted ayre is gathered in the inward eare to receiue the abstracted formes of the Sounds and to transport them or conuey them vnto the Sense Againe as in all the instruments of the Sences the internall Medium is distinct and a That it is not the chiefe organ of hearing differing thing from the principall Organ to which the action particularly belongeth as in the Organ of Sight the waterie humor is thought to be the internall Medium but the chrystaline the principall part receiuing the representations but not iudging of them so in the Hearing the internall Medium is this implanted Aire but the principall part is the Auditorie nerue which yet doth not iudge of the Idea but conducteth it to the braine that is to the first Sensator CHAP. XXV Of the manner of Hearing and of the Nature of Soundes COnsidering that to intreate of the manner of Hearing belongeth rather to a Phylosopher then to Anatomists wee will be but briefe herein yet somthing we thinke good to say because the structure of the eare was for the most part vnknowne to the Ancients The Eare is the instrument of Hearing and the action of the Eare is the Three things required to Sensation Obiect Definition of a Sound Medium Sense of Hearing vnto this Sense there are three thinges required an Obiect a Medium and an Instrument The Obiect is that which is audible that is all Sounds A Sound is a quality yssuing out of the Aire Coiter addeth or the Water beaten by sudden and forcible collision or concurrence of hard and solid bodies and those smooth concauous and large This definition we will labot to explaine in this following discourse The Medium is eyther Externall or Internall The Externall Medium according to Aristotle is Ayre or Water but in water the Sound is but dull as a man may perceiue when his head is vnder water yet they say that Fishes can heare in the water very well as they can assure vs that vse in the night time to fish for Mullets And although the water going into the water doe make a Sound yet this Sound is made in the Aire and by the interposition therof though it be made by the water The Internall Medium is the implanted Ayre concluded within the dennes or cauities of the Eares The Instrument although we may say it is the whole inward eare furnished 3 3. Instrument with his cauities and other particles aboue expressed and although that generally the Philosophers and Physitians doe determine that the inbred Ayre is the especiall and proper Organ of Hearing because as in the Eie the Chrystaline receiueth the Obiect that is the Light so this in-bred ayre receiueth the Sound Yet we are of opinion that not this ayre but the auditorie nerue is the principall instrument For wee thinke with Galen that not onely the alteration or Reception which is made by the in-bred ayre is the Sense of Hearing but also the dignotion or iudgement of that alteration VVherefore Soundes and Voyces are transferred by this ayre to the Auditory nerue as vnto the substance that is apprehensiue and from thence to the common Sense where they are exquisitly iudged off For if they must bee knowne and perceiued then must they touch some substance indued with Sense because all action is by contaction Now the Sensatiue faculty is not transported out of the bodie and therefore it was necessary that the Sound should apply it selfe to the Eare. The Sound is generated of hard bodies mutually striking one another as of the Efficient cause for soft bodies doe easily yeeld not resisting the force that is offered vnto them How sound is made and is receiued in the ayre as in his matter this Aire accompanieth the Sound and carryeth it as it were on his wings for as the ayre is mooued so also is the Sound carried as wee may perceiue by a ring of Belles farre off from vs for when the winde bloweth towards vs we shall heare them very lowd again when the ayre is whiffed another way the sound also of the bels wil be taken from vs. So also when two hard bodyes are smitten the one against the other we see the purcussion before we heare the sound for we do not heare the sound before the ayre that was moued do bring the sound with it to our eares neither is that motion made in a moment but in time and is carryed swifter or slower as the percussion of of the resisting bodyes was more or lesse vehement and quicke for this the Phylosopher requireth in sounds and consequently the repercussion or repulse of the ayre So wee see in a Drumme if the skin or Vellam be moist and laxe either they will not sound at all or they make but a dull noyse The
yet maketh not the Membrane Messa saith that the sound is made by the motion of the small bones and thence we heare 9 9. Messa Volcherus Coiter The outwarde Aire affected with the quality of the sounde runneth 10 10. Coiter vpon the Membrane or Head of the Drumme which when it is beaten mooueth the small bones that are tyed to it The bones strike the Nerue that runnes ouerthwart the Membrane The same Nerue makes a repercussion vpon the Membrane whence it is that the ayre included receyueth the alteration and the sound The Sounds without any disturbance are carried through the contorted Meanders of the Eares to the Auditory Nerue which receyueth the Image of the noise and presenteth it to the principall Sensator Laurentius hath almost the very same in substance The outward aer sayth he being striken 11 11. Laurentius by hard and solid bodies and affected with the quality of the sound altreth the aire that is next vnto it till by a continuation it come to the eares where it first encountreth with the Membrane the Membrane being strucken mooueth the three little bones and transmitteth in a moment the liuely Charracter of the sound which Character is receyued by the implanted aire and through the windows it sendeth it through these crooked and winding Labyrinths into the Snaile shel from whence it arriueth at the auditory Nerue and from thence is conueyghed to the common Sense as vnto an equal iudge or Censor Archangelus hath it on this manner as neere as I can vnderstande him The thing that 11 11. Archangelus maketh the sound sealeth or stampeth in the ayre the species or forme of the sound and withall driueth it on vnto the Instrument of hearing which is also aiery that it might better receiue those species and must likewise be mooued wherefore the hole of the Eare standing alwayes open and in his inside supporting the stretched membrane of the Tympane behinde which the aiery instrument of Hearing is concluded or shut vp and to which the Anuile cleaueth when the outwarde aire attaineth to that membrane the Hammer beateth vppon the Anuile and so it commeth to passe necessarily that the Instrument of Hearing by which he vnderstandeth the implanted Ayre it mooued vvith the same motion that the outward Aire is moued whence it is that altogether the same species or similitude of sound mooueth the Faculty of hearing which is brought thither by the outward aire Nowe the Nerues of Hearing do determine into the same place where this aerie instrument of Hearing is concluded and a membrane made of the amplification of these Nerues encompasseth that aery bodie as the Opticke Nerues doe ariue at the Cristalline humour And as the Opticke Nerues do conuay vpon the wings as it were of the Animall spirit from the place of the Common sense the Visiue Facultie to the Cristalline humor so these Nerues from the same Common sense doe transport the Faculty of Hearing to the principal organ of Hearing that there might be a perception made of audible things And so the Hearing when it hath apprehended the sounde of an audible thing carrieth it to the Soule and then the Reason or the intellectuall or sensatiue Soule comprehendeth and taketh knowledge of that which maketh the sound to be a Bell or a Drum or any other thing Finally Bauhine my Authour I call him so often my authour to stoppe their mouths 13 13. Bauhine who would think that I should arragate too much to my selfe if I shoulde not acknowledge him from whom I haue taken most of this History expresseth it on this manner The outward Aire is an external Medium which being driuen and moued by the mutual percussion of two hard bodies and affected with the qualitie of the sound carryeth the sound which resulteth from that percussion vnto the Eare. The sound passeth through the hole of hearing which is alwayes open vnto the Membrane of the Tympane which it mooueth That Membrane being mooued the implanted or in-bred aire is also moued and receiueth the sound or at least his Caracter or impression and transporteth it out of the first cauity of the stony-bone thorough the hole of the Stirrop and the Ouall window to the other two cauities which we called the Labyrinth and the Snayle-shel From thence it is conueighed to the auditorie Nerue and to the originall thereof that is the Afterbrain and so to the common sense as vnto a Iudge that is able to determine of the differences of sounds And because the Auditory Nerues are ioyned in the Bridge of the After-brain from whence they proceed therefore all sounds are apprehended in one comprehension not in two though there be two eares that is two organes of Hearing But least the Membrane before mentioned should be driuen too much inward by the violence of the outward aire when it is violently beaten Nature prouided three small bones and Muscles as we haue shewed before to preuent that inconuenience The vse of the Sense of Hearing according to Aristotle in his Booke De sensu sensili is to acquire or get knowledge and wisedome For speech being an audible thing is the verie Cause of Learning Againe by the Hearing things are signifyed to our selues as by The vseof the Hearing Aristotle our voice and tongues we are able to signify any thing to another as Aristotle hath well obserued in the end of his third booke De Anima And so much shall haue beene sufficient to haue spoken concerning the Sense of Hearing wherein I finde that I haue great cause to entreate my Reader fauourablie to A deprecatiō reade ouer this Discourse and to pardon me if in some things I haue not so fully satisfied him for there are some passages in my Author wherein I haue bene intangled partly by the difficultie of the matter partly by the fault of the Printer for in such a case as this the least error may prooue a sufficient remora or obstacle to interrupt the course of a Discourse but as neere as I could I haue followed their words at least their meaning if they vnderstood themselues as of some of them I make much doubt CHAP. XXVI Of the Nose which is the instrmment of Smelling HAuing absolued the Historie of those many particles which belong vnto the sense of hearing we will now come to the third outward sense which is the Smelling As therefore wee sayd in the Eare that there was an outward Eare and an inward Eare so must we also diuide the Nose into an outward and inward The outward Nose carryeth with it sayth Laurentius a kind of beauty yea of maiestie and the Egyptians in their Hyeroglyphicks signified a wise and The outward vse prudent man by a nose and Festus calleth such wise men Nasutos as if they were able to sent or smell the politicke stratagems of other men Besides man onely those creatures Nasuti haue this outward Nose that haue foure feete and bring
onely and they are sixe two on either side belonging to the vpper Lip and one on either side belonging to the nether The Iawes are two The vpper which in men is immouable and the lower which is moued The Iawes voluntarily with a double kinde of motion one simple another compound the simple motions are sixe vpward downward to the right hand and to the left forward and backeward The compound motion is made of that which is to the right hand and to the left and that which is forward and backward and by this motion the Iaw is circumduced or led about It is mooued vpward by the muscle called Temporalis downward by Digastricus to the right hand and the left by Mansorius primus backeward by Mansorius alter forward by the fift paire of all which as also of the common Muscles we shal intreate in the book of Muscles and of the Bones in the booke of Bones The parts contained in the mouth are diuers besides the teeth and the bone Hyois of which we shall intreate among the bones These are the Gums the Palat the Vuula the Almonds the Tongue the Larynx or throtle the Muscles of these parts and the beginning of the Gullet The Gummes are made of flesh which Auerrhoes saith is glandulous the Graecians call it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which signifieth to inuolue it is hard saith Bauhine and immoueable that so the teeth might be better fastened in their sockets so hard the gums are that such as haue lost their teeth are able to breake their meate sometimes with them The Palate is the vpper part of the mouth wherefore the antients as Hippocrates The palate and Galen from him call it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Aristotle 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as it were Caelum oris The Latines call it Ialatum because it is fenced in with teeth as it were with Pales as if one should say Paled in Tab. 13. fig. 4. * The extension of the Palate is from the backepart of the mouth to the teeth and is hollow like an Arch but the roofe is not too high hence we call it commonly the roofe of the mouth but those whose heads are acuminated or like a Sugar loase haue high roofes or palates as Hyppocrates obserued in the first section of the sixth booke Epidemion This is the soale or basis of the Braine established by the wedge bone which therefore Galen calleth the bone of the palate though saith he in his nineteenth chapter of his eleuenth booke de vsu partium it scarce touch the palate It is made partly of bony substance and partly of fleshy the bone is hard and fast lest Whereof framed it shold rot by the confluence of excrement vnto it as we see it doth in the French disease This bone is double on both sides for it is compounded of the fourth bone of the vpper iaw into which the teeth are fastened and the sixth bone which maketh the backeward The bones of it amplitude thereof It is also diuided in the middest by a Suture in the end whereof are two holes through which the braine is purged into the mouth and so there becomes a great society betweene the nosthrils and the palate Through thâ—se holes when wee hold our mouths close we may exspire and inspire breath in and out and when the wayes of the The holes of it nostrils are obstructed the excrements gathered together in the ventricles of the Braine are this way deriued into the mouth But the backeward halfe of the palate whiâ— endeth into the Fauces or chops is stretched out from one side to another consisteth of a thick and glandulous flesh It is inuested with a thicke coate arising out of the dura mater which hauing gotten The coate of the Palate out of the skull is enlarged becommeth thicker and compasseth the whole mouth and palate or the inside yea it is common also with the gullet and the stomach Hence cometh the great consent betweene the Palate and stomach for it was fit that the coate of the palate should haue the seÌ„se of Tasting that it might take the assay vnto the stomach Wherefore the sense of it is more exquisite as receiuing it into his back part certaine small nerues of the fourth coniugation which coniugation is also distributed vnto the palate This is also the cause why wee cannot euacuate the head with Masticatorie Medidicines but the stomach also will bee euacuated by the palate now the head is euacuated by the palate because from the head certaine hairy threds of veynes doe descend vnto the palate This coate of the palate in some places is rugous and rugged which Plinie calleth Crenas that the meate might be better mittigated It is also hollow or concauous that Plinie Why it is hollow the voyce might be better formed when the ayre is reuerberated in this concauity also as in a bosome the ayre we draw in is warmed that it should not descend cold vnto the vitall parts to offend them The Vuula hath many names It is cald Gargareon or Gargulio by Hippoc. by Aristotle 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The names of the Vuula but the proper name is Gargareon 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is vuula are the names of it when it is ill affected The name Gargareon is a made word of the sound we make when we gargle or else from Gargles which we vse in the diseases of this part It is called also Columella plectrum It is a particle of the mouth or a certaine pocesse saith Ruffus hanging directly downeward from the inward part of the palate Tab. 13. fig. 4. E. neare the holes of the nosthrils which looke into the backepart of the mouth into the capacity of the mouth betweene the Almonds F F aboue the slit of the larynx or throtle E as will easily appeare if a man open his mouth wide and presse his tongue downeward The substance of it is glandulous red and fungous hanging downe from the middest The substaÌ„ce of the glandulous part of the palate Some thinke it is made of the coate of the palate reduplicated at the end of the mouth and a little elongated this was Columbus his conceyt If it be diseased by a fall of humours it is no more called Gargereon but 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The names as they are properly giuen For if it grow equally thicke from the Basis to the ende and fall lowe become redde then it is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is a Piller but if the vpper part be slender the lower part grow round and liuid or blackish then is it called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or the Vuula because it is like a Grape both in colour and in magnitude the stalke being the vpper part It is called also 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉
because of the softnesse and loosenes of their Tongues and the muscles thereof till when their heate by their age encreasing the ouer aboundant moysture be consumed The Tongue also sometimes is too short when the Bridle thereof is not enough cut so then it is hindered that it cannot apply it selfe on euery side to the Mouth or because the muscles being little it is mooued too swiftly and so implicateth or doubleth the speach and maketh the words come hudling together It is tyed to the Larynx to the bone Hyois vpon which the rootes thereof resteth as vppon The connexions of the tongue a Basis and by which it is supported to the Choppes also and on both sides to the Almonds below it is fastned with a ligament The Tongue is compounded of a proper flesh a coate nerues veines arteries muscles Whereof cōpounded The ligament and a ligament The ligament is Table 14. fig. 3. II very strong membranous and broade and is vnder the middest of the body thereof Table 14. Figure 1. and 2. sheweth the tongue cut from the bodie and the Muscles thereof In the first the right side of it in the second his Muscles somewhat vncouered Figure 3. steweth the bodie of the Tongue diuided according to the length of it and his Ligament TABVLA XIIII FIG I. FIG II. FIG III. Tab. 14. figure 1. sheweth the Larynx hauing the Shielde Gristle cut into two parts but one part of it together with the Epiglottis is inuerted as by the Letters may be perceiued Figure 2. exhibiteth the Larynx shewing the Glottis FIG I. FIG II. The Second Figure It is inuested with a coate common to it with the Mouth the Pallate the Gullet and The coate of the Tongue the Larynx Tab. 14. fig. 1. AA BB. C least the laxe and rare substance thereof shoulde part asunder This Coate is all verie fine and thin that the sapors might more easily pierce through it into the pulpe and substance of the tongue into which coate as also into the flesh certaine Nerues of exquisite sense are disseminated The substance of it is soft loose rare and like a Sponge that it might bee the sooner moistened with the humour which carrieth the Sapor in it and so fitter to discerne of the diuersity of Tastes for of them it is the competent iudge Hence it is that in diseases The substāce of the tongue it is diuersly affected for as the humour is that it imbibeth so is the sense of Tasting depraued as we may see in those that are sick of the yellow Iaundise or of Agues The flesh therefore of the Tongue is proper and peculiar to the Tongue there being none such in the whole bodie toward the Basis it commeth neerer to a Glandulous substance then to a Musculous because it is much softer and looser yet hath it all manner of fibres but those so intertexed and wouen together that they cannot be separated one from another which may be done in Muscles Againe the Fibres runne through the length of the Muscles which is not so in the That it is not Musculous Tongue for it hath no Ligamentall Fibres to strengthen it as Muscles haue vnlesse it be a middle one which runneth vnder the tongue Finally no Nerues from the Braine that should giue it the power of motion do runne through the substance thereof wherefore it cannot be called Musculous although I know some men are of opinion that it is made of two Muscles arising out of the bone Hyois and determining in the tip of the Tongue seuered by a white line some say also there are two other Muscles of which the pulp of the Tongue is compounded but if it were made of Muscles it should onely mooue not taste for what Muscle doth taste Wee resolue therefore that the flesh of it is not Musculous At the rootes of the Tongue besides the Muscles inserted thereinto there adhereth a The Fatte at the rootes great quantity of hard fat The tongue receiueth two kinds of Nerues one soft which carieth sense vnto it from the third and fourth coniugations yet so that one branch is disseminated into the coate that inuesteth the tongue to be an instrument of Touching for the Tongue is apprehensiue The Nerues of two kinds of all the Tactile qualities as cold heate and such like The other Nerue is sprinckled into the flesh of the Tongue which is the instrument or organe of Taste and by that meanes the Tongue is made apprehensiue of Sapors The other kinde of Nerues is hard that is Nerues of motion to witte the seauenth coniugation which with many surcles is disseminated into his muscles that the tongue A Caution might be mooued with voluntary motion and because this Nerue is placed in the lower part of the Tongue the Chyrurgion or Midwife must be verie carefull lest when they cut the Ligament they do not also cut the Nerue It hath also two notable Veynes called Raninae not because they are like Frogges but because they are of the colour of a Frogge They issue out of the inward braunch of the externall Iugular Veynes and runne vnder the Tongue as it will appeare vnto anie The Veines man that lifteth it vp These Veynes in the diseases of the mouth the heate of the 〈◊〉 the Squinsie and such like are opened for deriuation after the blood is euacuated and reuelled by the opening of the Humerarie Veine of the Arme. It hath also two large Arteries on either side one from the sleepie Arteries which accompany the Veynes These are allowed to the tongue to maintaine the life of it as the The Arteries Veines were to supply it with nourishment The body of the Tongue although it bee continuall not diuided by any partition whereby it becommeth fitter to Taste with to breake the meate and to articulate the voyce yet it is diuided or rather scored thorough the middest with a white line which The bodie of it Hippocrates in Coacis first called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is the Median which Line runneth thorough the verie middest of the surface of the tongue diuiding it into a right side and a left yet not as it is in Lizardes whose Tongues are forked so that the Tongue as all other the Instruments of the Senses is double and therefore Galen calleth it a Double Member The Vses of the Tongue although it be but a little Member yet it is of great vse because it expresseth all the conceites of the minde wherefore our wise Creator hath defended The vses of the tongue it with many Teeth with Lippes and restrained it with a Bridle that beeing so carefully attended it might not runne before the minde which first ought to consulte and deliberate before the Tongue pronounce any thing The vse therefore of the Tongue is either primary or secondary The primarie vse is that it might be a conuenient and fit organ or instrument both of the Sense of Tasting
be moued for if it be dryed it wil not mooue so readily as wee may see in those that are very drie in hot burning Agues when the humour or moysture of the Tongue is exhausted Beside the Glandules the Almonds also of the throat as we remembred before do continually moysten the Tongue and help his motion And thus much of the Tongue CHAP. XXXIII Of the Sense of Tasting WEE sayd before that there were three things required in euery Sense the Instrument the Medium and the Obiect Which three wee will shew in this fourth Sense of Tasting as far as we can gather out of Anatomy The Physitians following Galen in his book de instrumento odoratus and in The instrument of tasting the fift chapter of his 7. booke de Placitis doe determine that the instrument of the Taste is the Tongue and that it is affected to Sapors as the Eie is to colours But as in the Eie there is one particle which is said to be the most principal instrument of Seeing the other but assistant so in the Tongue there is one similar part which is the most principall instrument of Tasting and that is the rare and laxe substance thereof which is therefore rare spongy that it might be better steeped with the moysture wherein the Sapors are conuayed The other parts of the Tongue are but helpers and handmaids all contributing vnto the principall part This substance call it flesh or pulpe or what you will The principal particle because it was made to receiue all Sapors was to be deuoyde of all Sapor that is insiped or hauing no Taste at all as we vsually speake and that it is so any man may perceiue if hee eat of the Tongue of any beast boyled fresh and without any sauce The matter wherein the formes of Sapors do consist which wee call Natura subiecta The matter in which tasts doe consist is moyst for without moysture sayth the Philosopher in the 10. chapter of his 2. booke de Anima nothing can make an impression of a Sapot and euery thing that maketh this kind of Sensation or moueth this Sense hath humidity in it either Actu or potentia that is eyther Actually and Really or in Possibilitie and by how much a thing is the moyster by so much is it the more sauoury because all things when they are moyst doe make a better impression of their Sauour then when they are hard Hence it is that those things that are hard as Pepper and such like do not make shew of the gustile qualities vnlesse their vpper superficial parts do giue or melt or be moistned The sweetnesse of Sugar we Taste better when it is melted and a corne of Salt will strike the Sense much more after it is dissolued then before An infusion of Rheubarbe is much bitterer then a peece Rheubarbe held in a mans mouth Seeing then that Sapors are not perceiued but as they communicate their qualities to moyste substances it followeth that the instrument of this Sense must neither be actually moyst neither yet of such a substance as cannot be moystned but it must be Potentially Moyste and Actually moystned yet so that when it is moystned the Nature of it must be preserued Hence it is that when the Tongue is either too dry or too moyst it doth not Taste well For example if a man Taste of any sharpe or vehement thing as Pepper and then presently Why sick foll◠thinke al things bitter Tast of an other thing he is not able to iudge well of the latter the reason is because the Tongue is already possessed and forestaled or taken vp with the former sharpe humour So likewise we see that those that are sicke think all things bitter the reason is because their Tongues are moystned with a bitter iuice The Tongue therefore was made of an earthy and dry substance for albeit because of the softnesse it may seeme to bee moyste yet this moysture is not Innate but an acquired moysture distilling perpetually out of the braine which insinuateth it selfe into the Toung as water doeth into a sponge That this is so it is euident for if the distilation out of the head be stayed the Tongue is presently exiccated yea so parched by hot vapours eleuated from the Liuer the Stomacke and the Lungs that it becommeth rough yea in Agues it cleaueth or choppeth and the marks or scarres of those fissures remaine many yeares to be seene which thing sayeth Bauhine I haue experience of in my selfe for 17. yeares since I had an Ague and my Tongue claue or chopped in the middest and yet the marke of it is Bauhine of himselfe Galen manifestly to be seene Galen therefore in his Booke de Odoratus Organo and in the sixt chapter of his seuenth Booke de Placitis hath truely taught vs that the instrument of Tasting was made of a moyst substance where hee intendeth to diliuer the qualities of the instruments which are most appropriate to the perticular Senses For if the Tongue be too much exiccated the Perceiuance or knowledge of Sapours must needes perish and therefore Nature set the Almonds neare the Tongue least the ayre that is continually drawne and let out by Inspiration and Expiration should drie it too much And so much of the Instrument The Medium of the taste The Medium of this Sense wee take to bee the coate of the Tongue as the Cuticle or Scarfe-skinne is the medium of the Touch. For sayth the Philosopher in the 114. Text of the second Booke de Anima all things that apprehend by any Sensation we apprehend by a Medium there being no Sensation made by the immediat contaction of the Instrument and the Obiect although afterward in the 10. chapter of the same booke not so well aduised he denyeth that either the Taste or the Touch haue any Medium to which place we refer him that is desirous to know his reasons The Obiect of the Taste are all thinges that haue any Sapour or Gustable qualities in The obiect them But the qualities of Gustable things are of two sortes some properly belonging to the Sense of Tasting as Sapours For as the obiect of the Sight is Colour so the obiect of the Tast is Sapor yet nothing that is without moysture exhibiteth any Sapor to the Sense others are Common to all the Senses as the Magnitude of that which is Gustable the Nūber the Situation c. VVherefore we say that the Tong doth Taste the Sapor of wine not the wine yet from this Sapour the Soule gathereth that it is wine which wee Taste For wine as it is wine and sugar as it is sugar are not the Obiects of the Faculty of Gustation but as they are indowed with Sapors or Gustable qualities The Soule indeed by discourse of Reason distinguisheth betweene a sharp Taste and a bitter but it is by the mediation of the Sense of Tasting when the Sensible qualities of
themselues yet their Organ is obscure and hidden others be cleare and manifest both of themselues and in respect of their Organ others be obscure both in themselues and in their Organ I call that action manifest of it selfe What action is manifest of it selfe and obscure of it selfe which is sensible and may be iudged of by the Sense and that obscure of it self which doth not appeare but from those workes which proceed from it I call also that manifest by the means of his Orgā whose organ doth presently appeare in this without all doubt do al consent but I account that obscure in regard of his organ when the action doth appeare yet the Organ doth not presently be wray it self without much study discorse of the mind which is held of some only for probable where about many do dissent Those which be manifest both in thēselues by their Organs be these vociferation pulsation respiration the locall motion of the parts expulsion of excrements the expulsion of vrine the emission of the seed c. In respect of both with Galen in the 8. 16. chap. of his 1. book de vsu partiū are the apprehension of the hand the walking of thee feete chewing vision hearing c. Finally these are esteemed obscure in respect of both the transmission of the blood the carrying and recarryinge of the spirits the generations of animall spirits he preduction of vitall the sucking of vrine out of blood chylification sanguification and the generation of seede QVEST. V. That Sense is not apure passion Eeing therefore that vnto an action there doe necessarily concurre an agent and a patient the agent for to worke and the patient to be a fit subiect for the agent and to receiue the action it may now be demanded whether the action proceede from the Organ vnto the sensible obiect or from the Whether the obiect or the organ doe worke in the sense obiect vnto the Organ and whether this be to bee accounted an agent the other a patient or on the contrary Concerning this poynt there bee diuers opinions of Authours for some maintaine Sense to bepassiue others actiue others both actiue passiue Aristotle doth contend for those which would haue Sense to bee passiue especially in the 118. text of his 2. book de Anima wherein expresse termes he affirmeth that to perceiue is a kind of suffering also calleth the obiect an agent again in the 51. text of the same booke he saith that Sensation hapneth in that which is moued and suffereth And he seemes most Their reason which say sense doth suffer exactly to demonstrate it in the 12. text of his 7. booke of Physicks saying That the senses are altered for they suffer and their action is a motion througha body which suffers in the Sensation So that it may be gathered out of these places of Aristotle that Sense is made passiuely that is that the act of Sensation is not made by the Sense but by the sensible obiect and that the sense doth nothing else but receiue the species from the thing obiected and suffer from it but this opinion though it be approued of many and be held for Aristotles yet it is neither agreeable to Aristotle nor to the truth That the places cited out of Aristotle doe not confirme this we will proue by and by when as by many reasons we shall haue demonstrated how farre distant it is from the truth For first if the Sense should onely concurre passiuely vnto sensation that is if sensation were onely a reception of the sensible species then we must needes euen when we are asleepe heare smell see seeing therfore that although That opinion disproued 1. Reason when we are a sleepe some certaine noyses or sounds be carryed to our eares and some odors do strike the nosthrils and colours if so be we sleep with our eyes open as some doe bee presented to our eyes yet we doe not heare or smell or see it will follow necessarily that something else must concurre vnto sensation beside a simple reception of the sensible species Add further that though wee receiue a visible thing into our Eyes 2. Reason and a sound into our Eares yet we neither see nor heare when wee are intent another way or haue our vnderstanding exercised in greater matters Wherefore there must be some part of the mind present in sensation and hence it is that wee sometimes seeke a very small thing and yet see it not though we be very neare it and though it be already receiued into the eye Surely this is an argument most euident that the mind must be applied to that thing which we would see and that something more is required to Sense then the bare reception of the species for else a glasse might also perceiue in as much as it doth receiue the images Moreouer if onely the reception of species were a sensation all action should proceede from the sensible species that species should be so prompt vnto action that it would worke euery where and vpon euery subiect and so would make sense euen as heate doth make hot euery where and euery thing but this is impossible for who euer affirmed that sense was made out of his proper Organ Sensation is not therefore an action onely of the sensible species neither was it Aristotles opinion for in the 37. text of his second booke de Anima hee teacheth the plaine Arist thought the contrary contrary and affirmeth manifestly that the soule is the efficient cause of sensation and therefore not the sensible thing and in the ninth chapter of the ninthbooke of his Metaph. he prooues that vision is an action of the sight And what can be more manifest then that which he expresseth in the second chapter of his book de sensu sensili where he reprooueth Democritus for saying that vision was an operation of the obiect and propounding the conformity of the similitude which the sensible thing hath with the Organ hee saith the sensible thing causeth the sense to worke as if he should say the obiect doth excite and prouoke the sense vnto action The poynt is as cleare as the light but yet what shall wee answer to those contrary places quoted euen now out of Aristotle for it seemeth by them to bee plainly affirmed that sense is passiue But I deferre the reconciliation of this contradiction till the seuenth Question where you shall haue also Placentinus his resolution QVEST. VI. That Sense is not a simple action THat Sensation is not a meere passion is plaine from that which hath beene said Now it is to bee considered whether it ought to bee called an Action Passion is necessary to Sense that is whether Sense doe perceiue onely by doing or acting And that setting aside all digressions I may come to the matter I say Seeing euery Agent in doing and acting doth also suffer againe it followes necessarily that the
Sense doth continualle suffer something from the sensible Obiect for there is no man ignorant that to the effecting of Sensation it is necessary that the The sense the obiect be vnlike Sense be conuerted into the nature of the sensible thing but it cannot be conuerted but by alteration because things of an vnlike nature cannot be made of one nature except the one of them be changed but the Sense and Obiect be of an vnlike condition And this is it where-vpon Aristotle so oft beateth that the Sense is potentially that which the sensible thing is actually and really and except the Sense doe passe into the nature of the organ Sensation cannot be performed Whence it followeth that the The obiect must alter the sense sensible thing doth alter the Sense and turnes it into it owne nature and therefore Aristotle often times calls Sense an alteration for so Sense is made Now if the Sense be altered and changed by the Obiect it is necessary that it must suffer because the sensible thing when it altereth the Sense worketh vpon it Hence it is more then manifest that Sense is not perfected by a simple Action QVEST. VII Placentinus his opinion IF therefore Sense be perfected neither by action nor passion how shall wee Sense is absolued by action and passion together say that it is performed I answere that it is absolued and perfected neither by action onely nor by passion onely but by both together that is both by action and passion That action is requisite vnto Sense is prooued by the Negatiue part before refuted We will adde some arguments wherewith we are purposed That action is requisite Reason for the present to confirme the affirmatiue And first if Sense should be made without acting it would follow that the vegetatiue faculty should be more noble then the sensatiue because that to doe is more noble then to suffer but no mā doubts that the faculties of the vegetatiue soule are Actiue wherefore least we should fall into an absurdity vnheard of and monstrous wee must graunt that the faculties of the sensatiue soule are also Actiue Furthermore if the Senses should not worke they were in vaine giuen vs by nature because the organ onely would haue sufficed vs for passion Againe if the Sense were onely passiue neither could the sight see nor the hearing heare nor the smell performe his owne function neither were any such like predications true of the other Senses because these predications doe intimate that the Sense doth produce out of it selfe an act of Sensation Fourthly Sensation is an operation of life and therefore proceedeth from an internall and actiue originall of motion for life is an internall motion What life is performed by that which liueth Vnlesse therefore you graunt that Sensation is an Action Sense is an operation of the sensatiue Soule it cannot be an operation of life Lastly Sensation is a second act and the sensatiue soule is a first act for to perceiue is an operation of the sensatiue soule and therefore Aristotle beside many other places affirmeth in the 7. Chapter and the 127. Text of the 2. booke de anima that to perceiue is something more then the suffering of the Sense whereby it is manifest that Sense is an Action How it is a Passion hath beene before declared But it may here be doubted by what Question meanes two Agents can concur vnto one Act of Sensation and this doubt is worthy the noting for if the sensible Species doe make Sensation and the sensatiue faculty doe together there-with perfect the same Action there must needes bee two immediate effectiue or operatiue Principles of one and the same Action which is impossible because that Sense witnesse Aristotle in the 9. Chap. of the 9. booke of his Metaph is an issuing Action now an issuing simple Action cannot proceede from two immediate Agents really distinct Againe it is impossible that an issuing Action should proceede from Sense is an immanent Action Solution an outward originall but from that where-out it ought to arise and to bee perfected For the enodation and resolution of these difficulties and the explication of a double truth we must know that Sense is many wayes to be vnderstood First as it is a reception of the Species and so it is a Passion for in that respect it suffers of the Obiect And of this did Aristotle vnderstand that where he saith that to perceiue is a kinde of passion or suffering Secondly as it is a discerning and knowing of the Obiect by the Species receiued into the Sense and so it is an Action for so the faculty doth worke vpon the Species and so the sight doth see and the hearing heare and so of the rest and so is Aristotle to be vnderstood when he saith that the Senses be Actiue Thirdly and lastly Sense is taken for both together to wit for an Action and Passion when as the whole Sensation that is the perfect act of Sense is vnderstoode for first vnto the perfection of Sensation there is neede of Passion or an alteration of the Organ from whence afterward followes the Action of the faculty which Aristotle did excellently note where he saith that Sensation begins at the Instrument and body and is determined in the Soule as if he should say the alteration of the Organ and the discerning of the sensatiue Sense begins in the Body and ends in the Soule faculty doe accomplish a perfect Sensation The same also must wee vnderstand when he saith that to perceiue is a second Act the sensitiue Soule a first Act because to perceiue is the operation of the sensatiue Soule Thus therefore may the difficulties propounded be easily resolued and so Aristotle redeemed from contradiction QVEST. VIII How the faculty is wrought in the Sense SEeing that as Galen in the 6. Chapter of his second booke de Placitis witnesseth Question Sense is no alteration but a knowledge of the alteration Sense is not an alteration but a discerning or knowing of the alteration because the sensatiue faculty is not affected with the Obiect but onely the Organ it may therefore heere worthily be doubted how the faculty can attayne to the knowledge of the Obiect seeing it suffereth nothing from it neither doth the Obiect Act before the faculty perceiue For the Action of the sensatiue faculty is a knowing and diiudication of the sensible thing but it seemeth not to be possible that the sensatiue faculty can come to the knowledge of the Obiect except that either the faculty be some way affected by the Obiect or the Obiect by the faculty but neither of these can be For first the Obiect cannot work vpon the faculty because an incorporeall thing is not affected The Obiect cannot worke vpon the faculty by that which is corporeall But the faculty is incorporeall and the Obiect corporeall Beside the Soule is not capable of Passion and therefore neither are
them and lastly least wee should too often fall into Tautalogies or vaine repetitions And Aristotle himselfe giues an excellent reason of this his owne Position to wit because without the knowledge of those things which be more common the lesse common cannot be knowne Now who will denie that the Sense of Touching is more common then the rest of the Touch is the common sense Senses vvho knowes not that this Sense is common to all liuing creatures yea it is so common in all that without it no Sense can bee performed in so much that the same Aristotle confesseth that euery Sense is a kinde of Touching Beside Art being the Ape or imitatour of Nature we therefore in the tradition of our Arts should follow the order of Nature in which order we must begin with those which are first not in intention Touch according to the order of nature is the first as the former Sect affirmeth but in originall and generation wherefore according to the order of Nature Touch seemeth to be put in the first place To these wee may adde that this Sense is more knowne then the rest for a man hath this sense more exquisite then any of the rest and it doth of necessity follow that that Sense which we enioy most exquisitely thereof we should also haue most certaine knowledge QVEST. XVII The Authors owne opinion THough both these Sects haue some shew of difference yet in my opinion they may be reconciled so that neither of both may seeme any whit blame worthy in regard that they contend about a matter which is of no great moment their strife being not about demonstratiue grounds But because the Schoole of Physitians hath alleadged the more waighty arguments I will more willingly cast in my lot with them Yet may any man draw a reconciliation betweene them from the diuers consideration of the order Some follow the order of A diuers consideration of order Nature in their writings which order may be vnderstoode to be double to wit either the order of originall or of intention that is either by what order Nature doth worke or what end she presenteth to her selfe in her worke According to the former consideration the end is the last but according to the latter it is the first Againe some in their deliuerie of Arts follow that order whereby the Art is more easily taught as for example some things that come behinde cannot be vnderstoode vnlesse some other things bee praemised before Others obserue the order of dignity so that by this diuersity of order being conferred with that which we haue said before it may easily be gathered what we ought to conclude of either sect QVEST. XVIII Whether the Senses doe neede a Medium or Meane IT seemeth to be no hard question to determine whether the Senses need a Medium or Meane because out of Aristotles Philosophy wee haue as it vere an Oracle 1000. times repeated that The Obiect placed vpon the Sense An axiome questioned doeth make no Sensation especially seeing hitherto it is receiued for such an vniuersall principle and ground that hee which denyes it deserues not to bee confuted But weighing this as all other Theormes in the equall ballance of Reason I am bolde to demaund whether this position deserue the Title of a Principle As for Aristotle he acknowledgeth it indeede for a principle and in many places resolueth vppon it for an infallible and vndoubted axiome without adding any reason thereto but whether herein he hath well done and whether it be such a ground and principle or no it will appeare by the due consideration of the conditions required in a princiciple The first condition therefore of a Principle is as it appeareth ex posterioribus Analyticis that it may be truely affirmed of euery particular of the same kinde and in my iudgement sayeth Placentinus this axiome transgresseth this condition because it agrees not to Touching and Tasting without Medium euery Sense to haue a Medium for that Tasting and Touching are absolued without But some may haply doubt how these two Senses can be perfourmed immediatly and yet a Medium be required to the rest The answere is at hand because the organs of some Senses are so sensible that they would easily bee offended with the contaction of their obiects The reason why the other are not So the Sight will not admit of the Touch of any thing and a vehement motion whereby the sound is generated would offend the organ of Hearing if it should come immediatly vnto it Againe a fumid exhalation which falleth in with the Sence of Smelling would hinder Respiration and except it were transported through a Medium or Meane it would bee offensiue and hurtfull to the Organ Lastly some Senses doe Perceiue their obiects not Materially but Spiritually Now Some Senses perceiue materially others spiritually as Sight the species must be drawne from the obiect through a Medium Some also receiue them Materially and those haue neuer a Medium For a colour cannot really attaine to the organ because an accident out of his subiect is nothing whereupon it followeth that not the Colour placed aboue the eye doeth offend it but the coloured or subiect of the colour But put case that Colour could really without any dammage bee imposed vpon the Eye Not the colour but the coloured offends the eye yet it would not moue the Sence because it would condense and thicken the eye for by this immediate contaction the colour doeth worke vppon the Daphanum or that which is translucent The Touch therefore and the Taste haue no neede of a Medium because they doe not receiue Intentional or abstracted species but reall qualities for if they should receiue Spirituall The Taste and Touch receiue reall qualities formes then they must discerne of them a farre off without the contaction of the obiects for the species are diffused into an ample distance but the Tast and the Touch are not perfected without contaction We see moreouer in these Senses reall affects of the obiects which could not be vnlesse they should be perceiued really but these thinges shall bee more at large discussed in their proper places For a playner dilucidation of the trueth wee must obserue that all Senses haue not alike neede of a Medium but there is a certaine order and degree of this necessity For the Sight doeth especially neede a Medium because it is most of all Spirituall and there is no The Sight doth especially neede a Medium The Hearing lesse Sensation at all of a reall colour immediatly placed vpon the eye A Meane is also requisite to the Hearing yet it hath lesse neede thereof then the Sight for a sound imposed vppon the Hearing maketh a kinde of Sensation but very imperfect namely such an one as is offensiue to the organ The Smell in like manner hath vse of a Medium if the smoaky exhalation be vehement The Smelling yet lesse for so
sensili where he affirmeth that they are therefore called common obiects because they are common though not to all the senses yet at least to the sight and touching for by these two are all things perceiued though not after the same manner as their proper obiects to wit by sending a species from them or by attaining really to the Organ but as it When the coÌ„mon obiects moue the sense were certaine manners and conditions ioyned with the proper obiects in order vnto the motion of the sences so that they doe not absolutely and primarily mooue and affect the sence but onely together with their proper obiects And because the second doe not worke without the first therefore the common obiects are not perceiued by the externall sence without the proper And these common obiects are fiue in number according to Aristotle Motion Rest Figure Magnitude and Number QVEST. XXI Of the Organs of the Sences THE Organ or Instrument of the Sence as Aristotle witnesseth in the 122. text of his second booke de Anima is that wherein the power and force of perceiuing What an Organ is is seated And this Instrument is the eye in the sight in the hearing the eares in the smelling the nosthrils in the taste the tongue and for the touch though all the skin yet especially that of the hand But yet the vertue or faculty of sensation doth not reside in the whole Organ but in some certaine similar particle of which kinde is the Cristaline humor in the eye the nerue of hearing dilated in the Eare the mamillary processes in the Smell the proper flesh or pulpe of the Tongue in the Taste and in the Touch the true skin the other parts of the Organs assist this particle keeping it as it were in tune or preseruing the harmony thereof from the offence and incursion of outward iniuries for otherwise this sweete musicke consent and proportion would by the ouer-vehement force and change wrought by excessiue obiects be destroyed which concordance being broken there can be no sensation And thus much shall suffice to be spoken of the Sences in generall we will entreate more at large of the particular Sences in their proper places where also wee will note some things concerning their Organs which will be worthy your obseruation And first of the Sight according to the order we before obserued in our Anatomicall History QVEST. XXII Whether sight be made by Emission or Reception where the nature of the sight is accurately explaned OVR particular controuersies concerning the Sight shal begin with that notable question coÌ„cerning the nature maner of vision or sight which is indeed rather Philosophicall then belonging to the art of Anatomy notwithstanding because Galen hath elegantly ventilated it in his books de vsu partium de Placitis Hip. et Plat. it shall not bee altogether impertinent to insert some collections in this place which yet wee must fetch out of the secret mysteries of Philosophy There are three especiall or most notable opinions of the Philosophers concerning Three different opinions concerning the nature of sight the manner of sight Some thinke it is made onely by emission of something out of the eye others only by Intromission or Reception of something into the eye and the third sort contend that it is made partly by Emission partly by Reception or Intromission Of the first sect there be diuers Authors but all of them disagreeing among themselues The maysters of the opticks thinke that certaine beames do issue from the Eyes and reach vnto that which is to be seene the figure of which beames they conceiue to bee pyramidall The first opinion of emission The masters of the Optick Arts. Pythagoras the Cone or point whereof is in the eyes the Basis in the thing to bee seene Pythagoras thought that sight was made by an emission of light out of the eye vnto the obiect which light is reflected againe vnto the eye euen as a hand-bal strucken against a wal doth rebound backe from the wall vnto the hand with an equall force Empedocles Hippocrates and Niceus thinke that sight is made not by Emission of light Empedocles onely but of beames also Plato thinkes that the eye sendeth not any beames foorth of it but onely light and that it also reacheth not vnto the thing seene but vnto a certaine or proportionable space of the Medium Democritus Lucipp and the Arhenian Epicurus conceiued that certaine Images or formes did flow from al things through the Motes which be in the ayâ—r Chrysippus and the whole Schoole of the Stoicks thought that a certain spirit Democritus Chrysippus spirit ascended from the heart vnto the Aple of the Eye which spirit was extended as farre as the obiect And these are the different conceits of the Authours of the first opinion whereby it is supposed that some thing is sent out of the Eye vnto the visible obiect which opinion the Platonists confirme by these reasons The Platonists Arguments First they say that witches doe falcinate or bewitch onely by beholding one with their Eyes whence it is that the Poet sayth Nescio quis teneros oculus mihi fascinat agnos I wot not well what witching eye My tender Lambs hath done to die Secondly they say that a Basiliske doth infect a man onely by seeing him Thirdly that a menstruous woman doth infect a looking glasse as it were with some materiall corruption Fourthly that if a Wolfe behold a man he will become hoarse Fifthly that Tiberius Caesar is reported to haue astonished a souldior onely by casting his Eye vpon him Sixthly that Antipho as Aristotle reports in the third booke of his Meteors had his owne image euermore before his eyes Seuenthly if we did not see by emission how it comes to passe that when wee would see more exactly wee draw the Aple of our Eye into as narrow a roome as wee can Is it not to this end that the beames and spirits going out of our eyes may be more vnited Eightly if no thing were sent foorth of the Eye how could the Eye be so weary with continuall looking Ninthly if vision were made by reception and not by emission wee needed not to conuert our Eye directly to the visible obiect for wee should see whether wee beheld the thing or no. Tenthly we could not see the magnitude or figure of many things for the Eye being so little a body cannot receiue such great obiects into it selfe Eleuently if it were by reception then would it follow that the more we dilated the Aple of our Eye the better we should see because our reception would be large Twelftly diuers or contrary species or formes would together and at the same time be receiued into the same Eye because at once it doth behold two contrary obiects as blacke and white Lastly the least thing should bee as easily perceiued as the greatest the contrary whereof is manifest for the sharpe point of a needle held
vnderstood of perfect vision But there is another more obscure question yet to be resolued namely whether that Question which is within the Eye when it seemeth to bee in the outward Ayre be seene by a proper species of it owne or by a strange species I answer that it is by a strange species for the vapour which is contained betwixt the horny membrane and Cristalline is not perceiued in the shape and species of a vapour but Solution vnder another shape conteined in the aire yet this strange species when it is receyued into the eye it followes the Nature colour figure and magnitude of that vapor which is already existent in the eye so if the internall vapor be greenish or yellow it represents the species of the externall obiects as of a wall or booke yellow and greenish If the vapour be small and diffused there do appeare as it were flying Gnats if it be stretched out in length haires do appeare Now if that which is in the Eye should be seene by a proper species of it owne the inner Why that which is within doth apear Grapie coate which is diuers coloured would be seene Finally the last knot which remaineth to be vntied is this why that which is within the eye seemeth to bee out of it I answere that the Cristaline humour being accustomed to the vision of external things Solution doth iudge whatsoeuer is within to be without QVEST. XXIIII Whether the Organ of Sight be Fiery or Watery COncerning the Nature of the Eyes the Platonists Peripatetiks are at great strife Plato in Timaeo because he is perswaded that vision is performed by Plato saith it is fierie emission of light from the eyes doth therefore thinke that the eie is of a fierie Nature The eies saith he do participate of that fire which dooth not burn but by illumination doth cheerfully drawe the day out of the Dungeon of the night Now Fire according to the Platonists is threefold First that which doth both shine and burne secondly that which shineth but burneth not Thirdly that which burneth but doth not shine And this opinion of Plato Galen seemeth to follow in his 10. Booke De vsu partium and in the seuenth De Placitis Hippo. Platonis For he calleth the eye a bright organ and the Sun-like part of the creature The Reasons of the Platonists be these First the eyes of some creatures do shine glitter in the night as of Night-Owles and of Cats Againe some in vehement fittes of The Platonists reasons anger haue their eyes as it were burning and enflamed Moreouer when the eie is shot at one side we see a kinde of fierie glaunce like Lightning and the Eye being rubbed in the darke doth yeelde a bright glimpse vnder the finger Aristotle affirmeth that Antiphon had his owne shape and Image continually before his eies And Pliny reports many things of Tiberius Caesar in the 11. booke of his Naturall Historie Galen also in the seuenth Booke De Placitis Hippocratis Platonis maketh mention how it hapned vnto one many nights before he vtterly lost his Sight that he perceiued a great quantity of light to yssue foorth of his eyes Furthermore that the eyes be fiery may be thus demonstrated because they are verie agile plyable and mooueable now facility of motion is from heate They are also translucid of a pyramidall Figure and full of spirits because they performe their functions in a moment To these we adde that to the most noble sensoriū or organ is due the noblest element which is the fire Againe the senses are of the same Nature with the things which are subiected to them but colours are of a fierie Nature for so Plato defines colour to be a flame yssuing from the bodie coloured Lastly the eyes neuer grow stiffe as do other parts of the bodie whence it followeth that they are of a fierie nature On the contrarie part Aristotle and all the Peripatetiks do The opinion of Aristotle that the eie is watery contend that the eye is waterie but he that desires more satisfaction heerein may reade those things which the same Aristotle writ against the Platonists in his Booke De Sensu Sensili We will subscribe rather to this latter opinion and the same doth Diuine Hippocrates affirme in his Booke de locis in homine The Sight is nourished by the humiditie of the Braine The authority of Hippocrates Democritus Reasons Of the same minde also was Democritus as Aristotle reports in his Booke of Sense Las◠Anatomie and the whole composition of the eies doth conuince this For the principall parte of the eye which first of all causeth vision is all ycy which part being drowned in the glassy humor hath in the forepart a watery humor so disposed for a defence And if the eye be hurt or wounded whatsoeuer doth flowe from it is watery Some haue laboured to reconcile Plato with Aristotle after this manner There be two Carpentarius reconciling Aristotle Plato is reprooued things to be considered in the eyes which concurre to this act of vision first a most clear Visiue spirit flowing from the Braine through the Optick Nerues and secondlie the Cristalline humor Now according to this distinction they say that in regard of the spirits the internall light as also of the enlightned obiect the eye is fierie but in regarde of the Cristalline it is watery But this distinction seemeth not to be altogether tollerable for so euery organ should be fiery because the organes of all Senses haue their animall spirites of the same Nature tenuity and brightnesse For there are not diuers kindes of the Animall spirits that some should be appointed to the sight others to Hearing I therefore hold it better to affirme simply according to Aristotle and indeed the truth it selfe that the Organ of sight is watery Concerning those reasons which are produced in defence of the Platonistes The reasons of the Platoinst◠answered they be of small moment for the eyes doe shine indeede and oftentimes a bright splendour doth proceed from them but not by reason of the fire but because of the tralucencie playnnes and smoothnes of the chrystaline and the coates for whatsoeuer things are Why the eye doth shine smooth and neate do shine in the dark as horne Againe it hapneth because the externall light receiued of the chrystaline doth not presently vanish They are mouable for this cause called by the Poet faciles yet this is not from the fire but from an aboundant and slipry humidity from the spirits and the sixe strong muscles by which it is an easie matter for a small member to be moued They are called spirituall by reason of their action for they perfourme their function Why they are called spirituall in an instant and because they receiue incorporeall and immateriall species or formes produced brought thorough the ayre and continually offering themselues
of his tenth book de vsu part acknowledgeth a third cause of this their meeting to wit that the formes Images of visible things may be vnited For The third though the species be carried through two organs yet they appeare single and not double And this was Aristotles minde in the first booke of his Problemes and the third Section where he demandeth why the eyes are together and at once mooued because saith he they haue one beginning of motion to wit the meeting of the Opticke Nerues And Auicen is of the same opinion But I sayth Laurentius doe not altogether approoue of this cause of theyr coition For Vesalius writeth that he obserued in a young man that these Opticke Nerues did no where meete and yet he neuer in the whole course of his life complained of any deprauation or infirmity of Sight Aristotle writeth in his second Booke De anima and in the 4. of his Metaphysicks that the Sense is neuer deceyued about his proper obiects What need is there then of this coniunction Againe if wee obtained this by the coition of these Nerues that the species and formes of either eie be vnited into one then why should not those many things which are seene together appeare but one In like manner though there be two eares and two nosethrils yet the obiect doth not appeare manifold to the sense It is not therefore from this coition of the Opticks that the obiect appeareth simple but because the Apples of the eyes are in the same plain and are turned toward the visible obiect at the same moment Fourthly some would haue the Optickes to meete to the end they might more fitly proceed out of the perforation in the Scull and so might be carried directly to the eies The 4. reason Lastly Galen in the 14. chapter of his tenth booke de vsu partium conceiueth that they meete that so the visiue spirit might passe from the one eye into the other in a moment The 5. reason for the perfection of the Sight so the one eye being shut wee doe see more accuratelie with the other And these are all the causes of this coition or meeting of the Opticke Nerues Let vs now follow on and declare the manner of their insertion The Opticke Nerue The insertion of the opticke Nerues dooth consist of a double substance an internall which is Marrowye and an externall which is membranous The inner Marrow when it attaineth to the Cristalline humour is dilated and so diffuseth Visiue spirits through the whole eye Out of this dilatation ariseth a coate which they cal 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or the Net-like coate which as Galen teacheth in the second chapter of his tenth Booke de vsu partium doth neither in colour nor substance deserue the name of a Coate but if you cast it into water you shal see it resemble the soft white and marrowy substance of the Braine But the outward part of the Opticke Nerue doth consist of two coates the one whereof is propagated from the thin Meninx the other from the hard the one is spent into the grapie coate the other into the horny membrane whence it is that by the continuitie of this Opticke nerue the Animall spirit is carried euen in a moment vnto the Apple of the eye Concerning the last question which is of the inner cauity of the Opticke nerue Galen Of the cauitie of the opticke Nerue writeth in the tenth Booke de vsu partium that they are manifestly hollow and therefore Herophilus called these nerues 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because they are perforated or holed through But we do not admit this sensible cauity in Nerues yet we would haue them to be the most softe of all the Nerues and more spongie that they might receiue and transport a more copious and abundant sourse of Animall spirirs QVEST. XXX Whether the light be the obiect of the Sight THere be some which do determine that light is the obiect of Sight grounding their opinion vpon this foundation because euerie thing which is seen Their reasons which say light is the Obiect of Sight either is light or it is seene by the light or as Simplicius saith that vvhich is seene is either light or nere a Kin vnto it concluding hence that light is visible by it selfe but colours and other things onely by the meanes of light insomuch as light is the cause wherefore they are seene But none of these are true first of all that proposition may not be granted to wit that whatsoeuer is seene is either light or is seene by the light or is very like to it For if they take Seeing in so large a sense as to perceiue a thing with the Eyes as it is necessary that they must grant for else we will denie that the light it selfe may be seene then would also darknesse it selfe be seene which neyther is nor may be seene by the light neyther is it of a nature like vnto it Again all things are not seene by light for there are somethings which are made conspicuous Some things are seene in the darke onely by darknesse but in too cleere and splendide a light they flye from the Sense as the Scales and eyes of Fishes olde rotten wood yea I say the Stars themselues which therefore the vulgar imagine do fall because they be obscured by the light of the Sunne and so taken from our sight but at the returne of the Euening twylight to wit How the Starres are seene vvhen the light goeth avvay and the night approcheth they are by degrees restored to our sight again as in the morning tvvylight they after the same manner doe vvithdravv themselues by little and little from vs. Therfore euery thing vvhich is seen is not light or seen by the light Reason and Aristotles doctrine doe contradict this opinion for vvee are taught by both these that the Eye should be free from his owne obiect that so it may receiue it more Light is not the obiect of the Sight because it is in the eie sincerely but the Eye both in regard of his whole frame and composition and especially in respect of the cristalline humour where the reception of the obiect is properly made is especially light and cleare light therefore cannot be the obiect of the Sight Moreouer to see is not onely to know a thing with the Eyes for this is too large a a signification and agreeth to many things beside the proper obiect but wee doe properly see that in which when it is perceiued with the Eye the sight is determined and stayeth it selfe But the sight is not terminated in the light though the Eyes doe perceiue it but reacheth alwayes beyond it Seeing therefore the light cannot be truely seene it canot bee the true obiect of Sight Furthermore an incorporeall obiect cannot alter a corporeal Organ except it proceede The alteration of the Organ is requisite to vision from a body that
or iustling one against another the medium wherein they are mooued endureth betwixt them a compression that compression endeth in attrition that attrition in fraction and that fraction kindleth as it were at resonance VVherefore Aristotle sayde well in the 78. text of his second booke de Anima that a sound is alwayes actuated when one thing moues against another in a third That the fraction is not the found But although the ayre thus beaten and broken makes a found yet the very fraction of the ayre is not the sound neither the next and immediate generation thereof and herein all Philosophers doe agree particularly Auicen But what shall wee stand vpon authorities we prooue it thus The fraction of the ayre is a motion but the sound is not a motion First because a Sound is the proper obiect of the Sense of Hearing but Motion is a common obiect not discerned by the sense of Hearing and therefore a Sound is not a Motion Secondly Motion is no quality but reduced vnto other Predicaments as wee say in Schooles that is to Action Passion or Place But Sound is a quality to witte one of the Nor the motion third kind to which the obiects of the Senses are referred Thirdly Sound is made by Motion so we see by experience so wee are taught by all Philosophy the same Philosophy teacheth vs That nothing produceth it selfe Seeing then that motion produceth Sound certainly Sound can be no Motion It may be obiected that Aristotle in the 58. Text of his Booke de sensu sensili and the Obiection Solution sixt Chapter sayth that Sound is a Motion but we answere that he speaketh not in a formall sense but in a casuall that is not indeuouring to giue the definition of a Sound but a casuall production as if he should say when some motion is made with such and such circumstances a Sound will result therefrom VVe will also add another Reason and that very strong which is on this maner Those things which haue a particular existence or being one without the other are in themselues seuerally distinct and diuers Now the sound and the breaking motion of the ayre haue seuerall and particular beings because the sound is diffused and attaineth to those parts of the Aire or water to which parts the motion cannot reach And this Aristotle in his fourth Booke De Historia Animalium prooueth by the example of Anglers who in the time of their disport are as silent as may be and yet the Fishes heare them Now saith Aristotle Aristotles instance it is not like that their whisperings can produce so vehement a motion that the partes of the Aire broken thereby should by succession mooue thorough the whole masse of water vnto the Sense of the Fish Againe that this fraction of the Aire is not the next and immediat generation of the sound may thus be euicted Locall motion of it selfe contendeth or striueth onelie vnto That sound is not imediately generated by motion Place neither of it selfe doth it make impression of any other reall Being vpon that which is mooued as Aristotle teacheth in the eight Booke of his Physicks the 7 chapter and the 59 Text. It followeth therefore that the generation of Sound is another action besides the motion which action I know not how to name yet we may wel conceiue a difference betweene the locall impulsion and the Sound as we may also perceiue that besides locall motion sometimes heate is engendred yet no man will say that motion is the immediate cause of heate After this manner also we may well conceiue how the influences of the Stars may be dispensed in this inferiour would To conclude therefore it is manifest that there must concurre three actions to the production of any Sound and these three do each accompany and succeede other The first action is the affront which is betwixt the two bodies which offend one against another The second is the fraction or breaking of the Medium The third and last is the sounding of the Medium for so you shall giue vs leaue to call it beecause wee can deuise no other name Immediately after this followeth the Sound QVEST. XXXIX The definition of a Sound HAuing as plainly as wee could deliuered the manner of the generation and production of a Sound we will now briefely set downe the definition of it Aristotle in the 65 Text of his second Booke de Anima defines a sound to bee A motion of that which may bee mooued with that motion wherewith those things are mooued which do rebound from the mutual percussion of two bodies Others do define it to be A sensatiue quality striking the hearing and the proper obiect of that Sense But we will thus define it A Sound is a passiue and successiue quality produced from the interception and breaking of the Aire or Water which followeth vpon the The definitiō of a Sound Obiection collision or striking of two sounding bodyes so fit to moue the Sense of Hearing If any should obiect that there is but one onely Nature of one thing as Arist saieth in the 4 chapter of his first Booke of Topickes and that a definition is an oration expressing the nature of a thing as the same Aristotle in the 5 chapter of his first Booke and the sixt chapter of his 5. Booke of Topicks saith There can be but one definition giuen of one and the same thing and therefore a Sound should not consist of one simple but of a threefolde Nature because we haue set downe three definitions one differing from another whereas wee promised but one definition in the Title of this Chapter It is therefore to be considered that three A threefolde definition of Accidents things may be obserued in all Accidents and from the knowledge of these their Nature may be better manifested these are the subiect the genus and the Cause By which three according to the diuers intention and end of the definer such accidentes are defined eyther with the mention of them all or of the subiect and genus onely the cause being lefte out or of the cause alone omitting the other two The first manner of defining satisfies the vnderstanding best the other affoords but a lame defectiue vnderstanding of that which is defined So in this definition of the Ecclipse that It is a priuation of the Light in the Moone by By the ecclips reason of the interposition of the Earth betwixt the Moone and the Sunne all three are contained Likewise the Thunder defined to be a Sound in a Clowd made by the extinction of Fire is a definition consisting of all three But this Thunder is onely defined by the subiect and Aud thunder the Genus if we say that Thunder is a Sound in a Cloud and by the cause alone when we say It is an extinction of the fire Now if the Nature of Accidents be such and so great variety be in their
of new aire inspired by the mouth and lastly that by this way a passage may bee open for the externall aire rushing forcibly through the hole Reasons of the former instances of the Eares as it is in the noyse made by Ordinance when wee are neere it The Ayre therefore doth passe freelie out of the mouth into the Eare and againe retireth from the Eare into the mouth VVhence it is that when wee would heare more attentiuelie weeholde our Breath least the Cochlea or Snaile-shell should bee filled with aboundance of inspired Aire and so the Tympane bee stretched But such as yawne doe not heare so well because in this yawning or gaping the Tympane is so stretched and puffed vp that it cannot receyue outward Sounds Lastly by scratching the Eare wee prouoke Spittle because by that compressing there is an expression of Excrements into the Cartilagineous or gristlie passage and so from thence vnto the Tongue And thus much of the Sense of Hearing now we come vnto the Smell QVEST. XLV What Smelling is THat the Nose was by Nature made as well for Respiration as for the Sense of Smelling we haue before declared But what is the Sense of Smelling The desfinitiof smelling that we doe vndertake in this place more precisely to vnfould Smelling therfore is the middle Sense of fiue which perceiueth the odours of thinges drawne in by the Nosthrils for the vse and behoofe of the Creature It is a great question which also we haue a little touched before whether to the action of this Sense the Inspiration of aire together with the odour be of absolute necessity and yet the streame and current of mens opinions as well Philosophers as Physitians run vpon the affirmatiue part For if we desire or bee willing to endeuour ourselues to Smell Whether inspiration be necessary to smelling any thing more curiously we draw the ayre in at our Nostrilles and that is the reason why we cannot smell in the water because the water that is drawne filleth the passages of the Organ Placentinus is of the contrary opinion and alledgeth Aristotle for his authour in the fift Chapter of his Book de Sensu sensili where he sayth that Nature doth but collaterally vse Respiration in the Attraction of odours which Respiration sayth he she destinated primarily to another end If therefore Respiration be necessary to the Smell then it followeth that Nature ordayned it primarily for that end For sayth he this is a rule in Nature that whatsoeuer in our bodies doeth necessarily belong to any function that is primarily appoynted for that function and doth not sort vnto it by error chance or accident Seeing therefore the primary and chiefe vse of Respiration is to refresh and cherish the heart and his spirites it followeth that it is not altogether necessary for Smelling Indeede one and the same thing may haue diuers vses but the principall and primary vse is but one for which onely it is necessary and to the rest accommodated onely secondarily or by accident Againe if an odour of it selfe be fit to ascend vnto his own Organ why should we thinke that Respiration should be so absolutely necessary Now an odout is nothing else but a hot and dry exhalation as we shall proue afterwards and exhalation of their owne Nature doe tend or moue vpward If then they ascend naturally why may it not be that a sweet and pleasing breath may rise into the Nostrilles and passe on vnto the Organ of smelling without any attraction of the ayre Placentinus addeth another argument which hee calleth Inuincible taken from those women that are Hystericall that is haue fits of the Mother For such woemen although they haue no Respiration at all doe yet receiue and perceiue odours and not onely so but Fits of the mother are holpen by smels are almost miraculously redeemed or recouered by them what shall wee say vnto the wombe it selfe doth it not smell yet no man did euer say that the wombe did respire but dayly experience teacheth vs that it taketh so great pleasure in sweete Smels and is so offended The wombe followes sweet sauours with that which is noysome and abhominable that it mooueth and applyeth it selfe manifestly vnto the one and auoydeth the other euen with Locall and Methematicall motion But it may be obiected that if we hold our breath we cannot smell and therefore this Obiection Sense is not accomplished without Inspiration Placentinus answereth that it is not true that if an odour be applyed to the Nose and the breath retayned no Sense will bee made Solution and those who vrge experience are deceiued in their experimenting For the breath cannot bee so retayned that nothing at all should either get in or out If then any thing enter in it helpeth the attraction of the odour if any thing get out it hindreth the same yea it repelleth or driueth it from the Organ And that the breath cannot be so immouably retayned may be conuinced by reason and experience Reason sayth that because such retention of the breath is violent and against nature Nature will likewise with all his force and vigour resist and oppose that violence and beside that all the Organs of Respiration doe by a proper instinct hasten to their Naturall Action Hence it followeth that the Muscles staggering as it were in their worke of sustentation and the Lungs declining downeward by their waight doe betwixt them perpetually expell some small quantity of ayre which is a subtle and fluide Element and wil finde way through insensible passages Now that there is such an instinct in the muscles seruing to Respitation that this instinct may doe much we may easily coniecture because though a muscle is otherwise an instrument of voluntary motion yet euen in sleepe when all election is absent and the wil especially vnto motion is at rest as well as the body yet euen then the intercostall muscles and the midriffe which serue for Respiration doe follow the necessity of Nature and mooue as freely as when we are awake Shall wee therefore conceiue that vpon the same necessity or a greater when wee ourselues doe voluntarily seeke to oppose and frustate the end of Nature shee shall not bee able without our knowledge and against our wills to let out so small a quantity of Ayre as may suffice for this her purpose of Ayre I say which is so subtle fluid a body that it will issue at the least crannie and yeeld vnto the least impulsion or violence Experience confirmeth the same thing for if you burne any thing that is odoriferous vnder the Nose and retaine your breath you shall finde nay you shall see that that fume will be mooued on this side and on that side which no doubt commeth to passe by reason of the Ayre which passeth and repasseth outward and inward but if it get within the nosthrils then it is presently smelt as any man that list to try may
degree contrary repugnaÌ„t to the nature of the Obiect but when sensation is made they must grow to be alike Wherefore if the Organ be so disposed that there is not so great a difference betwixt it the nature of his obiect it coÌ„meth to passe that they consent better together and the Organ yeeldeth more easily toward the Nature of that which doth importune it But we proceede vnto the Nature of an Odour QVEST. XLVII Of the Essence of an Odour HEraclitus as Aristotle remembreth in the fift Chapter of his Booke de Sensuâ—t Heraclitus opinion of Odours Sensili conceiuing that Odours are a fumide exhalation sayeth that if all Beings had beene fumide the Nose would haue discerned of all Aristotle replies vpon him on this manner If that were true which Heraclitus collecteth it would follow that those creatures which liue in the water do not Smell for in the water there can be no fumide or smoaky exhalation generated But that Fishes doe smell may bee proued by the choise of their meate which Aristotle perswades himselfe they make by Smelling We saith Placentinus haue other Reasons against this opinion First because a fumide exhalation is a substance for it subsisteth by it selfe and sustaineth accidents and therefore naturally and by his owne motion we perceiue that it mounteth vpward Now then if an Odour were a fumide exhalation it could not be by it sselfe sensible for no substance doth by it selfe fall vnder any Sense Yet no man will denie but that an Odour doth by it selfe and immediately worke vpon the Organ of Smelling It is true indeede that a fumide exhalation attayning to the nosethrils mooues the Placentinus refutation of Heraclitus Sense of Smelling but it doth not follow that therefore such an exhalation is an odour rather wee should say that the Odour hath his subsistence in the exhalation as in her subiect for accidents neither are nor can be without their subiects Notwithstanding there is a place in Galen neare the end of the second chapter of his booke de edoratus organo which seemeth to prooue this opinion of Heraclitus to bee true A place of Galen expounded the words are these That falleth into the Sense of smelling which is betwixt the Nature of ayre and water to wit such a thing as is neither so thin as ayre nor so thicke as water for that which exhaleth or vapoureth from the hodies of things is the substance of odours which wee may perceiue by roses and the like tender plants whose bodyes doe quickely become lesse crumple and dry vpwhence we may certainely gather that the more humide part of their substance is resolued in toexhalation Thus farre Galen Andanswered We answer that Galen saith that the substance of an odour is an exhalation by substance there meaning the subiect wherein the odour doth consist for it had beene a grosse thing in Galen and vnworthy the edge of so keene a Phylosopher if hee had attributed substance to an odour which hath no existence of it selfe And if any man shall insist vpon the example of Roses we will giue him this satisfaction that Galen doth not conclude that Roses therefore doe become lesser and dryer because their moystest parts are exhaled into odours but he saith that their moyster part turneth into an exhalation and he saith true for an exhalation which is a substance absumeth the humiditie of the body out of which it issueth and diminisheth the same for how can it be but diminished when a substantiall part is taken from the whole But an odour is not a substantial part neither is it made of a part but subsisteth in the whole subiect and is nothing else but an accident or an incorporeall qualitie So that out of these words of Galen wee may gather this excellent point of learning That where he saith That which exhaleth from the bodyes of things is the substance of an odour hee doth wisely signifie the matter out of which the odour doth arise which is the body and the subiect wherein it doth inhere which is the exhalation whereas therefore he saith that the exhalation is the substance of the odour he doth not meane that the odour is a substance but being an accident that it doth subsist in this substane as in his subiect But for the confirmation of this opinion of Heraclitus there are some obiections made to prooue that the odour it selfe is a fumide substance because it performeth many things A story out of Plinie which cannot be done but onely by a substance And first a creature may thereby bee nourished for which they alledge Plinie in the 2. chapter of his seuenth booke where hee saith that in the Easterne India about the fountaine or head of the Riuer Ganges there is a nation without mouths whom he calleth Astomy hairie all ouer ther bodyes and cloathed The Astomy with the leaues of trees They liue of nothing but exhalations and odours which they draw in through their Noses meate they haue none nor drinke onely they vse to smell vppon certaine rootes and flowers and wilde Apples which they carry with them when they traueil farre that they might not want something to smell to These men are easily stifled with a strong odour The like we reade of Democritus who they say sustained his life foure dayes with the smell of honey or hot bread VVe answer with Aristotle in the fifth chapter of his book Democritus desensu sensili where he ascribeth this opinion to the Pythagorians that such strange reports are mere fables vnworthy the credite of a hystory because they abhor so much from reason For those things which do nourish must be conuerted into the substance of the liuing Reasons against Plinie body Now that which is incorporeall cannot possible be conuerted into a corporeall substance wherefore odour being of it selfe an incorporeall accident and therefore not changed into the substance of the creature caÌ„not become a nourishment therto Beside all creatures haue some place in their bellies which receiueth their meate and from whence the body draweth that which sustaineth it But the Organ of odours is seated in the head from whence no member of the creature seeketh for nourishment They vrge further the example Cookes who because they are busie in boyling and roasting viands for other men doe receiue so many odours from them that they scarse Why Cookes haue no good stomackes euer are a hungry or desire meate but rather being satisfied with the smell doe loath the substance and therefore it is commonly thought that these smels doe satisfie and cloy theÌ„ But we deny that this commeth to passe by reason of the odours of meates but the reason why they desire not meate as other men is either because as it is in the prouerbe they can licke their owne fingers that is tasting a little of euery thing they insensibly fill their stomackes or being alwayes about the fire their pores are opened
for being inserted into the mēbarne the extremity therof reacheth vnto the substance of the tongue to defer and confer the faculty thereunto Obiection Answer But it will be obiected that if this coate or membrane be ill affected the Tast is therewithall depraued VVee yeeld it to be true yet not because the Taste is perfected in that part but because this membrane concurreth to the action of Sensation without which in deed we cannot Taste so in the eye if the Horny membrane bee violated the sight is then depraued and yet it doeth not follow that the Horny membrane is the chiefe Organ of Sight And thus we must vnderstand Galen in the second Chapter of his 4. Booke de locis Galen expounded affectis where he sayth that the Taste is vitiated if the membrane of the Tongue be distempered Or we may say that this membrane is as it were the Taster to the Taste which office it hath partly from his own proper temperament partly from the soft nerues which are inserted therinto vnlesse you will say that these nerues were allowed to the membrane by Nature to giue it an exquisite sense of Touching whereof the Tongue stood in neede for the defence of his substance which assertion will not be against reason VVe conclude therefore that the membrane of the Tongue hath an exact Sense of Touching nor altogether deuoyde of Tasting not that it tasteth at all of it selfe but being The conclusion contiguous yea continuall and growing to the substance of the Tongue it concurreth withall to the perfection of the action so as without it the Sense of Tasting cannot be perfected nor accomplished Notwithstanding we finde another principall part to which as this membrane so all the other adiacent parts are substituted by Nature as helpers and handmaides and that is the proper and spongy flesh or pulpe of the Tongue For beside that it hath a substance such as you can no where finde the like in the whole body the Temperament also therof That the body of the toung is the true organ is apt and to entertaine and receiue Sapours for it is moyst and hot neare of kinne vnto the Nature of a Sapour that it might more easily bee altered thereby And indeede for the making of this Sensation it is necessary that the Organ should put on the nature of Arguments the obiect which Aristotle meaneth when he sayth that the Organ must potentially be the same thing which the obiect is actually that so it might be altered actually receiue the nature of the obiect for how shall it iudge of the obiect vnlesse it doe put on the qualities thereof Adde hereto that it hath an ingenite humidity that those obiects which are potentially moyste as Salt is being by this organ actually made moyst might become sapide that freely and frankly exhibite his Sapours Againe what greater argument can there bee that this flesh should bee the organ of Tasting then because it is spongy for Taste is neuer made vnlesse the moysture that carrieth the Sapour bee imbibed by the organ of Tasting to which purpose nothing is so fit as the spongy pulpe of the Tongue Moreouer all the other Senses are double and therefore Nature though she had great reason to make the Tongue single for the commodity of the voyce and such other circumstances as wee haue particularized in our History yet that it might be after a sort double she hath drawne a line through the middest whereby it is diuided into a right side and a left On that manner there is no part in the mouth diuided but in the mouth is the Sense of Taste and therefore it must belong onely to the Toung QVEST. LXIII Whether the Tongue alone do Taste WEe hauce prooued that the Flesh or Pulp of the Tongue is the true instrument of Tasting Notwithstanding it is doubted whether this Action belong onely to this part or may also be communicated vnto others That it may be communicated to other parts some arguments are vrged First That it may be communicated the Taste is a kinde of Touching but Touching is diffused thorough all the body It may seeme therefore that the Taste is also diffused thorough more parts then one especially so farre as the meate doeth attayne that is into the Mouth the Gullet and Stomacke Againe there yssueth out of the Braine a soft nerue which is simple and single in his originall but when it hath paced a little forward from the skull it is diuided into two branches whereof one is inserted into the Tongue the other into the lower parts Thirdly we see that the Stomacke doeth reiect and cast vp some meates by vomit other it embraceth and contayneth In like manner the Gullet swallowes some meates well and freely others not without loathing and much difficulty yea some meates because of the enmity betwixt the stomack and their Taste euen after they are downe are cast vp againe It may therefore be demaunded how this choyce can bee made this loathing or liking stirred vp vnlesse we say that the Stomacke and the Gullet do Tast and distinguish the differences of Sapors Add hereto the authority of Aristotle who in the 11 chapter of his fourth Booke Departibus animalium saith that Fishes in their swallowing do take pleasure and haue a sense of the meate that passeth into their Mawes Without doubt these arguments are not to be contemned and yet we will make answere vnto them To the first we say that though the Taste be a kinde of Touch yet it is not necessary Answer to the first that it should in all conditions answere or be proportionable to the Touch. To the second that although the Nerue which is inserted into the tongue do transmit To the second another branch to the Gullet and the Stomacke yet it doth not follow that the gullet and the stomacke must taste for the soft nerues do transport the faculty of sensation yet that the Eye sees colours the Eare heares sounds the Nose perceiues odours or sauours is not by reason of the Nerue but because of the disposition and temperament of The differences of the senses depend on the diuersitie of the organs the organs For the faculty of sensation is euery where one and the same neither is there any difference in the faculty whereby wee heare nor in the faculty whereby wee smell from the faculty whereby wee taste but all the difference ariseth from the disposition of the organ The Foote would see and the Elbow would heare and the sides would smel and the crowne would Tast if in these parts there wer a disposition to receiue the obiects of these Senses In like manner although the Gullet and the Stomack do receiue a soft Nerue yet the Gullet and the Stomacke do not Taste because they are not disposed thereto But the Reason why Nature hath giuen them this soft Nerue wee may finde in Galens 2 chapter of his 16. Booke
de vsu partium to wit because they stood in neede of an exactnesse of sensation Now saith Galen those parts which had need of exact Sense haue all of them receyued soft Nerues From this that hath bene saide we may shape answers vnto the rest of the arguments To the third That the Gullet swallowes some meates and loaths others that the Stomacke reteines some meates and casts vp others wee ascribe vnto the pleasure or paine which they feele from the tactile qualities for of the parts of the body of man none hath the Sense of touching so exquisite as the Stomacke For beside that it is membranous it hath an infinite number of branches of Nerues inserted thereinto that it is no wonder if it kicke against the least offence So if we thrust our fingers into our throats wee can procure a Vomit Why the stomack casts vp some meat reteins other not that wee make our Stomacke loath any thing but because the Tactile qualities doe vrge and prouoke a sensible part VVee also may say that because of the contiguity of parts the Stomacke is fore-warned by the Tongue so that the Tongue perceiuing anie horrid or vnpleasant sauour communicateth the Sensation to the stomacke forewarning it of an approaching enemy which thereupon stirring vp it selfe as it were to battell yerketh against it and casteth it forth And to say true there is such an instinct in Nature bred Another answere to the argument and setled in those parts For wee may not attribute the sense of Tasting to the Gullet or Stomacke because if these partes had Taste the sicke man that takes a pill or Bole wrapt vp in Sugar wuold neuer retaine it which if he take without Sugar hee presently casts vp again and the reason is because when they are not rowled in Sugar or otherwise made sweete their bitter or vnpleasant Sapor is perceyued by the Tongue warning thereof Of the swallowing of Pils giuen to the Stomacke They are reteyned being sweetened because that ill Taste is obscured and so the Tongue deceyued Being now arriued into the Gullet or the Stomack although the Sugar melt from them yet they are not cast vp againe because the stomack doth not perceiue their Sapor And this is the reason why when we would let down any vnsauoury thing into the stomacke we endeuour not to touch the Tongue more then of necessity least it should be prouoked thereby VVee conclude therefore that neyther the Gullet nor the Stomacke do perceyue Tasts or Sapors but onely the Tongue QVEST. LXIIII. In what part of the Tongue the Taste is most exacte HAuing found out the Organe of Tasting it remaineth in the last place to search in what part of the Tongue the sense is most exacte for there is no question but there is a great difference That the back-part tasteth best There are some reasons to perswade vs that the backpart of the toung doth taste better then the forepart First because at the back-part of the Tongue the Almonds are seated on either side which doe receiue the spittle and a great quantity of moysture wherefore because the spittle doth helpe this sense very much it is to be imagined that where there is most spittle there is best Tasting Againe the Nerues which are inserted into the backside of the Tongue are greater then those which are inserted into the foreside Yet Aristotle holdeth the contrary and prooues his part better for what can be more certaine then experience If therefore we desire to Taste any thing more curiously we apply it to the tip of our tongues and if it fall toward the roote we call it backe againe Againe when wee are to swallow any thing whose taste is displeasing to vs we hasten it to the roots of our tongue The contrarie opinion Aristotle Reasons as soone as we can The reason is because the sense of Tasting is not there so exquisite Moreouer it is very reasonable that the Taste should be more perfect in the fore-part because this sense was allowed to the creature to discerne hurtfull Tasts and to auoid them But if the perfection of the Taste had beene at the rootes that which is offensiue might haue slipped downe before we were aware whereas the tippe of the Tongue discerning the difference best is also best able to free it selfe from that wherewith it is offended Add heereto that the forepart of the Tongue is softer more spongie and better disposed to imbibe the humidity wherein the Sapor is conteined VVe conclude therefore that the perfection of the Taste is not in the rootes but in the tip of the Tongue The arguments that were brought to prooue the contrary may easily bee answered Answer to the former arguments For because there is so great a plenty of moisture at the roots of the Tongue therfore the best Taste should not be there for superfluous humidity doth not quicken the Taste but dulles it Neither do we deny but that the Nerue is larger at the roote of the Tongue but it doth not follow that therefore the Taste is there more perfect because in the fore-part though the Nerues be lesse yet they be more plentifull and aboundant and therefore do cause the Taste to be more perfect And thus we are come vnto an end of these Labyrinths concerning the Senses wherein we haue beene somewhat the more prolixe that those which loue the contemplatiue part of Philosophy might haue something wherewith to please their appetites It is true indeede that there are many passages in these Controuersies which for the most part we haue taken out of Iulius Casserius Placentinus which might wel haue befitted the Schooles themselues but wee imagine that these our Labours may happily fall into some mens hands who will be willing to recognize those Studies which for better employments they haue intermitted A very few of which kinde if I shall giue contentment vnto I vvill not thinke my labour ill bestowed Other men vvho do not vnderstand them or else are better able then my selfe to satisfie themselues may turne ouer to that vvhich shall be more fitting for their Dispositions And so we will leaue the Head and Senses and come vnto the Ioynts The End of the Eight Booke of the Senses and the Controuersies thereunto belonging THE NINTH BOOKE Wherein the Ioyntes are briefely Described The Praeface IN the whole body of Man there is nothing more wonderfull then the structure and position of the Ioynts nor any thing wherein a man doth so much differ from all other creatures The bowels are most what a like in all both for Nutrition Generation Life and Sense because all creatures haue like vse of all those parts as well reasonable as vnreasonable The onely thing which makes the difference is the Reasonable Soule which is inuisible a Nature transcendent and aboue the Nature of the body But the fashion and position of the Ioynts whereby the body is lifted vp from the earth
together with the vaine and artery is dispersed into the inner muscles of the thigh The third lower then the former disperseth his fauours to the muscles of the yard and to some of the muscles also of the thigh not forgetting the skin of the lesk and afterward it determineth in the neighbour muscles aboue the middle of the thigh The fourth which is the thickest driest and strongest of all the nerues hauing his originall from the fowre vpper spondells of the Os sacrum or the holy bone gliding along betwixt it and the hanche bone affordeth certaine branches vnto the neighbor parts as vnto the skin of the buttockes and of the thighe and to the muscles contained vnder them Afterward departing into two branches the lesser falleth by the Perone and giueth two shootes vnto each toe the greater stretching along the leg and the foote giueth likewise two branches to each toe but both these boughs by the way as they passe doe touch at the heads of the muscles and at the skin of the leg and the foote and doe tye them together And this shall serue for a short description of the vessells The muscles of the foote are diuers some Bend the thigh Extend it bring it to the body lead it from the body and turne it about others doe moue the leg with the selfe same kinds of motions others bend and extend the foote it selfe Finally there are others which The muscles of the feete The bones of the feete moue the toes of the feete the particular history of all which you may require in the next booke of the muscles The bones of the feete are very many one of the thigh two of the legge called perone and Tibia together with the whirle bone of the Knee the wrest of the feete called peatum hath seauen bones the after-wrest called Metapedium hath fiue and there be 14 of the Toes to which may be added seed-bones like to those which we found in the hand Of all which we will giue you satisfaction in our Booke of the Bones CHAP. X. An explication of the dissimilar parts of the whole foote THE great foote is diuided as the hand into three dissimilar parts the Femur or Thigh the Tibia or Legge and the pes or Foot The Thigh is called Femur The partes of the foote in the large acceptation a ferendo because the creature is therewith sustained or held vppe The fleshy parts are called by Hippocrates 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the fore-partes 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Pulpie or fleshy part about the ioynt belowe is on the backeside into which the Knee is bent called Poples the Ham because it is folded Post that is backward the fore-parte is called Genu that is the Knee The second part of the foote from the Knee to the Heele is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in Latine Tibia we call it the Leg the forepart whereof Antetibiale the Shinne the hinder and fleshy part Sura the Calfe the two processes without flesh neere the bottome Maleoli or the Ancles The last part of the foote is called pes paruus properly the Foote because it is the basis or pedistall wherupon the whole body resteth and it is the true organ or Instrument of progression as the hand is diuided into three parts the Wrest the After-wrest and the Toes The Wrest is called pedium and consisteth of seuen bones foure of which haue proper names the other three none The forepart of this pedium is called the instep The backe part is round and is called Calx or the Heele the lower part of it is called Calcaneum because with it wee do calcare Terram tread vpon the Earth and we call it the pitch of the heele The second part of the foote consisteth of fiue bones and answereth to the After-wrest of the hand in Latine it is called Tarsus the lower part of it is called the plant or the soale of the foote the vpper part betwixt the Instep and the Toes is called pectus or dorsum pedis the brest or backe of the foote Finally the Toes are fiue answering to the fingers of the Hand and haue their owne orders making three ranks called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 excepting the great toe These bones are ioyned by Ginglymos and haue seede-bones for theyr firmer The Vse of the seed-bons in the foote articulation for these small bones make the foote stronger when we stand stil or walk on especially if our way be through sharpe places where otherwise the toes might easilie be luxed if they could be turned backe with stones or any other higher or vnequall substance whereupon we should tread And this is the true and succinct description of the Ioynts wherewith wee desire the Reader to rest contented at this time because he shall finde a more accurate delineation of all the parts of them in their seuerall places in the Tractes following beginning with the most compounded parts and so proceeding till wee come vnto the most Simple and Similar The End of the Ninth Booke of the Ioynts THE TENTH BOOKE Of Flesh that is of the Muscles the Bovvels and the Glandules The Praeface AS our ability time auocatiōs haue giuen vs leaue we haue gone through our first diuision of the body of Man into the three Regions Naturall Vitall and Animall and the Ioynts It remayneth now that we dissolue euery one of these into those parts whereof they are compounded laying each apart by themselues that their Natures and differences may better appeare In this Analysis or Resolution wee will first begin with the Flesh which beside that it maketh the greatest part of the bulk of the Body is also somewhat more compounded then the rest of the Similar parts Next wee will entreat of the Vessels that is to say of the Veines Arteries and Sinewes for these are the Riuers or Brookes which conuay the Bloud the Spirits the Heate the Life the Motion and the Sense into all the parts and corners of this Little world Afterward we will descend vnto the Gristles Ligaments Membranes and Fibres Parts not onely Spermaticall and Similar but also Simple that is not Organicall Last of all wee will come vnto the Bones that is to the foundation of this goodly Structure the Pedestall or Columns vpon which the frame of the body of Man is reared and whereby it is strengthened and supported I know well that some Anatomistes of the best note haue in their deliuery of this Art quite inuerted this order which we haue proposed vnto our selues beginning first with the Bones and so ascending by the Gristles Ligaments Membranes Vessels and Flesh vnto the three Regions and the Ioynts which Methode being Geneticall we conceiue to be rather the way of Nature then of Art for Nature first lineth out of the masse of Seede the warp of the body and after with the woofe filleth vp the empty distances first she layeth the foundation rayseth the stories
is into the laterall or side parts thereof and they are sometimes perforated in the middest to giue way to the muscle which openeth the Iaw They moue the bone toward the sides and somewhat vpward The fourth paire is called Coracohyoeidei Tab. 6. fig. 2. V V. Tab. 7 fig. 3 V V They ly lurking vnder the fourth muscle of the shoulder-blade as Vesalius and Platerus haue noted The 4. paire They are slender and long and do arise out of the processe called Carocoeides at the vpper end of the shoulder-blade nere his necke and do run obliquely vpwarde vnder the seuenth muscle of the head and are implanted where the third paire is into the beginning of the lower processe of the bone Hyois and these draw downward vnto the sides This is a long paire on eyther side fleshy and hath a double belly and therefore Galen cald them Digastricks but in the middle they are slender and neruous as is the fourth muscle of the Iaw and the fift proper muscle of the Larynx and extenuated into the forme almost of a Tendon haply to giue way to the seuenth muscle of the head which heere runneth ouer him K as to his better Concerning the vse of these muscles we craue leaue to add yet a little more some thinke they were not ordained for motion but rather for tension to tye establish suspend An addition concerning the Vse of these muscles Laurentius Archangelus Arantius the bone Hyoides so saith Laurentius others as Archangelus thinke they serue for diglutition and that they are the proper muscles of the Hyois Others as Arantius because this bone is the basis of the Tongue and because the basis of any thing can by no meanes be mooued but that also must be moued which is established vpon that basis do thence determine that these muscles do mooue the Tongue and so much the rather because the manifold and frequent motions of the Tongue can hardly be imagined to be accomplished by so few and so small muscles as determine or end in the substance of the Tongue Wherefore these may be called the common Muscles of the tongue and the Hyois into which certaine Nerues are distributed from the sixt Coniugation CHAP. XVIII Of the Muscles of the Tongue THe tongue hath three ends in Nature to speake to taste and to rowle the meate in the mouth which cannot bee performed without motion and therefore Nature hath allotted vnto it Muscles which from those three actions may bee called the Three vses of the tongue Talkers the Tasters and the Rowlers of meate In man the especiall end of the creation of the tong and of the motion of the same is for speech as in beasts for tast For because they want hands wherwith to reach their meat or â—other vnto their tast it was necessary they should be able with their tongues to lick and gather it of the earth but man The especially vse in man is able to tast without the motion of the tong because he hath hands wherewith to bring that he would tast vnto the instrument or organ of the sence but both of them haue necessary vse of it in rowling and returning the meat againe vnto the teeth which falleth from them into the space of the mouth VVherefore that it might answer those intentions it was made moueable and had therfore muscles and not muscles onely but also a figure fit for motion some parts being thinner then other yet because it should not moue beyond his teather Nature hath restrained it with a ligament that the body of it which by reason of the diuers fibres it had The bridle of the tongue was infinitely disposed to motion and agitation might rowle vpon that axletree or turne vpon those hinges onely but of those things we haue spoken sufficiently heretofore excepting of the muscles whose proper place this is The Muscles therefore of the Tongue are double some are common others proper Those are esteemed to be common which haue already bene said to belong to the bone Muscles of the tong double Hyois vnto which the third paire also now to be mentioned may happily be referred and those proper which hauing their original other where do determine and end in the substance of the Tongue The first paire are called Styloglossi or the Auger-tongue Muscles Tab 8. fig 1 2 P Galen dissect muscul 14 calleththem 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is transuerse They haue slender originals The 1. paire from the vtter face of the Appendix Styloeides as the fourth paire of the throat from the inside of it and are implanted with transuerse fibres into both sides of the Tongue about the middle thereof yea they proceede forward and attaine vnto the top of the Tongue and when the Tongue is lilled out they draw it in againe But because their Fibres are so wouen one within another when both of them are at once contracted toward their originall they lift the tongue directly vpward but when one of them onely worketh then is the tongue lead vpward to one side onely Tab. 8. is the same with that in lib. 8. Fol. 643. The second paire are called Myloglossi or the grinder-tongue Muscles tab 8. fig. 1. and 2. G. They arise with abroad and inuerted originall and transuerfe fibres from the sides The 2. paire of the lower iaw neare the roots of the grinding teeth called molares and are inserted on both sides into the length of the ligament which is vnder the basis or foundation of the tongue and degenerateth into the bridle by which the tong is tyed to the Chops When one of these workes we turne the tongue vpward and obliquely but when both of them mooue then the tip is directly lifted vpward to the palate and vpper teeth Sometimes this paire doubleth the tongue or maketh it hollow like a gutter and sustaineth it so in forme of a compassed bow to the palate with the assistance of the ligament and bridle becoming somewhat rigide or stiffe And if the second paire belonging to the bone Hyois doe worke with them then the tongue becommeth more narrow and solid and is exerted or thrusted forth to his extent beyond the lips The third paire are called Genuoglossi or the chin-tongue Muscles tab 8. fig. 1. and 2 H. They arise with a narrow beginning from an asperitie or roughnes in the inside of the The 3. paire middest of the Chin afterward they become broader and replenished with right fibres are implanted into the middle of the tong the greatest part of them at the roote yet some part of them runs out toward the tip so that the diuers parts of the same Muscle do worke Their contrarie vses contrarily For the greatest part of their fibres beeing drawne toward their origin all thrust the tongue beyond the teeth and the lippes although Auerrhoes thought that a proper motion of the tongue the lesser part in their action draw it againe inward
12 vnto the muscles thereof and another inward called Pudenda tab 21 ν tab 17 char 15 which issueth from the Artery somtime within the Peritonaeum sometimes without and runneth along the share-bone but of these we haue spoken before in the 15 chapter and repeated them briefly heere to make better way vnto that which followeth The Iliacke trunke of the great artery when it hath passed through the Peritonaeum and the cauity of the belly into the thigh is called Cruralis tab 21 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 tab 17 char 16. from it branches on eyther side are propagated and disseminated into the whole foot eight in number The first is called Muscula Cruralis exterior the vtter crurall muscle Artery tab 21 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Mus Cru exter Itissueth out of the outside of the crural trunke and running downeward is consumed into the foure muscles that compasse the bone of the thigh Table 21 Sheweth the distribution of the great Artery into both the feete TABVLA XXI The third is called Poplitaea Tab. 21. ◠the crurall trunke creeping downeward vnder Poplitaea the hamme being accompanied with ◠large veine maketh this propagation some surcles thereof run out into the back-ward muscles of the thigh the rest descendeth a good way to the ham-veyne The fourth is called Suralis the trunke lurking in the hamme or a little vnder it shooteth Suralis out on each side a deepe propagation tab 21 ΔΔ which are consumed partly in the ioynt of the knee partly into three muscles of the foote which make the Calfe and take their originall there abouts And these are the foure veynes which arise from the trunke in the region of the thigh from hence it descendeth to the hamme tab 21 Θ together with the interior veyne partly to the leg and partly to the foot when it is drenched within the muscles of the leg it is diuided into three notable branches tab 21 Λ Σ Π. The fift which is the first of these three Δ is called Tibiaea exterior the outward leg artery It is a notable branch arising from the outside of the trunke beeing accompanied Tibiaea exterior with the larger branch of the vtter veine and so descendeth along the Fibula or Brace is consumed into the muscles which occupy the leg as far as they are fleshy The sixt Crurall Artery is the second of the forenamed branches ta 21. σ and is called Tibiaea posterior elatior the vpper and backer Leg artery It yssueth a little below the Tibiaea posterior elatior former out of the backer and lower part of the trunk and descendeth as far as to the commixtion of the tendons of the muscles that make the Calfe being accompanied with the hinder branch of the interior veine The seauenth which is the third and last of the aforesayde branches Ta. 21. Πis called Tibiaea posterior humilior Tibiaea posterior et humilior the lower and backer Leg Artery It ariseth out of the backeward and exterior part of the trunke and being accompanyed through the membranous Ligament with the fore-branch of the inner veine which ioyneth the Brace vnto the Leg it is hidde within the muscles and runneth forward and downward further then the other two till it passe the transuerse Ligament and attayne to the top of the foote Table 21. q from whence it is disseminated into the muscles that leade the Toes backeward at which place Vessalius and Platerus say that the pulse may be easily felt The eight Artery of the Leg is nothing else but the remaynder of the Crurall trunke What the eight artery is descending along the backeside of the Tibea or Leg tab 21. the lower Ξ betwixt the 2. and 3. muscles of the Toes and so it passeth betwixt the heele the inner ankle vnto the soale of the foot but at the inner ankle it offers a branch to the foote ta 21. ψ which reacheth to the muscle of the great Toe and creepeth a good way vpon the top of the foot That which is left Ta. 21. Ω amongst the tendons of the muscles of the Toes is deuided into two branches ab each of which departeth into 5. surcles for the inner branch c affordeth two to the great Toe two to that next it and one to the middle The exterior b offereth two to the little Toe two to that next it and one to the middle Toe d and the lower side thereof And thus much concerning the distribution of the great Artery throughout the whole body It remayneth that wee come vnto the third sort of vesselles which are the nerues for whose prosecution we haue set aside the third part of this Booke The third part of the Eleauenth Booke concerning the Nerues CHAP. XXI Of Nerues in Generall AS the Naturall Faculty together with the Bloud and the thicker Spirit is deriued through the Veines the Vitall with Bloud and a thinner Spirite through the Arteries as through Canales and Water-courses into all the partes of the body so the Animall Faculties that is of Sense and Motion are conuayed into those parts which are capable thereof with a subtle and fine Spirite along by the Nerues as it were by the strings of an Instrument The Natures Vses and Diuisions of the Veines and Arteries wee haue vnfoulded in the two former parts of this Booke and are come in this place to the structure differences and diuarications of the Nerues The Grecians call Nerues 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the acception of which words among the Phisitians The names of Nerues and their kinds is manifould Erotianus thinketh that Hippocrates vsed the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for all sortes of vessels Veines Arteries and Nerues Galen in his first Booke de motu musculorum in the beginning of his Booke de ossibus and in many other places maketh three kindes of Nerues which appeare without bloud and without any hollownes Of these Nerues some proceede out of Bones others out of Muscles others are deriued from the Brayne and the spinall Marrow Those which yssue out of the Bones their protuberations are called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Vincula Tyes Bands or Ligaments Of these we shall heare particularly in the next Booke Those Nerues that yssue out of Muscles are parts of the Muscles and are called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is neruous propagations and Tendons Now a Tendon is nothing else but an excressence or out-growing of the Fibres of a Ligament and a Nerue which being sprinkled through the flesh doe meete together as it were in one Chord by which chord the loynts are ledde according to the good pleasure of our will The third kinde of Nerues are those which the Phisitians doe properly call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and that from their office 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because they doe nutare siue flectere that is incline or bend and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 because they doe Tendere that is stretch These Nerues do
already declared doth sufficiently witnes But as Hippocrates Erasistratus when he was wiser Herophilus Galen and most Anatomists do agree from the braine from which also the spinall marrow draweth his original From the brain I say which is manifested as wel by sense in the dissection therof where we see many riuers of nerues in the braine to which those of the body are continuated as also because their substances are marrowy alike and cloathed each of them with two membranes Moreouer the affects or diseases of the head doe manifestly proue that all Sense and motion doe flow from the Brayne So in the Apoplexy which is caused by an obstruction of the passages of the Brayne the Animall Faculty is instantly intercepted albeit the heart be altogether indempnified So in the Epilepsie or Falling sicknes where the marrow of the brayne from whence the nerues do yssue is affected the whole body is drawn into Convulsion which is nothing so when the heart is affected But we sayde before that a beginning is double one of Generation another of Dispensation An original double In respect of their Generation their beginning is Seede of which as of their immediate matter they are framed In respect of their Dispensation their beginning is in the brayne together I meane with the After-brayne which is the originall à quo from which Those Pipes if so you list to call them which receiue Sense and Motion are distributed into the body as the part standeth in need of the one or the other or both Againe the Nerues are sayde to be of two sorts some proceeding from the brayne The differences of nerues some from the spinall marrow and of these againe some from the beginning of the Spinall marrow that is being yet contayned in the scull others in the Spinall marrow which is in the Rack-bones of the Chine Againe of these some belong to the marrow of the Necke some of the Chest some of the Loynes and some of the Os sacrum or Holy-bone to which also we may adioyne the nerues of the Ioynts Bauhine in this place interposeth his owne opinion which is that all Nerues doe yssue Bauhines opinion of the originall of nerues 8. seueral opinions quoted by him from the marrow of the brayne oblongated or lengthned out some whilest it remayneth yet in the Scull and some after But withall hee maketh mention of diuers opinions both of the Ancient and late Writers concerning the originall of the Nerues which discourse of his we will here transcribe but contract it as briefly as we can Hee reckoneth therefore eight opinions for the ninth we thinke not worthy to be remembred The first is of Hippocrates in his booke de natura ossium in the very beginning where Hippocrates he sayth that the original of the nerues is from the Nowle vnto the Spine the Hippe the Share the Thighes the Armes the Legs and the Foote The second is Aristotles who in many places deliuereth that they arise from the heart because in it there are aboundance of nerues for which hee mistooke the fibres and because Aristotle from thence motions doe arise and vnder his Ensigne Alexander Auicen and the whole schoole of the Peripateticks doe merrit or band themselues This opinion of Aristotle Auerhoes and Aponensis with some others doe maintayne indeede but with a distinction affirming that they issue from the hart mediante cerebro by the mediation of the brayne or that they arise from the heart and are multiplyed and propagated in the brain The third is that of Praxagoras who thought that the Nerues were nothing else but Praxagoras extenuated Arteries The fourth of Erasistratus who thought they yssued from the Dura meninx but in his Erasistratus age he changed his mind as Galen witnesseth of him The fift is Galens who determineth that the Nerues and the Spinal marrow doe proceede Galen from the brayne The sixt is that of Vesalius who saith that some Nerues issue out of the Scull others Vessalius out of the Racks of the Spine those that proceede out of the Scull doe arise from the basis of the forepart of the braine or from the beginning of the Spinal Marrow before it enter into the spondelles The rest from the Spinall marrow remayning within the Racke-bones The seauenth is Falopius his opinion in his obseruations where hee sayeth that some Falopius Nerues as those that are soft doe arise from the brayne or the marrow within the Scul others from the Spinall marrow The eight is Varolius opinion who sayth that all Nerues doe take their original from the Spinall marrow which proceedeth from the brayne and the After-brayne and with Varolius him doe Platerus Archangelus and Laurentius vpon the matter consent as also doeth Bauhine as you haue heard before The Nerues therefore which yssue from the Marrow of the Brayne contayned yet within the Scull are commonly accounted 7 paires according to Galen some make nine coniugations which are called Nerui cerebri The Nerues of the Brayne which may be expressed in this disticke Optica prima oculos mouit altera tertia gustat Quartaque quinta audit vaga sexta septima linguae est The Opticks first Eye Mouers next the third and fourth doe Tast The fift doth Heare the sixt doth gad the Tongue claymes seuenth and last To which also we may adde the organs of Smelling Other Nerues do arise from the same marrow after it is falne through the great hole of the Nowle-bone and runneth thorough the holes bored in the racke-bones of the spine where it is properly called Spinalis medulla the Spinal Marrow And these are thirty paires or Coniugations that is to say seuen of the Neck of the Chest or backe twelue fiue of 30. pair of the spinall marow the Loines and six of the Holy-bone from which the nerues of the ioynts do arise For the hand receiueth sometimes fiue some sixe propagations from the fift sixt and seuenth paires of the necke and from the first and second paires of the Chest the foot receiueth foure Nerues from the three lower paires of the Loines and from the foure sometimes the fiue vppermost of the Holy-bone which are called nerues of the spinall marrow These nerues do yssue on either side after the same manner for no nerue is produced without his companion and therefore the Grecians called them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Latines Neruorum paria or Coniugia paires or Coniugations of nerues All these Coniugations as they do arise alike one from the right hand the other from the left so are they also distributed after one and the same manner except onely the sixt paire of the Braine whose right nerue is not diuided as is the left as we shall heare afterward And thus much shall haue bene sufficient to haue said in generall concerning the nature differences vse and originall of the nerues Now we descend vnto their particular Historie beginning with
those of the Braine because thence all nerues take their Originall CHAP. XXII Of the Nerues of the Eyes or of the first and second Coniugations THose two processes of the Braine called Mammillares which are the Instruments The Mamillary processes of Smelling do come to be handled in the first place but beecause we haue related their History and exhibited the Table which belongeth to them in the sixteenth chapter of the seuenth Booke we will referre the reader for his satisfaction vnto that place and proceede vnto the nerues of the eyes whereof indeede we made some mention before but that briefely and by the way as also we haue done of the rest of the nerues because they tooke their Original from the diuers parts of the substance of the Braine which was then the mayne subiect of our discourse The nerues therefore of the eyes are of two sorts the first are called Opticks or nerui visorij because by them we See The second are called Oculorum motorij the moouing nerues of the eyes for by them the eyes are wonderfully and sodainly moued The Optickes are the first Coniugation of the Nerues of the Braine Tab. 22. figure 1 and 2 G which are the thickest of all the Coniugations of the Braine yea of all the rest The Opticke Nerues if they be not compounded of diuers filaments And so much the thicker they were because saith Galen in the third chapter of his sixteene booke de vsu partium they haue sensible cauities beside of all the others they are the softest They arise vnder the middle of the basis of the Braine where the marrow beginneth Their original to be lengthned Galen in the third chapter of his sixteenth booke de vsu partium sayeth they arise from both sides of the forward ventricles to whose ends they are ioyned Howsoeuer after their originall they run obliquely inward and forward and when they haue gone a little distance and as it were in the middest of their iourny they are vnited aboue the saddle of the Wedge-bone Tab. 22. figure 1 H not onely by intersection or simple contaction but by a confusion of their marrowes beeing so mingled as they make one common body wherein the two nerues cannot be separated one from another Presently Their confusion after this confusion they are againe separated Tab. 22. figu 1 aboue H running each of them obliquely outwarde by a hole of the wedge-bone which was made of purpose commonly accounted for the first hole of the same and so getting out of the Scull the right runs vnto the center of the right eye on the hinder part and the left vnto the center of the left as if they were the roots of the eyes Notwithstanding Vesalius and Platerus do not thinke that their implantation is into the center but to the right side warde In bruite beastes indeede they are not implanted into the center but much lower for they Separation looke not so much forward as sideward These nerues are not dissolued into Fibres as other nerues are but are spred abroad within the eye notwithstanding Vesalius saith that he hath obserued them in Swine to consist of many Filaments as doe the Nerues of the Legges The substance of the Opticke Nerue is double Marrowey and Membranous for the Their substance inner part is soft which you shall perceiue will squeeze out if you presse the nerue hard whilest it is yet compassed with his membranes Of this Marrowey substance diffused in the orbe of the Eye is made that coate which is called Amphiblestroides or Retina tunica from the resemblance it hath with a Net tab Retina tunica 22. fig. 1. and 2. I which notwithstanding to say trueth is nothing lesse then a coate because it differeth nothing at all from the substance of the brayne compassing the vitrious humour round about and the middle part of the Eye that so the visiue spirites might bee diffused through the cauity thereof The membranes of the Optick Nerues are two one from the Pia mater and another Their membranes from the Dura mater notwithstanding from their originall to the hole which is in the orb of the Eye and wherethrough they passe they are inuested onely with the Pia mater from thence to the eye it selfe they assume another inuolution or vestment from the Dura Meninx which also is consumed into the horny coate as the membrane they haue from the Pia mater is spent into the grapie Hence it is that by the continuation of this nerue in a very moment of time the Animal spirit is conuayed vnto the Pupilla or apple of the Eie which is nothing else but the perforation or hole of the grapy coate And therefore when one eye is shut we may easily discerne that the Pupilla of the other will be suddenly dilated because of the affluence of the spirits And by this demonstration Galen in the 4. chapter of his 7. booke de placitis maketh it manifest euen to the very Sense that there is not onely a spirit but an Animall spirit in the body of man If it be demanded why Nature did so prouide that when one Eye is shut the spirites should all accrew vnto the other I answere it was to accomplish the perfection of that Sense for the concourse of spirites doe better receiue the impression of the obiect and conuay it to the Sense with more speede and certainty Concerning the counsell of Nature in vniting the Opticke Nerues many men haue disputed diuersly Galen thought it was that one obiect might not appeare double Diuers reasons why the opticks are vnited Answered which conceite Vessalius dislikes and so doth Archangelus who addeth that if that had bin the reason the Nerues of Hearing of Smelling and of the rest of the Senses should haue beene vnited in the middle of their iorney that one audible or odorable thing might not appeare double The second reason giuen for the vnition of the Opticks is that one Eie being put out the creature might see with the other but it is more reasonable to say that Natures first intention was that both the eyes should alwayes remayne sound The third reason that when one Eye is shut all the visiue Spirites should hasten vnto the other to make the sight more acute or sharp But it may be answered that one Nerue cannot contayne so much spirits as was in both He that shoots at a marke in a Crosse-bow or in a Peece thinks haply that he sees more sharply when he blinks of one eye then when he seeth his marke with both but therein hee is deceiued for indeede he seeth not his marke so well yet is able to lay his leuell better because hee seeth more directly when he lookes through a narrow hole The fourth reason some conceiue to be that when we are constrayned to look through a narrow hole or by the same right line by which both the eyes cannot discerne in such a case the
sight of both eyes might be vnited into one But I doe not thinke sayth Archangelus that Nature had any such scope in her first intention The fift and last reason giuen of the vnition is the most probable and that is that these soft nerues might not be put to distres in the middle of their passage wherto say the trueth they are in most danger as well because of their notable cauities as also because of Archangelus their softnes for they walke through the moister part of the brayne that is the lower and the faculty of seeing requires such a cauity and such a softnes Thus far Archangelus They are called Opticke Nerues that is visiue from their action because they communicate The names of the opticks the visiue faculty or the sense of Seeing vnto the Eye They are called also by Herophilus meatus visorij because sayth he they onely are sensibly bored which also Galen approueth who sayth that they are manifestly perforated at each end Many Dissectors are able to perceiue their perforation in the lower part where they touch the Eyes but sayth Galen in the fourth chapter of the 7. booke de placitis he that would descern the other perforation that is at their originall must obserue three things First that the creature which hee dissects bee great secondly that the dissection bee made presently after death Thirdly that the ayer be cleare and lucide where he makes his dissection Hee addeth also in the same place a reason why it was necessary that these nerues should rather be perforated then any other and that is because these nerues do leade along the animall faculty by animall spirits or by a spirituall substance For the rest they needed onely bee Whether the opticks be perforared porous without any hole or perforation because the faculty in them is conuayed no by animall spirits but onely by a beaming irradiation But the latter Anatomists with one consent do deny any such conspicuous perforation Vesalius I neuer met with it although I haue cut vp dogs aliue and other large creatures onely for this purpose yea saith hee I haue opened the head of a man within lesse then a quarter of an houre after it was cut off Opinions of Anatomists and haue carefully kept it warme with hot water and yet could neuer find any such perforation Falopius in his obseruations The optickes are not manifestly perforated Columbus No pore or hole may bee seene in them neyther in an Oxe nor any greater creature Laurentius I neuer obserued any conspicuous cauity Volcher The opticke nerue is not made of a solid and perforated body but of many neruous fibres bound and vnited by Membranes Thus you see that the streame of Anatomists runs directly against this opinion of Galen and they render a reason for say they their substance being rare and soft the spirit may easily passe through them vnto the eyes yea all the sinewes although they haue no visible holes yet are they full of spirits for the sense is hindred both by compression and by obstruction So if a nerue be intercepted with a band or tye the part below looseth Questions concerning the sâ—â—rits in the nerues sense for the spirits of the vpper part being separated from the lower there is no communion betweene them but if the tye be taken away the sense returneth And hence it is that when the opticks are obstructed in that disease which the Arabians call Gutta serena the action of seeing is vtterly taken away But whether we are to beleeue that in euery nerue there is a spirit as there is a spirite in the braine which being perished the whole creature becommeth stupid and beeing strong or plentifull serueth for the sense and motion of the parts and whether if there bee any such spirits they be inbred and seated in the nerue of the part and onely awaked by a message from the braine or whether at such time as we would moue any member the motiue spirit falleth from the braine into the nerue we confesse with Galen in the place before quoted that we are not able absolutely to determine Bauhine concludeth that these Nerues are not onely thicke and of a rare texture inuested by both the membranes of the braine and fit to giue way for the transportation of the Bauhines determination spirits but also saith he wee beleeue with Galen that they are porous as will especially appeare if they bee sodden and Archangelus saith that in the coition of the opticke nerues there is a common cauity insculped out of one into another We say also with Galen in the eight chapter of his ninth booke de vsu partium that the opticks in dignity are preferred worthily before the moouing Nerues of the eyes because the principall part of vision or sight consisteth in them Moreouer saith Bauhine whilest they are yet in the Scul certaine branches of the sleepy arteries do on eyther side touch them which obseruation he tooke out of Galen in the place before quoted The vse of the opticke nerues is one and the same according to all Anatomists who heerein do accord with Galen that through them the sensatiue soule and the visiue spirits The vse of the opticks are conuayed out of the marrow of the braine into the eyes The second coniugation of the braine is of the Nerues that mooue the eyes Tab. 22 fig. 1 and 2. K distinguished from the former coniugation onely by a thin bone This The second coniugation of the eyemoouers their original coniugation is small and fine much lesse then the former and harder because it is to bee inserted into muscles It ariseth out of the basis of the marrow of the braine and so runneth forward vnto the cauity of the eye where it falleth out of the Scull through a proper hole accounted for the second perforation of the wedge bone This hole is not round as that which was bored for the optickes but somewhat long saith Galen in the eight chap. of his 9. booke de vsu partium because three nerues were to Where they passe the scul passe through it This the third coniugation or the second branch of the third paire coÌ„monly so called and the eight coniugation or the lesser roote of the fift paire and therefore Columbus and Archangelus call it Fissuram orbitae a cleft or chinke of the Orbe of the eye This moouing Nerue hauing perforated the bone is fastned to the Opticke and diuided The diuision 〈◊〉 pâ—ire into good large braunches which are conueyed to the seauen muscles of the eie saith Vesalius and Platerus to flue muscles of the eye and to two of the eye-lid saieth Columbus and Archangelus to foure onely of the eye and that that lifteth vp the eye lidde saith Falopius and Laurentius Bauhine particularizeth concerning their insertion on this manner The first branch climbeth ouer the Opticke and is disseminated into the muscle that lifteth vp the eye-lid and the Muscle
fig. 2 v neare the skinne issuing through a hole bored in the foreside of the Iaw is communicated to the lower lip and to the skin thereof in many surcles From this nerue also before it get into the Iaw there ariseth often a small sinew slender indeede but strong and long which runneth vnder the Iaw till it come to the muscle which openeth the mouth and to those which are placed vnder the Chin and is inserted partly into the bone Hyois and partly into the tongue The remainder Finally the trunke it selfe Tab. 21 fig. 2 Y which Falopius in his Obseruations calleth the fift nerue of the third coniugatiō passeth through the muscles that lurke in the mouth and beeing accompanied with the trunke of the other hand passeth vnto the side of the tongue and is consumed into the coate thereof to make it a fit organ to discerne the differences of sapors or Tastes and from it certaine smal surcles are fixed into the substance of the tongue From this coniugation that which is commonly numbred for the fourth by Galen Vesalius Columbus Platerus and Laurentius Tab. 2 fig. 1 and 2 Z seemeth not to bee distinguished not because it is nearest to that before named but because it taketh his original though his surcles be many out of one place and in one place onely perforateth the Dura How to count the coniugations of the sinewes meninx For those paires or coniugations which are commonly numbred for the sixt the seauenth although they arise from many propagations yet because the surcles are vnited together and so vnited do fall through one perforation of the Dura meninx are not accounted for double or manifold paires for we thinke with Falopius that in the distinguishing of the coniugations of the nerues the holes of the Scul are not to be considered for if this were to be obserued then because the second and the third payres and the eight do passe through one and the same hole they should bee accounted all for one coniugation which were yet neuer so accounted by any Anatomist The originall of this nerue is lesser then the former neare vnto it and a little harder The originall of it therefore Galen saith that it springeth more out of the Basis of the braine as from a part thereof which is the harder Presently after the original it passeth a little forward and is mingled with the third with which it issueth at a common hole and at the pallate is diuided into diuers branches into whose whole coate it is inserted tab 22 fig. 2 the lower Z and giueth vnto it the sense of Tasting Galen sayth it is somewhat hard because the coate which compasseth the mouth is harder then the tongue and other parts of the mouth and in this respect his sense is the duller Sometime two small branches which descend neare the Almonds and the Appendix called Styloides vnto the roote of the tongue are distributed through his coate And thus much of the fourth coniugation CHAP. XXIIII Of the Auditory Nerue or the fift Coniugation THE fift Coniugation Tab. 22 fig. 1 and 2. a at the sides of the basis of the The fift coniugation braine acording to Galen ariseth out of the marrow of the braine elongated and is made of two surcles or nerues The one softer and indeed the softest except the opticks and nearest to the Eare the other harder These two do together issue through the membrane run into the stonybone many thinke they are ioyned accounting them for one nerue for they say the fift Coniugation consisteth of a soft and a hard part but indeede and trueth they are distinguished ta 22. fig. 2. It appeareth vnder a which also Galen and Falopius did obserue This Nerue therefore runneth through a large but writhen hole in the stony-bone His double originall appoynted properly for it which is numbred for the fift perforation of the Temple-bone into the cauity which is like a Cony-burrough prepared for the Organ of Hearing Presently His out-gate after the harder part runneth forward through a proper Canale or Pipe being accompanied with an artery arising from that artery which is disseminated through the dura Progresse meninx and through the same bone it returneth obliquely backeward and falleth into that cauity wherein that Timpanum or Drum is yet so that it alwayes buts vpon his owne bony Canale from thence being more reflected it sendeth forth two shoots one aboue and another below both which do passe through by their proper holes The vpper ta 22. fig. 1. and 2. b runneth ouerthwart through the hole through which likewise a small veine passeth vnto the Organ of Hearing And this shoote is mixed ta 22. fig. 2. R with that branch of the fourth paire or of the third according to common Anatomists which we sayd was like the tendrill of a vine but the lower tab 22. fig. 2. c passeth out at a hole which is very streight and writhen and being carried ouerthwart ouer the masseter muscle is instantly mixed with the branch of the third payre that is like the tendrill of a vine or to the propagation of the sinew that goeth vnto the Tongue and from the Tongue is led along to the muscles of the Cheekes and to the skinne about the roote of the outward eare and haply this Nerue assisteth the Tast as well as the Hearing and the reason may hence be deriued why those that are borne deafe are also borne dumbe Sometimes when this Nerue hath gotten through the Blind hole it runneth downward as if it would accompany the sixt coniugation ta 21. fig. 1. and 2. c and sendeth small branches to the His branches vnto the ioynts proper muscles of the Larinx whence it is that because of the consent betwixt the Eares the Tongue and the Larinx a dry cough ariseth if we picke our Eares to deep Sometime also it sendeth small braunches into the whole arme with the fourth fift and sixt nerues of the arme yea oftentimes it accompanieth the spinal marrow and sendeth his branches together with the nerues of the marrow into the whole foote But the soft part of this The true auditory nerue nerue table 22. fig. 2. a which is indeede Neruus auditorius the true Auditory Nerue accompanyeth the hard part and when it hath attayned vnto the end of the forenamed cauity it is dilated after the manner of a membrane Ta. 22. figu 1. and 2. Φ becommeth the chiefe instrument of Hearing and there remayneth after the same manner that we mentioned before in the expansion of the Organ of Smelling CHAP. XXV Of the sixt seauenth and eight Coniugations THE sixt Coniugation ta 22. fig. 2 c taketh his beginning from a few fibres a little below the originall of the fift payre or of the Auditory Nerue But The sixt coniugation these fibres are presently and mutually vnited and are thought to make one great nerue whereas indeede they
very beginning of the spinall marrow properly so called Thence therefore it ariseth with more rootes then one and those somewhat distant one from another But they vnite themselues and passe out of the scull by an oblique and proper perforation in the Nowle-bone and for more security this Coniugation saith Galen in the eleuenth of the ninth de vsu partium is ioyned by strong membranes with the sixt coniugation but not commixed therewith saith Falopius in his Obseruations For Retribution it communicateth to the sixt paire a portion of it selfe Tab. 22. fig. 2 m that is to say sometimes one fibre or string and sometimes two but the coniugation it selfe keepeth stil his owne body and with a round and full thred runneth downward vnto the tongue whose roote when it attaineth the greater part thereof Table 22. fig. 22 is dissolued or as it were vntwisted and parted into many fibres which as so many surcles are imparted into all the muscles of the tongue The lesser part sendeth some braunches vnto the muscles of the bone Hyois and the Throttle to assist their motion It affoordeth also some surcles Tab. 22. fig. 2 l vnto the His implantation muscles which take their originall from the appendix which is called Stylotdes Finally the Fibers of the greater branch doe seeme to be commixed with the Fibres of the fifte Coniugation The eight coniugation if we may so call them which others do ascribe vnto the fift The eight Coniugation Tab. 22. fig. 1 2 d yssueth out of the marrow of the Braine aboue the Auditory nerue and is much slenderer and harder then it betwixt the second and third coniugations It runneth vpward and forward vnder the sides of the basis of the Braine and hauing perforated the Dura Meninx betwixt the second and thirde coniugations it getteth into the orbe of the eye through the hole of the second coniugation saith Bauhine according to Falopius although Vesalius and Platerus thinke it passeth through a proper perforation in the wedge-bone and so goeth vnto the temporall muscle and that which lurketh in the Implantation mouth but the truth is that it is almost wholy consumed in that muscle of the eie which draweth it to the vtter angle This coniugation saith Bauhine in regard of his originall should haue bene acounted before the fift and those that follow but least in changing the number resolued vpon by Anatomists we should breede confusion wee haue rather thought good to reckon it in the last place Columbus addeth a ninth paire of which hee challengeth the inuention and for ought I know no man is desirous to take that prize out of his hande which Columbus his 9 Coniugation when they haue they shall not be able to hold but he saith that they be very smal nerues arising from the two processes of the Braine which are called Nates or the Buttockes neere the Testicles they bend their course toward the face and passe out by the third fourth coniugations and are inserted into the third muscle of the eye-lid but allow a branch also to the fift muscle of the eye Thus farre Columbus And so much concerning the coniugations of nerues seauen or eight if you will or nine if you beleeue Columbus which yssue from the marrow of the Braine contained yet within the Scull Now we proceede vnto those that yssue from the spinall marrow when it is falne out of the Scull CHAP. XXVI Of the Nerues which yssue from the spinall Marrow in the Necke THE coniugations before mentioned are called productions of the Braine and Nerues of the Braine albeit they yssue from the lengthened Marrowe thereof but yet contained within the Scull Now we come vnto those sinewes which draw their originall from the same marrow indeed but that contained in the rack-bones of the spine and therefore are called Nerues of the Spinall marrow For from this marrow all the parts which are vnder the face excepting the bowels and the instruments of the voyce do receiue Nerues the bowels and the instruments of the voyce do not partly because it was necessary that some of them shold bee immediately ioyned with the Braine as the Heart and the Liuer for it behooued that all the principles of those faculties whereby the creature is gouerned should be conioyned partly because their situation is neere vnto the Braine and they stande in neede onely of Sense The Nerues of the spinall Marrow are accounted thirty Coniugations yssuing out of distinct parts and seates as out of the marrow of the Necke the Chest the Loynes and the Holy-bone contained within their vertebrae or rack-bones and issuing out of their perforations or holes thrilled in them These holes are eyther double before and behind as in the two first of the neck and fiue of the Holy-bone or single in each side of the racks as in the rest The coniugations of the necke some account seauen as Galen Vesalius Platerus and 7 of the neck Laurentius yet Galen in the fift of the 13 de vsu partium reckons 8 and so doth Archangelus Columbus but fiue These are dispersed into the outside of the whole head and his Muscles The first and second coniugation do not arise after the manner of other Nerues out of The first the sides of the spondels one out of the right side the other out of the left but one falleth through the hole on the foreside the other through the hole on the backside which happeneth His diuision because of the different articulation of these two rackes which is so made for the more security of the motion The first Coniugation issueth betweene the Nowle and the first racke-bone which that it might more easily be there is a certaine small cauity in the nowle-bone and in the first vertebra yet in dogs in whom the spondell is greater the cauity is onely in it but before it issue it is reflected aboue the spinall marrow and presently is diuided into two small branches one antertor which is very small Tab. 23 H and so small that Vesalius saith it is not alwayes visible but Columbus maketh no mention of it at all This nerue is inserted into the muscles which lye vpon the necke and vnder the gullet which bend the neck accounted by Vesalius and Platerus for the first payre that moue the Subdiuision backe but Bauhine reckoneth it for the first bender of the necke and calleth it Longus or the Long-muscle Table 23 is the same with Table 22. Lib. 7. folio 490. The other posterior Tab. 24 F which is subdiuided into a double surcle one lesser which are disseminated into the smal muscles of the head seated in the Occipitiū or nowle the right branch into the muscles on the right side and the left into the muscles of the left side which also we must vnderstand of the nerues that follow The other surcle of the posterior branch Tab. 24 G goeth into the beginning of the muscle that
of the Soule we declared in the first book The outward walles we dismantled in the second The Cooke-roomes and sculleries with all the houses of Office and roomes of repast we suruayed in the third The Geniall bed and the Nursery we viewed in the fourth and fift In the sixt we were ledde into the rich Parlor of pleasure wherein we were entertained by a leuy of Damozels one Modest as Modesty it selfe another Shamefast another Coy another Iocond and merry another Sad and lumpish and a world of such Passions we found inhabiting in the Little world there also we saw the curious clocke of the heart mooued by a perpetuall motion the Heralds of honor those nimble and quicke Purseuants those agile spirits whose presence giues life whose pleasance giues cheere refreshment whether soeuer they are sent From thence wee ascended in the seauenth Booke by staires of Iuory into the presence Chamber where the Soule maketh her chiefe abode there we saw the Counsell gathered the Records opened and Dispatches made and signed for the good gouernement of the whole family From thence in the eight Booke we clombe vnto the battlements and saw the watch of the Senses set to discouer and giue warning of the approches of enemies or friends In the ninth we obserued the guard appointed to fetch in the prouision from without to entertaine or giue the repulse to defend or offend as cause required In the tenth we discouered the Materials which filled vp the empty distances in the walles and parted the roomes asunder In the eleuenth we followed the courses conuayances the enteries and Lobyes which leade throughout the whole edifice from chamber to chamber out of one office into another Now we are ariued neare the principals of the building where we may see how they are ioyned how they are fastened and bound together how they are couered and defended how they are interlaced and intertexed And finally in the next and last booke wee shall with God to friend come vnto the Principals themselues and to the very foundation ground-worke whereon the whole Frame is raysed The first part Of Gristles CHAP. 1. Of the definition vse and differences of Gristles BEfore we come vnto the particular Histories of the Gristles it will bee requisite to speake something in generall which may open their nature The distinction of a Cartilage vses and differences A Gristle therefore is a similar part cold and dry made out of the thickest part of the seede gathered together by the power of heate and ordained to secure the variety of motions and to put by outward violence That it is similar is very manifest because it is altogether like it selfe the least fragment or particle thereof retaining the nature temper and name of the whole This Gristle if we will beleeue Galen is to be numbred in the list of those parts which are gouerned by themselues and do not gouerne others It is cold because the heat soone The explication of the definition vanisheth away and dry for that the moysture is vapoured from it whence also it becommeth hard but not so hard as a bone The matter of it is the crassament or thickest part of the seede The efficient is heate which is the immediate organ of the procreating Faculty to which the Altering and the Forming vertues are assistant yet is not this an extending heate such as whereby the Membranes are dilated nor perforating such as boreth the Veines and Arteries but a more remisse degree which gathereth or curdleth the parts together and is indeede proportionable to cold in outward things there being nothing actually cold in a liuing body But as a high degree of heate doth melt the Lead which caketh when it is lesse hotte though a great heat do remaine yet in it so it is in the body the greater heare diuideth the parts and the lesser gathereth or if we may so say congealeth them The finall cause is expressed in the last particle of the definition for although there be diuers vses of Gristles as we shall shewe by and by yet these two are principall First to make the ioynts of the bones which are coupled by Diarthrosis more gladde or easy to mooue and more secure and permanent Secondly to defend the parts vnder them from outward impressions or iniuries The Nature of a Gristle is much vnlike that of a bone for saith Aristotle when the bones are in any creatures wanting the supply is made by Gristles Their Tempers also are not farre asunder Sense they haue none because the creature should not be in perpetuall paine neither indeed haue they any Nerues dispersed through them Notwithstanding as we shall say in the next Booke there are some kinde of bones which haue Sense How Gristles and Bones do differ The teeth for in stance So some Gristles seeme to haue Sense as those of the Eye-lids because certaine small Tendrils of Nerues do touch them Finally saith Laurentius a bone and a gristle do differ but secundum magis minus For bones are harder drier and colder yet we may say further that all Gristles are transparant smooth and polished many bones vnequall and sharpe Moreouer a Cartilage or gristle hath no marrow nor cauity nor corners or celles in it as bones haue because there was no neede of them for being not so thick or solid as a bone their aliment doth easily passe through their substance Wee conclude therefore that a gristle is of a middle nature betwixt a Bone and a Ligament faster then a Bone and harder then a Ligament The vses of the Gristles are diuers and those very admirable and wonderful The first The vses of the Gristles and most common vse is to helpe the motion of the bones which are ioyned with a laxe or loose articulation for by the helpe of the Gristle the motion becommeth more easie The first more secure and more permanent More easie for being smooth and polished it leuigateth and maketh slippery the asperities or roughnesse of the bones and so their heads become more glib or prompt in their motion Whence it is that all moueable ioynts are crusted ouer with a Gristle So also are the heads the sinus or cups or cauities of bones where they touch one another lined with a smooth gristle They make the motion more secure because the gristle encreaseth the hollownesse of the bone that so the articulation is not so easily luxed or put out of ioynt as we may see in the articulation of the arm with the shoulder-blade and in many others Finally by the inter-vening of the gristle the motion is preserued and made more lasting and dureable for the extremities or ends of bones being very hard by their mutuall contaction and perpetuall attrition would haue bene worne and fretted and so in time the motion would haue decayed which inconuenience is auoided because they are compassed or lined ouer with a soft gristle The second vse of Gristles
Moreouer in the cauity or hollownesse of the Shoulder-blade Nature placed a Gristle to increase the sinus or bosome of the bone least in violent motions the ioynt should bee easily luxed or put out In the lower part of the Cubit which hath an acute or sharpe processe there appeareth a gristle which filleth vp the empty distance It hindereth the Hand when it is led to Of the cubit the side frō offending against that acute processe Betwixt the Share-bones there is a thick hard gristle so vniting them together that it is not credible they shold be seuered in the time of trauell as we haue shewed before in the 33. Question of our fift booke In the cauity Of the hanches of the hanch-bone there is another gristle which increaseth the compasse of the bosome or cauity therein Finally in the lower heads of the thighes we finde two semicircular gristles which inlarge the lippes of the cauities In a word almost euery articulation is cursted ouer with a gristle to make the motion more easie more secure and more permanent and so much concerning Gristles Now we proceede vnto the Ligaments The second part of Ligaments CHAP. VI. Of the Nature Vse and differences of Ligaments AS the lubricity of Gristles makes the motion of the Bones more nimble and quicke so the Ligaments doe secure both motion articulation but there is a double acception of a Ligament the A double acception of a ligament one large the other presse and more restrained In the first Sense we call any thing a Ligament which tyeth one part to another So Hippocrates calleth the skin and the flesh colligations the ancients also called all manner of vesselles Veines Arteries and Sinnewes Common Ligaments In the presse and strict signification wee call that a Ligament which is a hard and firme body yet laxe and flexible and without sense which incompasseth tyeth downe and contayneth the ioynts This kinde of Ligament properly so called the Grecians call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Latins copula vinculum Ligamentum wee may call it a Tie but because the worde Ligament is growne into common vse we will if you please retayne it for the most part Laurentius giueth The definition of a ligament this definition of a Ligament It is a similar cold and dry part of a middle nature betwixt a Nerue and a Gristle betwixt a Membrane and a Gristle sayth Bauhine ingendred by the power of heat out of the slimy part of the Seede and being of great vse in colligation contayning inuesting and forming of Muscles Concerning the Temper of a Ligament which is the forme of the similar part all men do agree that it is cold and dry albeit some peculiar ligaments of ioyntes are lined ouer with a mucous and slimy humour but concerning those things which accompany follow and happen to the temper many haue made scruple hardnesse and softnesse followe the temper sense and motion happen vnto it We resolue that Ligaments are of a middle Nature betwixt Gristles and Membranes harder then Membranes least in vehement motions they should bee broken and softer then Gristles that they might more easily follow and obey the Muscles which moue the bones For the most part they are all insensible as well because they receiue no Nerues into them as also least being perpetually moued they should breed perpetuall payne It may be obiected that Galen in his 3. booke de facultat natural sayth that Ligaments consist of sensible fibres but we must know that by sensible in that place Galen vnderstandeth not that which hath Sense but that which is liable to Sense not that which is sensatiue but that which is sensible For Ligaments borrow nothing from the brayne and therefore haue no sense neither can they mooue themselues notwithstanding as among the bones the Teeth haue sense among the gristles those that make the Eye-liddes so amongst the Ligaments there are some which haue the sense of touching as the two ligaments that make the yarde and the reyne or bridle of the Tongue The matter of Ligaments is the slimy part of the seed extended or lengthned by heat The matter of ligaments whence it is that they can bee contracted and againe relaxed Their Aliment I doe not take to be sayth Laurentius as some would marrow but bloud conuayed vnto them by Capillary veines which are so little that they cannot be perceiued The vses of Ligaments are diuers the first and most common is to firme and assure Their vses the articulations especially those that are more laxe of the bones and the gristles and to hinder luxation for it was to be feared that when the bones are separated in violent motions they should be also distracted vnlesse the wisedome of Nature had prouided to tye their extremities together with strong and straite bonds These Ligaments which performe this vse are either common which compasse the ioynt round about or priuate The common are thin and membranous the proper are thicker and most what round Their second vse is to bind and fasten the bones where they are not articulated for there are thinne and fine Ligaments which tye the cubite to the Radius and the Legge to the Brace where they gape asunder as also the spines of the spondels The third vse is that which Galen remembreth who sayeth they serue for an outward garment to defend the tendons So the tendons which bend and extend the Fingers the Toes are throughout their whole length couered with Ligaments with mēbranes Adde hereto the fourth to contayne the Tendons in their owne places to establish them and safely to transmit them from one place to another Such are the Transuerse Ligaments of the wrest round like a ring and therefore called Annularia Fiftly they are interposed like a pillow betwixt the bones and the Tendons that the hardnes of the bones should not offend the tender and sensible tendons Sixtly to discriminate or separate the right muscles from the left the fore muscles from the hinder and other parts one from another as we may see in the Ell and the Wand in the Leg and the Brace Seauently to encrease and augment as do the gristles the Cups of the bones Eightly to suspend the bowels that they should not fall with their great waight Such are the Ligaments of the Liuer the Bladder and of the Wombe Finally they concurre vnto the structure of a muscle for of the fibres of a nerue and a ligament mixed together is a tendon made The differences of Ligaments are to be taken from their substance magnitude figure The differences of ligaments site originall insertion vse and from their principall parts From the substance some are soft some hard some membranous that is like vnto membranes because they be broade Some are neruous that is round like nerues some are gristly From the magnitude some are little some are great some are broade and some are narrowe From the figure some are
bones they also would be consumed We answere to the first that sense is not of the nature of a bone To the seconde Answered that they grow because in attrition they are worne To the third that more or lesse do not change the species or kind otherwise the spongy bones shold be no bones To the fourth that they are accustomed to the outward aer and haue no periostion on them and the Philosopher saith that that which is accustomable maketh no impression or alteration To the fift that is to Hippocrates authority we say that the bones and the teeth are affected by cold diuersly the bones onely by suffering the teeth not onely by suffering but also by sensation To the sixt first we may safely doubt of the experience secondly we may say that the Teeth are not consumed because they are harder then other bones It remaineth therefore according to Hippocrates Aristotle and Galen that the Teeth are bones for saith Galen they cannot be referred to any other similar part and therfore he placeth the teeth vnder the common Genus of the bones and the rather because the qualities of their matter do agree as hardnesse solidity smoothnes whitenesse c. yet there are some differences betwixt them and other bones For among all the bones none but these haue any exquisite sence because the teeth alone do admit nerues into their cauitie The teeth alone do increase as the life increaseth that without any detriment they might performe their offices for being worne in the chewing of meates they are increased againe but onely so much as they are worne away otherwise they would soone fayle The other bones haue no sence or but obscure neither do they increase alwayes but when they come vnto their state or perfection they make a stay because they are not changed in the performance of their functions They differ also from bones because they are naked hauing no periostion without thē for then they would be payned in the wearing hence it was that Aristotle doth oftentimes How they differ from bones not number the teeth among the bones but sometimes faith they are bony somtimes that they resemble the nature of bones And truly in their hardnesse fastnesse or solidity they doe exceed other bones yea they are little softer then stones themselues if they bee not allout so hard especially about their extremities Some are stony like a milstone others are sharpe like the steeld edge of a knife They were made very hard that they might not weare so soone or be broken in the chawing or breaking of hard things for they are Why they are hard how not lined eyther with fatte or gristles as other ioynts are to hinder attrition The teeth therefore do breake bones resist the edge of steele neyther can they easily as other parts of the body be burnt with fire Hippocrates in his booke de Carnibus ascribeth the cause of their hardnesse to the quality of the matter out of which they are ingendered for hee writeth that out of the bones of the head and the iawes there is an increase of a glutinous matter In that glutinous matter the fatty part falleth downe into the sockets of the gums where it is dryed and burnt with the heate and so the teeth are made harder then other bones because there is no cold remaining in them Their outward surface is by nature white smooth and polished but in age for want of care or by disease they become liuid or duskish There groweth also vnto them a hard Their surface scaly matter by which as also by corruption they become rugged and vnequall yet sayeth the Philosopher a horses teeth become whiter as he becomes older Their forme is before somwhat round behind more plaine where they are ioyned one Forme to another they are euen and in their extremities somtimes thinne somtimes sharpe somtimes plaine but alwayes vnequall They differ among themselues in figure magnitude and number Their figure in man differeth according to the difference of their vse in chewing In fishes they are only Difference acute or sharpe In those creatures that chew the cudde they are of a double forme some Grinders and some Shearers In men according to the three speciall diuisions of meates there are three kinds of teeth Shreaders or Shearers called Incisores Dog-teeth called Canini and Grinders called Molares Againe mens teeth do not stand out of their formes as a Boares tuske but are concluded or shut within the mouth neyther are they set like the teeth of a Saw as it is in dogs for their teeth are giuen them in stead of weapons The teeth of a man are much lesse then the teeth of many other creatures lesse then he for his mouth is much lesse for according to the magnitude of the mouth is the Magnitude strength of the teeth which consisteth in their figure hardnesse and quantity yea mens teeth compared among themselues are not equall but some greater some lesser for the grinding teeth are greater then the rest The number of the teeth is not in all men one and the same for some haue more some haue fewer yet the more the better for such saith Hippocrates in the sixt section of Number the second Epidemion are long liued whereas those that haue few teeth are but short liued as Aristotle saith in the 3 chapter of his 2 booke de historia Animalium The reason is because the paucity and rarity of the teeth is an argument eyther of the want of spermatical matter or of the weaknesse of the formatiue faculty Againe those that haue but few teeth do not chew their meate so throughly not prepare it so well for the stomacke So that the Chylus is not so well concocted and by consequence the bloud not so pure for the second concoction which is in the veynes of the Liuer doth not amend the error of the first concoction which is made in the stomack Stories make mention of some men who haue had but one tooth in their vpper iaw and therevpon haue some bin cald 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as Euripheus the Cyrenian Euriptolimus of Cyprus Diuers rowes of teeth in some men and Pirhus the King of the Epirots Some in stead of teeth haue one continuall bone such was the sonne of Prusias King of the Bythinians Some haue had a double row of Teeth as Dripetinus the sonne of King Mithridates Trimarchus of Cyprus Some haue had 3 rowes as Hercules for so Coelius Rhodiginus reporteth in the third chap. of his fourth booke But for the most part there is but one row which is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Septum the hedge because it hedgeth in the tongue In both iawes there are in growne bodies 32 Teeth 16 in each iaw in some men 30 sixteene in the vpper iaw and 14 in the neather in some 28 which is the least number and then the foure last are wanting for they doe not breake out in
one forme in Apes as Eustachius elegantly Their roots its Apes declareth for in them the grinders of the vpper iaw haue three roots of the lower iaw two excepting sometimes the fift the fourth as it is the greatest so are the roots thereof greatest In Men their roots are not alwayes of one forme yet mostwhat they are many and alike sometime in the fift of the lower iaw in the second also Eustachius obserued the same which because of his magnitude a man woulde thinke should haue many roots there is but one thicke and persorated with one broad hole Other roots of the Teeth haue an equall or vnequall supersicies and within two or three holes skilfullie thrilled and disseuered by thin scales much like a Hony-combe In the fift grinder there are three in most of the rest two Oftentimes the roots grow together sometime they are separated sometime a man cannot perceiue so much as the line that parteth them The Figure also of these Rootes is diuers for some are round others streight and accute Their Figure others obtuse plaine and crooked They differ also in magnitude the roots of one tooth being thicke sometimes sometimes narrow of another short of another long of some broad and thin yet for the most part the roots of the vpper teeth are longer and of the lower teeth shorter They varry also in situation some touch one another some growe neare but touch not some straddle one from another like the feete of a stoole Againe some stande off one from another but yet are so incurued that their extremtties doe touch others running Situation foure wayes are in their ends most of all disioyned and these in drawing of Teeth are sometimes broken and put the man to cruell torment If there be three roots especially in the vpper iaw one runneth inward and two outward To conclude commonly the two vpper grinders which are next to the Dogteeth are fastned into their sockets with two roots the other three with three Sometimes the fift hath foure which is rare Againe the two lower Grinders which are next to the Dog teeth haue but one roote the three others two Those Teeth which we call Genuini or Teeth of wisedome haue very short rootes partly because that portion of the iaw wil not admit a deepe insertion partly because in the leuigation or chewing of meate they are not in so much vse as the rest Wherefore the rootes of the grinding Teeth of the lower iaw are fewer and shorter then those of the vpper because the substance of the lower iaw is harder and more solid and therefore better able strongly to containe the Teeth and to beare their waight but in the vpper iaw which is more rare and soft and wherein the Teeth hang and therefore are more subiect to fall out with their owne weight their rootes are longer the better to fasten them for they needed more ties as it were to binde them and to containe them within the iaw Hence it is that where the rootes are shorter the Teeth are drawne with lesse danger but with more labour where they are many especially if the rootes grow vnto the sockets The rootes of all the Teeth are perforated euen into their internall cauities yet Their perforations this perforation in perfect and growne Teeth is very small and that in the sharpe pointe or top of the roote through which a veyne an artery and a nerue are admitted of which Vessels we will speake in the next place but briefly because we haue touched vppon them before CHAP. XVI Of the Vessels and Sense of the Teeth THrough the holes of the rootes of the Teeth al manner of Vessels do run and are diuersified in their internall cauities veynes to bring them plentifull The veines nourishment Now it was necessary that the Teeth should alwayes grow because in mutuall attrition they were one against another this we may certainly conclude by our owne experience For if a tooth fal out or be drawne that which groweth opposite against it will be longer then the rest of the Teeth of his owne ranke because it is no more worne by the Tooth that before was opposite against it the rest of the Teeth by their mutuall attrition in chewing of the meat are impaired and againe so much increased Arteries also do enter into the Teeth to preserue and keepe their naturall heat hence it is that in inflamations there is a beating or pulsing payne felt such as fleshy parts feele Arteries when they are inflamed And this Galen first of all men obserued in the 8 chap. of his fift book de Compositione medicamentorum secundum loca for he found in himself not only paine but a pulsing paine in his Teeth whence he concluded that there was one paine in the Gums another in the very substance of the Tooth Yea without any inflamation of the Gums somtimes there is paine in the proper body of the Teeth somtimes in the nerue And againe vnlesse vnder the Tooth there were an artery how could so much florid and pure bloud issue when the Tooth is perforated which Eustachius obserued in a man that fell into such a flux of blood that he had like to haue died vpon it They haue also nerues soft and slender which come from the third coniugation commonly Nerues so called and runne through their rootes into their cauity euen from their first conformation where they are disseminated and their small surcles are mixed with the mucous matter of the Teeth hence it is that when that mucous matter is become bony yet it easily consenteth with the nerues and the Teeth become sensible whereas to other bones there are no nerues at al conuayed which may be dispersed into their cauities And therefore it is truely saide that bones want nerues although the membrane which is called Periostium haue sense and nerues in it Wherefore when this Periostium which is of exquisite sense is affected the paine may be thought to be in the bones themselues when it is onely in the membrane so in a Cicatrice which hath no sense wee imagine wee feele paine when indeed the paine is onely in the neighbour parts and the membrane which How Teeth haue sense inuesteth the Liuer being affected we thinke we feele paine in the Liuer whereas the Parenchyma or substance of the Liuer it selfe is insensible vnlesse any man will say that the bones haue sense by the helpe of the Sensatiue soule by which they subsist and yet that very obscure because the hardnesse of the bones doth very much resist any such sensation and thus we may say that bones do differ from plants as being particles of a sensatiue creature These nerues of the Teeth are very small yet in our Table we haue made thē large immitating therein Vesalius and others But by what order and manner of dissection we How to demonstrate the vessels of the Teeth Eustachius vse to make demonstration of the
vessels and nerues of the Teeth saith Bauhine wee will now relate as we learned it out of Eustachius These vessels are better demonstrated in the iaw of a great creature as for example in an Oxe then they are in a Man and againe the administration is easier in the lower iaw then in the vpper We take therefore the lower iaw of an Oxe and open it on the inside presently we meet a cauity full of marrow together with the nerue inuolued in a membrane when we haue remoued the marrow slit the membrane throughout his length then may wee perceiue the nerue made as it were of many strings betwixt which do run propagations of veines and arteries Moreouer if you remooue this membrane with the surcles of the nerues and vessels a little vpward from the bone carefully that you break them not you shall perceiue some fibres distributed from the membrane not vnlike the Lawny threds of a cob-web In like manner in the iaw of a Ramme certaine fibres do penetrate the bony partition which is betwixt the Nerue and the Teeth but these fibres are most conspicuous at the roots of the grinders From these Grinders vnto the Dog-teeth and the Shearers there is a nerue conuayed accompanied with an arterie the nerue is deuided into two one part of it through a hole in that place breaketh vp at the lower Lip and a branch of it runneth along vnto the Shearers and affoordeth a small surcle to euery one of them another portion of it is ioyned with the vtter part of the rootes the second part which is also the slenderest pearceth into the cauity of the teeth and may euen without any greater difficulty be discerned euen in men And truely it is a strange thing that the Shearers and Dog-teeth which are the lesse and haue but one roote haue notwithstanding allowed them great and conspicuous surcles of vesselles attayning to their insertion by a broade and open way whereas the Grinders which are the greater and haue three sometimes foure rootes are allowed but small and capillary surcles made of the former doubly trebly and foure-fold deuided and creeping obscurely into their insertion Againe if a Grinder or a Shearer bee gently and by degrees drawne out of his socket you shall finde to arise with it out of the cauity of the Iaw very small fibres which are ioyned to the roots of the Teeth you may also obserue that the parts of the bony partition are full of a mucous substance which is not vnlike to that whereof the teeth and their huls or huskes are generated Againe when the Tooth is drawne in the extremity of his roots you shall find a matter partly mucous partly fibrous which carrieth a resemblance or shew of a nerue a veine and an artery But if you deuide the Tooth in the middest you shall finde a mucous substance wouen with vesselles and some fibres but these things may be better seen in the iaw of an Oxe or of a Ram then of a Man and yet euen in a man diligent search will find them out though they be not so perspicuous Wherefore who can deny but that there is a Pulsatiue or beating payne euen in the inner part of the tooth as Galen and Eustachius haue witnessed when he shall perceiue an arterie and a nerue attaine thereinto For veines why should we not likewise beleeue that they enter into the Teeth when wee see it sprinkled with bloud in men and in Oxen may manifestly perceiue the vessell it selfe for it is in the tooth as it is in that coate of the eye called adnata as long as a mans Eie is well disposed the veines therein are not visible but then onely become conspicuous when it is inflamed Concerning the Sense of the Teeth the opinions of Anatomistes and Physitians are Of the sense of the teeth Diuers opinion of Anatomists very diuers Some thinke they haue no sense at all because they are bones and may be filed without paine others thinke they haue Sense but that of themselues without nerues as other bones haue and these men imagine that the paine of the tooth is without it that is in the membrane which compasseth the socket others thinke they liue and haue Sense by their inbred heate Aristotle determines that they feele cold sooner then heate and are more affected by it Galen saith they are pained they beate and receiue soft nerues But the question may be asked what part of the tooth hath this Sensation Varolius answereth the body of the tooth but on the inside onely Others say that the whole Tooth indeede hath Sense but the whole Tooth doeth not feele paine it perceiueth the first and second qualities but the first qualities onely doe paine it because they exercise their power vpon the rootes of the teeth into which certaine small nerues doe penetrate This was Archangelus his conceit and Laurentius hath almost the same The whole Toothsayeth hee doth feele but more exquisitly on the inside more dully on the out Another question may be asked whence comes the sensation that payneth them some answere that it is by reason of the nerues and of their proper substance so saith Actuarius Falopius thinkes the paine comes by reason of a thin membrane compassing about the inner cauity Others ascribe the cause to the nerue and the membrane ioyntly others to the nerue which cleaueth to the neighbour partes and to the rootes of the Teeth onely Others to the nerue that entreth the Tooth and a membrane that cleaueth to the roote thereof as it were a Periostium Others to a nerue which penetrateth the substance These and such like are the diuers opinions of Anatomists concerning the sense of the Teeth Bauhine interposeth his opinion on this manner The teeth saith he do feele and the faculty of sensation is communicated to their Bauhines resolution substance by the mediation of a very thinne membrane which compasseth the inward cauity of the Tooth lightly hanging vnto it and also of a soft nerue which attaineth into the same cauity thus the Teeth haue a proper kind of Touching which we cannot in words so well expresse as by instance For vpon the eating of sowre or sharpe meates the Teeth are affected with a kinde of stupor and then we commonly say our Teeth are set on edge which kind of sensation is proper only to the Teeth and the Gums and is nothing else but a Symptome of the touching faculty But we must conceiue that each part of the Tooth is not equally sensible but that the inside which is nearest to the nerue and the membrane is of quicker apprehension then the outside for the outside partly because of the spisse and hard substance which like a shell couereth the inward part of the Tooth and doth not admit the power of the nerue or the impression of the animall spirit partly because it is continually accustomed to the mutations that come from the ambient ayer is not so sensible Euen
so we see that the callous skinne in the hands and feete of a labouring man is almost altogether without sense thogh the skinne it selfe naturally disposed be very sensible Wherefore that part which is without the Gummes or the shell of the Tooth is not ffended by hard and rough things for though it be cutte or filed or burnt with hot yron yet it is not payned neyther is there any sense or signe of sense following therevppon especially the height or top of the tooth which was made solid to breake the meate therfore the cauity not attaining so far the nerue also commeth short of it The reason why a part of the body of the tooth is not payned by fire or by hot iron Aritaeus sayth is knowne onely to the Gods As for vs we can say nothing but that it is a peculiar to the teeth that they are not equally affected eyther by all things that make alteration in them or by those things which might offend them but are more affected by heat and cold then by any other qualities by cold more then by heate yet to giue some satisfaction we say that the teeth are not offended by moist or dry by soft or hard thinges because their qualities are not so suddenly communicated to the membrane or to the nerue But they are affected by hot and cold things because the animall spirits which are contained in the substance of the tooth and diffused through the same are thereby altered for those actiue qualities do pierce on euery side affecting and changing together with their substance the animall spirite and by succession also the membrane and the nerues And truly it is very reasonable to imagine that in the substance of the teeth there are great Great store of animall spirits in the Teeth store of animal spirits more theÌ„ in other bones first because they receiue soft nerues into their cauities and againe because their internal substance is somwhat rare made of a mucous matter condensated or thicknesse Obserue also that the paine which is felt in the substance of the tooth differeth much from that paine which is in the Gummes eyther from their distemper or from any flux of humor into them and from the payne which is felt in the nerue that runneth vnder the roote of the Tooth The vse of their sensation is thought to be first that being exposed to outward iniuries The vse of their sense and hauing no Periostium to compasse them about it was fitte they shoulde haue an ingenite principle of Sense that they might bee able to discerne betwixt that which is profitable and hurtfull Againe if we wil beleeue Galen in the second Chapter of his 16. book de vsu partium as all the other parts of the mouth so likewise the teeth doe after a sort discerne of sapors or Tastes and for that purpose they receiued soft nerues For as the Skinne hath Sense yet through the cuticle or scarffe-skinne which is not sensible so the marrow of the tooth is apprehensiue of tactile qualities through the bony part like as the neruous membrane which is vnder the nailes doth feele heat and cold through the nailes which haue no sense at all And so much shall haue beene sufficient to haue spoken of the Sense of the Teeth Now we come vnto their cauities CHAP. XVII Of the inward cauity and Membrane of the Teeth WEe saide before that the Vessels and the Nerues did enter into the cauities of the Teeth and therefore it would be very fitte we should acquaint you what this cauity is All the Teeth are hollow on the inside table 11. fig. 3. I but this cauity is The cauity of the teeth greater or lesser according to the magnitude or figure of the Teeth which thing also Aristotle acknowledged in the 7. chapter of his 3. booke de historia animalium where hee sayeth that the teeth are bones partly concauous and partly solid Norwithstanding some new Anatomists haue been so impudent as to challenge to themselues the inuention or finding out this cauity Galen indeede in those bookes of his which are extant doth not write how great or what a kind of cauity this is nor yet what is contayned therein yet because ofttimes he makes mention of the Dennes of the Teeth it is not likely that he was ignorant of them for if hee had beleeued that the teeth in their first originall had had no cauities it had bin an idle thing for him in vehement payne of the Teeth to commaund that their solid substance should be perforated with a small wimble or piercer in the ninth chapter of his 5. booke de compositione medicamentorum secundumloca Againe Hippocrates in the 4. Epidemiâ—n repotteth that a Childes Teeth were eaten with acorroding vlcer those especially that had cauities or were hollow whereby Hippocrates doth insinuate first that the substance of the Teeth may bee corroded and secondly that they haue a naturall cauity in them This cauity is in children of seauen yeares old and somewhat vpward very large and circumscribed with a thinne scale very like vnto a hony-combe It is also full of a white The humour therein humor not of marrow such as we may see in the sweet-tooth of a Calfe when it is broght sodden vnto the Table but this humour in processe of time is dried becomes harder and for the most part turnes bony and so the cauity is euery day diminished yet so that in the middest at the roote there remayneth alwaies a Sinus which scarcely reacheth aboue the height of the Gummes for it was necessary there should be an empty space left because of the insertion of the vessels and the dilatation of the artery yet some men affirme that the pulsation we feele in our teeth doth not proceede from the beating of the artery but from a spirit or ayre moued as sometimes we finde it to be in our eares These things sayth Eustachius are best perceiued in the Grinding teeth of an Oxe broken and in a Calfe and a Lambe each grinder hath three cauities one anterior another 3 cauities in a calues tooth posterior the third in the middest and the middlemost cauity is perforated with a crooked hole like the letter C which reacheth as farre as to the top of the Gummes in the two other cauities there is a mucous matter contayned which for the most part as the Tooth growes perfect turneth bony Beside because in these creatures we finde oftentimes two sometimes three sometimes foure grinding Teeth ioyned together Nature to make a mutual consent between them hath perforated the bony partition with a transuerse hole through which a matter like a small membrane passeth out of one cauity into another as surcles of vessels do passe through their perforations This cauity is compassed with a membranous substance which Falopius and Laurentius call a thinne membrane Goreus saith it is a production of the Pia mater Columbus esteemeth it to bee made of
and establish the Diuers opinions of their generations extremities of the body and therefore if they faile or fall away it is a signe of great weaknesse Thirdly Aristotle in the sixt chap. of his 2 book de generatione animal saith that the nailes the hayres hornes beakes of birdes hooues and such like are engendred of aduentitious aliment Fourthly Columbus remembers that some thinke the nailes are amassed of a part of a bone of a nerue of skin yea some say also of flesh but he doth not easily subscribe to their conceite Columbus saith they take their originall partly from the skin partly from the tendons of the muscles which extend the Fingers and the toes Bauhine saith that some conceyue them to arise from the crasse excrements of the third concoction and therfore that they continually grow by an imperfect acretion made by the apposition onely or addition of Aliment whence say they it is that they grow onely in length not in bredth or depth and therefore are to be excluded out of the number of liuing parts notwithstanding Galen in his booke de Admin Anatom witnesseth that there is conueyed to the roots of the nailes a vein an artery and a nerue by which they receiue aliment life and sense as other parts do And truly not onely two Nerues are conueyed vnto the roots of the nailes but also do creepe vnder the nailes together with the veines vnto the very top of the Finger yet we do not say that the nailes haue sense because they are not distributed throughout the substaunce of the nailes no more then are the veines which vnburthen themselues of the Aliment at the roote of the naile We conclude therefore that the nailes are encreased like the teeth by an apposition of aliment to their roote which was the best way because they were euery day worne and therefore had more neede to bee restored in theyr length then in their bredth and thicknesse Their substance is of a middle Nature betwixt bones and gristles moderately hard Their substance the better to beare the violence of outward iniures flexible or buxome that they should not breake but giue way to violence pellucide or transparant and therefore they are either red or liuid according to their flesh vnder them thin they are and conuex that they might lye more snogly vpon the fingers and this also maketh much for their security for if they stood off from the flesh they would easily be torn from their roots Again to make them more stedfast they are fastned at their root with a Ligament because they must needs grow to the flesh and the skin therefore the skinne on the outside compasseth the root round but the flesh groweth to them more inward Vnder the nailes as far as to the very extremities or ends of the fingers the tendons of muscles doe passe and are dilated vnder them which thing saith Columbus I first obserued And this is the reason why the part vnder them is of so exquisite sense and the pain so great if any sharpe splinter or such like do get vnder the naile The vse of the nailes is to defend the end of the fingers which are very softe that they The Vse be not offended by outward occurrents their hardnesse therfore giueth a firmitude vnto the softnesse of the flesh Againe the hands had nayles for better apprehension for wee could not haue taken hold of many small things vnlesse there had bene fastned some hard body to strengthen establish the fleshy extremities of the Fingers which must bee also sharpe or edged to enclose a fine and slender bodye that otherwise would haue slipped from betwixt them The Toes had nayles to couer and defend their extremities beside in station to beare the Toes against the ground with more resistance As for scratching or clawing or any such other vse of the nailes we thinke it to be of the by and not of the Maine Thus at length haue we through the diuine assistance brought vnto end a long and painfull labour worthy indeede to haue bene vndertaken by a man of more sufficiencie and of greater experience in this Art then I would haue my selfe esteemed to be my Age The Conclusion and Meanes not affoording me time or opportunities to do that which I haue earnestlie euer affected But for recompence of these Defects gentle Reader I haue pressed the footsteps of the best and most approoued Authors wherein as my first and most simple intent was the bettering of my owne knowledge in so necessary a part of my profession so being perswaded that thy profit might fall in with the same I haue set before thee a Mirrour wherein thou mayst see the true representation of thine owne Originall Structure Growth and Accomplishment learn thereby to giue the glory and profit of thy Creation to him that acording to his mighty vvorking did first poure thee forth as a few drops of Milke and after curdled and sammed thee vppe into so exquisit a forme as thou art become the most wonderfull of all his workes of wonder To him therefore so admired and propitious a Creator ascribe with me all honor and praise and consecrate the glorious Temple of thy body and the Altar of thy Soule vnto that Diety vvho created them first of nothing redeemed them when they were worse then naught and hath promised eternall mansions for them to partake with Himselfe of euerlasting Felicitie 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 FINIS ⧠The Printer to the Reader WHen I intended first this excellent labour Courteous Reader my absolute purpose aymed at the ingenious worke of M. Ambrose Parae Chirurgeon to the most Christian King of France Henrie the third a man of admirable perfection in his Art and profession whereto I was the rather incited because his first fiue Bookes beginneth with this present Argument of Anatomy a matter much affected by mee But finding his scope farre short of so deliberate a determination that more mature discourse flowed from those two famous Anatomists Iaspar Baubinus and Andreas Laurentius with diuers other Authors writing on the same argument I made choise for this time to be gouerned by their worthy enstructions although to my no meane care and cost it hath risen to so great a volume which in the first intention was imagined to comprize the whole frame or building Yet let me not be misinterpreted heerein as one fearefull to aduenture on a worke of farre greater moment the Authors being so renowned and the expectation only to the publique benefit of my countrey For thus much I assure thee the Figures Pieces and Shapes belonging to the remaining Bookes of Paraes Chirurgery are already prepared the worke it selfe fully translated for the presse which by thy gentle acceptance of this my first aduenture in this kinde will flye vnto thee with the swifter speed Farewell
which no man in his right wits but will easily confesse or let him but pricke his finger and he shall see it Auicen Fen prima doctrina 5. Cap. primo defines that to be a principal part which hath in it selfe the Originall or beginning of the first and chiefe faculties of the Auicens desition or a principall part body or wherein the power or efficacy of those faculties by which the body is dispersed or gouerned doth as in his chiefe seate especially reside and manifest it selfe Some of the late Writers haue defined a principall part to bee that which out of it selfe exhibiteth and A definition of the late writers communicateth to other parts some actiue Instrument as for instance a Spirit So that which of all these definitions we accept of it will still remaine that there are three principall parts the Braine the Heart and the Liuer For if we respect Necessity these only are absolutely necessary if the originall of the faculties in the Braine resideth and shineth the animall the vitall in the heart and the naturall in the Liuer if the Instruments then from the Braine floweth the animall spirits by the sinnewes the vitall from the heart by the arteries the naturall from the Liuer by the veins and by those passages are all diffused from their fountaines in the whole body Galen in his Booke de Arte parua addeth to the principall partes a fourth to wit the Testicles not in respect to the indiuiduum or particular creature but because they are of absolute necessity for the conseruation of the kinde and production of encrease For the Testicles indeede do not make allowance to the whole body of any matter or facultie or spirit but only of a quality together with a subtile and thin breath or aire from which the flesh hath a ranke taste of the seede and the bodye a strength or farther ability in the performance of his actions QVEST. IIII. Which of all the principall Parts is the most Noble HAuing praemised this disputation concerning the number of the principall parts it remaineth because wee would haue nothing wanting which may giue satisfaction to such as desire it that we inquire which of all the principall parts is worthily to be preferred aboue the rest Galen in his first Booke de semine preferreth the testicles to the heart where he saith The Heart is indeede the author of liuing but the Testicles Galen preferreth the Testicles before the Heart are they which adde a betternesse or farther degree of perfection to the life because if they be taken away the iollity and courage of the Creature is extinguished the Male followeth not his Female the Veynes loose their latitude and become sunke narrow the Pulse abateth of his strength and becomes weake dull and languishing the skin is pilde and bare whereupon such men are called Glabriones and in a word all virility Glabriones Galen or manhoode vanisheth away Galen addeth The Testicles are another Fountaine or Well-spring of in-bred heate the Feu-place or Fire-hearth where the Lares or houshold-Gods of the body do solace and disport themselues from hence the whole body receyueth Wherein the Testicles do shew their power an encrease of heate and by that meanes not onely foecundity but also a great alteration of the temper the habite the proper substance yea and of the manners themselues so that to say true their power is very great and almost incredible then especially knowne when it is wanting as we may obserue in Eunuches Wherefore as to be and liue well is more excellent then simply to liue and haue an Idle and sluggish existence so the Instrument of the former which is the Testicles is more excellent then that of the latter which is the heart A probable but a sophisticall argument Galens subtile argument answered True it is that which giueth better life if it giue life also is more excellent then that which giueth life onely but the testicles do not giue life at all the creature can liue without them they adde indeed a perfection not to life that is to the concreate as we say but to liuing that is to the abstract so do the eyes so do other parts without which a Man should liue but in liuing should be miserable the heart therefore giueth the substance the testicles exhibite but an additament which may be away albeit it bee with notable detriment detriment I say not of that which the heart giueth which is the substance but of that which themselues affoord which is a complement Now that a substance is of more excellence then a complement no Man will deny the heart therefore is more noble then Whether the Braine be to be preferd before the hart the testicles But the heart hath a greater concurrent in this plea of honour which is the braine The Peripatetikes and Aristotle their Prince together with the whole family almost of The opinion of the Peripatetiks Stoiks the Stoickes especially Chrysippus do giue the preheminence to the heart as well because it is seated in the middest which is the place of honour as also because it is a liuing and abundant Fountaine of Natiue heate and finally because it is the speciall habitation of the soule for euen Hippocrates himselfe the Oracle of Physicke in his booke de Corde placeth Hippocrates the soule in the left ventricle of the heart and hence it is that they call the heart 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifieth Empire or rule comming from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to Command But all this notwithstanding we are enforced to yeelde the superiority to the braine We determin that the brain is the prime principal part because his functions are more diuine and more noble then those of the heart For example All sence and voluntary motion proceede from it the habitation it is of Wisedome the Shrine of Memory Iudgement and Discourse which are the prerogatiues of Man aboue all other Creatures This is the Prince of the Family and the head is the head of the tribe all other parts are but attendants though some serue in more honourable place then others and owe homage vnto it yea all were created onely for his vse and behoofe An Elegant demonstratiō how all the body is seruiceable to the Braine For the braine being the seate of the intelligible or vnderstanding faculty it was requisite first that it should be supplied with phantasmes or representations these representations could not be exhibited and represented to the vnderstanding but by the ministerie of the outward sences For it is a rule in Philosophy Nihil est in intellectu quod nō prius fuit in sensu There is nothing in the vnderstanding or intellect which is not first in the sence It was necessary therefore that the sences should be created for the intellect Furthermore the sences could not haue beene perfect vnlesse the
that lifteth vp the eye The second is very conspicuous vnder the Optick and is diuided into many surcles and dispersed into the Muscle which leadeth the eye to the inner angle The third is bifurcated and inserted in manie strings into that Muscle which draweth the eye directly downeward The fourth is conuayed into the sixt Muscle which leadeth the eye round or rowleth it vnto the vtter Angle There are also saith Falopius and with him Laurentius and Bauhine certaine smal and A consent betwixt the 2. coniugation and the temporal muscle threddy Fibres which accompanying the Opticke Nerue are disseminated into the externall Membranes of the eye In some men though it be not very ordinary saith Columbus and Archangelus but Falopius and Laurentius deny it some branches are sent from this second Coniugation to the temporall muscle whence it is that when that muscle is offended the eye partaketh with it and on the contrary The vse of this Coniugation is to conferre the Moouing faculty vnto the muscles the tractiue faculty vnto the membrans of the eyes Now the reason why when one eye is The vse moued to one side the other eye also followeth his motion necessarily is to be ascribed to the Nerues themselues which in their originall are continuall that is doe imediately ioyne together And so much of the first and second Coniugations which are the Opticke and moouing Nerues of the Eyes Now we proceede CHAP. XXIII Of the third and fourth Coniugations of the Braine THE third Coniugation Tab. 22. fig. 1 and 2 L is sent vnto the muscles of the face and is commonly called the lesser roote of the third payre But The 3. coniugation saith Bauhine because it is neuer ioyned with the Coniugation following Tab. 22. fig. 1 and 2 L with H neither in the beginning nor in the progresse yet hath nothing common therewith and because it groweth out of order in respect of all the rest therefore saith he it may worthily be called a peculiar Coniugation His originall It is saide to arise from that side of the basis of the Braine where the spinall marrow takes his originall therefrom Tab. 22. fig. 1 D But Falopius in his Obseruations hath it thus and better It ariseth from the lower and backward part of the marrow of the Braine or those processes thereof which are called the Buttockes Bauhine addeth that Diuision their originall is very small and runneth directly vnder the basis of the braine to the side outward and perforateth alone the Dura meninx on either hand Then being fastned to the second paire Tab. 22. fig. 1 X it entreth into the orbe of the eye together with it by a perforation common to them both And is diuided into four branches according to Vesalius Columbus Platerus and Bauhine But Falopius ascribeth these braunches to the two subsequent coniugations which we haue reckoned but for one The first of these Tab. 22. fig. 2 N runneth vpward thorough the fat of the eyes and affoordeth a branch to the fift muscle placed in the inner angle which compasseth it vnto the pulley Falopius is of opinion in his Obseruations that this whole Coniugation is bestowed vpon this muscle But presently after the branch wee made mention of before is bestowed it falleth through a peculiar hole of the forehead bone to the skin of the forehead to giue it and the vpper eye-lid motion The second branch of this coniugation Tab. 22. fig. 2 O is lower then the former running downward passeth through a proper hole grauen for him in the fourth bone of the Iaw at whose forepart it is diuided into many propagations distributed into the muscles that mooue the vpper lip the Wing of the nose outward into the lip it selfe and the gums of those teeth that are called Incisorij or the shredders The third branch Tab. 22. fig. 2 P issuing thorough the second hole of the vpper iawe behinde the Caruncle seated in the angle of the eye attaineth the cauity of the nosthrils where it is consumed into their coate Tab. 22. fig. 2 the lower P and affordeth a branch to the Membranous muscle of the nose which contracteth the wing thereof Table 17. Figure 1 sheweth the basis of the Braine and After-brane freed from theyr Membrane that the originall of the Nerues of the Brayne might be better perceyued Figure 2 sheweth one side of the Braine the After-braine the spinall marrow and the Nerues TABVLA XXII FIG I. FIG II. The fourth coniugation belongeth to the tongue and are called Netui gust aterij because by them the sense of gustation or tasting is made t. 22. fi 2 M This coniugation lieth The fourth Coniugation close to the former in the progresse but not in the originall and is called by them that thinke it hath his beginning from a double roote it is called I say the thicker root of the third coniugation It doth not proceed saith Galen in the eight chapter of his ninth book de vsu part out of the backe parts of the Braine because those are harde nor out of the His Original sides because the way had not bene safe but out of the basis of the Braine where the forepart is tyed to the hind part yea out of the marrow of the braine And the reason of this originall is double first because it was most secure and againe because it was the readiest to answere the position of the tongue from thence it falleth directly downward thorough the sixt hole of the wedge bone which is common to this and the following Coniugation Tab. 22. fig. 2 Z and from this presently after the outgate yssueth a propagation twisted or wrethed like the tendrils of a Vine tab 22 fig. 1 a that so say some it might by degrees become harder or rather that the Animal spirit might haue a little stop or stay and is vnited by two branches Tab. 22 fig. 1 and 2 bc with the auditory nerue So giuing surcles to the muscles of the face to the temporall muscles to the grinding muscles of the cheekes and to the skinne of the face When it hath allowed this wrinkled branch it descendeth more downeward and sendeth forth a shoote Tab. 22 fig. 2 S which affoordeth surcles forward to the gums of the grinding teeth and to the teeth themselues in their order yet some doubte whither they passe as farre as the rootes of the teeth At the same time also there buddeth out of the backside a third propagation which Falopius calleth the fourth nerue of the third payre tab 22 fig. 2 T which is inserted into the muscle that lurketh in the mouth and passing through the inner hole of the lower Iaw offereth surcles to the rootes of the lower teeth of his owne side Tab. 22 fig 2 xx and by the helpe of these nerues the teeth whereas other bones haue no sense do feele the occursation of things that are offensiue The remainder of this coniugation Ta. 22